en-name-test

  • #588
  • 09 Aug 2020

{"1126":{"position":1126,"title":"Reflected Light Intesity","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"EV3,Programming,Light and Color Sensor","subtitles":null},"1002":{"position":1002,"title":"Organizations and Groups at FLLCasts","description":"\u003cp\u003eOne of the large differences at FLLCasts is that students do not participate in Courses. Students participate in Groups. Courses are like books. You can read many of them while participating in a Group.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWhen you Enrol in a Course this means you've started reading a book. When you Enrol in a Group this means you participate in a group of students and instructors that are meeting at specific hours, in specific days and are trying to work together towards a competition or are in a after class club or are a class at a school.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eGroups are owned by organizations.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch2\u003eOrganization (Team/School/Library/Family)\u003c/h2\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWhen two or more people work together we call this an organization. The Organization could be a School, or a Team for example.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIf you are using the platform personally you don't have to have an organization. But the moment you need to group students or teachers you must create an Organization.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch2\u003eGroups\u003c/h2\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe Group is used to group \"students\" and \"instructors\". A group could have any number of \"students\" and \"instructors\". People in the group could have different level of access and could be in different subscriptions. The \"instructors\" could have access to \"School Teacher Subscription\" while the students could have access to \"School Student Subscriptions\". \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eGroups have a starting date, groups have a schedule, groups have location. In is the the Course. It is the Group. People participating in one Group could move through many courses and tutorials and materials a in an year. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eGroups are part of an organization. If the organization is a school than the groups could be the different classes in the school. Or if the organization is a library, you could use the groups to represent the different clubs in this library. Groups should be specific. There is no \"\u003cstrong\u003eScience Fair Group\u003c/strong\u003e\" in the library. The name should be \"\u003cstrong\u003e2019 Jan-July, Sunday 17:00, Science Fair Group\u003c/strong\u003e\". This means that people in these groups are gathering from Jan to July 2019 and are working on Sunday, 17:00 and are preparing for the \"Science Fair\". \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIn one Team there could be many groups. For robotics competitions there could be a \"\u003cstrong\u003eFLL 2018 Team4453 Programming Group\u003c/strong\u003e\" and \"\u003cstrong\u003eFLL 2018 Robot Construction Group\u003c/strong\u003e\" and \"\u003cstrong\u003eFLL 2018 Presentation Group\u003c/strong\u003e\" and \"\u003cstrong\u003eFLL 2018 The Whole Team Group\u003c/strong\u003e\". In this way different assignments could be given to each group and the progress for the Group could be tracked. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"FLLCasts","subtitles":null},"1136":{"position":1136,"title":"Gyroscope acceleration","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"EV3,Programming,Gyro Sensor","subtitles":null},"1048":{"position":1048,"title":"Slower students should go first ","description":"\u003cp\u003eSlower students can only download the block from the lesson, which is why they should go first. It is important to take turns so that no one gets offended.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"","tags":"Classes with students,Teacher's Note","subtitles":null},"1088":{"position":1088,"title":"For the teacher - class 7. Competition","description":"\u003cp\u003e(available in Bulgarian)\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"","tags":"Teacher's Note","subtitles":null},"1057":{"position":1057,"title":"Teacher's note: Preparing the Container","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"Classes with students,Teacher's Note","subtitles":null},"1031":{"position":1031,"title":"Problem with messages","description":"\u003cp\u003eThere are some problems which apears when you want to parse messages from the server. Some of them are easy to solve, others need a little bit more attention. In practice people use format called JSON.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eWe send and receive messages without any problems. But what if we want to do something with this message? For example we want to wait for a message \"play\" or \"light up\" and to turn on our LED Strip,\u003cbr\u003e\r\n\u003cbr\u003e\r\n\u003cstrong\u003eHow to do that?\u003c/strong\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe first way is to compare the message with specific word.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cpre\u003e\r\nif msg.payload == \"play\"\r\n\u003c/pre\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eBut what will happend if we send \"Play\" or \"PLAY\", or \"plaY\"? It will not catch it. Why? Because it is CaseSensitive, this means that if we compare with lowercase it must be lowercase. We can solve this by modifying the message and make all of it's letters in lowecase.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cpre\u003e\r\nif msg.payload.lower() == \"play\"\u003c/pre\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eAnd if we send only one word it's OK. But in common case there are more than one word. In our case we want to make a game. And in this game we want to have more than one player. So every of the players must send his name, the control which he wants to play and eventually some other things like stats, ratings etc. And you can send it like a simple string for example : \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cpre\u003e\r\nclient.publish(\"game\",\"UserName Right Rating\")\u003c/pre\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThen the subscriber program have to parse it by \" \"(space), store it in some structure and go trough all the elements and do some stuffs with them. And we are fine with this. But what happens when the user is new and he doesn't have any Rating or just the user sends an empty string, or put some extra spaces between words. Then the parsing of the arguments will be ruined. \u003cbr\u003e\r\nBecause аll of the mess around receiving and parsing messages people has made an specific Format called JSON.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"","subtitles":null},"1081":{"position":1081,"title":"Cammel teachers note","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"Teacher's Note","subtitles":null},"1122":{"position":1122,"title":"Teacher's Note: Reaching the first feeding spot.","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"Classes with students,Teacher's Note","subtitles":null},"829":{"position":829,"title":"How to connect two diodes to the Raspberry. Teacher Notes","description":"\u003cp\u003eIn some cases, the two lights will not work. The voltage will not be enough if you connect two diodes one after the other, no matter if it is with or without a resistor.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eTL;DR.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eConnect diodes in parallel as shown in the picture below.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"diodes in parallel\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/275/content/20180407_123937.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eYou have not enough voltage\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIf you connect diodes one after the other, none will light up. The 3.3V from GPIO 18 are not enough for two diodes even without a resistor.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eConnect in parallel\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThere is another way to connect elements: both diodes share the same input.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003col\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eConnect a resistor to GPIO 18 via F-F cable;\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eConnect a long end of a diode to the resistor via F-F cable;\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eConnect the other end of the diode to GND on pin 14;\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eConnect the long end of another diode to the resistor via M-F cable as seen ot the picture above;\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eConnect the other end of the second diode to GND on pin 39;\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eStart the Raspberry. After 30 seconds both diodes will ligth up.\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ol\u003e\r\n","tags":"Teacher's Note,STEM,Classes with students","subtitles":null},"913":{"position":913,"title":"Teacher's notes: Why the LEGO forklift is not like the real one","description":"","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eThe forklift mast is different from the real forklift mast shown on the picture. The reason to choose this construction is to avoid using too complex gear-wheel mechanisms. Otherwise, to be able to lift an object above the box, we will have to use a lot of gear wheels and a very high robot.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eDraw students’ attention to the fact that real-life forklifts lift the mast vertically thanks to chains and gear wheels while our forklift uses a different technology.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eCAUTION\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe robot is quite complex for a single student to build, make sure all students work in pairs and if there is one alone, you find the needed pieces and give them to the student.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Teacher's Note","subtitles":null},"1113":{"position":1113,"title":"Teacher's Note: Some directions to give to students on building a plastic sorting robot","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"Teacher's Note,EV3","subtitles":null},"1110":{"position":1110,"title":"Teacher's Note: The end result program for the Clam robot","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"Classes with students,Teacher's Note","subtitles":null},"1132":{"position":1132,"title":"Teacher's Note: The goal of the discussion about the two different pincers","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"Classes with students,Teacher's Note","subtitles":null},"1108":{"position":1108,"title":"Teacher's Note: Rotational sensor backlash","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"Classes with students,Teacher's Note,Programming,EV3-G,Rotation Sensor","subtitles":null},"1046":{"position":1046,"title":"The importance of the starting position","description":"\u003cp\u003eIn order to deal with the task successfully, students have to realize how important the starting position of robots is. The next task will help them do so.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMark a given point as the goal\u003c/strong\u003e. You can do that if you put an object the robots should reach or make a line by using some tape, or by any other way.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eStudents should reach the goal. The trick here is there is no starting point. Your task will be to place \u003cstrong\u003ethe robot in a different starting position\u003c/strong\u003e every time a program is launched. You can turn the robot sideways, place it at various distances compared to the goal or even turn it back to front. This will make the task relatively impossible to accomplish\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eLeave the students struggle for a few minutes, then pause and discuss the task. Pay attention to the fact that without knowing the starting position of the robot, students will find it very difficult to program it to reach the goal\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Teacher's Note,EV3,Classes with students","subtitles":null},"1083":{"position":1083,"title":"Best animal teachers note","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"Teacher's Note","subtitles":null},"1144":{"position":1144,"title":"Teacher's Note: More information about kiwi birds.","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"Teacher's Note,Classes with students","subtitles":null},"1134":{"position":1134,"title":"Teachers Note for ev3 y3","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"Teacher's Note","subtitles":null},"1127":{"position":1127,"title":"How to find MyBlocks?","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cem\u003eIn this lesson, we are going to use pre-made MyBlocks. Do you know how to find them?\u003c/em\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eAll of the MyBlocks are located in the last section of the program, the teal one. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-content img-responsive\" src=\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/909/content/FindMyBlockTab.png\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,EV3-G","subtitles":null},"1117":{"position":1117,"title":"Teacher Note","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"Teacher's Note","subtitles":null},"1106":{"position":1106,"title":"Timer","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"EV3,Programming,Timer","subtitles":null},"1148":{"position":1148,"title":"Using series of math blocks","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"EV3,Programming,Math","subtitles":null},"610":{"position":610,"title":"Teacher Notes: Building third wheels ","description":"\u003cp\u003eWhat to pay attention to and what the usual students’ mistakes are.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eThere are several \u003cstrong\u003eways\u003c/strong\u003e to build the rear wheel:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003col\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eBall - it is important that the weight is evenly (as much as possible) distributed on the ball. Therefore, constructions such as these are not the best option. You can use the following ideas:\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eWheels – wheels can be attached in several ways:\r\n\t\u003cul\u003e\r\n\t\t\u003cli\u003eTwo wheels at the end of the robot. It is important to use tireless wheels. Why?\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\t\u003cli\u003eA wheel/wheels at the center of the robot. Again, the wheels should be tireless;\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\t\u003cli\u003eCastor wheel/a wheel that can turn – it is important that the weight is not on the turning axle of the wheels.\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/ul\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ol\u003e\r\n","tags":"Teacher's Note,EV3,Castor Wheel,Classes with students,Construction","subtitles":null},"1116":{"position":1116,"title":"Reset timer","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"EV3,Programming,Timer","subtitles":null},"1120":{"position":1120,"title":"Teacher's Note: How should the field look like?","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"Classes with students,Teacher's Note","subtitles":null},"1104":{"position":1104,"title":"Teacher's Notes: Solution for the Weighting Plate 3.0 Tasks","description":"\u003cp\u003eProgram: \u003ca href=\"https://fllcasts.com/programs/fph05a-weighting-plate-3-0-solved-tasks\"\u003eclick here\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"","tags":"Teacher's Note,EV3,Programming","subtitles":null},"1099":{"position":1099,"title":"Teacher's Notes","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"EV3,Programming,Teacher's Note","subtitles":null},"1114":{"position":1114,"title":"What is the alarm?","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"STEM","subtitles":null},"1086":{"position":1086,"title":"For the teacher - construction a hand","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"Teacher's Note","subtitles":null},"1077":{"position":1077,"title":"For the teacher - starting a class of robotics","description":"\u003cp\u003e(available in Bulgarian)\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"","tags":"Teacher's Note","subtitles":null},"936":{"position":936,"title":"Programming and Theory","description":"","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eOur programming tasks today will practice and further improve your skills in turning with robots. You can use all three types of turns:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cul\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003ePivot turn;\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eSpin turn with two motors;\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eArc turn;\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ul\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eEvery task requires the use of a different turn and you should find the best solution.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Programming","subtitles":null},"1080":{"position":1080,"title":"how penguin walks ","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"Teacher's Note","subtitles":null},"1089":{"position":1089,"title":"For the teacher - Exam instead of a competition","description":"\u003cp\u003e(available in Bulgarian)\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"","tags":"Teacher's Note","subtitles":null},"66":{"position":66,"title":"Catapult built from LEGO Mindstorms EV3/NXT (Part 2 - Base)","description":"\u003cp\u003eIn this second video lesson on catapults we improve the stability of the base of the robot. An important feature of the new base is that it is not bending. Use the same principle in all of your constructions to achieve better, stronger robots.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eImproving the base\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIn the previous video lesson of the Catapult series - \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/62-catapult-looking-like-a-trebuchet-launcher-build-from-lego\"\u003eCatapult build from LEGO Mindstorms EV3/NXT (part 1)\u003c/a\u003e we built the initial construction with its Base, Frame and Lever. In this lesson the catapult is still loaded manually but before proceeding to automatic loading we should improve the base. This is done by making its surface larger which depends on the number of LEGO parts that you have.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eRotating the whole robot\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eI have also added a large gear wheel from the NXT constructor which allows the catapult to change direction freely.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eAll episodes from the series:\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/69-how-to-use-the-ultrasonic-sensor-with-the-catapult-build-from-mindstorms-ev3-nxt\" style=\"color: rgb(46, 49, 171);margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;text-decoration: none;\"\u003eHow to use the Ultrasonic Sensor with the Catapult built from EV3/NXT (Part 5)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/68-catapult-build-from-lego-mindstorms-ev3-nxt-part-4-ev3-clutch-and-loading\" style=\"color: rgb(46, 49, 171);font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;border-image-source:none;text-decoration: none;vertical-align: baseline;\"\u003eCatapult build from LEGO Mindstorms EV3/NXT (Part 4 - EV3 clutch and loading)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/67-catapult-build-from-lego-mindstorms-ev3-nxt-part-3-automatic-loading\" style=\"color: rgb(46, 49, 171);font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;border-image-source:none;text-decoration: none;vertical-align: baseline;\"\u003eCatapult build from LEGO Mindstorms EV3/NXT (Part 3 - Automatic loading)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/66-catapult-build-from-lego-mindstorms-ev3-nxt-part-2-base\" style=\"color: rgb(46, 49, 171);font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;border-image-source:none;text-decoration: none;vertical-align: baseline;\"\u003eCatapult build from LEGO Mindstorms EV3/NXT (Part 2 - Base)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/62-catapult-looking-like-a-trebuchet-launcher-build-from-lego\" style=\"color: rgb(46, 49, 171);font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;border-image-source:none;text-decoration: none;vertical-align: baseline;\"\u003eCatapult build from LEGO Mindstorms EV3/NXT (Part 1)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e \u003c/h3\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Gears,Nxt,Lever,Fun,Shoot,Construction","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eIn the first episode of the series I showed you how to construct your own catapult, the base, the frame, the nest that holds the brick and the lever that fires the small Lego parts. The catapult uses only gravity forces but it was not very stable. In this video I will show you how to improve the stability of the base and in the same time achieve this free turning of the catapult.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNow let's think about the problem for a moment. With our construction from the first video you can fire small Lego parts and, as you can see, the whole construction isn't very stable when firing. It moves and it might fall. Probably if the brick is heavier it might even fall. A good way to enhance the base of the robot is to use these frames available in the EV3 version of the robot and in some of the newer NXT versions. So, we can find different ways to attach these frames and increase the surface of the base. For example, I've prepared this construction which is very simple. If I attach some of the frames like this, I will have a larger frame. Now we can connect the catapult to this larger base and probably we will improve the stability of the robot. But the problem is not only to improve the stability of the robot but also to make it turn freely at a random degree. So, we can use a part available only in the NXT version. If you have an EV3 version, you will have to go with a smaller base. But if you have an NXT version, you can use this gear wheel. Attach it to the bottom of the robot\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eHere it is. So, as a last step, if we find a way to attach the whole catapult to this wheel, we'll be able to turn it freely. I've prepared the pins and now we just add the construction on top. Of course, we can think of ways to attach it.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eLike this. These are only examples. You can find different ways.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd the whole process of attaching the robot and enhancing the base would look like this.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAttach these parts on one side and then on the other side.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eHere's the attachment. The whole catapult is attached to the gear wheel and the wheel is attached to the enhanced larger base. Now the robot will be much more stable and it will be much more difficult for the catapult to fall. Now we have the base and it's quite stable. We can fire various small not very heavy Lego parts. We can turn the robot\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003ebut there's one more thing we should improve in the base. I'll detach the catapult from the base. As you can see, we wanted to achieve something very stable. But all the frames in the base are connected only in one direction. This means the base will bend and when it bends it's not very stable. I have forgotten to add a part here. You will have this in the construction. And the whole base will be very unstable. One of the ways to fix this - and you should always fix this in each of your constructions - is to add some parts that will prevent the bending. We can add the parts in the following way.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThus, we'll make the whole construction much more stable, without bending, and it will be suitable for our catapult. As you can see, now the base is not that fragile. Now we'll add the catapult.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAttach it on one side and then on the other and now we have our very stable construction.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIn the next video we'll continue with adding a motor and a sensor, so the whole process of loading the catapult and firing becomes completely automatic.\u003c/p\u003e"},"1141":{"position":1141,"title":"How to use Completed/Uncompleted in Groups","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"FLLCasts","subtitles":null},"804":{"position":804,"title":"Programming and theory","description":"\u003cp\u003eToday you will program your robots to follow a line. You will once again use the PLF algorithm. To do that, you will use the block we programmed in the first lesson. You can find it below. Download it and modify it for your robot. Then, remind yourselves of the basic principles of the PLF algorithm and do the exercises.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"","tags":"Classes with students","subtitles":null},"1072":{"position":1072,"title":"\"Cut the wire!\"","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"EV3,STEM,Classes with students","subtitles":null},"1138":{"position":1138,"title":"Sound block - play tone","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"EV3,Programming","subtitles":null},"1115":{"position":1115,"title":"Getting feedback from the sensors","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"EV3,EV3-G,Sensors","subtitles":null},"1121":{"position":1121,"title":"Loop Interupt Block","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"EV3,Programming","subtitles":null},"1107":{"position":1107,"title":"Rotational sensor - What does it do before we even use it?","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"Classes with students,Programming,EV3,EV3-G,Sensors,Rotation Sensor","subtitles":null},"1058":{"position":1058,"title":"Teacher's note: Return to starting position","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"Classes with students,Teacher's Note","subtitles":null},"1098":{"position":1098,"title":"What is an algorithm","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"STEM,Programming,Algorithms","subtitles":null},"1049":{"position":1049,"title":"Teacher's Note: Adding the wait block","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis is one option for including a wait block.\u003cbr\u003e\r\nThe block is a block which waits for a change of color: Color sensor -\u0026gt; Change -\u0026gt; Color\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive content-img\" src=\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/617/content/LEGO_EV3_example_solution_of_the_telephone_game_adding_wait_fllcasts.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"","tags":"Classes with students,Teacher's Note","subtitles":null},"1128":{"position":1128,"title":"Saving your EV3 project","description":"","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eLorem ipsum\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cdiv class=\"ckeditor-html5-video\" data-responsive=\"true\" style=\"text-align: center;\"\u003e\r\n\u003cvideo controls=\"controls\" src=\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/attachment_files/data/000/000/914/original/LEGO-EV3-Software-save-project-option-FLLCasts.webm\" style=\"height: auto;\" width=\"100%\"\u003e \u003c/video\u003e\r\n\u003c/div\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Programming","subtitles":null},"1082":{"position":1082,"title":"Teo yansen teachers note","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"Teacher's Note","subtitles":null},"1109":{"position":1109,"title":"Teacher's Note: How to stop a motor indefinetly?","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"Classes with students,Teacher's Note","subtitles":null},"1079":{"position":1079,"title":"Teachers note for Ev3 E2","description":"\u003ch3\u003eUse in bulgarian!\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n","long_description":"","tags":"Teacher's Note","subtitles":null},"1145":{"position":1145,"title":"Sumo","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"STEM,Classes with students","subtitles":null},"1052":{"position":1052,"title":"Teacher's note: Relay line following field","description":"\u003cp\u003ePrepare the field while your students are building the robots. You may choose a square with rounded angles (as shown on the picture) or any other closed curve. You may use a \u003cstrong\u003esumo wrestling\u003c/strong\u003e vinyl field or draw the field by using tape.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive content-img\" src=\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/content_pictures/pictures/000/001/992/1c7bce0e6f9692419006ee1bac90989172033d21roundedBlackSquare.png?1547140924\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"","tags":"Classes with students,Teacher's Note","subtitles":null},"1143":{"position":1143,"title":"Teacher's Note: How to solve the tasks for the kiwi robot","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"Classes with students,Teacher's Note","subtitles":null},"1084":{"position":1084,"title":"For the teacher - Simple and Smart solution for stopping on black line","description":"\u003ch2\u003eЗа преподавателя\u003c/h2\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eПросто решение: да се премине през линията с ротации градуси или секунди. Така робота отново ще може да се движи до следващата черна линия.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eХитро, гъвкаво решение: Какво ще стане ако черните линии са прекалено наблизо една до друга? Или ако черните линии са с различна дебелина. Хитрото решение е робота сам да усети че е излязъл от черната линия. Това става когато усети бяло със сензора си за светлина.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"","tags":"Teacher's Note","subtitles":null},"1078":{"position":1078,"title":"For the teacher - electronics","description":"\u003ch4\u003e(available in Bulgarian)\u003c/h4\u003e\r\n","long_description":"","tags":"Teacher's Note,Classes with students","subtitles":null},"1":{"position":1,"title":"How to align and follow a line with two light sensors","description":"\u003cp\u003eIn this video we are showing how to use two light sensors to do basic aligning on a black line. This is always needed at the competitions. We also show an example for following a line with two sensors. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eFind an even IMPROVED version of aligning at \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/29-aligning-to-a-line-block-with-direction\"\u003eHow to tutorial 29\u003c/a\u003e where you would learn how to build a block for aligning to a line.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eFor building instructions of the robot used in the tutorial refer to \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/13-building-a-competition-robot\" style=\"font-size: 13px;line-height: 1.6em;\"\u003eEpisode 13\u003c/a\u003e.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Align,Line follow,Nxt,Light and Color Sensor,FLL","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cp\u003eToday I will show you how to make your robot align perpendicular to a black line. Lets assume we are using the construction we build earlier and the left sensors is connected to PORT 2 and the right sensor to PORT 3 as well as the left motor is connected to PORT B and the right sensor is connected to PORT C. We will take a movement block and set motor B to go Unlimited till the light sensor connected to port 3, detects a black line. We change the expected value to 39 so when the sensors detects a value below 39 we will know it is above a black line. Now we do the same with MOTOR C but in parallel to motor B. We set motor C to unlimited and we set the light sensor on PORT 2 to detect values below 39. If any of the two sensors detects a black line the corresponding motor should stop so we will add a stop block after each sensor. Now our program is ready and we can test it. - video I have shown you how to follow a black line using one sensor, but now I will show you how to do it using two light sensors. We will start with a loop, because we will be constantly repeating the program. We have a Switch block using the light sensor that is connected on PORT 2 and set for threshold value of 39. If the light sensor on PORT 2 sees a black line we have to move MOTOR B, in order to go away from the black line. Our step will be 30 degrees in order to be more precise. If the light sensor doesn\u0026#39;t detect a black line we can take another switch, for a light sensor which is connected on PORT 3, set the threshold to 39 and now if the light sensor on port 2 doesn\u0026#39;t see a black line and the one on PORT 3 sees, we have to move MOTOR C 30 degrees. If both don\u0026#39;t see a black line we move them 30 degrees forward. And this is our program. We download it and test it.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\u003c/p\u003e"},"1123":{"position":1123,"title":"Teacher's Note: Reaching the second feeding spot.","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"Classes with students,Teacher's Note","subtitles":null},"1101":{"position":1101,"title":"Level Y Teaches Note Lesson 2","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"Teacher's Note","subtitles":null},"1124":{"position":1124,"title":"Loop name","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"EV3,Programming","subtitles":null},"1068":{"position":1068,"title":"Teacher's Note: What could act as a net?","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"Teacher's Note,STEM","subtitles":null},"1090":{"position":1090,"title":"Sync dino teachers note","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"Teacher's Note","subtitles":null},"1092":{"position":1092,"title":"Rotational sensor - How does it work?","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"Classes with students,Programming,EV3,EV3-G,Sensors,Rotation Sensor,Physics","subtitles":null},"13":{"position":13,"title":"How to build a LEGO Mindstorms Competition Robot","description":"\u003cp\u003eIn this lesson I would like to show you how to build a LEGO Mindstorms competition robot and tell you how we have designed the construction used in the videos so far. Surely it isn’t perfect, but it is a good start.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eWinning the competition depends on a solid, robust and extendable base \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/search/lego+mindstorms\"\u003eLEGO Mindstorms\u003c/a\u003e construction for the robot. Attachments are most of the time dependent on the specific mission, but a good base could save you many days of hard work when preparing for the competition.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch4\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eThere are three main topics when it comes to base constructions:\u003c/strong\u003e\u003c/h4\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cul\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\r\n\t\u003cp\u003eWhat is the perfect size for out robot, while we keep the constuction balanced? \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\r\n\t\u003cp\u003eWhat tires to use for the robot?\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\r\n\t\u003cp\u003eWhere and how shall we put the sensors and attachments?\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ul\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eand we mention all of them in this lesson.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFeel free to use this base, explore and extend it. Get in touch with us if you do so. It would be very helpful for us :)\u003c/strong\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cdiv\u003e \u003c/div\u003e\r\n","tags":"Nxt,Robot Base,FLL,Construction","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cp dir=\"ltr\" style=\"margin-top: 0pt; margin-bottom: 0pt;\"\u003e\u003cb id=\"internal-source-marker_0.9041411196812987\" style=\"color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman'; font-size: medium; line-height: normal; font-weight: normal;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-size: 15px; font-family: Arial; background-color: transparent; vertical-align: baseline; white-space: pre-wrap;\"\u003e001\u003c/span\u003e\u003c/b\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp dir=\"ltr\" style=\"margin-top: 0pt; margin-bottom: 0pt;\"\u003e\u003cb id=\"internal-source-marker_0.9041411196812987\" style=\"color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman'; font-size: medium; line-height: normal; font-weight: normal;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-size: 15px; font-family: Arial; background-color: transparent; vertical-align: baseline; white-space: pre-wrap;\"\u003eIn this video I would like to show you how to build a competition robot and tell you how we reached the construction used in the videos. Surely it isn\u0026rsquo;t perfect but it is a good start.\u003c/span\u003e\u003c/b\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp dir=\"ltr\" style=\"margin-top: 0pt; margin-bottom: 0pt;\"\u003e\u003cb id=\"internal-source-marker_0.9041411196812987\" style=\"color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman'; font-size: medium; line-height: normal; font-weight: normal;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-size: 15px; font-family: Arial; background-color: transparent; vertical-align: baseline; white-space: pre-wrap;\"\u003eMany times I have heard this question:\u003c/span\u003e\u003c/b\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp dir=\"ltr\" style=\"margin-top: 0pt; margin-bottom: 0pt;\"\u003e\u003cb id=\"internal-source-marker_0.9041411196812987\" style=\"color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman'; font-size: medium; line-height: normal; font-weight: normal;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-size: 15px; font-family: Arial; background-color: transparent; vertical-align: baseline; white-space: pre-wrap;\"\u003eWhy does the robot end up in different position after each run?\u003c/span\u003e\u003c/b\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp dir=\"ltr\" style=\"margin-top: 0pt; margin-bottom: 0pt;\"\u003e\u003cb id=\"internal-source-marker_0.9041411196812987\" style=\"color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman'; font-size: medium; line-height: normal; font-weight: normal;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-size: 15px; font-family: Arial; background-color: transparent; vertical-align: baseline; white-space: pre-wrap;\"\u003eWell there are many reasons for that, like:\u003c/span\u003e\u003c/b\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp dir=\"ltr\" style=\"margin-top: 0pt; margin-bottom: 0pt;\"\u003e\u003cb id=\"internal-source-marker_0.9041411196812987\" style=\"color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman'; font-size: medium; line-height: normal; font-weight: normal;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-size: 15px; font-family: Arial; background-color: transparent; vertical-align: baseline; white-space: pre-wrap;\"\u003ethe different starting position\u003c/span\u003e\u003c/b\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp dir=\"ltr\" style=\"margin-top: 0pt; margin-bottom: 0pt;\"\u003e\u003cb id=\"internal-source-marker_0.9041411196812987\" style=\"color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman'; font-size: medium; line-height: normal; font-weight: normal;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-size: 15px; font-family: Arial; background-color: transparent; vertical-align: baseline; white-space: pre-wrap;\"\u003ethe wheel slip\u003c/span\u003e\u003c/b\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp dir=\"ltr\" style=\"margin-top: 0pt; margin-bottom: 0pt;\"\u003e\u003cb id=\"internal-source-marker_0.9041411196812987\" style=\"color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman'; font-size: medium; line-height: normal; font-weight: normal;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-size: 15px; font-family: Arial; background-color: transparent; vertical-align: baseline; white-space: pre-wrap;\"\u003eor the bad construction.\u003c/span\u003e\u003c/b\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp dir=\"ltr\" style=\"margin-top: 0pt; margin-bottom: 0pt;\"\u003e\u003cb id=\"internal-source-marker_0.9041411196812987\" style=\"color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman'; font-size: medium; line-height: normal; font-weight: normal;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-size: 15px; font-family: Arial; background-color: transparent; vertical-align: baseline; white-space: pre-wrap;\"\u003eToday we will focus on the last one. First, I will begin with giving definition of center of mass. For the purpose of this lesson we will refer to it as the point, where if you put your finger, the robot will stay in balance. As on the picture taken from wikipedia.org. More precise definitions you can find in the links below.\u003c/span\u003e\u003c/b\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u0026nbsp;\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp dir=\"ltr\" style=\"margin-top: 0pt; margin-bottom: 0pt;\"\u003e\u003cb id=\"internal-source-marker_0.9041411196812987\" style=\"color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman'; font-size: medium; line-height: normal; font-weight: normal;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-size: 15px; font-family: Arial; background-color: transparent; vertical-align: baseline; white-space: pre-wrap;\"\u003e002\u003c/span\u003e\u003c/b\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp dir=\"ltr\" style=\"margin-top: 0pt; margin-bottom: 0pt;\"\u003e\u003cb id=\"internal-source-marker_0.9041411196812987\" style=\"color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman'; font-size: medium; line-height: normal; font-weight: normal;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-size: 15px; font-family: Arial; background-color: transparent; vertical-align: baseline; white-space: pre-wrap;\"\u003eOne will ask why we begin with this, well there are two reasons. The first one is that to be stable during turns the center of mass of the robot must be as low as possible. The second one is that the center of mass of the robot must be on the same vertical axis as the center of the points of the robot, which touch the ground. By this the weight of the robot is distributed equally.\u003c/span\u003e\u003c/b\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp dir=\"ltr\" style=\"margin-top: 0pt; margin-bottom: 0pt;\"\u003e\u003cb id=\"internal-source-marker_0.9041411196812987\" style=\"color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman'; font-size: medium; line-height: normal; font-weight: normal;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-size: 15px; font-family: Arial; background-color: transparent; vertical-align: baseline; white-space: pre-wrap;\"\u003eNext it is very important to choose the right type of back wheels. They must have little friction during turns, so that the robot turns easily.\u003c/span\u003e\u003c/b\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp dir=\"ltr\" style=\"margin-top: 0pt; margin-bottom: 0pt;\"\u003e\u003cb id=\"internal-source-marker_0.9041411196812987\" style=\"color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman'; font-size: medium; line-height: normal; font-weight: normal;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-size: 15px; font-family: Arial; background-color: transparent; vertical-align: baseline; white-space: pre-wrap;\"\u003eThen we need a small base construction, because of the many mission models on the field.\u003c/span\u003e\u003c/b\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp dir=\"ltr\" style=\"margin-top: 0pt; margin-bottom: 0pt;\"\u003e\u003cb id=\"internal-source-marker_0.9041411196812987\" style=\"color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman'; font-size: medium; line-height: normal; font-weight: normal;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-size: 15px; font-family: Arial; background-color: transparent; vertical-align: baseline; white-space: pre-wrap;\"\u003eLast I would like to point out another common problem. Usually the students begin with solving one of the missions and build construction for solving this mission. After they solve it, they see that the construction is not appropriate for solving the next mission, so they change the construction. By doing that, the program they made for the first mission does not work anymore and they get stuck in a vicious circle. To avoid this you must keep in mind all of the missions during construction of the base and do not change it afterwards. So, we reach the following two conclusions - keep in mind all of the missions and do not change the base. \u003c/span\u003e\u003c/b\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cbr /\u003e\r\n\u0026nbsp;\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp dir=\"ltr\" style=\"margin-top: 0pt; margin-bottom: 0pt;\"\u003e\u003cb id=\"internal-source-marker_0.9041411196812987\" style=\"color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman'; font-size: medium; line-height: normal; font-weight: normal;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-size: 15px; font-family: Arial; background-color: transparent; vertical-align: baseline; white-space: pre-wrap;\"\u003e003\u003c/span\u003e\u003c/b\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp dir=\"ltr\" style=\"margin-top: 0pt; margin-bottom: 0pt;\"\u003e\u003cb id=\"internal-source-marker_0.9041411196812987\" style=\"color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman'; font-size: medium; line-height: normal; font-weight: normal;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-size: 15px; font-family: Arial; background-color: transparent; vertical-align: baseline; white-space: pre-wrap;\"\u003eSo let\u0026rsquo;s sum up the conclusions we have made so far. First, we need the center of mass of the robot to be as low as possible and to be on the same vertical axis as the center of the pivot points. We have to choose the right type of back wheels, so that they have a little friction. We need to make a small base construction and keep in mind all of the missions during constructing, so that we do not need to change the base after we finished.\u003c/span\u003e\u003c/b\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u0026nbsp;\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp dir=\"ltr\" style=\"margin-top: 0pt; margin-bottom: 0pt;\"\u003e\u003cb id=\"internal-source-marker_0.9041411196812987\" style=\"color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman'; font-size: medium; line-height: normal; font-weight: normal;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-size: 15px; font-family: Arial; background-color: transparent; vertical-align: baseline; white-space: pre-wrap;\"\u003e004\u003c/span\u003e\u003c/b\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cb id=\"internal-source-marker_0.9041411196812987\" style=\"color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman'; font-size: medium; line-height: normal; font-weight: normal;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-size: 15px; font-family: Arial; background-color: transparent; vertical-align: baseline; white-space: pre-wrap;\"\u003eNow let\u0026rsquo;s take a look at the robot. The first point was that the center of mass must be as low as possible, we have accomplished that by choosing the small tires and making a relatively short construction, which is tall only about 15 cm. Next we said that the center of mass must be on the same vertical axis as the center of the pivot points. After you build the robot, you can easily see that the center of mass of the robot is somewhere on this axis, where is exactly the center of the four pivot points. Next, we have chosen these parts from the MINDSTORMS set for back wheels, because they have little friction and the robot turns easily with them. We have made a small base construction and we have optimized the space in it so that there is not any empty space. We have kept in mind several things. The first one was that at some point you will need light sensors, so we have put them in the base construction with this part in front of them for making shadow and also for alignment on the border walls. Next, we have this third motor incorporated in the body of the robot and transmitted the motion using these gears. So that you can put the attachments in here and have the motion for them. By doing this, we actually do not need to change the base construction during the work on the missions. The next thing about the robot is that it is modular and it is easily disassembled into 5 or 6 simple modules. The first part is the back wheels, next we can detach the two motors, like this. Now we detach the third motor with the light sensors and finally it\u0026rsquo;s the brick with this parts, which are easily disassembled from the brick, as you can see. And we have the six modules of the robot. The instructions for the modules you can find under this video, as well as the instructions for the whole robot. \u003c/span\u003e\u003c/b\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\u003c/p\u003e"},"37":{"position":37,"title":"How to program the Mindstorms NXT robots to communicate over Bluetooth","description":"\u003cp\u003eWe are showing the basics of communication between LEGO Mindstorms NXT Bricks using a Bluetooth connection. In the next few minutes we will build two programs - one for the master and one for the slave brick, while explaining the essentials for building such programs.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eBy the end of the video tutorial you would have established a connection between two Mindstorms NXT bricks. On each brick display there will be an image that you can move using NXT buttons. Moving the image on one of the bricks will be communicated over Bluetooth to the other brick where the image will also be moved. Try it!\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cdiv\u003e\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://thenounproject.com/noun/bluetooth/?dwn=CCBY\u0026amp;dwn_icon=10901#icon-No10901\"\u003eBluetooth icon\u003c/a\u003e, Thomas Le Bas, from The Noun Project\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\u003c/div\u003e\r\n","tags":"Nxt,Bluetooth,Programming","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eIn this tutorial we'll get familiar with the basics of the Bluetooth communication using the Mindstorms NXT brick. Bluetooth allows the robots to communicate with each other and cooperate in that way. We'll build a simple program that will illustrate the possibilities we have using Bluetooth.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eLet me explain what we will try to build in this tutorial. By the end of the tutorial, we'll have two bricks - paired and communicating using Bluetooth. On their screens there will be an image which I'll move using the left and right NXT buttons of the first brick and the image will move on both screens. OK. After we have cleared our vision about the program, let's start programming. The Bluetooth communication in the Mindstorms series is master-slave. This means that if we have two bricks, one is the master and the other one - the slave. The master brick can only send signals while the slave brick can only receive signals. So, in our case we'll have two separate programs: one for the master brick and one for the slave brick. Let's take a look at the slave brick program. I've divided it into two separate tasks which are executed simultaneously. In the first one we receive the coordinates of the image from the other brick and in the second one we visualize the image on the screen according to these coordinates. Now, let's take a look at the master brick program. Here we have three separate tasks. One for sending the current coordinates to the other brick, or the slave brick. Then we modify the current coordinates using the left and right NXT buttons and, finally, we visualize the image on the screen according to these coordinates. Let's take a look at the visualization part of the program. It's one and the same for the master brick program and the slave brick program. Here we have one loop which is repeated forever. Then, inside it, we read the value of the X variable and give it to the display block. In the X variable we will store the current coordinates of the image on the screen. Let's download the program and see what will happen when we run it. Now let's get back to the master brick program. In this My Block we modify the current coordinates of the image. So, first we initialize the X variable at value 0. Then we have a loop which is set to forever and inside it we modify the X variable according to whether the left, the right or no buttons are pressed. So, we have one switch for the right button and one for the left. If the right button is pressed, we add 5 to the X variable. If the left button is pressed, we subtract 5 from the X variable. If no button is pressed, we continue repeating the loop. So, let's again get back to the master brick program. The last things are the Send My Block and Receive My Block which are actually responsible for the Bluetooth communication between the two bricks. But before getting into the Bluetooth communication I'd like to show you some of the blocks responsible for this communication. We start the program and the logo is shown on the screen but it is not moving. Now we are going to get back to programming in order to make it move. Let's open a new program. We have three blocks which are responsible for the communication between the two bricks via Bluetooth. The first one is located under the Action tab and is called \"Send message\". Then, under the sensor tab, we have the block \"Receive message\" and under the advanced tab we have the block \"Bluetooth connection\". In the Bluetooth connection block we can turn on or off the Bluetooth of a given brick and also we can initiate or close connection with another brick. In \"Initiate connection\" we have to give the name of the brick we want to connect to and on which port we want to connect to. A very important thing to know when you want to initiate connection is that the two blocks should be paired. This can be done using the menu on the brick and I'll show you how to do this in a moment. Another important thing is that if you have already initiated connection and then run the program again and then try to initiate connection again, in most cases the Bluetooth connection will fail. So, I prefer to initiate the connection manually and leave the communication to the program. OK. Now let's take a look at the other two blocks. In the first one we can send a message to another brick by indicating on which connection it is - 1, 2, 3; by indicating whether we want to send some text, number or logic (boolean value True or False) and to which mailbox. Because each connection has 10 mailboxes and you can send simultaneously up to ten messages.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eOK. If we expand the block, we can connect numbers, text, number of the mailbox, etc. In the Receive Message Block, we can compare the message we have received and also, if we expand it, we can take this Boolean variable which will be True if there is a message received and False otherwise. OK. If we get back to the Send My Block, things are quite simple. We have this loop which is again repeated forever and we send the value of the X variable to the brick on connection 1. We say that we send a number and we send it to mailbox 1. After we have sent the value we wait for 0.05 sec. This is because otherwise we'll send the values too fast and the other brick will fail. So, now let's get back to the slave brick program. The only thing left is the Receive My Block. We have this Receive Message Block inside it from which I get the Boolean value showing whether the message is received or not. If the message is received, I use a switch block to store the value of the message in the X variable. Otherwise, I do nothing and continue repeating the loop. As I said, the two bricks should be paired before starting the program. So, I'll start both bricks; then go to the Bluetooth menu on both of them and turn on their Bluetooth.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNow both of them have their Bluetooth enabled. This is indicated by this icon. And now I'll go to the search menu of the \"Favorit\" brick because it will be the master brick. There I will search for the slave brick - in our case \"911\". Now we wait until it finds the other brick.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt has found 911, so I'll select it. Then I select Port 1. I want to establish connection between the two bricks on Port 1.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eOK. Now the two bricks are paired and ready to communicate. I go to My Files and start the programs in order to check how they work.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAs you see, the program works perfectly. Now I'll turn off the bricks and then start them once again. Once I have paired the two bricks, all I need to do now is to go to the Bluetooth menu of the master brick and then to My Contacts and select the slave brick (in our case 911). Select Connect and again select Port 1.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe two bricks are now connected, so I can run the program. In the end, I will run the program once again in order to be sure that everything is just fine.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eOK. The program is working properly. In this tutorial we have used Bluetooth communication with two bricks only. But the Mindstorms series can communicate with up to five bricks. So, in one of the next tutorials I'll show you how you can establish Bluetooth connection with more than two bricks.\u003c/p\u003e"},"1129":{"position":1129,"title":"Teacher's Notes","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"Teacher's Note,EV3,Programming","subtitles":null},"1051":{"position":1051,"title":"How to start your robots","description":"\u003cp\u003eRobots are positioned one after the other so that each color wheel could be seen by the color sensor of the robot in front. At the start of the line we position a robot which uses MyBlock which we have prepared for you. The program starts from the robot using MyBlock. When its program is over, the next robot in line starts its program and so on.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"","tags":"Classes with students","subtitles":null},"1066":{"position":1066,"title":"Teacher's Note: More information on plastic pollution and degrading plastic wastes","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"Teacher's Note,STEM","subtitles":null},"1047":{"position":1047,"title":"Teacher's Note: The Robot shows the color it sees","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis is how the program should basically look like:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive content-img\" src=\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/615/content/LEGO_EV3_example_solution_of_the_telephone_game_fllcasts.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThis is the smallest working program.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"","tags":"Classes with students,Teacher's Note","subtitles":null},"969":{"position":969,"title":"Finding the largest number among a given set of numbers","description":"\u003cp\u003eA popular task in computer science classes is finding the largest number in a set of numbers. No matter in what language the program is imlemented the idea of the algorithm is one and the same. Now let us take a look at it.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eAs humans, the task may seem simple and we do not put much thought in it. However, when we are asked to create a program for finding the largest number, we may struggle. When you have no idea when to start from, the best practice is to start with a simple example. So let see how we can cope in the following cases:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIf there is just one number:\u003c/strong\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWell if there is just one number, obviously it is the largest, so you do not have to do anything\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIf there are two numbers:\u003c/strong\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eNow we just compare the two numbers and choose the one that is greater. Simply stated:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ccode\u003eif \u003cstrong\u003ea\u003c/strong\u003e is greater than \u003cstrong\u003eb\u003c/strong\u003e, then \u003cstrong\u003ea\u003c/strong\u003e is the largest else \u003cstrong\u003eb\u003c/strong\u003e is largest \u003c/code\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIf there are three numbers:\u003c/strong\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eFrom here on, we will change the strategy. We already know how to find the largest number among two given numbers. Now if we introduce to those two numbers a third one, we just have to compare the largest of the two with the third one. In general, if we know what is the largest number in a set of numbers and we introduce a new number, we only need to compare the previously largest number with the new one.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eThe algorithm:\u003c/strong\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIf we use the last idea the algorithm should be as follows:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003col\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eCreate a new variable and initialize it with a number that we are sure is smaller than all of the numbers in the set.\u003cbr\u003e\r\n\tAdvanced users may initialize the variable with the first number from the set.\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eIf there is a next number in the set, compare it to the value of the variable, else we have passed through all of the numbers and the largest number is the one stored in the variable.\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eIf the next number has a value that is greater than the value in the variable, we drop the old value of the variable and set the number as the new value in the variable. Else we do nothing and get back to 2.\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ol\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eAfter repeating those steps, we will end up with the largest number in the set in the variable.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSmallest number in a set:\u003c/strong\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIf we are interested in the smallest number, the algorithm is the same. There are two main differences:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cul\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003ewe should initialize the variable with a number greater than all of the numbers in the set\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003ewe should compare if the next number is less than the variable instead of greater than.\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ul\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eNow try to implement it in the next task.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Programming,Algorithms","subtitles":null},"1050":{"position":1050,"title":"Teacher's Note: Adding blocks for returning to starting position","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis is an exemplary program of how we can add blocks which return the color wheel to its starting position:\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive content-img\" src=\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/616/content/LEGO_EV3_example_solution_of_the_telephone_game_return_to_positionfllcasts.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"","tags":"Classes with students,Teacher's Note","subtitles":null},"1118":{"position":1118,"title":"Status Light","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"EV3,Programming","subtitles":null},"1053":{"position":1053,"title":"Teacher's Note: The difference between wait block and switch","description":"\u003cp\u003eExplain to your students that \u003cstrong\u003ethe wait block halts the execution of the program until the condition is met. During that time the robot reads from just one of the sensors and the others cannot be used\u003c/strong\u003e. Whenever we need to read from more than one sensor, a switch block should be used. \u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive content-img\" src=\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/620/content/LEGO-EV3-using-switch-block-instead-of-wait-blocks-fllcasts.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"","tags":"Classes with students,Teacher's Note","subtitles":null},"1139":{"position":1139,"title":"How to conduct a mixed lessons class","description":"\u003cp\u003eSometimes one has too few students and has to merge two groups together. Sometimes student(s) come to catch up with a missed class in another group of students. Here we show you how to effectively conduct such classes.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"","tags":"EV3,STEM,Classes with students","subtitles":null},"1073":{"position":1073,"title":"Wait change block","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"EV3,STEM,Programming","subtitles":null},"970":{"position":970,"title":"Building a robot","description":"\u003cp\u003eIn the second part of this section you will have to build a robot on your own. Before you begin, take a look a the next tutorials. The first one points out some key techniques in building with LEGO, while the second and the third take a look at a competition robot. We discuss what are the main aspects of a construction, how we have reached them and give an example with the given robot. Afterwards you will have to build your own modular robot. \u003cstrong\u003eNote that you will have the opportunity to build larger competition-like robot in a later section. For know, try to keep it simple, but still implement the concepts shown in the tutorials.\u003c/strong\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"","tags":"","subtitles":null},"1102":{"position":1102,"title":"Conditional Loop","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"EV3,Programming","subtitles":null},"886":{"position":886,"title":"Introduction","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"","subtitles":null},"25":{"position":25,"title":"How to categorize your FIRST LEGO League Senior Solutions missions","description":"\u003cp\u003eRobotics competition is a large part of the FLL Competition. The field contains missions which give points and the main purpose is to gather maximum number of points for 2:30min. FIRST LEGO League competitions have different themes every year but the tasks have similar functionality. In this video tutorial we will give a brief of missions in Senior Solutions (the theme for 2012).\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://thenounproject.com/noun/thinking/#icon-No12468\"\u003eThinking\u003c/a\u003e icon designed by \u003ca href=\"http://thenounproject.com/iconoci\"\u003eiconoci\u003c/a\u003e from The Noun Project\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"FLL 2012,FLL","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eA large part of the FIRST LEGO League is the robotics competition. Each year the field contains a number of missions, which give different points. The robot has 150 seconds to gather the maximum number of points. What we have seen in our experience is that although competitions have different themes most of the tasks share common functionality. We would try to summarize and categorize the missions in the\u0026nbsp;\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/search/senior+solutions\" style=\"line-height: 20.7999992370605px;\" target=\"_blank\"\u003e2012\u0026rsquo;s competition Senior Solutions\u003c/a\u003e.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe first mission that we will take a look at is the Video Call mission. We put this mission in two of our categories - Active lever and Passive Lever. We could use a third motor attachment in order to lift the flag or use stationary arm to accomplish the mission.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eNext is the Woodworking mission. We have to mark it as Collect and Deliver. In order to accomplish the mission we have to bring the chair to the base, repair it by hand and deliver it under the table.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWe have put the Medicines mission in two of our categories - Collect and Loops. The medicines is one of the two missions on the field with loops. Solving these missions requires to precisely put an axle, a beam or another lego part inside the loop. Another possibility is to use some kind of fork to lift the loop. After the robot has collected the medicine it has to bring it to base.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eLet\u0026rsquo;s take a look at the bowling mission. This mission could be solved in many ways, that\u0026rsquo;s why we categorize it as: Container, Deliver, Active lever and Detachable attachment. First you could use a container for the ball and drop it over the pins, you could use a rail to slide the ball, Active lever to hit the ball, use a rubber band to shoot the ball and all of this could be done by detachable attachments.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eFlexibility is very interesting mission for the Senior Solutions field. We qualify as Collect, Container, Push/Pull, Loops and High Reach. Lets first stop at the High Reach category. The higher loop is positioned at more than 16 inches or 406 mm. Since 16 inches is the maximum height of the robot when the round starts it means that the robot should somehow extend itself to reach the higher loop. Most High Reach missions require an attachment put at the upper part of the robot, but there are also other ways to solve the mission. For example you can Push or Pull the stand to the extend where the higher loop falls into a Container. This means we put the mission in both Container and Push/Pull category. Both loops should be returned back to base before the end of the round and this adds the final category to this mission which is Collect.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe quilting is marked as Deliver, Push/Pull and Detachable attachment. We have to deliver the plates to the corresponding places on the field, by pushing or by some attachment that could be left on the field afterwards.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe Gardening mission is about Deliver and Push/Pull. The execution of the Gardening mission is the same as the Quilting one.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWhat is interesting about the Stove is that you should rotate the black lever to more than 90 degrees. In order to do that you have to use an attachment connected to a motor. That falls in the Active Lever category.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eLets move to the next mission which is the strength exercise. You must solve this mission by lifting the weight from the lever. You could use a motor attachment, which is in the active lever category. Some of the teams come up with a solution where you could push the robot to the mission element and using a tilted platform to lift the lever, which is in the Passive Lever and Push/Pull categories.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe Cardiovascular exercise is categorized in Active Lever, Passive Lever and Iteration. The \u0026ldquo;clock\u0026rdquo; could be clicked either by attachment connected to a third motor or by steady attachment. The most important part about this mission is that it is iteration based - it could be made just one click at a time.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe mission Similarity recognition and cooperation is in three categories : Active lever, Passive Lever and Collaboration. For this mission you have to collaborate with the other team in order to make agreement on who will push the stick either by active or by passive lever.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe mission Ball Game \u0026ldquo;Future effects of our current decisions\u0026rdquo; is in three categories: Active Lever, Passive Lever and Collaboration. For this mission you have to collaborate with the other team, but this time you have to compete with them. To push the ball from the rack you can use either attachment connected to the third motor or a steady one.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe Service animal mission is in 4 categories : Collect, Push/Pull, Active Lever and Passive Lever. The first part of the mission is to push the gray disk either by the robot or use an active or passive arm. Then we have to collect the dog and bring it to base.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThere is one common mission each year. The transition mission is about the position of the robot at the end of the round. That\u0026rsquo;s why we have categorized it in Position at time end. After you categorize the missions you could look for missions in the same category from past years for ideas for solving your current task. In the next tutorials we will go through the categories with examples and possible solutions of the missions.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n"},"984":{"position":984,"title":"Required adjustments of the \"PLF_without_motor\" myBlock","description":"\u003cp\u003eWe want you to know how things work, so that you should make some adjustments to the block.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch2\u003eHow that block works\u003c/h2\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cem\u003eOpen the myBlock in the software and follow the text below. A picture is intentionally omitted here.\u003c/em\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThere are three important things to remember for the time being. The myBlock uses a \u003cstrong\u003eyellow\u003c/strong\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e block\u003c/strong\u003e for \u003cstrong\u003ecolor sensor\u003c/strong\u003e and reads the color in front of the robot.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eAfter that, the myBlock \u003cstrong\u003ecalculates\u003c/strong\u003e where the robot should steer. We use these calculations \"as is\", we don't change them.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eFinally, the calculated result is used to \u003cstrong\u003econtrol the\u003c/strong\u003e \u003cstrong\u003esteering motor\u003c/strong\u003e of the robot.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat needs to be adjusted\u003c/h2\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe yellow block for \u003cstrong\u003ecolor sensor\u003c/strong\u003e must match the port of the sensor on your robot.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe last two blocks must match the port of the steering medium motor of the robot. Both the \u003cstrong\u003eyellow\u003c/strong\u003e rotation sensor block and the \u003cstrong\u003egreen\u003c/strong\u003e motor block must be set to \u003cstrong\u003eone and the same port\u003c/strong\u003e.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch2\u003eIf the robot is still not following the line well\u003c/h2\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThink of the speed and the direction of the robot. In Level D2 we discussed and practiced what the correct direction of the robot should be and what maximum speed it could use.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,STEM,Programming","subtitles":null},"1131":{"position":1131,"title":"Motor Rotation Sensor - Switch Block","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"EV3,Programming,Rotation Sensor","subtitles":null},"1074":{"position":1074,"title":"Yellow sensors and program's wires","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"EV3,Programming","subtitles":null},"56":{"position":56,"title":"Active attachment for changing gears direction - part 2: improving durability","description":"\u003cp\u003eIn this episode we continue from Episode 55 and we improve the durability and stability of the attachment for a LEGO Mindstorms EV3 robot. Many times attachments are not very stable which results in gaps between parts. The goal of the video is to give basic construction ideas.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eThe previous \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/55-active-attachment-for-changing-gears-direction\"\u003eEpisode 55\u003c/a\u003e introduces the basic idea of changing gears orientation from vertical to horizontal. In this episode we stop at some of the principles of improving the stability and durability of the construction.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Gears,Attachments,FLL,Construction","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eIn episode 55 I showed you how you can change the direction of a vertical wheel attached to the front of our robot to a horizontal wheel. And we built an attachment. This attachment had some problems and it was not very durable so in today's episode we'll see how we can improve this attachment.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eFirst, let's start from where we stopped last time. This here is the attachment. We place the gear wheel here. Then we can place the attachment on the robot.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNow we have the attachment working. When the gear is turning, the other gear is also turning. The problem with this attachment is that when we place something to the front, something that's heavier, the gears will no longer work together and there will be a gap between the gears. For example, I will now start it. If there is a heavy load on the front, the gears won't be working together. We should find a way to improve this. One of the first things we should do is to find the problem. The problem is that the attachment is attached to the robot at two points only. And the connection is not very strong. So, we can improve this in several different ways. Let's start with something very simple. Let's attach these beams not only to a single point but also to another one. We could use these parts and we could do something like this. It's very simple. Very straightforward. Again, we start the robot. We can see that the attachment is much more durable and even if I press it and I try to press it even harder, it will continue working. So, this is one of the ways you could improve this attachment. The problem is that it's kind of difficult to place it, it takes a lot of time. If I have only the attachment and if I want to place this attachment on the robot, it will take me something like 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 seconds. It's not good enough. We could improve the time by simply removing two of the small black parts. This one here and this one here. And change them with parts that will make it easier for the team player to place the attachment. Now, let's try to place this attachment on the robot. It will take us 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 seconds. And the attachment is ready. (No, it's not.) So, again, it takes about 5-6 seconds to build the attachment. One thing we should also consider is that we should improve the stability of the attachment\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eby using the upper side of the robot. For example, by using these two holes here. Let's see how we can do this. This here is our attachment.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWe see that it's working - not very stable, not very durable but at least working. So, we could use a construction like this - a module like this; place it on the top of the robot and now we could find ways to attach the attachment to this construction. We can do this in several different ways. I have prepared some parts. You can see the constructions in the video. But if I add the parts like this,\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003ethey are still not connected, so the first upper construction module is not connected to the attachment. We can connect them by using beams. I have here 7-hole beams. I will just place the beam on the sides of the upper construction and we could connect both of them. It takes some time. And I'll do the same on the other side.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAgain, the construction is working. Now it's much more durable but, again, you can see there's a certain gap. This gap comes from here as we've connected both the attachment and the upper module with only one black part. As a result, the whole construction is not very stable. Another way we can improve it is to find ways to connect both constructions at at least two points. I'll remove this. I'll remove this as well. We could use 5/3 beams and attach them because the 5/3 beams will connect the upper construction and the attachment at at least two points. The whole construction will become much more stable.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAgain, it is working. And it's very stable. Even if I apply a lot of pressure, the whole construction is very stable. The problem with this construction is that it will be very difficult to place it on the robot. And it will take probably a lot of time. Here's the construction. If I try to place it on the robot, it will take me 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 seconds. 11 seconds is not very good for the competition. And again we can use what we have learnt in the previous video - We could use these parts - the red ones.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eI'll remove both black parts from here.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eOne and another one. Place the gear wheel. And now, placing the attachment on the robot will take us like 1, 2, 3, 4 seconds. In four seconds our attachment is working. You can find the instructions for the attachment here and in the next video we'll improve it even more.\u003c/p\u003e"},"1094":{"position":1094,"title":"Programming with EV3G","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"","subtitles":null},"126":{"position":126,"title":"EV3 basics course. Build a robot (part 1)","description":"\u003cp\u003eBased on your feedback we've build a course for introducing new students to the LEGO Mindstorms EV3 programming and construction. It is designed for school groups, competition teams and students alone in home that can get our feedback on their progress\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003ePreviously we've build over a hundred more advanced tutorials which were not suitable for completely new students. We then made a few assumptions about the student's knowledge in programming and constructing \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/search/robot+construction\"\u003erobots\u003c/a\u003e. In the EV3 Basics Course we are starting from the beginning.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Basic,Construction","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eIn this series of video tutorials we'll do more of an introduction. Based on your requests, of course, we've built over a 100 - 120 resources but they were more like intermediate resources and we were using robots like this and we were adding attachments to robots like this. But we've kind of missed for the last few months or probably even a year. We've kind of missed the introductory part. Where do you start from? How do you start with these robots? How do you use it in the classroom, on the competition, at home? How do you program them? How do you construct them? This is something that we missed and we got few requests that we should probably return back to the basics and start from the bottom and built from there and that's the goal of these series. We are separating these series in 3 parts, every episode will have the following structure or we'll at least try to keep every episode with the following structure. First we do more of an introduction, for example on the motors. Then we do more of an explanation on how do you use the robot and the movement of this robot and how do you program the movement on the competition. So, first it's general, then it's competition. And then we have a few tasks 2, 3, 4. We've prepared different tasks. The goal of this tasks is that you can do something at home, in the classroom. Experiment, record with a phone, upload, submit the solutions to us, share it, ask questions, so that we can help you get a better understanding on how do you construct and program this robot. Now what's the goal of this course, again, it's to return to the basics but we hope that you can use it in your school and you can use it as a course that will introduce students to the robot, but will also give them some more advanced knowledge on how to use the robot on the competition. So it's introductory course with a few episodes that are more like competition oriented. The other goal of the course is, of course if you are alone at home and you would like to use the robot and you'd like to learn more about them you can take this course and you can continue moving through it and it will be very interesting if we can communicate and you can leave us comments, write us an email or write to us through twitter and we'll help you along the way so that you can solve all the tasks and at the end have very good understanding on how to program the motors, the sensors and how to construct the robot. And the third goal of this course is if you're preparing a team for a competition and that's probably a rookie team or not a very experienced team to have a place to start. For the more advanced, experienced teams with 3, 4 years at the competition you can find links below for other playlists that are designed for them. This is for more like student that are now starting and they're trying to use the robots to compete at the competition. So let's start, I hope we'll get to 15, 20 videos in the next few months and at the end you'll have a pretty good understanding of the robots.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eFirst, let's start with this simple robot that we call Easy robot. It' quite easy to construct you can find the instruction below the video. Now when you receive the LEGO Mindstorms EV3 set, you receive, there're different set but at the end you have the brick, you have the motors, probably 3 motors and you have a few sensors. Sensors like, touch sensor, or ultrasonic sensor, or color sensor you can have also the gyro sensor. So you have different sensors. With the LEGO parts that are in the set you can construct an unlimited amount of robots. These are all different robots. Most of the robots, when you start, will look like this. It will be more like mobile robots, robots that are moving on wheels and they'll probably have 2 motors, these here are the motors and the brick. And the motors will be somehow attached to the brick. Then you need, so that you can have a stable construction you need a third wheel. LEGO have introduced this metal wheel with the EV3 set it is quite interesting if you can learn to build different third wheels, but for the moment stick with this metal wheel that's very convenient. And this here is the robot. Most of the robots, that you'll use will have different constructions and different instructions on how to build the robot, but sometimes you won't have any instructions. So the goal of our first video is to show you the robot, to give you some feedback on this robot and to leave you to construct it. Find the instructions below and construct this robot.\u003c/p\u003e"},"1125":{"position":1125,"title":"Brick Buttons","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"EV3,Programming","subtitles":null},"623":{"position":623,"title":"Teacher's Note: solving problems during the challenge \"stop to the wall\"","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis is the first task in which your students will make many mistakes. We will prepare you for them now.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eOmitting the unlimited movement block\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe first block is usually for rotations and the robot will make one rotation and then stop and wait for a press. The green lights of the brick will flash showing there is a working program but the robot will remain motionless.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eLet’s remember what unlimited movement is\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e - How many rotations the robot should make in order to reach the wall?\u003cbr\u003e\r\n - We don’t know!\u003cbr\u003e\r\n - When we don’t know, we should use the unlimited movement block.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhen we use a sensor, we should always use unlimited movement as well.\u003c/strong\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eOmitting the stop block\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe robot moves for an unlimited period of time, touches the wall, pushes a little bit against it and then stops. If the robot pushes against an object, for example a box, the effect will be even more visible. You can allow students put their hands in front of the robot and feel it continues to apply some pressure even after the touch.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe reason is that they have forgotten to put a stop block and the robot continues moving for about half a rotation forward before it understands the program has ended and there are no other commands.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Teacher's Note","subtitles":null},"779":{"position":779,"title":"Construction and Theory","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe truck we are going to construct today will use a medium motor for steering. The rear wheels will be driven by a large motor. \u003cstrong\u003eCan you find the difference between the rear-wheel driving of the truck and that of the car from lesson 1?\u003c/strong\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"","tags":"Classes with students","subtitles":null},"1054":{"position":1054,"title":"Adding the ultrasonic sensor switch block","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eStudents have to solve the next task by using the switch block and not a condition loop! The condition loop will be studied in the next level.\u003c/strong\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWe add an ultrasonic sensor switch block in which the robot stops and waits until the touch sensor is pressed if another robot is detected. The program should look like this:\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive content-img\" src=\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/619/content/LEGO-EV3-relay-line-following-example-program-fllcasts.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"","tags":"Classes with students,Teacher's Note","subtitles":null},"1093":{"position":1093,"title":"Rotational sensor - Wait block","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"Classes with students,Programming,EV3,EV3-G,Sensors,Rotation Sensor","subtitles":null},"982":{"position":982,"title":"Prepare for the online meetings","description":"\u003cp\u003eAs mentioned above during the online sessions we will use Google Hangout. In order to be able to join the sessions, you will need to create Google Account if you do not have one and test that Google Hangout works properly on the device you will be using, before the first session. You can checkout this tutorial for more information - \u003ca href=\"https://support.google.com/hangouts/answer/2944865?co=GENIE.Platform%3DDesktop\u0026amp;hl=en\"\u003ehttps://support.google.com/hangouts/answer/2944865?co=GENIE.Platform%3DDesktop\u0026amp;hl=en\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"","tags":"","subtitles":null},"87":{"position":87,"title":"How to calibrate the EV3 Gyro Sensor and remove its drift (hardware solution)","description":"\u003cp\u003eMany teams are having troubles with the EV3 Gyro Sensor and its drift. Based on a request from Sharon and Faye (full names omitted) in this video we are showing one way to fix this behaviour and get an accurate measurement from the sensor. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the \"drift\"?\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWhen you connect the sensor to the brick it shows a certain value. Then, after a moment it shows another value even though nor the sensor or the \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/search/lego+mindstorms\"\u003eMindstorms robot \u003c/a\u003eis moving. This makes it difficult to use the sensor for positioning the \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/search/robot+construction\"\u003erobot\u003c/a\u003e.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThis problem has been reported many times and discussed in many forums. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eThere is a hardware and a software solution\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIn this video we are stopping at the hardware solution. In some of the next videos we would stop at different software solutions.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eMore on the gyro sensor\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eCheck out the \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/50-how-to-on-gyro-sensor\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;\"\u003eHow to Use EV3 Gyro Sensor of the LEGO Mindstorms Robotics Set\u003c/a\u003e video tutorial\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Calibration,EV3,Gyro Sensor,Sensors","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003e- The gyro sensor of the \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/search/lego+mindstorms\"\u003eMindstorms\u0026#39; EV3 robot\u003c/a\u003e has a famous problem. It\u0026#39;s called the gyro drift. As you can see currently the value detected by the sensor is changing although we are not moving the \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/search/robot+construction\"\u003erobot\u003c/a\u003e. We got a request from several teams to explore different solutions of this problem. And in this video we\u0026#39;re gonna stop at the hardware\u0026nbsp;solution.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIt\u0026#39;s quite simple and when you get to this point, see the gyro drift? You just unplug the sensor. Then you make sure you don\u0026#39;t move the robot. And then you just plug to make sure we don\u0026#39;t move it. We plug the sensor again.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eAs you can see, the drift is now gone and if I move the robot, it detects the angle of rotation.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eAgain, if we unplug the sensor and if we plug it while moving the brick.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWe get the drift. The brick is not moving, but the values are changing. So you just unplug. Wait for a while. Make sure you don\u0026#39;t move the robot. Plug it gain.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eAnd the drift is gone.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n"},"1005":{"position":1005,"title":"Introduction","description":"\u003cp\u003eIn this section we will learn how to create, edit, import and use My blocks. First we begin with ilustrating a use of My blocks. There is a whole group of robot constructions called steering robots. Today we will build a steering robot and learn more about the way it is driven through a differential. Then you will have to download a My block that implements the Proportional Line Following algorithm for steering robtos. You need to download, import and modify the block to fit your robot setup. Finally, you will have to create a block of your own and learn how to add parameters.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"","tags":"","subtitles":null},"1103":{"position":1103,"title":"Teacher's Notes: Solutions of the challenges with the Pressure Plate robot","description":"\u003cp\u003eProgram: \u003ca href=\"/programs/2s8tid-pressure-plate-3-0-solved-tasks\"\u003eclick here\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"","tags":"Teacher's Note,EV3,Programming","subtitles":null},"518":{"position":518,"title":"Tetrix Gamepads. One Gamepad stick for moving in all directions","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"Tetrix,Java,Android,Gamepad,Motors,Programming","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eAnother way to control your FIRST Technical Challenge robot with the gamepad is to use just one stick. And with this one stick you control both moving forward - backward and turning. So, it would look like this. We have only the left stick. We move forward, backward or we turn.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eOr we can move and turn.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eOkay, let's see how we develop it and then we'll discuss the program and the result. In our OpMode what we do is to change the formula with which we calculate the left power and the right power. And we'll use another formula. This formula should include only the left stick and again we'll use the 'y' for moving forward and 'x' for turning. What I'll do is remove the division by 2 and here and use just the left stick. In this way a part of the result of the power comes from the left stick - its 'y' access and a part comes from the 'x' access. And we have the same thing for the right motor. And we have left_stick_x. This is our new formula for controlling the powers of the motor. Again, you can modify them based on your robot and find the correct values and the correct formula that is working correctly for your robot. One disadvantage of this approach of course is that we are not controlling the speed of the motors we are controlling their power. And this is a large subject - what is the speed and what is the power of the motors and for controlling the speed we must use the encoders but this is a subject for another video. For now it's important to know that there is another formula with which you can control the whole robot using only one of the sticks. And this one is the left stick. Let's return and discuss the end result. Moving forward. We haven't started the OpMode. I'll start it on the phone. Moving forward, moving backward, turning. Now, there are a couple of disadvantages. First, it is difficult with this kind of calculation to rotate around one of the wheels. You can do an arc or you can rotate around the center of the axle between the two wheels but you cannot do a turn around one of the wheels. So, it is not possible to set the power of one of the motors to 0 with this kind of calculation which might be a disadvantage depending on your construction and how it works. But what we can do I don't have enough space to show a full arc turn here on the camera and it would be difficult to record this. But if I move it forward and turn slightly to the left. Again I'll try to move forward and turn slightly to the left.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNow, this is something that's difficult to control with this robot.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eYou can but it's difficult. At least we have another way for building a software, for building a program for your gamepad and with this gamepad using only one of the sticks you can control how the robot moves. Actually, I set it to move the robot on the floor so that we can have more space and record the robot on the floor and it is difficult but it is possible to make the robot rotate around one of the wheels. We have two wheels and around one of the wheels. So, let's see how we do this on the floor.\u003c/p\u003e"},"1075":{"position":1075,"title":"Teacher's Notes: Land Mines","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"Teacher's Note","subtitles":null},"1055":{"position":1055,"title":"The first relay run","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe first relay run is the most basic program, without line following. It is important to line up robots close to each other so that they do not miss the robot in front. To make the race funnier, you can indicate the start and the finish on the field.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"","tags":"Classes with students,Teacher's Note","subtitles":null},"1095":{"position":1095,"title":"For the teacher - parking","description":"\u003ch4\u003eЗа преподавателя - паркиране\u003c/h4\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eПерпендикулярното паркиране се реализира по следния начин:\u003cbr\u003e\r\n1 - Робота подминава обекта\u003cbr\u003e\r\n2 - Върти пълен ляв или десен\u003cbr\u003e\r\n3 - Върви назад малко\u003cbr\u003e\r\n4 - Изправя волана\u003cbr\u003e\r\n5 - Върви назад докато не види нещо със сензора за разстояние\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eУспоредното по аналогичен начин, само че завиване не се случва докато робота застане на 90 градуса спрямо стартовата позиция. А да е 45, за да може да се \"мушне\" между колите.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eЦелта е колата да се \"наманеврира\" спрямо обектите и после финално да бъде спряна от сензора за разстояние.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"","tags":"Teacher's Note","subtitles":null},"1056":{"position":1056,"title":"Teacher's Note: The second relay run","description":"\u003cp\u003eIn this relay run the robots should follow a line. Align the robots at equal distance and, if possible, on the straight sections of the field.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"","tags":"Classes with students,Teacher's Note","subtitles":null},"1096":{"position":1096,"title":"For the teacher - class4 from level 1.5","description":"\u003cp\u003e(available in Bulgarian)\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"","tags":"Teacher's Note","subtitles":null},"632":{"position":632,"title":"How to calibrate more than one LEGO Mindstorms EV3 Light/Color sensors at a time","description":"\u003cp\u003eWould you like to resolve all the problems with the light/color sensors that you have? And to make all of them work in a predictable, stable way even when using more than one MINDSTORMS colour sensors. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWhen using Color sensors it is important to calibrate them depending on the light conditions in your venue. In this way, the calibrated sensor will show values between 0 and 100 independent of the light conditions. But using the default EV3 colour calibration available in the colour sensor block could lead to unpredicted problems that are difficult to track and resolved especially when used with multiple Color sensors. So in this series of tutorial we implement the calibration ourselves discussing the principles of colour sensor calibration.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eWe have more than one sensor. Each sensor could have a different calibrated value. But when changing the ports on which these calibrated sensors are attached a few problems could arise. We are taking a different approach. Implement the calibration on our own. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eHow does the program behave at the end\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe whole calibration process consists of the following steps\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eInitialization\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIt happens right after the robot is started. It is the first thing to do\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eFinding of Min and Max raw values\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWe find the values and we store them in an array that is later used to get the values.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eGetting a value depending on the calibrated Min and Max\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWe get the raw value and find the percentage this value represents between the Min and Max.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Sensors,EV3,Light and Color Sensor,FLL,Programming","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eWhen using color sensors it is important to calibrate them depending on the light conditions in your venue. In this way the calibrated sensor will show values between 0 and probably 100 independently of the light conditions in the venue. But using the default EV3 color sensor calibration available in the color sensor block could lead to some very unpredicted problems that are difficult to resolve and mostly difficult to track down especially if you are using a number of color sensors like 2 or 3. So, in this series of tutorials we'll implement the calibration ourselves discussing the principles of color sensor calibration. At the end we'll have 3 blocks that we can import in the EV3-G software and we'll have a program for calibrating and stopping on a black line. The program works like this.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe sensor is calibrated, the robot stops at the black line and we also show some of the values of the different sensors - the minimum and the maximum to discuss the calibration. So, let's dive in and start with a few very simple steps. We have more than one sensor on our robot. Each sensor could have a different calibrated value but when changing the boards of these calibrated sensors we could have some problems. And these are problems that are difficult to track down. We are taking in this series of tutorials a different approach and we are implementing the calibration on our own. How does the program behave at the end? At the end we have a program and we start a program that calibrates and then stops at the next black line. Of course, after the calibration we could use this calibrated value to follow a different line or to align to a black line. But for this example we'll just stop at this black line. Our whole program consists of 3 blocks. And you can find the blocks in the course attached, you can download them, import them directly in your EV3-G software. The whole process is the following. First, we initialize an array with some values and this happens right when you start the robot. Then we move for about a second to calibrate - to see the maximum and the minimum value and then we start looking for a minimum value. Again, the program - calibrating, stopping at the black line. So, the blocks are in the course. You can download then and use them directly in your programs. Look at the code of the blocks, try to understand it. If you have any comments, do a comment below the video and we'll try to answer and now let's dive in implementing the different blocks. This is the program that we have at the end. And we have a block for initializing an array and in this array we store the different values for minimum and maximum for the different sensors. Then we move forward for about a second and while moving we calibrate the minimum and maximum value for each sensor and after a second we stop. Then we move forward and detect the value of the third sensor. And if this value is less than 90%, this means that we are just starting with black - we stop. Again, this program could be achieved with a lot of different blocks and a lot of different programs but the goal of this tutorial is to give you an idea how to do an advanced calibration how to implement the calibration yourself so that you can track the problems of having more than one sensor that need to be calibrated.\u003c/p\u003e"},"1133":{"position":1133,"title":"Teacher's Note: Ambushing Scorpion task","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"Classes with students,Teacher's Note","subtitles":null},"14":{"position":14,"title":"How to programmatically calibrate NXT Mindstorm Light Sensors","description":"\u003cp\u003eIn episode 11 we looked at one of the most important topics for the competition - calibrating the light sensors. In this video I would like to show you how to use a more programmatic approach. This means letting the robot do the calibration on its own. Automatically.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eMentioned Episodes:\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cul\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/11\"\u003eEpisode 11 - Calibrating Light Sensors\u003c/a\u003e.\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ul\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://thenounproject.com/noun/stethoscope/#icon-No17432\"\u003eStethoscope\u003c/a\u003e icon designed by \u003ca href=\"http://thenounproject.com/alexeyivanov\"\u003eAlexey Ivanov\u003c/a\u003e from The Noun Project\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Light and Color Sensor,Programming","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cp dir=\"ltr\" style=\"line-height: 1.15; margin-top: 0pt; margin-bottom: 0pt;\"\u003e\u003cb id=\"internal-source-marker_0.8105615291278809\" style=\"color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman'; font-size: medium; line-height: normal; font-weight: normal;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-size: 15px; font-family: Arial; background-color: transparent; vertical-align: baseline; white-space: pre-wrap;\"\u003e0 In episode 11 we looked at one of the most important topics for the competition - calibrating the light sensors. \u003c/span\u003e\u003c/b\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u0026nbsp;\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp dir=\"ltr\" style=\"line-height: 1.15; margin-top: 0pt; margin-bottom: 0pt;\"\u003e\u003cb id=\"internal-source-marker_0.8105615291278809\" style=\"color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman'; font-size: medium; line-height: normal; font-weight: normal;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-size: 15px; font-family: Arial; background-color: transparent; vertical-align: baseline; white-space: pre-wrap;\"\u003eIn this video I would like to show you how to use a more programmatic approach. This means letting the robot do the calibration on its own. Automatically.\u003c/span\u003e\u003c/b\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u0026nbsp;\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp dir=\"ltr\" style=\"line-height: 1.15; margin-top: 0pt; margin-bottom: 0pt;\"\u003e\u003cb id=\"internal-source-marker_0.8105615291278809\" style=\"color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman'; font-size: medium; line-height: normal; font-weight: normal;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-size: 15px; font-family: Arial; background-color: transparent; vertical-align: baseline; white-space: pre-wrap;\"\u003eI am going to use the Calibrate block from the Advanced section in NXT-G.\u003c/span\u003e\u003c/b\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u0026nbsp;\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp dir=\"ltr\" style=\"line-height: 1.15; margin-top: 0pt; margin-bottom: 0pt;\"\u003e\u003cb id=\"internal-source-marker_0.8105615291278809\" style=\"color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman'; font-size: medium; line-height: normal; font-weight: normal;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-size: 15px; font-family: Arial; background-color: transparent; vertical-align: baseline; white-space: pre-wrap;\"\u003e1 - software\u003c/span\u003e\u003c/b\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp dir=\"ltr\" style=\"line-height: 1.15; margin-top: 0pt; margin-bottom: 0pt;\"\u003e\u003cb id=\"internal-source-marker_0.8105615291278809\" style=\"color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman'; font-size: medium; line-height: normal; font-weight: normal;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-size: 15px; font-family: Arial; background-color: transparent; vertical-align: baseline; white-space: pre-wrap;\"\u003eFirst I would like to display the value of the sensors on the brick. This is achieved with the Light sensor block. You should convert the value returned from the block to a text using the Number to Text block. Our sensor is attached on port 1. And after we have converted the value we can display it on the brick. We select Text. Finally after displaying the value, I would like to leave the robot working for 5 seconds just to make sure we can see the displayed value. Time. Five seconds. OK.\u003c/span\u003e\u003c/b\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u0026nbsp;\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp dir=\"ltr\" style=\"line-height: 1.15; margin-top: 0pt; margin-bottom: 0pt;\"\u003e\u003cb id=\"internal-source-marker_0.8105615291278809\" style=\"color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman'; font-size: medium; line-height: normal; font-weight: normal;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-size: 15px; font-family: Arial; background-color: transparent; vertical-align: baseline; white-space: pre-wrap;\"\u003e2 - robot\u003c/span\u003e\u003c/b\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp dir=\"ltr\" style=\"line-height: 1.15; margin-top: 0pt; margin-bottom: 0pt;\"\u003e\u003cb id=\"internal-source-marker_0.8105615291278809\" style=\"color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman'; font-size: medium; line-height: normal; font-weight: normal;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-size: 15px; font-family: Arial; background-color: transparent; vertical-align: baseline; white-space: pre-wrap;\"\u003eLet\u0026rsquo;s start the robot. As you can see we currently get a value of 53 for the brightest part of the field and a value of 31 for the darkest part of the field, this black line here. \u003c/span\u003e\u003c/b\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u0026nbsp;\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp dir=\"ltr\" style=\"line-height: 1.15; margin-top: 0pt; margin-bottom: 0pt;\"\u003e\u003cb id=\"internal-source-marker_0.8105615291278809\" style=\"color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman'; font-size: medium; line-height: normal; font-weight: normal;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-size: 15px; font-family: Arial; background-color: transparent; vertical-align: baseline; white-space: pre-wrap;\"\u003e3. \u0026nbsp;- software\u003c/span\u003e\u003c/b\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp dir=\"ltr\" style=\"line-height: 1.15; margin-top: 0pt; margin-bottom: 0pt;\"\u003e\u003cb id=\"internal-source-marker_0.8105615291278809\" style=\"color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman'; font-size: medium; line-height: normal; font-weight: normal;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-size: 15px; font-family: Arial; background-color: transparent; vertical-align: baseline; white-space: pre-wrap;\"\u003eNext we move the four blocks in a new block and call it DisplayLightSensor. DisplayLightSensor. Finish. In this way, we could use this block many times in our program without repeating ourselves. \u003c/span\u003e\u003c/b\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u0026nbsp;\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp dir=\"ltr\" style=\"line-height: 1.15; margin-top: 0pt; margin-bottom: 0pt;\"\u003e\u003cb id=\"internal-source-marker_0.8105615291278809\" style=\"color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman'; font-size: medium; line-height: normal; font-weight: normal;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-size: 15px; font-family: Arial; background-color: transparent; vertical-align: baseline; white-space: pre-wrap;\"\u003eAfter we see the value on the screen, we should calibrate this value. Calibrate. As the robot will first be on the brightest part of the field, we set the calibrated value to a maximum, so we would like to calibrate the maximum of the sensor. Just to make sure that the calibration is successful, I will put a sound after the calibration and select the Click sound. After calibrating, we again show the value of the light sensor on the screen. We take the MyBlock DisplayLightSensor.\u003c/span\u003e\u003c/b\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u0026nbsp;\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp dir=\"ltr\" style=\"line-height: 1.15; margin-top: 0pt; margin-bottom: 0pt;\"\u003e\u003cb id=\"internal-source-marker_0.8105615291278809\" style=\"color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman'; font-size: medium; line-height: normal; font-weight: normal;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-size: 15px; font-family: Arial; background-color: transparent; vertical-align: baseline; white-space: pre-wrap;\"\u003e4. - robot\u003c/span\u003e\u003c/b\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp dir=\"ltr\" style=\"line-height: 1.15; margin-top: 0pt; margin-bottom: 0pt;\"\u003e\u003cb id=\"internal-source-marker_0.8105615291278809\" style=\"color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman'; font-size: medium; line-height: normal; font-weight: normal;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-size: 15px; font-family: Arial; background-color: transparent; vertical-align: baseline; white-space: pre-wrap;\"\u003eNow, as I start the robot, it shows the value of the sensor, again 53, we calibrate it, to make the brightest object with a value around 100, and after the calibration the new value was a 100.\u003c/span\u003e\u003c/b\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u0026nbsp;\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp dir=\"ltr\" style=\"line-height: 1.15; margin-top: 0pt; margin-bottom: 0pt;\"\u003e\u003cb id=\"internal-source-marker_0.8105615291278809\" style=\"color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman'; font-size: medium; line-height: normal; font-weight: normal;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-size: 15px; font-family: Arial; background-color: transparent; vertical-align: baseline; white-space: pre-wrap;\"\u003e5. \u0026nbsp;- software\u003c/span\u003e\u003c/b\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp dir=\"ltr\" style=\"line-height: 1.15; margin-top: 0pt; margin-bottom: 0pt;\"\u003e\u003cb id=\"internal-source-marker_0.8105615291278809\" style=\"color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman'; font-size: medium; line-height: normal; font-weight: normal;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-size: 15px; font-family: Arial; background-color: transparent; vertical-align: baseline; white-space: pre-wrap;\"\u003eAs we have calibrated the maximum value of the sensor, we should now calibrate for the minimum. Let\u0026rsquo;s move the robot about 1 rotation forward and calibrate for the Minimum Value. Calibrate on port 1 but this time for the minimum. Again with an appropriate sound at the end. The sound is \u0026ldquo;Click\u0026rdquo;. I will add a few comments to make the program easier to understand. You have this comment tool so here we are \u0026ldquo;calibrating maximum\u0026rdquo; and here we are \u0026ldquo;calibrating minimum\u0026rdquo;. And now we download the program. Um.. no. We should first add one more block to see the value of the sensor, and take the DisplayLightSensor. Download.\u003c/span\u003e\u003c/b\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u0026nbsp;\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp dir=\"ltr\" style=\"line-height: 1.15; margin-top: 0pt; margin-bottom: 0pt;\"\u003e\u003cb id=\"internal-source-marker_0.8105615291278809\" style=\"color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman'; font-size: medium; line-height: normal; font-weight: normal;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-size: 15px; font-family: Arial; background-color: transparent; vertical-align: baseline; white-space: pre-wrap;\"\u003e6. \u0026nbsp;- robot\u003c/span\u003e\u003c/b\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp dir=\"ltr\" style=\"line-height: 1.15; margin-top: 0pt; margin-bottom: 0pt;\"\u003e\u003cb id=\"internal-source-marker_0.8105615291278809\" style=\"color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman'; font-size: medium; line-height: normal; font-weight: normal;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-size: 15px; font-family: Arial; background-color: transparent; vertical-align: baseline; white-space: pre-wrap;\"\u003eAgain we start the robot. First it shows the non-calibrated value of the brightest object. The calibration is done. Then we show the new value for bright object. Now the robot moves automatically about 1 rotation, it calibrates for the minimum value, which, in this case, it was 0.\u003c/span\u003e\u003c/b\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u0026nbsp;\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp dir=\"ltr\" style=\"line-height: 1.15; margin-top: 0pt; margin-bottom: 0pt;\"\u003e\u003cb id=\"internal-source-marker_0.8105615291278809\" style=\"color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman'; font-size: medium; line-height: normal; font-weight: normal;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-size: 15px; font-family: Arial; background-color: transparent; vertical-align: baseline; white-space: pre-wrap;\"\u003e7. \u0026nbsp;- software\u003c/span\u003e\u003c/b\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp dir=\"ltr\" style=\"line-height: 1.15; margin-top: 0pt; margin-bottom: 0pt;\"\u003e\u003cb id=\"internal-source-marker_0.8105615291278809\" style=\"color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman'; font-size: medium; line-height: normal; font-weight: normal;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-size: 15px; font-family: Arial; background-color: transparent; vertical-align: baseline; white-space: pre-wrap;\"\u003eOne more important thing about calibration is to always reset the calibrated value before doing new calibration. You can do this again with the Calibration block, but this time for Action you chose \u0026ldquo;Delete\u0026rdquo; instead of Calibrate.\u003c/span\u003e\u003c/b\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u0026nbsp;\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp dir=\"ltr\" style=\"line-height: 1.15; margin-top: 0pt; margin-bottom: 0pt;\"\u003e\u003cb id=\"internal-source-marker_0.8105615291278809\" style=\"color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman'; font-size: medium; line-height: normal; font-weight: normal;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-size: 15px; font-family: Arial; background-color: transparent; vertical-align: baseline; white-space: pre-wrap;\"\u003e8. - robot\u003c/span\u003e\u003c/b\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp dir=\"ltr\" style=\"line-height: 1.15; margin-top: 0pt; margin-bottom: 0pt;\"\u003e\u003cb id=\"internal-source-marker_0.8105615291278809\" style=\"color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman'; font-size: medium; line-height: normal; font-weight: normal;\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-size: 15px; font-family: Arial; background-color: transparent; vertical-align: baseline; white-space: pre-wrap;\"\u003eAs a result, we have a robot that can automatically calibrate itself with just a push of a button. \u003c/span\u003e\u003c/b\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cdiv\u003e\u0026nbsp;\u003c/div\u003e\r\n\u003c/p\u003e"},"52":{"position":52,"title":"Judging FLL Robot Design (part 2 - the programming)","description":"\u003cp\u003eWe continue the discussion of the Robot Design category from the FIRST LEGO League Competition. This time we stop on the programming - how to evaluate the programming of the team during its preparation for the competition.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eStatistics designed by \u003ca href=\"http://thenounproject.com/iconify\" style=\"background-color: transparent;color: gray;text-decoration: none;\"\u003eScott Lewis\u003c/a\u003e from the \u003ca href=\"http://www.thenounproject.com/\" style=\"background-color: transparent;color: gray;text-decoration: none;\"\u003eNoun Project\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"FLL 2012,FLL 2013,FLL","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eIn the first part of this video we did a quick overview of the FLL Robot design category. And the judging process. Find the link below this video. In part two I would like to go into details about the referee sheets and especially about programming. First thing you should know is that the referee sheets are public. Everyone could go to the FLL website and download them. Just go to the website, visit FLL events.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eJudging and awards and then download the rubrics.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eHere you could see I combined rubrics for all the three categories.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eCore values.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eProject.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd Robot design.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eUsing the sheet is quite straight forward. There are three sections: Mechanical design. Programming. Strategy and innovation. For each section you have three rows and five columns.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAs the team enters you should mark their achievements in the given section. And this could be NOT demonstrated, beginning, developing, accomplished, exemplary. If you think that the team should receive an award for Mechanical design. Or for Programming. Or for Strategy and innovation. Mark them at the bottom.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eTake your time to know all the values in the different cells before the tournament. It could take you about 10 to 20 minutes. Also be sure to sync with the other judges in your team that you have the same understanding about these values. One of the most important things about this scoring sheet is to judge team relatively. Compare them to each other and NOT to a absolute scale. I have been to a competition where most of the teams are really exemplary. Which is great! Then you come to a situation where two or three teams are obviously better. But there isn't a second column for exemplary. So you should somehow adjust your judging. Leave the best two or three team in the competition as exemplary. And you can mark the others as accomplished. But that is again just a proposal. In the next videos there are a number of pictures I want to show you of different robots. But a lot start from the Programming section. Teams are allowed to use both NXT and Ev3 software. These product are developed for young students that are just starting with programming. The first great challenge for us as judges is to evaluate the complexity of the program. Theoretically it is possible to solve all the missions on every FLL field using only Move Blocks. So Move here with motor B and C then lift something with motor A then move again with motor B and C. Then lift something again and move. But this is not a good program for a number of reasons. As students grow and are at the age of 14-16 When they are no longer allowed to participate in FLL. They should have basic understanding about programming autonomous robots. So considering the following scenario: Team A collects 400 points. Team B again collects 400 points. Team A does it with one big program with just a sequence of Blocks for moving.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eTeam B has developed an autonomous robot with the use of sensors, variables, states, transitions, threads and other even more reliable design patterns .\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eSo which team is better?\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eMy personal understanding is that Team B has learned a lot more than Team A. They were more open minded and would have greater potential of continuing studding in the field of technical science. Let's now look at the first row of the scoring sheet.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eExemplary states: It should achieve purpose every time. And begging would be: Would not achieve purpose and would be inconsistent. From my experience programs that are relining only on Blocks like this one here for moving. They depend on gaps, on battery, on the initial starting position and on many other parameters. So they would hardly achieve the purpose and most of the time be very inconsistent. On the other hand appropriate use of sensors , decision making, logic operations, variables loops, switches, parallel using of different Blocks can greatly increase the average score of the team. Next we come to how well is the program organised and is it understandable. Where for beginning we have: excessive code, difficult to understand. And for exemplary we have extreme light code and easy to understand for everybody. Many judges will now ask for comments.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eLike this one here. I have personally over a decade of experience in software development. Comments from my point of view are the great enemy of every good software developer. Because they introduce redundancy in your code. This means that the next time you change your code you should also change the comment. And if you forget to change the comment which you will serenely do. Then looking at the code two months from now rises the question which is correct the comment or the code. Should I now change the code to reflect the comment or should I change the comment to reflect the code. What I'm personally looking for in the programs is for them to be understandable. And if you cannot understand a simple program developed for the FLL competition. In a matter of minutes. Then you could consider this program as \"Not understandable\" Modules or MyBlocks could be used here it's much easier to look at a program with the following structure. House and Animals. Humans return to base. And it is much more understandable to see the sequence of the Blocks. Instead of Move, Move, Move, Move and again Move. There is a saying in the software development word: \"Everybody could write a program that a computer can understand. The goal is to write a program that a human can understand.\" Looking at the last row. Automation, navigation. You should have one thing in mind: Is it possible to develop a robot that the team could just start and without any intervention receive the highest score. So - no changing programs.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo changing attachments.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo strategic touching.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd returning back to base. A robot that runs completely on it's own. This should be the goal of every team. What I like to ask the team here for example is how many missions do they have?\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eHow many sensors do they use?\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhen asking about the programming try to understand the extend to which the coach was involved. I was once judging a team that developed a state machine. Check the links bellow for more information about state machines. It was obvious that the coach had done all the programming. After a couple of questions we found out that the students cannot write even a simple program for following lines. The coach was completely honestly not aware that it should be the children doing the programming to level they can. So to keep the competition fare we didn't allow this team to participate in the Robot Game. Now I finish this video and in the next parts I will continue judging mechanical design and strategy and innovation. I have prepared some very interesting photos of robots. And I have gathered them trough my experience. Find the link bellow to the other parts of the video.\u003c/p\u003e"},"50":{"position":50,"title":"How to Use EV3 Gyro Sensor of the LEGO Mindstorms Robotics Set","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis video tutorial reviews the EV3 Gyro Sensor and the HiTechnic Gyro Sensor for the LEGO Mindstorms NXT robotics Kit. We compare the two sensors and demonstrate them in action.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eIn the video, we answer the question what a Gyro Sensor is - a sensor, that tells you at what degrees you have rotated it and what is the rate of rotation (degrees per second) is. We compare the two sensors using the EV3 Experiment Software, which tells us that the EV3 Gyro Sensor is much more precise. Fortunatelly, we can use both sensors with the EV3 software, without the need of installing additional blocks, as it was the case with the NXT-G. At the end we see what is the difference in the values of the EV3 Gyro Sensor after three times running one and the same program. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIn conclusion, the EV3 Gyro Sensor is quite accurate and for sure will improve your performance during the FIRST LEGO League competition, but still you should not rely only on the Gyro Sensor for positioning on the field.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eNew and Updated videos in a whole playlist:\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/playlists/21\"\u003eEV3 basics course. Mindstorms EV3 Gyro Sensor\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://thenounproject.com/term/top/22598/\"\u003eTop\u003c/a\u003e designed by \u003ca href=\"http://thenounproject.com/Wannabechilean\"\u003eMr. Blune\u003c/a\u003e from the \u003ca href=\"http://www.thenounproject.com/\"\u003eNoun Project\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Gyro Sensor,Sensors,Programming","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eOne difference between the NXT kit and the EV3 kit is the existence of the new EV3 Gyro Sensor. There was a Gyro sensor for the NXT kit but it was manifactured by High Tech which means that it wasn\u0026#39;t allowed on the \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/search/fll\"\u003eFIRST LEGO League competition\u003c/a\u003e. Whereas the new EV3 Gyro Sensor is manifactured by \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/search/lego+mindstorms\"\u003eLEGO\u003c/a\u003e and so it\u0026#39;s allowed on the FIRST LEGO League\u0026nbsp;competition. Last, makes it quite interesting for the participating things. In the next few minutes I will show you the differences between the two sensors. And some possible uses for the sensors during the competition.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eFirst of all, what is the Gyro Sensor? If you ask with idiom the gyroscope is device for measuring or maintaining orientation based on the principles of !angular momentum*. Said with other words, the Gyro sensor could tell you what is the change in its position. And by this I don\u0026#39;t need the change in milimeters or meters or whatever. But change in rotation,so it tells you at what degrees it has changed starting from its based position. So, when we run the \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/search/ev3+programming\"\u003eprogram\u003c/a\u003e if the sensor is like this and we take the \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/search/robot+construction\"\u003erobot\u003c/a\u003e at 90 degrees the Gyro sensor will tell you that it has been rotated at 90 degrees. This can be quite useful during the competition because you could try to make perfect turns with it. And with this will be better for your orientation on the field. But now, let\u0026#39;s see what we can actually do with the program and the Gyro sensor. I\u0026#39;ve connected EV3 brick to the computer and as you could see the computer detects two sensors. In Port 2 we have EV3 Gyro sensor and in Port 1 we have NXT Gyro sensor. Which in this case is detected as NXT sound sensor but now I will take Gyro sensor block, set it to Port 1 Here is a warning that on Port 1 we don\u0026#39;t have Gyro sensor but still I will download the program.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eNow as you could see the sensor on Port 1 is detected as Gyro sensor. Ok let\u0026#39;s see what are the settings of the Gyro sensor block. First we have the reset option which means that we reset the value of the Gyro sensor and it starts measuring from this point on. This is the automatically each time we run the \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/search/ev3+programming\"\u003eEV3\u0026nbsp;program\u003c/a\u003e. Then we have the measure option where we can measure the angle at which we have rotated the \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/50-how-to-on-gyro-sensor\"\u003eEV3 Gyro sensor\u003c/a\u003e or the rate of rotation. This means that it will return value of the number of degrees per second at which we rotate the Gyro Sensor. And of course we can read both lines senteniously.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWe have also the compare option where for instance we get set traceful value for the angle and if we want to turn our robot at 90 degrees we should set it greater or equal to 90. and then stop the motors. Now I will use a program we have created in the last episode, which use the Raw\u0026nbsp;sensor value block. And thanks to this program I will compare the Raw\u0026nbsp;Sensor values of the two sensors. Something that is quite important is that the \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/1-two-light-sensors-align-and-follow\"\u003etwo sensors\u003c/a\u003e should be stable when the value is reset or when start the program. So in our case I\u0026#39;m using NXT brick as table ground where I have put 2 sensors. You could see the value of the EV3 sensor which is below the value of the NXT sensor. Now when I rotate the sensor this way the values are getting lower and lower until we reach somewhere here which is 90 degrees turn. And as you could read the value of the EV3 sensor is 82. Then if we get the other way their value is getting greater and greater. Ok. Now let\u0026#39;s get back to the program. Now I will be using the Data **** section of the \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/search/ev3+programming\"\u003eEV3 Software\u003c/a\u003e. Here in green we have on Port 1 the NXT Gyro sensor and in gray on Port 2 we have EV3 Gyro Sensor. The default value of the EV3 Gyro sensor is 0 whereas the default value of the NXT Gyro sensor is 2400. So I have aligned the two values so that we have similar results. Within the time frame of 10 seconds and with 100 samples per second we\u0026#39;ll run the experiment in order to see what is the difference between the values of the two sensors. So I\u0026#39;ll run the experiment and move the NXT brick with the two sensors slowly left and right. Let\u0026#39;s see what will happen.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eOk, as we could see the graphic of the EV3 Gyro sensor is a lot smoother than the green one. And that\u0026#39;s because the EV3 Gyro sensor makes 3 times more measures per second than the NXT Gyro Sensor. Also as you could see the change of their values is opposite so you should keep that in mind when you\u0026#39;re using the two sensors. The good news is that within the EV3 software you could use the NXT Gyro sensor whereas within the NXT-G wasn\u0026#39;t possible. But still is quite hard to use it because it\u0026#39;s quite hard to read the values and use them properly. Now let\u0026#39;s continue with some simple examples and simple programs with the EV3 Gyro sensor. I have done this simple program, first we clear the screen and then we do the following thing three times. Moving motor B at power 50 for 1 rotation, we detect the value of the EV3 Gyro sensor and display it on the screen. Then we wait for one second before we reset the value in order to be sure that the Gyro sensor is stable and the value will be correct. Then we repeat the same thing but this time we display the value below the first one and the third time below the second one. At the end we wait for 10 seconds in order to have time to see what has happened. So let\u0026#39;s run the program.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eAnd after the three runs, the values of the sensor are 94,90 and 89 which means the sensor is quite persistent in the values and can be quite accurate but still it could not rely on your positioning only to the Gyro sensor because you make perfect turn but still you could slip and it cannot guarantee your end position. So if you have any further questions on the Gyro sensor please leave a comment under the video.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n"},"1105":{"position":1105,"title":"Display Block","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"EV3,Programming,Display","subtitles":null},"897":{"position":897,"title":"Construction of remote","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"","subtitles":null},"53":{"position":53,"title":"How to align LEGO Mindstorms robots to a black line (EV3 version)","description":"\u003cp\u003eIn this tutorial we present a way to align your robot to a black line. Go through common difficulties, that the teams face, when they need to align their robot, and provide a solution for them.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003ePreparing for the FIRST LEGO League Competition, it is essential to know how to align your robot to a black line. In this tutorial we provide an algorithm to do so with two light or color sensors and also explain some problems you may face during reaching this solution.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIn the tutorial we use a NXT Color Sensor and a EV3 Color Sensor. The same can be achieved with NXT Light Sensor and of course with two EV3 Color Sensor. For further review on the three sensors please take a look at \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/48-how-to-use-the-nxt-light-sensor-with-ev3-software\"\u003eEpisode 48\u003c/a\u003e.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Align,EV3,Light and Color Sensor,FLL","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eAs we have said in previous tutorials - the main problem during the first LEGO competition is: \u0026quot;How to position your robot precisely on the field?\u0026quot; We showed in episode #41 and #42 that is virtually impossible to do so without using sensors. In this tutorial I will provide you one more way to orientate your robot on the field. In the next few minutes you will learn how to aline your robot perpendicular to a black line.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIt is known that the line is defined by two points. That\u0026#39;s why if we just use one sensor to determine a black line, you will need to make several maneiras and this will be inaccurate and time consuming. And so useless on a competition where time matters. That\u0026#39;s why we will use two colour sensors to align on the black line. We have received e-mails from users that they do not possess two EV3 color sensors. That\u0026#39;s why during this tutorial we will use one \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/search/ev3+color+sensor\"\u003eEV3 color sensor\u003c/a\u003e and one NXT color sensor. Same can be achieved also using NXT white sense, for further information on that take a look at episode 48. Now let\u0026#39;s see how to align that line. The first problem we faced when we want to align our robot to a black line is that we don\u0026#39;t know which of the two sensors we will reach first the black line. So if we move like this the first sensor will be this one,the NXT color sensor and if we move like this the first sensor will be that one. That\u0026#39;s why we will use pardo actions and I will move this motor until this sensor reaches the black line. And then stop the motor, and in pardo action I will move this motor until the EV3 color sensor reaches a black line and then stop this motor. That\u0026#39;s how to achieve something like this.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eNow let\u0026#39;s see how it will look like when we program it. So, as I said we will need parallel actions and first I will move motor B until the robot detecs light.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eSo I\u0026#39;ll go to Port View and first I\u0026#39;ll move motor B when I put the robot on the black line we\u0026#39;ll see that the value of the EV3 colour sensor is 6 and the value of the NXT coulour sensor is fifty-some. So, a good traceful value for the NXT color sensor will be 75.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eAnd then I will stop motor B. I repeat the same thing in parlo but this time for motor C. And with the EV3 color sensor where traceful value will be on white space 60 so it will be 30 and then I will stop motor C. OK. So now let\u0026#39;s run the program and see what are the results. So, first let\u0026#39;s run the robot from here.And as you could see the robot is aligning to the black line. Now if I run the robot from here the result will be the same and so there\u0026#39;s no difference in whether the NXT color sensor or the EV3 color sensor first sees the black line. But if I run it again from here you could see that when this motor stops while the other one is continuing moving there\u0026#39;s change in the position of the NXT color sensor. By this at the end we have us light an accuracy of the position of the robot compared to the black line. In order to clear this inaccuracy I will make the robot move forward again with bolt motors and parallel actions. But this time I want them to stop when the sensors see white space. By this I will have made the robot to align to the border of the black line. So now let\u0026#39;s see how this implemented in a program. OK. I won\u0026#39;t continue the program here because If I do so when motor B stops it will right away continue running until it sees white space. That\u0026#39;s why I will make this one into MyBlock and then make another MyBlock and put it afterwards. So in the MyBlock the program should be on one threat, so I will do it like this. Now select these six blocks and go to Tools -\u0026gt; MyBlock Builder I will name it AlignPartOne and finish. OK. So now I will open it and copy the content. Go back to Program and paste here the content. And this time I will switch the size so the robot will move forward until it sees value greater than 75 and greather than 30. Again I will select these blocks, go to Tools-\u0026gt; MyBlock Builder This will be AlignPartTwo, finish. OK. So now I\u0026#39;ll put then on one thread and delete these threads.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eNow I will open the tool blocks and return them in their original condition like this. And I\u0026#39;ll do the same for AlignPartTwo. Ok now we have our alignment program ready. So I\u0026#39;ll download it and see the result. So now I will run the robot again from here and as you could see it is aligning much more precisely compared to the previous run. So basically it is a good way to align your robot perpendicular to a black line. You could download the whole EV3 project we have created in this tutorial under the material tab below this video. Keep in mind that you could also increase the power of the motors and by this earn some time while aligning faster to the black line but also when you have power of 10 you could align to really small black lines for example the border of the base of the field and this could be sometimes useful.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n"},"112":{"position":112,"title":"Rubber bands, gear wheels and motors attachment for solving FLL 2013 Truck and Ambulance (part 4)","description":"\u003cp\u003eIn the final video we explore how to trigger the release of the attachment with just a rubber band. The release is triggered with a gear wheel that rotates in a specific way. This saves speed, does not require additional LEGO Mindstorms motor and is precise enough for a competition. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eOne motor, three movements. This saves parts, time and efforts durring LEGO competitions like FIRST Lego League (FLL), World Robotics Olympiad (WRO) and others similar competitions. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003ePrevious videos:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cul\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/109-rubber-bands-gear-wheels-and-motors-for-solving-fll-2013-truck-and-ambulance-part-1\" style=\"color: rgb(46, 49, 171);margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;font-size: inherit;line-height: inherit;font-family: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\"\u003eRubber bands, gear wheels and motors for solving FLL 2013 Truck and Ambulance (part 1)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/110-rubber-bands-gear-wheels-and-motors-attachment-for-solving-fll-2013-truck-and-ambulance-part-2\" style=\"color: rgb(46, 49, 171);margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;font-size: inherit;line-height: inherit;font-family: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\"\u003eRubber bands, gear wheels and motors attachment for solving FLL 2013 Truck and Ambulance (part 2)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/111-rubber-bands-gear-wheels-and-motors-attachment-for-solving-fll-2013-truck-and-ambulance-part-3?playlist=16\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;font-size: inherit;line-height: inherit;font-family: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\" title=\"Rubber bands, gear wheels and motors attachment for solving FLL 2013 Truck and Ambulance (part 3) \"\u003eRubber bands, gear wheels and motors attachment for solving FLL 2013 Truck and Ambulance (part 3)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ul\u003e\r\n","tags":"Attachments,Rubber band,FLL 2013,EV3,FLL,Construction","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eAs an overview of the previous videos of the series we built an attachment that was taking the truck and the ambulance from the \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/resources/2\"\u003e\u0026quot;Nature\u0026#39;s Fury\u0026quot; 2013 competition\u003c/a\u003e, we had one motor on the robot and with this motor and with couple of \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/playlists/23\"\u003erubber bands\u003c/a\u003e we had two movements, we were catching the truck and the ambulance, and we were lifting them. These are the two movements with only one motor. Now \u003cstrong\u003ein this video we will explore how can we actually release the truck and the ambulance when we get them to the yellow region\u003c/strong\u003e.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eBecause the attachments for the truck and for the ambulance are quite similar\u0026nbsp;we had the same attachment on the left and on the right side. I\u0026#39;ll disassemble it and I\u0026#39;ll just work with one of the attachments.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eFor example the left side.\u0026nbsp;Remove this from here\u0026nbsp;аnd here we have the left side of the attachment. We add this to the robot.\u0026nbsp;And now it is working like this we start the motor\u0026nbsp;and it moves up the whole attachment or we can move it down.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003ePretty simple.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eNow let\u0026#39;s see how it works from this side. We have a gear wheel, right here, connected to a small gear wheel so we have two gear wheels and this is the driving one. It gets some power from the motor and it transfers it to the large gear wheel\u0026nbsp;аnd then we can lift the whole attachment. Because we are lifting and we\u0026#39;ve attached the attachment with only one pin, right here, we add some additional support. It\u0026#39;s a pin that supports right here. In this way there\u0026#39;s less bending when we lift the whole attachment.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eAgain.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWe start lifting the attachment or we can release it. Now when we have this mechanism with the levers here and the rubber band open, we reach the truck, we catch the truck, we lift the truck\u0026nbsp;like this. Now we must find a way to release this lever so we can release the truck.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eAs you can see here there is a small, very small, gear wheel a black gear wheel. Let me just get the camera closer.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eHere is the very small gear wheel, that\u0026#39;s actually doing the job and we have these parts here. When we continue lifting the moment when the small black gear wheel\u0026nbsp;touches this part here it will start rotating. And when it starts rotating it will also rotate the grey gear wheel. This one here. When we rotate it we will actually release the whole truck.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eLook at it.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eI\u0026#39;ll do this again\u0026nbsp;slower. Now let\u0026#39;s do this again. Of course because I have not programmed the robot, I\u0026#39;m just controlling it from the brick. I cannot control the power but if you have the program you can do the lifting and the release\u0026nbsp;very slowly.\u0026nbsp;Now, we\u0026#39;ve caught the truck and we start lifting the parts, like this. Very, very slowly.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eAgain. And now when the black gear wheel touches this part here, it will start rotating and when it rotates it will also rotate the gray gear wheel and It will rotate in one direction, then we\u0026#39;ll actually release the levers\u0026nbsp;like this.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eAs you saw, with a single motor and one rubber band, we did 3 movements. We caught the truck, then we lifted the truck and then we released the truck. \u003cstrong\u003eSo these are 3 movements with a single motor\u003c/strong\u003e. Now, there\u0026#39;s one interesting thing about this attachment, that make the whole magic. Let me just disassemble it.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eAs you can see there\u0026#39;s one more rubber band right here. It\u0026#39;s the white one. the purpose of this rubber band is the following.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWhen we have the attachment, we can see that the black gear wheel right here does not actually work with the grey gear wheel right here. So, as you can see they are in different position. Now, when we lift the truck there is some force because the truck is not very light, it\u0026#39;s quite heavy and all the part are bending. Like this. And the moment that the parts are bending is actually the moment when the two gear wheels start working together. Like this...\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eSo, now they are not...and now they start. So, we use actually the force of gravity to move the gear wheels to a position where they can work together and we need this rubber band to support the whole module here.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eFind \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/112-rubber-bands-gear-wheels-and-motors-attachment-for-solving-fll-2013-truck-and-ambulance-part-4#episode-materials\"\u003ethe instructions for building the 3 modules\u003c/a\u003e of our attachment below the video.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThese were the 3 modules. So, we have two parts of the attachment that are basically identical with the one that is transferring power.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWe welcome any comments if you have ideas for other videos or like us to build a lesson for other topic. Comment below the video and we\u0026#39;ll try to build one.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n"},"217":{"position":217,"title":"Arrays, Lines, Menus with WRO Elementary 2013. Introduction","description":"\u003cp\u003eWe are working on the World Robotics Olympiad (WRO) 2013 competition and its elementary part. The series will introduce three different concepts and this would be Arrays, Menus and Counting different lines. In the video you will see the robot working as it is in the final stage. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eThe robot starts from the green array and carries different blocks. The blocks should be placed in the corresponding region where the match should be done with the colors of the blocks and region. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eFirst task\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eBut the color of the regions is configured right before the competition. The challenge is actually that the robot should be smart enough to figure out how are the regions positioned as quickly as possible.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eSecond task \u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eNot that hard - just leave an object at a location\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eThird task\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eKind of like more difficult - return to the red region moving over the different obstacles.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"WRO 2013,Array,Menu,WRO,Construction,Programming","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003e- In this series of video tutorials we are working on the World Robotics Olympiad 2013 and we'll use this competition field as a way to work on three different concepts, first arrays and how do we work with arrays with the Lego Mindstorms EV3G software, then how do we program a menu. We need the menu to program the robot for this field and we are also counting different lines which should be familiar by now. And these are the three concepts that we are working on in this World Robotics Olympiad 2013 Elementary Challenge.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe rules of the competition are the following: the robot starts from this green area here and it carries these blocks. And we have two green blocks, two blue blocks, sorry but we didn't have the bars correctly, and we have one red block. And the idea is for the robot to move on the field in this region here and to drop each of the blocks in these three regions. So the red blocks should go in this red region, the blue blocks, these two, should go in the blue region and the green should go in this region. And when the robot starts, it has these five blocks here in the base. We add them on the robot and the challenge is that these three different sectors are configured before the competition so they could be changed. So the green could be placed here and the red could be placed here, and the blue here. So we don't know their arrangement before the start of the competition. So at the start of the competition we must somehow find a way to tell the robot, \"Okay, the first region is green, the next is blue, and the next is red. So this is the challenge. Then the robot moves after it drops these blocks. It moves and it must reach this black spot here. And on this black spot here we have this part, and we must push this part over the gray area, the gray area right here. And as a third mission for our robot, we have different parts on the field right here. And these different parts are just lego parts like this, so exactly like this. And they are positioned like this, nine of them. And each one consists of two of these parts and the robot must move over these part so it can also go around and arrive at this red region but it will receive fewer points. And these are the three challenges for our robot. Our strategy would be first, to accomplish this part of the field and to drop the blocks into the sectors, then we push the element to the gray area and then we return back to this red region here. And this is the competition. Let's start with the mission one by one and I'll introduce you to the robot and how do we program the robot for accomplishing the different missions.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe competition is an elementary challenge, an elementary competition so it's designed for smaller students and we have also designed a working robot that will be easier for smaller students and to get them to introduce them and to pass through this course. But it will also be very interesting for students that are more advanced. This here is the robot, it's an EV3 Lego Mindstorm robot and it consists actually of a base with four wheels and we have this mechanism here. It's designed to drop the different blocks. And we also have a light sensor here that we will use for counting the lines. Now in the EV3 Lego Mindstorm set we have only one color sensor and we could have solved the competition in many different ways but we decided to stick with one color sensor because there is one color sensor in the set. And that's why we are using only one color sensor. There will be no alignment to the lines, only counting the lines and if needed, probably following the lines. You can find the instructions for this robot below the video and we can now actually dive into the programming and construction of this robot.\u003c/p\u003e"},"96":{"position":96,"title":"Pinless attachment added below the robot","description":"\u003cp\u003ePinless attachments are smart and quick and could make a big differences between two robot constructions. In this video we are sharing a nice idea for a pinless attachment placed below the robot.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eIt is actually an extension for pinless attachments. One could place this or similar LEGO attachment on almost any \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/search/robot+construction\"\u003erobot construction\u003c/a\u003e, but this one is designed specifically for the \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/58-ev3-competition-robot-construction\"\u003eEV3 Competition Robot\u003c/a\u003e from video 58.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003ePlacing the robot above the construction is a very easy and fast way do to attachments. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eOther pinless attachments:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/64-quick-pinless-attachments-for-lego-ev3-competition-robots-part-2\" style=\"color: rgb(46, 49, 171);margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\"\u003eQuick Pinless Attachments for LEGO EV3 Competition Robots (Part 2)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/63-quick-pinless-attachments-for-competition-robots\" style=\"color: rgb(46, 49, 171);margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\"\u003eQuick Pinless Attachments for LEGO EV3 Competition Robots (Part 1)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Pinless,Attachments,FLL,Construction","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eIn a previous video we built a rubber band attachment that solves the 2012 Senior Solutions competition model. And in this video I'll like to further stop the attachment because it was a pin-less attachment built from five different parts. And we were attaching this attachment very easily to the robot without any pins, very fast. So I'd [inaudible] that was because we had some questions from some of you.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis here is the EV3 competition model from video 58. This here is the front of the robot. It has a motor. It's a very nice, stable construction. You can use it at the competition. And basic challenge for this and for every robot construction are actually the attachments that you build for solving different missions. Because the missions may vary from this, like oven, to loops, to taking different small elements. And a very successful robot is one where the attachments are very successful, are working correctly 100% of the time. And the other thing about each competition is that you're bounded on time. So you have a specific time and you're limited by this time. So it's very important to have attachments that you can place very easy on the robot without any hesitation, without any mistakes. Because if you make a mistake when placing the attachment it will cost you some seconds and that's not something that you want at the competition. First, you can build an attachment with pins, small black pins. And you can actually attach attachments with these pins. For example, like this and now I can attach something on these pins. But a more interesting solution is how to do this without the use of a pin. And in the EV3 set you have this part. If I add some elements to this part, you'll have a very interesting result. I place the attachment on the field. And after I place it, I just place the robot on top of the attachment. Like this. And now I can move around the field and solve different missions. And I could actually extend this attachment here with anything I like. So just-- it's just very easy and very straightforward. Just place the robot on top of the attachment. It's four seconds. And of course you can have different attachments here. For example this one. And just add this. And now we're at the competition, time is . . . and place the robot. And that's it. Very fast, very easy. Here it is again, the whole attachment.\u003c/p\u003e"},"157":{"position":157,"title":"EV3 basics course. Gyro Sensor. Mounting the sensor vertically (part 4)","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Gyro sensor can be positioned horizontally, vertically or at a random angle. Have you ever wonder what does the gyro detect when it is positioned vertically. This is the subject of this video tutorial for the LEGO Mindstorms EV3 Gyro Sensor.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003ePrevious video tutorials:\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003col\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/154-ev3-basics-course-gyro-sensor-turn-at-an-angle-part-1\"\u003eEV3 basics course. Gyro Sensor. Turn at an angle (part 1)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\r\n\t\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/155-ev3-basics-course-gyro-sensor-why-is-the-robot-turning-to-a-different-angle-part-2\"\u003eEV3 basics course. Gyro Sensor. Why is the robot turning to a different angle (part 2)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\r\n\t\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/156-ev3-basics-course-gyro-sensor-non-intuitive-but-logical-turn-back-part-3\"\u003eEV3 basics course. Gyro Sensor. Non-intuitive, but logical. Turn back (part 3)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ol\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Gyro Sensor,Sensors,Basic,Programming","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003ePreviously we did a program that turns the robot to 90 degrees and then returns back the robot. Now an interesting question here is what will happen if we remove the sensor from here and place the sensor like this. It's not horizontal, but vertical. Would the program work, what would be the value returned from the gyro sensor? Let's check out the program.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eSame program as before only this time the sensor is positioned vertically. I'll run the program.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe robot does not stop, I'll stop the program and we see that there is a completely different value returned from the sensor. It returns 19 degrees. Although the whole motor is turning the gyro sensor detects that it's turning on 19 degrees. Why does this happen with the sensor? Let's run the program again.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe motor turns, make a few rotations but the sensor is detecting an angle that's increasing very slowly.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis time only to 40 degrees angle. Let's see the construction. What actually happens here is that when the sensor detects an angle of turning in a plane. There's quite some mathematics here in the sensor going on. Without entering into much detail. When we have the sensor perfectly aligned horizontally and we turn it, it will give us the degree of turning. But if we have the sensor perfectly vertically, like this and we just turn the sensor there's is no turning in the direction of the sensor. So we are turning vertically, but we are not turning in this direction and that's why we are returning 0. We have no turning and that's very tricky with this sensor. When you want to work with this sensor you must have 2 conditions. First, you must either place this sensor perfectly horizontally or perfectly vertically. In our case you see that while we are turning the robot, the sensor returns some values of 14, 40, so it's a slightly increasing value. That's because our whole construction is not perfectly horizontal and the sensor is not perfectly vertical. We must lift the construction like this for about a millimeter or something so that we have the sensor perfectly vertical and if you have it that way it won't detect any turning in the direction the sensor detects turning. So it detects turning in this plane not in this one. That's very tricky for the sensor. Have this in mind when you are using you sensor on you robots. If you want to have some precise turning with the gyro sensor.\u003c/p\u003e"},"309":{"position":309,"title":"Arduino Basic Course. Constructing your first blinking diode device","description":"\u003cp\u003eYou have the controller, you have the diode. The controller has a number of pins (holes). Where should you put the diode so that it starts blinking? \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe small holes on the controller are called pins. On our controller we have 32 pins. The more pins that you have, the more elements you can controller with this microcontroller. For this video the interesting pins and 13 and GND\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eHow does the diode blink\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIn a very simplified view - there is current flowing in the system and this current flows from pin 13 to the GND. The current is \"small charged particles called electrons\". We need the current to flow through the diode. The particles must move through the diode.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThis light emitting diode has two special features:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003col\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eIt allows the current to flow in only one direction\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eIt emits light when the current is flowing\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ol\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe diode has two legs. The constructors of the diod have decided to make on of the legs longer. In this way they are telling us how should the current flow in the system. How should the small particles move. The they should move from the longer to the shorter leg. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe longer leg should be added on PIN 13 and the shorter leg on PIN GND\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Arduino,Diode,Programming","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eThis here is the Arduino controller. It has a number of pins. This here is the diode. It has two legs. Question is: Where should we put this diode so that it starts blinking?\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe small holes on the controller are called pins. We have an overall of 32 pins. Generally speaking, the more pins your controller has, the more elements you can control with it. There are two pins that are interesting for us for this video. The first pin is the Ground pin. Right here. It is located right here and it has G and D marked on it. The next pin is the pin with number 13. You can see it here. And for the video you should use exactly this pin. The pin with number 13. The current that will make the diode emit light because this is a light emitting diode and current flows through this diode and it emits light the current will flow from pin 13 to the ground. Now, to make the diode emit light we need to have current flowing through it. This diode is a special element with two main features. It emits light when current is flowing through it and it allows the current to flow in only one direction. To know the direction in which the current should flow the constructors of this diode have decided to make one of the legs shorter than the other. You can see it here. The current will flow from the longer leg to the shorter leg. And that's why we should add the longer leg to pin 13. And the shorter leg to pin Ground. Because the current will flow from pin 13 to the ground. Now, I know that this is a very very simplified view on how an electrical circuit works. Remember that the shorter leg of the diode should be attached to the ground. Like this.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eYou might wonder why is the diode not blinking now. This is because we have not written the program and we'll write the program in the next step.\u003c/p\u003e"},"960":{"position":960,"title":"Introduction","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"","subtitles":null},"145":{"position":145,"title":"EV3 basics course. Ultrasonic Sensor. Follow an object (part4)","description":"\u003cp\u003eFollow an object using the LEGO Mindstorms Ultrasonic Sensor. Object moves away, the robot moves with the object. The program is very useful if you are doing STEM classes and you want to demonstrate results. People react very well to a robot following you like a dog for example. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003ePrevious video tutorials:\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cul\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\r\n\t\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/142-ev3-basics-course-ultrasonic-sensor-detect-object-part1\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\" title=\"EV3 basics course. Ultrasonic Sensor. Detect object (part1)\"\u003eEV3 basics course. Ultrasonic Sensor. Detect object (part1)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\r\n\t\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/143-ev3-basics-course-ultrasonic-sensor-move-after-object-is-removed-part2\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\" title=\"EV3 basics course. Ultrasonic Sensor. Move after object is removed (part2)\"\u003eEV3 basics course. Ultrasonic Sensor. Move after object is removed (part2)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\r\n\t\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/144-ev3-basics-course-ultrasonic-sensor-stop-move-part3\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\" title=\"EV3 basics course. Ultrasonic Sensor. Stop \u0026amp; Move (part3)\"\u003eEV3 basics course. Ultrasonic Sensor. Stop \u0026amp; Move (part3)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ul\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Ultrasonic Sensor,Basic,Programming","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eThe next program with our ultrasonic sensor is to make the robot follow my hand. Аs I move my hand away from the robot, I would like the robot to follow it and to keep at a distance of about 4 inches, like this.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eDownload, run the program.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNow I move my hand and the robot moves forward. The only thing that we should add to this program is that when I move my hand the robot should move at exactly the same distance, so it should keep 10 cm.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eMove, stop and move my hand and it continues moving. How can we make this process repeatable, moving and keeping distance of 10 cm? Since we want this whole process of moving forward, stopping and moving forward to repeat we need to use a loop.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhat we want to repeat are the following blocks. First moving forward, waiting until we see an object, stopping and then waiting until the object moves away and when the object moves away we return to the beginning of the loop and we'll move the motor forward until we detect an object and when the object moves away we start again and move forward for undefined amount of time. This way we'll get our robot to follow the object in this case my hand. Let's see if the program works correctly.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe robot moves forward, reaches my hand, I move my hand and the robot moves with the hand.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhat you can see is that we have this not very smooth movement of the motors. How can we improve this? What we want to change in our program is the Tank block with the stop option. We want to change it so it does not break when stopping but to coast, so it's stopping very slowly not immediately and this will probably make following the object a little smoother. Let's see if this works.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eI'll stop the program now. Let's run it again and what happens. We move with the robot forward until it sees my hand\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003ebut it does not stop.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt moves it's smother but there is a glitch and the glitch happens if the sensor is very near to my hand. Now is following, it's very smooth but if my hand is very near to the sensor, like this, the robot won't stop.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eSo we have the program for following my hand but as we have the coast option it is possible if the object moves very slowly we actually touch the object and when we are touching the sensor is not able to detect any distance to the object and it's not working as expected. It might return a maximum distance or it might return 0 but if the object touches the sensor, the sensor is not returning correct values. As a result from this video we have a program for following an object that is moving.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIn the next video we'll set few tasks that you can implement for the ultrasonic sensor so that you can learn more about it.\u003c/p\u003e"},"416":{"position":416,"title":"Spin turn with LEGO Mindstorms robots","description":"\u003cp\u003eA spin turn is a turn around the center of the robot. Let's learn how to program it.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eDefinition\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eA spin turn is a turn around the center of the robot. \u003cstrong\u003eBoth motors\u003c/strong\u003e are turning but in two different directions. You may hear us saying that the robot \u003cstrong\u003eturns \u003c/strong\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eas\u003c/strong\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e a Tank\u003c/strong\u003e.\u003cbr\u003e\r\n \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eIn the Software\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIn the Actions palette, choose the Move tank block. The first power setting corresponds to the power of motor B and the second power setting corresponds to the power of motor C.\u003cbr\u003e\r\n \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eEqual speed, different directions\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIn order to make a spin turn, you must set \u003cstrong\u003etwo equal values\u003c/strong\u003e for power and make one of them \u003cstrong\u003enegative\u003c/strong\u003e. For example, use 20 and -20. This will make the motors move at equal speed and in different directions.\u003cbr\u003e\r\n \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eMaking exact right turns\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eYou must \u003cstrong\u003eexperiment\u003c/strong\u003e with the number of rotations a few times in order make a 90-degree turn with the robot.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Classes with students","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eA spin turn is a turn at place like this.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIn this video we'll look how do we program the robot to do a spin turn.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIn the software we go to the actions palette. And we take the move tank block. In the move tank block we set the number of rotations to 1 and then we have the power options, we have the power to the left motor and this is motor B and the power to the right motor and this is motor C. If we just set the power to the left motor\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eto -20 and the power to the right motor to 20, this means that the left motor will move backward while the right motor will move forward. And we'll have our robot spinning. It'll stay in place but the two wheels will move in different directions and this will make our robot spin.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWe have our robot spinning and this wheel is doing one rotation forward while the other wheel is doing one rotation backward. And when both wheels are moving the whole robot stays in place. Again. From here it's just a matter of finding the right value so that we can have our robot turn around. But this will be for some of the next videos.\u003c/p\u003e"},"762":{"position":762,"title":"Programming and theory","description":"\u003cp\u003eIn the next lessons we will recall how to follow a line and you will learn some new ways of following a line. But today we will start with a new block which will help us along the process.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eLet’s first recall how to follow a line. The robot should turn to one direction until it detects black and then to the opposite direction until it detects white. In this case, you should constantly rotate the large motor and, depending on the color, you should rotate the medium motor to one or the other direction, as in the program below:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/187/content/line_follow_idea.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWhen the robot is on \u003cb\u003eWhite, rotate the motor 30 degrees\u003c/b\u003e, and when on \u003cb\u003eBlack – -30 degrees\u003c/b\u003e. The problem is that you should rotate the motor a different amount of degrees depending on the situation, as in the table below:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/219/content/table1_english.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWhen the sensor detects white, the motor will rotate either 0, 30 or 60 degrees. To calculate the degrees of the rotation, you should know the current location of the motor. You can use the following block to do that:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cdiv class=\"ckeditor-html5-video\" data-responsive=\"true\" style=\"text-align: center;\"\u003e\r\n\u003cvideo controls=\"controls\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/attachment_files/data/000/000/189/original/motor_rotation.webm\" style=\"height: auto;\" width=\"100%\"\u003e \u003c/video\u003e\r\n\u003c/div\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThis block measures the degrees to which the motor is currently rotated. To display this information on the screen, you should develop the following program:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/190/content/display_rotations.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Classes with students","subtitles":null},"81":{"position":81,"title":"Two rear motors on BigDaddy Competition Construction Robot (Part 10)","description":"\u003cp\u003eBased on a request we are showing the robot construction with two rear motors instead of a differential. In this way, as a construction, it is closer to more students, but much more challеnging for programing. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eThe two rear motors VS the differential\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eMany \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/search/robot+construction\"\u003eLEGO Mindstorms robot constructions\u003c/a\u003e use two rear wheels controlled by two different motors. Students are used to this kind of construction. The differential is a little bit more abstract and difficult to understand and use properly. Based on a request we have decided in this video tutorial to show the Big Daddy construction implemented with two rear motors and one front motor. Programming this construction would be challеnging so we have prepared a challеnge (see the task).\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"big_daddy_two_rear_motor.jpg\" src=\"http://media.fllcasts.com/assets/episodes/notes/081/big_daddy_two_rear_motor.jpg\" style=\"height:505px;width:600px;\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"Big Daddy Competition Robot with two Rear Motors\" src=\"http://media.fllcasts.com/assets/episodes/notes/081/big_daddy_two_rear_motor2.jpg\" style=\"height:443px;width:600px;\"\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eOther episodes from the series:\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/70-bigdady-competition-robot-part-1\" style=\"color: rgb(46, 49, 171);margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;text-decoration: none;\"\u003eConstructing BigDaddy Competition Robot (Part 1 - Front)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/71-bigdady-competition-robot-front-part-2\" style=\"color: rgb(46, 49, 171);margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;text-decoration: none;\"\u003eConstructing BigDaddy Competition Robot (Part 2 - Front)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/72-bigdady-competition-robot-rear-part-3-front-to-rear\" style=\"color: rgb(46, 49, 171);margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;text-decoration: none;\"\u003eConstructing BigDaddy Competition Robot (Part 3 - Front to Rear)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/73-bigdaddy-competition-robot-part-4-complex-transfer-of-power\" style=\"color: rgb(46, 49, 171);margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;text-decoration: none;\"\u003eBigDaddy Competition Robot (Part 4 - Complex Transfer of Power in a Triangle)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/74-bigdaddy-competition-robot-part-5-power-to-rear-wheels\" style=\"color: rgb(46, 49, 171);margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;text-decoration: none;\"\u003eBigDaddy Competition Robot (Part 5 - Power to Rear Wheels)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/76-positioning-motors-on-bigdaddy-competition-robot-part-6\" style=\"color: rgb(46, 49, 171);margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;text-decoration: none;\"\u003ePositioning motors on BigDaddy Competition Robot (Part 6)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/77-positioning-motors-on-bigdaddy-competition-robot-second-try-part-7\" style=\"color: rgb(46, 49, 171);margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;text-decoration: none;\"\u003ePositioning motors on BigDaddy Competition Robot - Second try (Part 7)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/79-correct-position-of-motors-on-bigdaddy-competition-robot-part-8\" style=\"color: rgb(46, 49, 171);margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;text-decoration: none;\"\u003eCorrect position of motors on BigDaddy Competition Robot (Part 8)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/80-differential-lock-on-bigdaddy-competition-robot-part-9\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;\"\u003eDifferential Lock on BigDaddy Competition Robot (Part 9)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n","tags":"Motors,EV3,Advanced,Construction","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003e- Based on your comments, we\u0026#39;ve decided to do an experiment on our \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/70-bigdady-competition-robot-part-1\"\u003eBigDaddy construction\u003c/a\u003e and to try to add two motors at the rear part that will transfer power to each of the wheels, and one motor at the front that will turn the front part of the robot. In today\u0026#39;s video, we\u0026#39;re going to construct the robot and see how it works. First, I\u0026#39;ll start with two EV3 motors that we\u0026#39;ll \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/search/attachments\"\u003eattached\u003c/a\u003e to the wheels. And wheels, again the large wheels from the EV3 sets. Let\u0026#39;s attach the first wheel. The second one. The challenge here with such large \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/search/robot+construction\"\u003econstructions\u003c/a\u003e is how to have the same distance between the rear wheels as in the front wheels like here. So, we must find the way to position them and to have the same distance. We\u0026#39;ll add this grey frames. Now add one grey frames-, grey frame at the back with the blue pin here. And now we have the two wheels attached to the motors. And if we measure distance, we can see that distance between the front wheels is the same as the distance between the rear wheels. But this construction is not very stable because we have the \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/search/attachments\"\u003emotors attached\u003c/a\u003e only one place. And as you can see it\u0026#39;s quite fragile. And again, we add a second frame to the other side of the motors. And now we have a much more \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/search/robot+construction\"\u003estable construction\u003c/a\u003e. This is how the construction will look at the end. You\u0026#39;ll have the front of the robot and the rear part of the robot with the motors. In the next step, I\u0026#39;ve already prepared the frame around the wheels. You can find the instructions for the frame below the video. I\u0026#39;m not going to construct it, the whole frame. But as an end result, we must add the frame around the wheels. And this way we can use the frame to align, to attach \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/search/attachments\"\u003eattachment\u003c/a\u003e, to protect sensors and the other interesting things we\u0026#39;re talking. And now we have the frame. The frame is attached only on two parts, two sides. Here on one axle and here on the other axle. And as you can see it is moving. As a next step, we must attach the frame to the motors and make it stable.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThank you Komolov Pavlo who came up with a number of solutions. But we like always the solutions that use as few parts as possible. And we\u0026#39;ve done this module that we attach to the frame. Here on the right frame and then to here. And now we\u0026#39;ll just click and the frame is attached. Again the frame is attached only one part of the motors and we must also attach the frame to the other parts to make more stable. This is the module that we\u0026#39;re using. It\u0026#39;s not very complex. It\u0026#39;s again, angled beams, some pins. We add this angled beams to the frame.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eAnd now we attach them. It is always a good practice to have all of your models in a way that you can attach them and detach them very easily, separately. And to fix the whole construction, we just add this pin. Here it is. A very nice, good looking, stable construction with two motors. Each motor is attached to a wheel. And this whole rear part of the robot will be used. And we\u0026#39;ll attach it to the front of the robot and let\u0026#39;s see what happens. In order to attach the rear part to the front part, we\u0026#39;re starting with this front part of our BigDaddy construction. And you can find the construction below. It\u0026#39;s a-, it\u0026#39;s a front part that we\u0026#39;ve already done in a previous episode. Again, find the link below the video. And we continue with adding a simple frame. Here it is. With these grey frames, we just add them to the front part. Now we lock the other frame and we add to the back of the robot. Here our construction is looking quite nice. It\u0026#39;s not very stable. But we improve this. The next step of our construction is to add the brick. Here\u0026#39;s the brick. And a nice place for the brick\u0026#39;s probably here. Of course we can place it in other ways. But let\u0026#39;s not forget that we must also have a motor at the front that will turn the robot. So let\u0026#39;s add first the brick. In order to add the brick, we must somehow attach to the motors and the frames. For the motors, we are using these parts. And for the frame, we add a part here. Let\u0026#39;s try this. One and second. And here we have the brick on our robot. As a final step, this is how the middle motor will be used We have a small pin and we\u0026#39;ll attach it\u0026#39;s not even a pin, sorry. It\u0026#39;s a two-hole axles. It\u0026#39;s an axle with two lengths. And we\u0026#39;ll attach this motor at the front of the robot. Right here we have the axle for turning the wheels. And if we attach the motor...\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWe have our motor at the front and we can transport power to this motor from the brick and will turn the front part of the robot. And we have the rear part of the robot with two EV3 motors. Each motor is attached to a wheel. And the whole construction is much more stable. And it\u0026#39;s kinda interesting. Now something that\u0026#39;s . . .while experimenting with this robot, we found out that it\u0026#39;s a-, it\u0026#39;s quite easy to detach the whole construction and we\u0026#39;ve decided to do a little hack. And you might see these hacks in different situations. Especially when you have such robots that you\u0026#39;re experimenting. But let\u0026#39;s just know that our hack is just two pins and the one small pin. And they should be attach to the really difficult place right here between the motors in order to improve the stability and to be difficult for the motor to break. And we didn\u0026#39;t, so it\u0026#39;s . . .initially. But after a few experiments we saw that this part is actually needed. You will find it in the constructions. And let\u0026#39;s try to add it. This is the part. Right-, right here. See? And as a result, we have our BigDaddy construction with the two motors and very modular construction. We can deconstruct and construct it in different ways. In the next video we will probably continue with how we program this robot and we\u0026#39;ll think of some very interesting tasks for you on how do you experiment with this robot.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n"},"274":{"position":274,"title":"Pinless attachments. FIRST LEGO League Trash Trek 2015. ","description":"\u003cp\u003eIn this video we discuss part of the pinless attachments build by the ELM team. Without pinless attachment it is nearly impossible to achieve a good score at the FIRST LEGO League competition. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eFIRST LEGO League Trash Trek 2015\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eLearn more about the competition by visiting our \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/resources/8\"\u003eFLL 2015 resource page\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003ePinless attachments\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eFind more resources on builing pinless attachments in the following playlists and videos:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/playlists/6\"\u003eQuick Pinless Attachments for LEGO Mindstorms Competition Robots\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/playlists/34\"\u003eRubber bands pinless attachments\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eMusic by\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eAmobacrew, https://soundcloud.com/amoebacrew\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"FLL 2015,EV3,Attachments,FLL","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eThe first thing that is worth mentioning is that when the ELM team uses the different attachments they try to build them in a pinless way. So that the attachments could be added to the robot without the use of any pins. So let's first take a look at this.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNow this here is the base of the robot and in front of the base we have different holes. And on these holes we can add different attachments and our motor is right here. You can see it below so we need an axle from the motor so that we can control the different attachments. The way in which we do this and this here is the attachment of the team and it's pretty large attachment and it does a lot of things. But the interesting about the pinless way is that they have these four axles here. One, two, three and four. And they also have these pins here but these are pins that are with axles at the end. The way they add this attachment is the following: they just take it and they add the attachment to the robot. So it's quite fast and there are no pins involved. And you can also remove it very easy. Again, just place on the robot and add. And we have the attachment. Now the robot can move and it can solve different missions with this attachment. The second thing about this attachment is that when we have added it in a pinless way again very fast , like this, we must somehow connect the motor to all the gears that are inside of the attachment. And for this we have the axle that is right here. So, it's right here where we have an axle. We just need to push with hand this axle so that it moves to the other one. Like this. This connects the whole attachment to the motor. In this way just place and then push this axle we connect the attachment to our robot. Let's also see how the team does this and how they add the attachment to the robot.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNow if you have other attachments from your robot that are also pinless, please feel free to share them with us and the whole FLL Casts community below in the comment section. In the materials section we'll upload some pictures of this attachment so that you'll know more of the pinless way of attaching. Again, like this.\u003c/p\u003e"},"409":{"position":409,"title":"EV3 Phi. Teacher's note - Break at the End option in EV3-G for Mindstorms move block","description":"\u003cp\u003eLet's cover the break at end option and learn why there is no lesson about it to students.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eExplanation of the setting\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe last setting is \"Break at end\". The default is True and it means that the controller will try its best to keep the motor at place.\u003cbr\u003e\r\nThe controller is sending current to the motor in order to keep it at place. The controller is applying electrical break to the motor.\u003cbr\u003e\r\nEven if we apply enough power to turn the motor by hand, it will return to its initial position.\u003cbr\u003e\r\n \u003cbr\u003e\r\nWhen set to false, no such behavior is present - the motor can freely rotate and the robot slowly coasts to a resting position.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\r\nThere is no lesson about this for students\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWith small, lightweight robots, the effects of \"break at end false\" are barely visible. So we just share that knowledge with you as a teacher.\u003cbr\u003e\r\nWhen the time is right, you can demonstrate it to your students.\u003cbr\u003e\r\nLet us know about that moment in the comments section of either this video in comments of the video that you needed to add \"break at end\" explanation.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Teacher's Note,EV3,Classes with students","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eA note for the teacher for the Brake at the end option. And on every motor block that you have in the EV3 software there is an option in the end that's called 'Brake at the end'. It might be true or false. In this teacher note I'd like just to stop briefly on this option and tell you how to use it.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe option is right here at the end of the block. Brake at end. And it could be true of false. And by default it's true. What I'd like to do is to implement a simple program where I'll just move for one rotation and brake at the end then I'll wait for like\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e3 seconds and then I'll move again\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003ethis time with brake set to false. And I hope I could show you the difference of how the robot behaves.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThere is a really really small barely visible difference between using the brake at end and brake at end: false. Again, I'll start the program. First, it will brake at the end then I'll just move it and you see that at the end it just continues moving forward. The reason is that when you have brake at the end the motor is exerting some force on the wheel and this force makes the whole wheel stop. So, there is some current flowing in the motor that makes the wheel stop. This is if you have the brake at end: true. If you have the brake at end: false, what happens is that the brick just cuts the power of the motor, stops the current from the motor and the wheel will continue forward with the inertia that the robot has gained. We've thought about different ways to explain this to the students but the whole challenge with this is that at this stage with these small robots it is very difficult to develop a real visible example where students could see this difference and they could see it at a large magnitude. So, not just a few millimeters as a difference. That's why we are honest with you. We don't have an example for brake at the end and for coast for the students and we can't show them the inertia that the robot can have because the robots are quite small. That's we are telling it just to you. Again, I'll develop another program that will help you understand it further how the brake at end and how the brake at end: true and how the brake at end: false work.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eUsing the previous program for the wait block I'll just set a value of 5 or even 10.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd I'll download and run the program.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe robot is currently waiting and if I try to move the wheel with a hand you can see that it's difficult to move it with a hand. Because there is some force from the motor to the wheel that prevents the whole wheel from moving. Again. If the option is brake at end: true, the motor will try to brake and it will try not to move forward. You can't move forward. If you are using the brake at end: false, then at the end of the block you'll be able to just freely move the wheel like this.\u003c/p\u003e"},"98":{"position":98,"title":"How to use Hi Technic Color Sensor in EV3 Software","description":"\u003cp\u003eBased on a request from Abdulah we decided to build a tutorial on how to use Hi Technic Color Sensor and EV3-G Software. There is a special block imported in the software that helps you use the sensor.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eHi Technic Color Sensor was mainly used with NXT version of LEGO Mindstorms robots. The sensor was quite powerful with a number of modes in which it could work. As the EV3-G version of Mindstorms became available a special block was builded. The block could be downloaded from the Hi Technic site.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIn the video we are exploring a simple line following with the sensors.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eNote: As of building the video we do not have the sensor. It seems to be out of stock. So we have not actually tested the program, but it is following a working algorithm and should work :)\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Light and Color Sensor,Programming","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003e- Last week we got the question, \"How can we use the HiTechnic Color sensor in the EV3 software?\" We found out that there is a block for this, and today we are exploring how can we work with this block. First, you have to download the HiTechnic EV3 Color sensor block. You can do this from the HiTechnic site. Go to Downloads, and from Downloads, you choose Mindstorms EV3 Programming Blocks. And from there, at the bottom, you see the HiTechnic EV3 Color sensor block. Now you download this. It's a ZIP. And you save it, for example, somewhere on your computer. Then you open the EV3 software, and you go to Tools, Block Import Wizard. Now, I've already imported this block in my software, but if this is your first time, you'll click Browse. You find the the folder where you extracted the ZIP file. And in this folder you see a file called HT Color EV3 B from Block. You select it, Open, Import, and on your side here at this step, it will just import in my case. Because the block is already existing, it says that it has to override it. I don't want to override the block. And then you restart the software. After you restart the software, you have one new block in your sensors section. This is the HiTechnic Color block. Now the question that we received is, \"How do you follow a line with this sensor?\" As you can see, this sensor can measure color. It can measure an RGB value. It can measure a raw value. And one of the very, very, very simple ways to follow a line is to follow a line by moving the motor two states. It is a simple program that goes like this. In the loop, we measure with the color sensor, the color that the sensor detects. If the color is black, we move one of the motors for an unlimited amount; for example, Motor D. And if the sensor detects white, another color, we move another motor; for example, Motor C. This is, of course, if we have Motor D and C as primary motors. One more modification here, everything we switch from black to white and from white to black, we switch the motors. So when we are over black, we have Motor D moving. When we are over white, we have Motor C moving. And we must also stop the opposite motor in the opposite case. So here, we stop Motor C. We turn off Motor C. And here, we turn off Motor D. Again, this here is the color sensor. It is not the HiTechnic Color sensor; it is the standard EV3 color sensor. And when it detects black, we stop Motor C and we start Motor D. When it detects white, we stop Motor D and we start Motor C, and you get this zig-zag movement, most of the people working with Mindstorms are very familiar because this is the simplest way to follow a line. You have two states, only two states, and in these two states, you switch between the states and you move from left to right and you actually follow the border between the line and the field. Now the question is, \"How do we do this with the HiTechnic sensor?\" Unfortunately, we don't have a HiTechnic sensor currently, so we cannot experiment with this. That's why we are only guessing on how it should work, and I welcome any comments on whether this program actually works when you download it to your software, to your . We follow the same principle. So, the color sensor, again, returns a color, and it's a number. So, as you can see, the HiTechnic Color sensor, it can measure color and it returns a number. And this number, if I assume that for black we have, let's say, 10, or for white, we have 20, or 1 or 2, and we have different numbers for the different colors. I don't know what are the numbers for the different colors, but I'm sure that for different colors, we get different numbers, which is basically the case here, different colors black, different color white. Now if we make this switch not dependent on the color sensor but on number, we can just implement the with the HiTechnic sensor as we take an input from the HiTechnic Color sensor. And then, if the HiTechnic Color sensor returns one, let's say that this is black, we again stop Motor C, start Motor D. If it returns white, which is let's say 6, we stop Motor D, we start Motor C. And this is I assume, again we don't have the sensor so that we can test it, I welcome any comments if you can test it and say whether it works, but this is a very, very simple way to follow a line with the HiTechnic Color sensor in the EV3 software. There are also other ways, which we will probably explore when we are able to have this sensor with us so that we can experiment this, but we also can measure an RGB, we can measure , which would probably give us more details on what exactly is the color underneath the sensor. And we'll probably have a smoother [[00;7:21]]. Again, you can find this program below in the materials.\u003c/p\u003e"},"593":{"position":593,"title":"Teacher Notes: one challenge per lesson","description":"\u003cp\u003eWe follow the teaching approach of \u003cstrong\u003eone big task\u003c/strong\u003e that sets the topic of the lesson and we work on that task only. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eOne meaningful challenge\u003c/strong\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThere are a few possible ways to teach learning material. You can use a lot of smaller tasks which show various techniques and principles or to use one big task which unites them all.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe big task allows students to get a broader idea about the application of the learning material while solving smaller tasks makes the application impractical.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFocusing on students and material understanding\u003c/strong\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eTry not to solve the big task too quickly. Very often, as a result of their great enthusiasm, teachers tend to actually offer the solution to their students. In such cases the group may cover all tasks in just 30 minutes. Then, you should ask yourselves the following questions:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cul\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eCan students \u003cstrong\u003efind on their own\u003c/strong\u003e their next task and work with the e-learning system (this website)? Or I tell students what their next task is and what is expected from them?\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDo my students ask questions\u003c/strong\u003e when they encounter difficulties or I help them in advance?\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eWhen I help, do I give students instructions on how to solve the problem or \u003cstrong\u003eI ask guiding questions \u003c/strong\u003e and discuss the issue with the student/students?\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ul\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eYou can help in urgent situations\u003c/strong\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eOf course, there are cases when it is important to directly intervene and help your students. It is important that you do that consciously and only when necessary.\u003cbr\u003e\r\nSuch an example is the end of the lesson when you want your students to have a finished project and \u003cstrong\u003eleave the class satisfied\u003c/strong\u003e.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Teacher's Note,Classes with students","subtitles":null},"733":{"position":733,"title":"Mount and un-mount Raspberry SD Card with Mac OS","description":"\u003cp\u003eHere is the process of mounting and unmounting the SD Card if you are using Mac OS\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"","tags":"Learn At Home,Basic,Classes with students,Programming","subtitles":null},"249":{"position":249,"title":"General Programming of the Game. Robotics Game of Life. ","description":"\u003cp\u003eIn the current course we would use a number of languages. Generally we would program the robots in EV3-G, but we would also program them in JavaScript to make the parallel with the JavaScript. The programming would include arrays, switches and loops.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eIt is kind of obvious that for serious play of game of life we would need a computer to compute the next generation and the next and the next and even reach thousands of generations.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eFor this we would need three things:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cul\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eswitch - check if a given cell is alive or dead using a switch/if statement. Based on the result we would know how to compute the neighbour cells.\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eloop - do this thing 8 times for each given cell. So we need to do the same thing over and over again which happens in a loop. The same operation - again and again.\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003earrays - this would be the most difficult part. The computer has to store the value for the different cells in a given way. What we could use is an array. Array could be of many dimensions which could make them pretty complex, but we would try to keep the complexity to a minimum.\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003estate machine - we would use this pattern to make the programming of the robot more understandable and easy.\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ul\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Programming","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eLet's talk for a moment about programming the Robotics Game of Life and for this we'll use a different programming language and as you can see by not using a computer it will be pretty difficult to compute the next generation.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eComputers are really good at doing the same task over and over again and doing it in a very efficient way. So let's discuss how are we going to build a program, that would solve the Robotics Game of Life.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThere are couple of things that we need in our programs in order to solve the Robotics Game of Life. First, we'll need some kind of a check and this is also known as a switch or if statement and because we looked at the field and we need a way to check is this cell alive or dead and for this we need a switch or an if. This is something we must know how to use. Then we must also do this for the other cells. So we need to do this for let's say 16 different cells, or a thousand or million different cells and this means doing the same thing over and over again. And for this we'll need a loop. This is another programming abstraction that we'll need to use. Then because we build a program, it needs to store some of the values we need to use arrays and I can assume that some of you are not familiar with arrays, so don't be discouraged with this, we'll get to work with them and we'll introduce you to arrays and also we have couple of videos that also introduce you to arrays. And we'll have most of the programs already ready, so you can just look at them and learn how to read them, instead of programming them from scratch and one last thing that we'll use is something that we called a state machine. And this is the way that we'd like to program our robots. Using a state machine.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWe'll do this first in the EV3-G language then we'll also do it in JavaScript\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eand we are also thinking about other languages. For the EV3-G we'll have a program that solves the Robotics Game of Life on the screen and we'll also have a program that directly moves the robot on the field. So this is what we need to know and this is what we'll introduce you to in this course. Switch, loops, arrays and state machines. This is the general way we are going to program this Robotics Game of Life. The way we program our robot using switch, loop, array and state machines and the general algorithm for solving the Robotics Game of Life is the following, we have the grid and in it we would like to know if a given cell, let's say this one here should be alive in the next generation or not. And what we should do is actually find all the neighbors of this cell and the neighbors are these are the direct neighbors of our cell. And then we must count how many of them are alive and how many of them are dead. So we just move and we count. We count his one it dead, then we count this one it's alive, then we count this one, and all the others. So that's the that we program the robot, we can also count in the other way, we can count by rows.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd for those of you that already used arrays in other programs, we'll use a loop and a loop inside to do this and for the others we'll just provide the programs ready and as you have the programs already implemented you can just customize them and look at them and learn from them and in this way this will be both for intermediate students and beginners and for the beginners you can just look at the programs and try to customize them and if you consider yourself intermediate or even advanced, you can try to implement the programs from scratch. If you can't implement them from scratch you can just look a the solutions, that you have already provided. Again, the general way that we program and it's a general algorithm for Robotics Game of Life is just look at the neighbors of a cell, count how many of the cells are alive and then calculate if the given cell should be alive at the next generation or not.\u003c/p\u003e"},"944":{"position":944,"title":"More about ultrasonic soundwaves","description":"","long_description":"\u003cp id=\"yui_3_17_2_2_1534515007940_505\"\u003eAs the name indicates, ultrasonic sensors measure distance by using \u003cstrong\u003eultrasonic waves\u003c/strong\u003e. One of the “eyes” on the sensor head is the transmitter and emits an ultrasonic wave and the other “eye” is the receiver which receives the wave reflected back from the target. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp id=\"yui_3_17_2_2_1534515007940_489\"\u003eUltrasonic sensors measure the distance to the target by \u003cstrong\u003emeasuring the time\u003c/strong\u003e between the emission and reception.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp id=\"yui_3_17_2_2_1534515007940_508\"\u003eHow does this happen? The robot emits an ultrasonic wave with a \u003cstrong\u003econstant \u003c/strong\u003espeed and uses the Distance-Speed-Time formula that distance is speed multiplied by time (\u003ci\u003eS=V.t\u003c/i\u003e). As speed is constant, it is known to the robot. By measuring the time between the emission and reception, the robot finds distance. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp id=\"yui_3_17_2_2_1534509306693_490\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eUltrasonic waves\u003c/strong\u003e have high frequency – much larger than the frequency human beings can detect.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-resposive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/447/content/us-spectre.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eUltrasound is used in medicine and industry.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIn medicine ultrasound is used to visualize soft tissue and muscles and thus visualize organs of the body.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIn industry ultrasound is used to locate various defects and flaws in production.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/448/content/US-analysis.gif\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWhen ultrasonic waves are sent to a product, its solid parts reflect them while hollow ones diffract them which makes it easy to locate holes and cracks in concrete, for example.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Learn At Home,STEM,Ultrasonic Sensor,Physics,Basic,Classes with students","subtitles":null},"1004":{"position":1004,"title":"The idea behind the free construction","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis time there is no instruction to follow for the students when building their robot. In most cases, this will prove to be hard for them and they will fail to create a steering construction on their own.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThat is fine.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eLeave them to try.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe idea is to try and struggle. Once they have tried on their own, they will be more focused on the construction they build next time and will understand the steering mechanism better. In lesson 7 they will have to construct on their own once again and they will perform much better then.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"","tags":"Teacher's Note,Classes with students","subtitles":null},"423":{"position":423,"title":"Find the value for a 90 degrees turn using binary search","description":"\u003cp\u003eHow to search for an unknown value with the fewest possible tries.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eThe Problem\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eOften you will search for a motor rotation value in order to achieve some desired position of the robot. This process could take a lot of experiments and time if not approached structurally.\u003cbr\u003e\r\n \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eThe approach - simple\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eTake a range of two values and make a test using their average. If the test is not satisfying, test again with a new range, based on the last test.\u003cbr\u003e\r\n \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eThe algorithm\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePhase one\u003c/strong\u003e - find a value that is lower than the desired result and a value that is higher than the desired result.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePhase two\u003c/strong\u003e - make a test using the average of the low and high values. In order to find the average, add the low to the high and divide the result by two.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePhase three\u003c/strong\u003e - if the result is lower than the desired, change the initial lower value to the new average value and repeat phase two.\u003cbr\u003e\r\nIf the result is higher than the desired, change the initial high value to the new average value and repeat phase two.\u003cbr\u003e\r\n \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eExample\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eFind the value in degrees for a pivot turn to 90 degrees.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eStep 1 \u003c/strong\u003e(Phase one)\u003cbr\u003e\r\nWe measure that 360 is too low and 720 is too high.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eStep 2 \u003c/strong\u003e(Phase two)\u003cbr\u003e\r\nThe average value of the range from 360 to 720 is (360+720) / 2 = 540.\u003cbr\u003e\r\nWe test and see that 540 is too much.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eStep 3 \u003c/strong\u003e(Phase three)\u003cbr\u003e\r\nChange 720 (initial high) to 540 degrees.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eStep 4\u003c/strong\u003e (Phase two repeated with the new values)\u003cbr\u003e\r\nThe average value of the range from 360 to 540 is (360+540) / 2 = 450.\u003cbr\u003e\r\nWe test and see that 450 is too low.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eStep 5 \u003c/strong\u003e(Phase three repeated)\u003cbr\u003e\r\nChange 360 (initial low) to 450 degrees.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eStep 6 \u003c/strong\u003e(Phase two repeated with new values)\u003cbr\u003e\r\nThe average value of the range from 450 to 540 is (450+540) / 2 = 495.\u003cbr\u003e\r\nWe test and see that 495 is good!\u003cbr\u003e\r\n \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eComparison\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIt looks too long and difficult now.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eBut if we tried every 10 degrees, we would test 540, 530, 520, 510, 500 and 490 in order to find the value that we needed.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe direct approach testing every 10 degrees from 540 degrees downward takes 6 tests, whereas the binary search in the area from 360 to 720 degrees takes \u003cstrong\u003eonly three tests \u003c/strong\u003eto find the correct value!\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Classes with students","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eTurning with the wheel to 90 degrees does not result in turning the whole robot to 90 degrees. It's just the wheel. Again I'll set the wheel like this. The wheel turns to 90 degrees but not the whole robot. What we should do in this video is find the value for this construction for this wheel, for this robot of how much should we rotate the wheel so that the whole robot rotates to 90 degrees. In the software, I have the computer right beside me we have a program for turning this wheel to 360 degrees and I'll just start the program. 360 degrees with this wheel is not enough for turning the robot to the right - it's slightly to the right but not exactly to the right. What we can do is to experiment and to find the correct value. How do we find this value? There are many different ways. We can just try with 370 degrees or 380 degrees but that's kind of a slow process. What we can do is until we have the experience and you'll know most of the values by heart by the end of this course but for now what we can do is just double this value and set the value to 720 degrees. Like this.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eSo, 720 degrees is too much. We rotate the robot but not exactly to the right. It's to the right and then it continues forward. But what you can see is that 360 results in the robot positioned like this, 720 results in the robot positioned like this. So, it's somewhere in the middle and we can take the exact middle between 360 and 720. And the exact middle is 540. And if we set this to 540 degrees,\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003ewe see that it kind of looks like exactly to the right. Again.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eBut it's probably more. Exactly to the right would be like this. This process of finding the correct value is called Binary search. And it's very famous algorithm for seraching different values when we don't know them. And it's basically for searching in an array but these are details. With just 2 tries we find a value that's very close to the real one. How do we find if 540 degrees is the real one? What we should do is to make this robot turn to 540 degrees 4 times. And if it just rotates, then we know that the value of 540 is correct. How do we do this in the program?\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWe have our block - 540 and we must execute this block 4 times. Or even 10 times but 10 is too much. Let's start with 4. What we can do is we can take another block - Large block place it here then we can configure it for a number of degrees - for 540. But as you see this is kind of a slow process. What we can do is to copy. We can select this block, click edit \u0026gt; copy and then click edit \u0026gt; paste. And we have the same block here with the exact same configurations. But we can also do another trick. We can hold CTRL and move.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd this makes another copy of the same block and now we have 4 different blocks. And I'll just download and run these 4 different blocks.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe robot does 4 turns to 540 degrees. If each of these is exactly right then at the end it should arrive at the same position that it started. Because it will do a full circle. But as you saw 540 is a little too much.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAt the end the robot is not facing exactly you on the camera and we use the marker, it moves slightly after the marker. So, the correct value is somewhere slightly less than 540 degrees. And we'll leave this to you. Try to find the correct value for making the whole robot turn to exactly 90 degrees and when you do 4 turns it should return to the same position.\u003c/p\u003e"},"424":{"position":424,"title":"EV3 Phi. When to use Tank, Large and Steering Block","description":"\u003cp\u003eWe will introduce a convention, an agreement, how and in which cases we are going to use each types of blocks.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eWhen to use Steering block\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWhat kind of a turn is going to happen if you adjust Move Steering Block to 25% ? No one knows for sure and it will be a different arc for different robots.\u003cbr\u003e\r\nThe percentage value of the steering setting means nothing to a person, so we will not use it at all.\u003cbr\u003e\r\nWe use Steering block only for forward and backward movement!\u003cbr\u003e\r\n \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eWhen to use Tank block\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWe can control the power of each motor in this block and we will use it for spin turns (equal power, different directions) and for arc turns (same direction, different power).\u003cbr\u003e\r\n \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eWhen to use Large Motor block\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eLarge block controls only one motor and it will be used for pivot turns (one motor is stopped and one motor turns the robot).\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Classes with students","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eSo far we've looked at 3 different blocks for controlling the motors. The Large motor block, the Tank block and the Move steering block. And now it's a good opportunity to discuss the difference and when to use each of these blocks. The rule is very simple and in this course and most of the other resources that you see at fllcasts.com we have this rule. You use the Steering block only for moving forward and backward. Yes, it is called Steering block but you use this block only for moving forward and backward. You use the Tank block for turning - spin turn, arc turn. And you use the Large block for pivot turns. So, 3 blocks, 3 different ways to use them. Steering block - move forward, move backward. Tank block - arc turn, spin turn. Large motor - pivot turn. Why? Let's look at the program and we'll discuss why we do this. First, the Steering block. If you drag and drop the Steering block, you'll see that it has only one setting for power. And when you have only one setting you can just drag and drop this block, set the power and it will just move forward or backward depending on the value of the power. This is much easier than using the Tank block for moving forward because in the Tank block you have 2 different settings for power. For power to the left motor and to the right motor. So, we just use the Steering block for moving forward not for steering. Yes, it is called steering but we don't use it for steering. In the Steering block the first arrow that you see it's the steering option. With this option you can move to the right or to the left. And this will make the robot steer to the right or to the left. And this will make an arc turn. What's important for this option is that when you use this option you don't have a lot of control of how the robot moves. You just set a value of let's say 10 and it will do some kind of an arc but you have little to no control of what kind of an arc and how exactly it turns. That's why we don't use the Steering block for steering. We use the Tank block when we know the two values. We can also use the Tank block and the Large motor block for turning and for pivot turns. For example, if I take the Move tank block, we can set the power of one of the motors to 0 and this will stop motor B and it will be just motor C working. So, it's a pivot turn. And we can do a pivot turn with the Tank block. But since we want to control only one of the blocks\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eit is much more clear to use the Large motor block where it is clear that we are controlling only one of the motors not the two motors. Because here we see in the Tank block we have motor B and motor C. And one of them is with power 50 and the other is 0 and it's much more difficult to understand the program than to just use the Large motor block where we set motor B - 50 a number of rotations and the other motor will not be working. Last thing we need to discuss is the Tank block. And with the Tank block you can do two types of turns. You can turn in an arc or you can do a spin turn. And we saw the spin turn - we set one of the powers to 50 and the other to -50. This will make the two wheels rotate in opposite directions and this will make the robot spin. But if you set one of the wheels to a power of 30 and the other to a power of 50, this will make the robot move in an arc. And we can control this arc because we have two values. We can control the power of the inner motor and the power of the outer motor. Let's just run the program and see how it works so that you get the idea. I'll set this to rotate with power of 70 and this with power of 30.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe robot with the Tank block does an arc turn where the inner wheel, the left wheel is turning with the power of 30 and the outer wheel, the right wheel is turning with the power of 70.\u003c/p\u003e"},"836":{"position":836,"title":"Solution to the challenges. Teachers note","description":"\u003cp\u003eExample code that solves the challenges.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eCreate a program to greet you by your name\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cpre\u003e\r\n\u003cspan style=\"font-family:Courier New,Courier,monospace;\"\u003eprint(\"Hello, mr/mrs Teacher\")\u003c/span\u003e\r\n\u003c/pre\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eCreate a program to start the lights with brightness equal to your age\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cpre\u003e\r\n\u003cspan style=\"font-family:Courier New,Courier,monospace;\"\u003efrom time import sleep                                          \u003cem\u003e# we need sleep function from time library\u003c/em\u003e\r\nimport RPi.GPIO as GPIO                                         \u003cem\u003e# GPIO library to control pins\u003c/em\u003e\u003c/span\u003e\r\n\r\nGPIO.setwarnings(False)\r\nGPIO.setmode(GPIO.BCM)                                          \u003cem\u003e# BCM means we will use GPIO numbers, not pin numbers\u003c/em\u003e\r\nfrontLightsPin = 18                                             \u003cem\u003e# GPIO 18\r\n\u003c/em\u003efrequency = 50\u003cem\u003e\r\n\u003c/em\u003e\r\n\u003cspan style=\"font-family:Courier New,Courier,monospace;\"\u003efrequency = 50 \r\nGPIO.setup(frontLightsPin, GPIO.OUT)                            \u003cem\u003e# set GPIO 18 in output mode, the led is there\u003c/em\u003e\r\n\r\nfront_lights = GPIO.PWM(frontLightsPin, frequency)              \u003cem\u003e# PWM = pulse width modulation with 50Hz (blinks per second)\u003c/em\u003e\r\n\u003c/span\u003e\r\n\r\nmax_light = 32\r\n\r\nfront_lights.start(max_light)\r\nsleep(0.200)\r\nfront_lights.stop()\r\n\r\nGPIO.cleanup()\u003c/pre\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eChange the program to start the lights with brightness three times your age\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cpre\u003e\r\nfrom time import sleep                                          \u003cem\u003e# we need sleep function from time library\u003c/em\u003e\r\nimport RPi.GPIO as GPIO                                         \u003cem\u003e# GPIO library to control pins\u003c/em\u003e\r\n\r\nGPIO.setwarnings(False)\r\nGPIO.setmode(GPIO.BCM)                                          \u003cem\u003e# BCM means we will use GPIO numbers, not pin numbers\u003c/em\u003e\r\nfrontLightsPin = 18                                             \u003cem\u003e# GPIO 18\r\n\u003c/em\u003e\r\nfrequency = 50 GPIO.setup(frontLightsPin, GPIO.OUT)                            \u003cem\u003e# set GPIO 18 in output mode, the led is there\u003c/em\u003e\r\n\r\nfront_lights = GPIO.PWM(frontLightsPin, frequency)              \u003cem\u003e# PWM = pulse width modulation with 50Hz (blinks per second)\u003c/em\u003e\r\n\r\nage = 32\r\nmax_light = age * 3 \r\n\r\nfront_lights.start(max_light)\r\nsleep(0.200)                                                    \u003cem\u003e# dot\u003c/em\u003e\r\nfront_lights.stop()\r\n\r\nGPIO.cleanup()\u003c/pre\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eCreate a program that blinks the LED as letter \"R\" in morse code\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cpre\u003e\r\nfrom time import sleep                                          \u003cem\u003e# we need sleep function from time library\u003c/em\u003e\r\nimport RPi.GPIO as GPIO                                         \u003cem\u003e# GPIO library to control pins\u003c/em\u003e\r\n\r\nGPIO.setwarnings(False)\r\nGPIO.setmode(GPIO.BCM)                                          \u003cem\u003e# BCM means we will use GPIO numbers, not pin numbers\u003c/em\u003e\r\nfrontLightsPin = 18                                             \u003cem\u003e# GPIO 18\r\n\u003c/em\u003e\r\nfrequency = 50 GPIO.setup(frontLightsPin, GPIO.OUT)                            \u003cem\u003e# set GPIO 18 in output mode, the led is there\u003c/em\u003e\r\n\r\nfront_lights = GPIO.PWM(frontLightsPin, frequency)              \u003cem\u003e# PWM = pulse width modulation with 50Hz (blinks per second)\u003c/em\u003e\r\n\r\nage = 32\r\nmax_light = age * 3 \r\n\r\nfront_lights.start(max_light)\r\nsleep(0.200)                                                    \u003cem\u003e# dot\u003c/em\u003e\r\nfront_lights.stop()\r\nsleep(0.200)                                                    \u003cem\u003e# pause \u003c/em\u003e\r\n\r\nfront_lights.start(max_light)\r\nsleep(3 * 0.200)                                                \u003cem\u003e# dash\u003c/em\u003e\r\nfront_lights.stop()\r\nsleep(0.200)                                                    \u003cem\u003e# pause \u003c/em\u003e\r\n\r\nfront_lights.start(max_light)\r\nsleep(0.200)                                                    \u003cem\u003e# dot\u003c/em\u003e\r\nfront_lights.stop()\r\nsleep(0.200)                                                    \u003cem\u003e# pause   \u003c/em\u003e\r\n\r\nGPIO.cleanup()\u003c/pre\u003e\r\n","tags":"Learn At Home,Teacher's Note,STEM,Programming","subtitles":null},"445":{"position":445,"title":"Improving FLL Robot Game. Task. Lift your robot with 40 teeth gear wheels.","description":"\u003cp\u003eBuild a similar mechanism to this one. Similar, but for your robot. This is the task for you. Try, give yourself half and hour or even an hour.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eWhy lifting in this way\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eYou may be successful in lifting the robot in this way, you may not. But this is not the real task here. Because this mechanism is showing a very useful principle of using the gear wheels and the goal of the task is to experiment with them.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eLegs on both sides\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eBuild legs for both sides of the robot. Build the symmetrical.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eTransfer power from the motor\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eTry to somehow transfer power from the motor to the attachment. This is where the real challenge is. It will involve many axles, gear wheels, and systems of gears, but at the end, you should have the gears on both sides of the robot working and controlled by one of the motors. Do not be afraid to make a \"mistake\". There are no mistakes. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,FLL 2016,Gears,Attachments,Motors,Construction,FLL,Classes with students","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eHere is the task that could greatly help you improve your FIRST LEGO League robot game score. Look at this attachment and this mechanism, this system of gears and build a similar one for the left side and similar one for the right side of the robot. Then somehow try to transfer power from the motor to these two axles. You'll have one axle at the right and one axle at the left side of the robot. And then try to rotate them to see what will happen. If the two legs are very long, you'll need to have more torque, more power from the motor. If they are not that long, you won't be able to lift the robot. How many Lego units do you need to lift the robot? If the robot should go up, how many Lego units do you need because right here if you have a very long beam like a 15 holes beam, probably it will manage to lift the robot to about 10 holes but then it will require much more power and this is something that could work or could not work. Try, experiment, attach two of these to each side of the robot, give them power from the motor and try to lift the robot.\u003c/p\u003e"},"464":{"position":464,"title":"Improving FLL Robot Game. Task. Fix attachment to make it durable and stable","description":"\u003cp\u003eFollowing the principles from the previous video, try to make the attachment that you've built, more stable and durable. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eFix the legs, the sides with additional beam, so that they don't bend and disassemble. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Attachments,FLL 2016,Construction,FLL,Classes with students","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eDepending on the attachment that you've built try to make your whole attachment more steady, more durable with the same principles. Try to fix the legs of your attachment. Try to fix some of the sides with additional beams so that they don't bend and they don't disassemble. If you are using this attachment, just continue with adding the beams at the front and the beams at the back so that you can follow the rest of the course. Don't forget to send us pictures and videos of the modifications that you've done so that we can return some feedback for your achievement.\u003c/p\u003e"},"61":{"position":61,"title":"Heavy lifting with a detachable LEGO Mindstorms attachment","description":"\u003cp\u003eHow do you lift heavy objects with an attachment? In this episode we show a simple, interesting, but yet not very popular way to lift something heavy with and LEGO Mindstorms EV3 robot and without gears and motors as attachment. As a specific example we are using the Strength Exercise mission from the FIRST LEGO League 2012 competition. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eMany of the constructions in the LEGO world mimic the \"real\"/\"engineering\" world. But initially students need some time to come to such solutions and must see them somewhere. In this episode we are building an attachment that follows an interesting principle for lifting heavy objects. Our observation is that this are hardly ever used in competition. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eTry to follow the same principle to push objects, not only lift them. If you use the attachment share with us the results and what have you achieved with it. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eInstructions and rules for the use of the heavy lifting model can be found at \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/resources/1\"\u003eFIRST LEGO League 2012 competiton materials\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"FLL 2012,EV3,Attachments,FLL,Construction","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eIn this tutorial I'll take a look at the strength exercise from the 2012 First Lego League Challenge. In the next few minutes I'll introduce you to an interesting way to complete the mission with a detachable attachment. Now let's see how the final version of the attachment would look like.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eI'd like to show you how we've come to this attachment. In the beginning there was this square frame which actually is the scissor mechanism. The main idea is that the robot will push the mechanism from one side and the model will resist from the other which will make the mechanism stretch and lift the lever which will complete the strength exercise mission from the 2012 First Lego League Challenge. What we'll do next is build on this mechanism, so that we could attach it to the robot and see what other problems we will face. I have built this frame at the back of the mechanism and I'll focus on two key features of it. First, I have this axle here which is used not only for supporting this beam but also for preventing the mechanism from falling down so it's a little bit stretched at anytime. Next, we have this rail here. So, we have these two beams at the front of the robot and they are sliding into the frame. So, in the end, the attachment looks like this. Now, if we push the robot towards the model, it will stretch and lift the weight a little bit. Unfortunately, the robot does not lift the weight all the way. This is because the mechanism is hanging at the front due to its weight. We have two solutions to this. The first one is to extend these frame beams but then the attachment will become too long and it would be hard to maneuvre through the field. Another solution is to add an extra point here where the weight will fall onto. So, I'll build it and show it to you. I have added these two wheels as pivot points for the attachment and now they are rotating. I will attach the scissor mechanism once again to the robot. and when I push it towards the model it stretches and lifts the weight all the way up. When I move it back, the attachment remains on the field. This is due to the friction between the tires and the beams. As you see, it's very difficult to rotate them. Another way to achieve this is to put a half bush between the beam and the tire.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eLike this. Of course, you should also put a half bush on the outer side of the tire. I'll repeat the same thing on the other side. I put a half bush, then put the tire and finally put a half bush on the outer side. Now, when I push the mechanism towards the model, it lifts it all the way up. But when I move the robot back, the attachment remains on the construction. If you want to have no friction but still leave the attachment on the field, you could use this angled beam as a hook. I'll attach it here with this little friction pin.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNow, when I push it towards the model, the hook is flipped and when the robot returns, the attachment remains on the field. When we have the hook in place, the attachment will be left on the field. If you do not want to leave it on the field, just remove the angled beam.\u003c/p\u003e"},"70":{"position":70,"title":"Constructing BigDaddy Competition Robot (Part 1 - Front)","description":"\u003cp\u003eBased on your feedback we have decided to show you the live process of building a complex LEGO Mindstorms Competition robot without having the whole robot ready yet. We would be making mistakes, showing them and taking up the challenges right in front of your eyes. The first construction would not be perfect but we would eventually arive at it. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eThe Name\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eYes, we have watched the Marvel 'Kick Ass'. And yes, this robot will be big and angry.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eThe Construction\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/search/robot+construction\"\u003erobot construction\u003c/a\u003e has a 'front', 'back' and a frame in between. In this video lesson we are starting with the 'front' where we use a paired gear wheel. The power would be transfered from a mindstorms motor to the front wheels.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eThe Process\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWe construct, experiment and post. You give us feedback and based on the feedback we make modifications on the robot. So, build it with us on the way, try to take up a specific challenge with it and leave us a comment below on what has and what hasn't worked for you in this robot.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,FLL,Construction","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eIn this episode, based on your feedback, we'll start building a new competition construction. It is a very interesting construction and in this video we are showing only the front. It has probably three or four main features. First, it's very, very heavy loaded. So, it can take a large load. It also uses these interesting black parts that are not used very often and it has these frames that will help you align to the walls during a competition.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eFirst, let's start with the wheels. We've decided to use the large wheels from the EV3 set. As you can see, probably you have your wheels with you, they are 68.8 by 36 mm. So, we are using these wheels. We should now find a way to attach them to a frame. To make them turn, we've decided to use this gear wheel. I'll use the parts and attach them to make the frame. Repeat the same on the other side. Now we can add the wheels to the frame.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAll we need now is to find a way to transfer power from the motor to the gear wheel so that we can turn the wheels whenever we want. Now we have the wheels and we have the frame. I'll add the wheels to the frame. I will use also a bush so that they are stable.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eHere it is. Now we have to find a way to transfer power from the motor to this double gear wheel which will allow us to control the turning of the robot. I'll show you a construction. It's something we will improve in this video lesson or probably in the next one but it's a very interesting construction which deserves our attention. I'll use three small eight-teeth gear wheels to transfer power to the large gear wheel, especially to the inner side of the large gear wheel. As you can see, it's turning freely, so we should make some modifications to this construction. I'll add these parts to the large gear wheel.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eOne here.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt's not very easy. And the other one here. Now, the tricky part is to actually add the three gear wheels in a way that they could work together with the large gear wheel. We should do this in two steps: first, we add the axle; then, we add the gear wheels.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eOne gear wheel.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe second one.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd the third one. It's ready.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe interesting thing about this construction is that all three gear wheels are working together with the large grey wheel and we can see that the whole construction is turning. Now, we have to find a way to stabilize the gear wheel so that they won't fall and I'll use these small parts here. I'll add them.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd it will look something like this.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eHere it is. We have a gear wheel which is turning and we can transfer power from the motor to the large gear wheel and in this way turn the frame.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe problem with this construction is that we have large gaps between the gear wheels and the large gear wheel. So, we have to find a way to fix these gaps. The problem with this construction, as I mentioned, is that there's a large gap between each of the gear wheels and this may cause problems in the next episode. So, let's look for ways to fix this. I've come up with a solution. It's very, very simple. First, I'll have to detach this axle. Then remove these elements. Reduce! Use as few elements as possible!\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThen I'll remove the frame from here and from here and I'll start from the initial position. So, again, I have this frame. I'll attach it like this. I've prepared an interesting part. It looks like this. I'll have to attach it both to the black parts and to the gear wheel. To do this, I'll have to change the position of this blue pin. It should go on the last hole.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis one goes here and this one - there. So, I've changed the position. We add the black parts to the gear wheel. We add the other ones.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNow, we have to attach the gear wheel in the following way. Now we can see that the center of this part is aligned to the cener of the wheels and to the center of the gear wheel. If I now add an axle here, I will achieve turning of the gear wheel in a very simple way.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIn the next episode we will continue with improving the front part of the robot so that it becomes more stable and we'll add additional frames to it.\u003c/p\u003e"},"88":{"position":88,"title":"How to calibrate the EV3 Gyro Sensor (software solution)","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe EV3 Gyro sensor is quite powerful, but there are some little tricks when using it. In the previous episode we showed a hardware solution to the problem and now we are exploring how could the sensor be calibrated from the EV3-G software. Thanks to Sharon and Faye (full names omitted) for the request for this video.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eThe hardware solution\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eFor the hardware solution take a look at \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/87-how-to-calibrate-the-gyro-sensor\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;\"\u003eHow to calibrate the EV3 Gyro Sensor and remove its drift (hardware solution)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eCalibration\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eSimply put - you have a device that is making measurements. If there is a difference between a well-known value and the value measured by this device then you need to calibrate the device.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eExample - you take a compass and get the direction of North measured by the compass. You compare this measurement with the real direction of North. If there is a difference the compass should be calibrated. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eExample 2 - you take a thermometer and get the temperature of a freezing water. You know that the temperature of a freezing water is 0 degrees Celcius. If the thermometer has measured something else than you need to calibrate it. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eCalibration with the gyro sensor\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/50-how-to-on-gyro-sensor\"\u003eEV3 Gyro Sensor\u003c/a\u003e is a powerfull sensor for every \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/search/robot+construction\"\u003erobot construction\u003c/a\u003e. It detects Angle of rotation and Rate of Rotation. In order to calibrate it you must get the difference between a known value and the measured value.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIn the video tutorial we are discussing exactly this. How to calibrate the sensor using the \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/search/ev3+programming\"\u003eEV3-G software\u003c/a\u003e, what is the measured value and what is the difference between the measured and the known value.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Calibration,EV3,Gyro Sensor,Sensors","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eIn the previous episode we started with experimenting with Ev3 Gyro drift, and ways to remove it. We looked at the hardware solution, and in this video we will explore different software solutions. As you can see, the brick currently, although it is not moving, shows that the Gyro sensor is moving and that's in fact called EV3 Gyro drift. Let's look for ways to remove this drift.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAs you can see, the brick is currently connected to the computer, and we can see the result of the Gyro drift. A simple problem for solving this drift is to use the Gyro sensor block. The Gyro sensor's connected on port 1, and we have the first measuring rate, the second block measuring angle, and after that we have a simple wait. This should cause a reset in the sensor and from then on the value detected from the sensor should be correct. These blocks are now run each time we start our program and our program is to output the value of the Gyro Sensor. So here I'll just get the value and display this value on the screen. I would like to wire, display text, and show the value on the screen, and after display the value we wait for about a second. So again, we start the program with calibrating the sensor by resetting, not by resetting, but by changing the rate that is measuring. First the rate and then the angle, you wait for about second, and we start the loop, and in this we loop, we just measure the angle and display this angle on the screen. Let's see how this works.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNow, this is where it gets really interesting. After running the program, as you can see, it should calibrate. We set the value of the Gyro sensor and from then on we measure only the real value, and not the drift. But currently I'm not moving the brick, and we can see that there is a Gyro drift.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eFrom our experience, what I've personally found is that for some bricks it works, the program that we have just written, for other, it just doesn't work. Let me just start the same program for another brick. I have simulated the Gyro drift on another brick, uploaded the program, and now I'm holding the brick in my hand, and as you can see there is no Gyro drift. Actually, the differences are from the movement of my arm.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAs a conclusion, we have simple program for calibrating the sensor, but it seems that this program works on some sensors and on some bricks, and on other bricks it doesn't work. So I recommend that you use the Harbor solution and the link for the solution is provided below in the description of the video.\u003c/p\u003e"},"243":{"position":243,"title":"Fourth state - Cube/Row Color Reading","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"EV3,WRO 2015,State machine,WRO,Light and Color Sensor,Programming","subtitles":null},"966":{"position":966,"title":"Programming and theory","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"","subtitles":null},"378":{"position":378,"title":"A series of instructions comprises every program","description":"\u003cp\u003eLet's make a program that moves forward and then backward.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eA program is a series of instructions\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eDrag and drop a second block to the programming canvas of the software. You can add new blocks either before, or after existing blocks.\u003cbr\u003e\r\nA computer program is a series of instructions, or commands that are executed one after the other.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\r\nHow to delete a wrong block\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIf you need to remove a block, you could drag it back to the palette section and drop it there. The delete button will do the same, if you prefer to use the keyboard.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Classes with students,Programming","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eOur robot moves forward and we can also program the robot to move backward. Let me just find my program.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eLike this. Now, in this video we must improve on the program so that it moves forward, backward, forward, backward, etc. We'll set this as a challenge. We'll show you part of the solution and then we'll leave you to experiment with the different tasks. So, let's first implement a program so that it moves forward and backward.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis here is a program for moving backward. You see -1 as rotations and we can drag and drop one more block into the program. We can drop the block as a last block or as a first block. Let's just drop it as a first block. Now, this program will make the robot move forward for one rotation backward for -1 rotation. And that's important because this is what programming looks like. You just add a number of blocks in a series and you reach a behavior of the robot. In this case forward, backward. Let's download it and run it.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAgain, I'll have to find it.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eForward, backward. What you need to do from here is to just add more blocks to the program and configure their settings. And you reach a final program that makes the robot moves like a Yo-yo. And you'll need.. You have to find out how many blocks you'll need. Now, it's possible that you make a mistake. Like clicking on another block and even placing it. You can delete this block. You just drag and drop this block back to the pallet. Like this.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eOr you can just use the Delete key. You just select the block and press delete. So, the task from here is to implement the Yo-yo. To do it on your own by adding more blocks to the program.\u003c/p\u003e"},"406":{"position":406,"title":"EV3 Phi. Task - use wait when the cup is over the robot buttons","description":"\u003cp\u003eHow to use the robot when the buttons are not accessible.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eWait block\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eRemember the Wait Block and Wait Time mode.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eSteps\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003col\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eStart the program with the middle brick button;\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003ePlace the cup;\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eAfter that, the robot starts moving.\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ol\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Classes with students","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eNext task after you've brought the cup from a water dispenser to a human and you've seen how the cup behaves and how it falls sometimes it is important to mention one more thing and this is what happens if you place and how to use the robot if you place the cup on the buttons. You can't start them. You can't start the robot. You can't press the buttons. So, let's see what we can do.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhat you should remember is that there is a wait block in the EV3 software. And this wait block tells the robot to wait for a number of seconds. And try to implement a program, where you start the robot with this button, place the cup on the buttons and only after that the robot will move forward. And the program I could imagine should work like this. I'll download it.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNow, I press the button\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eand the robot moves.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAgain. Press the button then place the cup because there is a wait block and the robot moves only after that. Try to implement this program by remembering the wait block and using the wait block.\u003c/p\u003e"},"454":{"position":454,"title":"Improving FLL Robot Game. Driving the scissors mechanism. Change gear orientation","description":"\u003cp\u003eIn this tutorial, we would drive the scissors mechanism and there are a number of rules that we must follow\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eTransferring power\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWith the motor in the centre of the robot, we must use a system of gear to transfer the power. The final driving wheel must be as small as possible. In this case, we are using 40 teeth gear wheels so for driving we must use the 8 teeth LEGO gear wheel. This will increase the torque and will reduce the speed because in lifting we must increase the torque and power to be able to lift the robot.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eChanging gear orientations and direction of axles\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIt would be necessary to change the gear orientation and the direction in which the axles rotate. There are plenty of resources about this and you could find them at:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003ca href=\"https://www.fllcasts.com/playlists/5\" title=\"Active Attachments for changing Gears Orientation\"\u003eActive Attachments for changing Gears Orientation\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eor generally just search for \u003ca href=\"https://www.fllcasts.com/search?utf8=%E2%9C%93\u0026amp;search=gear+orientation\"\u003eGear Orientation\u003c/a\u003e.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Attachments,Construction,Classes with students,FLL","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eOur next step is to actually drive this scissor mechanism. And for driving there are some rules that we must follow.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWe have the robot, we have the scissor mechanism and we should place one mechanism at each side of the robot. And then when we rotate with the gear wheel we would lift the robot. It's an interesting question: Where do we place this axle? Is it at the back of the robot at this side? Is it at the front of the robot? The important thing is that to transfer the power from the motors that are right here in the center of the Box Robot to transfer the power from the motors to our scissor mechanism we'll need some form of a gear system - gears that are changing directions, gears that are increasing the ratio or decreasing the ratio. So, it's a mechanism of gears. At the end when we get to the final wheel this is this large wheel here we should always try to drive this wheel with a small gear wheel - 8 teeth gear wheel. And this will allow us to go for power and for torque which is important when lifting heavy objects and not that much for speed. So, the end wheel is a small 8 teeth wheel that is driving the large 40 teeth wheel.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAgain, the advantage when using a small 8 teeth gear wheel driving a large 40 teeth gear wheel is that you are going for torque. And this is what you want to get at the end for lifting a heavy object. But you reduce the speed. So, lifting the robot will be slower. How slow? We should see this as an end result.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAlso when transferring the power from the axles that are at the front of the robot to these scissor mechanisms that are at the side of the robot we must change the gear orientation. What I'll try to do is to add in the course links for a number of videos for changing the gear orientation - the orientation of gears and changing the direction of the axles. Check them out before moving forward to the course because some of the next tasks are actually changing the orientation of different gears.\u003c/p\u003e"},"459":{"position":459,"title":"Improving FLL Robot Game. Beams on all axles of the gear wheels","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe most stressed wheel in our system is the driven wheel. We've already fixed the problem with the driving wheel of the scissor mechanism and now it is time to look at the drive LEGO Mindstorms wheel. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eSolution\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWe've added a beam connected to the axles of the driving and the driven wheel of the scissors mechanism. This prevents the whole robot construction from bending. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Construction,Classes with students,FLL","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eThe most stressed wheel in our system is the driven wheel. So, we fixed this problem where we have a beam on both sides of the these two gears wheels. And now we need also a beam at this side of the gear wheel. It is mush more easier to bend the whole construction right here between the two large gear wheels. And this one is the last one - the driven one. And it's much more easier to bend the construction here than to do it right here where we have the small gear wheel because when we have the small gear wheel it will actually be the largest that is bending. But right here we have two 40 teeth gear wheels and they will bend. So, we must find a solution and our solution we've implemented it in our attachment. It's right here. How does it work? Let me just take an axle to show it. We have a beam that's connecting both of these large 40 teeth gear wheels and in this way the whole construction cannot bend here. And then we have this beam that's extended to the back of the attachment that assures that this small 8 teeth gear wheel will again not miss a teeth. And in this way we have the 3 wheels with beams on both sides.\u003c/p\u003e"},"63":{"position":63,"title":"Quick Pinless Attachments for LEGO EV3 Competition Robots (Part 1)","description":"\u003cp\u003eYou think that you can quickly change the attachments of your LEGO Mindstorms EV3 competition robot? Are you sure? In this first episode of the series you will see how to create and attach attachments without using pins and how faster and easier this could be. You will see the design logic of a few attachments and how they work on the field. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eConstruction\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe first part shows a construction similar to the one shown in \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/60-reusable-geared-active-attachment-for-changing-gears-orientation\"\u003eEpisode 60\u003c/a\u003e. The construction presents the logic of how to make a quick pinless attachment. The robot from \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/58-ev3-competition-robot-construction\"\u003eEpisode 58\u003c/a\u003e has been used for the current presentation.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eAttachment base\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe second part of the video shows how to make a base for various pinless attachments. Usually, there are two bases designed for one robot. While the robot is using one of the bases on the field, the other remains with the team who attach the construction necessary for the following missions. When the robot returns to the base, the quick pinless attachment base is removed and the other one is attached and vice versa.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eAdapter\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe third part of the video shows how to build an adapter. This is a construction connecting the base to the attachment. One adapter could be used for several attachments. It is also possible to have an adapter for each attachment.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe purpose of the base, the adapter and the quick pinless attachment is to\u003cstrong\u003e \u003c/strong\u003e\u003cstrong\u003esave parts \u003c/strong\u003ewhich could be used for the making of whole attachments.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe last part of the video shows how the robot behaves on the field.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWe are looking forward to your comments. We would be happy if you share how this video has been useful to you.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Pinless,Attachments,Construction","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eIn this cast I will talk about quick attachments. How to make and use them; what their benefits and issues are. For example, this is a normal pin attachment. It's easily mounted but when you have to remove it, the pins are the bad guys - you have to remove them by hand and this is a time-taking process. The quick attachment is easily mounted; it has enough strength and it's easy to remove. In this cast some complex constructions will be discussed and the way to design them.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAs a specific example, the senior sollution flag challenge will be coped with.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis robot will be used to demonstrate the attachment. This is the attachment. It's very similar to the one from cast 60.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis is the way it works.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eOK. Now, when you have the attachment and the robot, all you have to do is find a way to make a rigid connection between them. When you know your construction and the construction of the robot, you have to find a way to make the construction rigid in the easiest way. Probably, one of the easiest ways for that robot is to use that channel here.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThese three parts can be used.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis is the first one, this is the second one and this is the third one.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis is a very simple lock. All you have to do after you put the attachment is to lock it. Now it's very durable\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eand very easy to remove. Probably, you are going to need a lot of attachments during the competition. This means a lot of parts. if you don't have a lot of parts, you may use a quick pinless attachment base. It's a carrier for normal attachments. So, while the robot is on the field with the first base and the attachment to it, the second one is with you where you can remove the previous attachment and put the attachment you are going to need. So, when the robot is back to the base, you can quickly change the attachments. And so on, until the end of the race. The quick pinless attachment base design logic is pretty simple. The first thing to do is decide where to place the attachment base. For that robot, these beams and the sensor shield will be used. The second thing to do is decide what kind of element you will use for a base of the attachment. For example, this beam will be used for this robot. It has to be placed like this. To do that, you may use some angled beams. Like these.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eHere it is.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd you are ready. In that way, however, the base may easily fall. So, to prevent this, you have to make a grabber to lock the attachment to the robot. In this case, the same angled beams could be used. Like that.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eSo, you can easily attach it to the robot. And detach it. If you're in a hurry, you may use force to detach it.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eUp to now, you have the attachment and the base.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhat you need now is an adaptor to make the connection between the attachment and the base. To make this adaptor, you need to decide how to attach the connection to the base. In this case, this hole here will be used. Like this.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd a beam will be used here.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eLike this. This beam is going to be placed here.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eOK.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis is going to be the adaptor. For connecting these two beams you may use this type of element.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eLike this.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd like this. But, as you can see, it's not very stable. Not at all. So, to make it stable, you may detach the attachment\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eand use this kind of beam\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eto make it more stable.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNow you have a fully equipped quick attachment which could be used on the robot. It's very durable\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eand you may unlock it by using force. So, now, you have the attachment,\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eyou have the adaptor\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eand the base. The attachment will be demonstrated on the field now.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd this is it. Another type of quick pinless attachments will be shown in some of the next videos. We'd like to see your constructions of quick pinless attachments and we are looking forward to your comments and suggestions below. Thank you.\u003c/p\u003e"},"949":{"position":949,"title":"Construction and Theory","description":"","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eIf you take a closer look at the robot, you might recognize the base. The base and the medium motor are the same we have already used in the Earl bot.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eYou will use chains for the first time. The grabber is replaced with a stick which the robot will use to push away obstacles.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIf you put a ball in the stick, the robot may through it to the basket!\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Construction","subtitles":null},"594":{"position":594,"title":"More precise turns - using decimal numbers","description":"\u003cp\u003eSometimes 1 rotation is not enough and 2 rotations are too much. What do we do?\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eDecimals\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eAre there any numbers between one and two?\u003cbr\u003e\r\nAre there any prices between USD 1 and USD 2? There are things that cost one dollar fifty!\u003cbr\u003e\r\nHave you noticed that the price of things at the supermarket which cost one dollar fifty is written as 1.50?\u003cbr\u003e\r\n \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eThe zero matters\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eBe careful about the difference between 1.50 and 1.05. The first one means one dollar fifty while the second one – one dollar five cents (which is far less).\u003cbr\u003e\r\n \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\"One point nine, one point ten\"\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eSometimes students make a mistake when increasing the values they are looking for.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eDecimals are counted in the following way\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cul\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e1    (one)\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e1.1 (one point one)\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e1.2 (one point two)\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e1.3 (one point three)\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e1.4 (one point four)\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e1.5 (one point five)\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e1.6 (one point six)\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e1.7 (one point seven)\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e1.8 (one point eight)\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e1.9 (one point nine)\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cs\u003e1.10 (one point ten)\u003c/s\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eNO\u003c/strong\u003e! 1.10 is the same as 1.1 and 1.1000. The next value after 1.9 is 2.\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ul\u003e\r\n","tags":"","subtitles":null},"591":{"position":591,"title":"Introduction - clear a field from objects","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cspan\u003eBefore the spacecraft could land on the Moon, robots are sent to clear the landing site. The objects that should be cleared are balls, rocks, built from LEGO parts, and others.\u003c/span\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cspan\u003eToday you are going to build your robot alone, without any instructions. This robot should be able to collect and push objects on its way. We will learn how to make a turn by switching off one of the motors.\u003c/span\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"","subtitles":null},"352":{"position":352,"title":"EV3 Phi. EV3 Brick menu - recent projects","description":"\u003cp\u003eWhen you first start the EV3 brick, you see the recent programs menu. Let's see what it is all about.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\r\nRecent programs menu\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThis list contains programs (not projects) that you have stared at least once.\u003cbr\u003e\r\nThis is a useful menu for demonstrations because all needed programs will appear there.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\r\nDon't rely on Recent programs in class\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eDuring development however, this list is not of use. Every time you download a project to the brick, the brick firmware checks the names of the programs in the project.\u003cbr\u003e\r\nAll programs that are in the downloaded project are cleared from the Recent programs menu.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Classes with students","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eAfter you start the brick the first menu that you'll see is the recent programs. And in this video I'd like to take a few minutes to discuss the recent programs menu.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIn this menu you see the programs that you've started at least once. And using the up and down keys you can select the program and then you can start the program. What is interesting and what is important to understand here is not to rely on this menu. Why? Because when you develop the programs and when you download them from the computer sometimes, well actually always the program is cleared from this menu when another program is downloaded from the PC.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eEspecially if it has the same name, it is difficult to know which program exactly are you running. So, don't rely on the recent menu. Always start your programs from the 'My projects'. And this will be the subject of our next video.\u003c/p\u003e"},"615":{"position":615,"title":"Teacher's Note: Stay on point and say only the most needed things","description":"\u003cp\u003eYou are working with young students and you may lose their attention pretty quickly. We will tell you what you can do to keep their attention for a longer period of time.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eThree sections with a lot of theory\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThis and the following sections seem to be too long. They include details which you should know and also be able to tell your students \u003cstrong\u003ewhen necessary\u003c/strong\u003e. For the time being, you can just mention some of the things your students will need in order to begin. When some problems arise, you can give them more details.\u003cbr\u003e\r\n \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eOnly brick and parts\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIn this section you can shortly tell your students that the brick is \u003cstrong\u003ethe brain of the robot\u003c/strong\u003e.\u003cbr\u003e\r\nAlso tell them that they can find all the parts in the respective sections in the box and that parts should be returned to their places after disassembling the robot. Sometime later you can play the game for teaching the names of the parts.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eGeneral rule\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWe, as adults, tend to say a lot of things \u003cstrong\u003eto show\u003c/strong\u003e we know a lot. Try to avoid that.\u003cbr\u003e\r\nMake sure you stay on point and leave the details for when they are needed.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Teacher's Note","subtitles":null},"512":{"position":512,"title":"Box Robot Two. Conclusion on the attachments","description":"\u003cp\u003eRecap on the attachments, their purpose and how you should use them. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eBuilding instructions\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/courses/6\"\u003eBox Robot Two. Fewer parts and one motor. Simplifying a robot\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n","tags":"Construction,EV3,Attachments,FLL","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eA few words as a conclusion on the attachments for our Box Robot 2. With the second version of the Box Robot we have a stable base and we can extend this base. We have a number of axles to the front and a number of gear wheels and we can add a frame on the robot and add this frame as a pinless frame. First, on the frame we have one attachment that extends the axle from the front of the robot if we need to probably for a certain mission you can see that this one here rotates. We can also add different attachments to the frame and in this way even though the attachments are not pinless the whole frame is pinless and this makes the attachment pinless. Because we can just remove the frame and add the frame again to the robot. We can also add another attachment to our robot like this. And have two attachments on the same frame and then add these two attachments to the robot. Now, it depends on the mission. Our goal is not to solve specific missions with this attachment but to show you how you can transfer the motion from the wheels that are on the inside of the robot to some axles that are outside of the robot. So, we have an axle here, we have an axle here, we have an axle right here. So, these are all different examples of how you can extend the system of gears and the system of axles of the robot to another axle and then attach something to this axle and then solve the missions. Try to build them. Try to experiment with them. Try to solve a number of your specific tasks you might be working on different competitions and then do not forget to send us videos and pictures of the attachments that you've built.\u003c/p\u003e"},"520":{"position":520,"title":"Tetrix Gamepads. Hand control with Gamepad bumpers","description":"\u003cp\u003eControl the hand of the FIRST Technical Challenge Push Bot robot with the GamePad bumpers.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eHand vs Arm\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWe follow the same convention as in human beings :), and there is a difference between hand and arm. The hand is the manipulator, the instrument at the end of the arm. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eServo motors for the arm\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eTwo servo motors are controlling the hand. They are connected to the servo block. The servo motor has a \"position\" of 0 and 1. When the hand has grabbed something on of the servo motors is at position 1 and the other at position 0.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Tetrix,Java,Android,Gamepad,Motors,Programming","subtitles":null},"903":{"position":903,"title":"Programming and theory","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"","subtitles":null},"371":{"position":371,"title":"Today's topic: Move a specific distance forward","description":"\u003cp\u003eMove 50cm (20 inches) forward with the robot.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eYour first program\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThere must be two lines on the floor – a start line and a finish line. The two lines should be 50 cm (20 inches) away from each other.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eMake several attempts with your robot in order to adjust the settings at which it will travel that distance.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe idea is to experiment with the software. After you have experimented, we will show you our approach to the task.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Classes with students","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eLet's set the next task for the robot. Mark the starting position of the robot with an electrical tape or with some kind of a pencil or if you're on the floor just mark the starting position. And try to make the robot move exactly 50 cm if you are in a metric system. Or 20 in if you're in an imperial system. So, try to make the robot move exactly this distance. Take a measuring tape and measure it. So that you know the exact distance. Experiment with the block, run a few programs, try the different options in the software and make the robot move exactly 50 cm. Which is something like this. So, from here to here.\u003c/p\u003e"},"419":{"position":419,"title":"EV3 Phi. Fine adjustments when turning - using degrees for a move block","description":"\u003cp\u003ePivot turns require fractions of rotations, a number between 1 and 2. Sometimes it is more convenient to use degrees.\u003cbr\u003e\r\nIn the software, you can change the \"move block\" to use degrees.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eWhat is a rotation\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eOne full circle with the wheel is one rotation of the wheel. When you set one rotation for your move block, the wheel will do one full circle.\u003cbr\u003e\r\n \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is one degree\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIn geometry, one degree measures 1/360 of the full circle. In other words, one rotation equals 360 degrees.\u003cbr\u003e\r\nDegrees is the measurement for part of a full rotation.\u003cbr\u003e\r\nOne full rotation (full circle) has 360 degrees, a half circle is 180 degrees and a right corner is 90 degrees.\u003cbr\u003e\r\n \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eIn the software\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIn the lower left corner of the \"move block\", change the mode of the block from rotations. marked with \"#\" symbol to degrees. The icon will change to a \"90\u003csup\u003eo\u003c/sup\u003e\" put in a circle.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Classes with students","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eCurrently our robot turns slightly to the right but not exactly to the right. And to program the robot turn exactly to the right or to the left we should first introduce 2 new things. First, what are degrees of rotations and then what does it mean to turn exactly right or exactly left? What does it mean to turn to 90 degrees? In this video let's first stop at rotations and degrees. What's the difference?\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eProgramming the motor to do one full rotation around this axle will result in the wheel doing a full circle around the axle. Like this. And that's one rotation. But you can also do 1/2 of a rotation like this. Or you can do 1/4 of a rotation. And you can actually do some part of the whole circle. You can rotate for some part of the whole circle. And here we have degrees. Degrees is a measurement for part of a full rotation. One full rotation, a full circle like this\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eis equal to 360 degrees. And that's more like from definitional point of view. And we have a half circle that's equal to 180 degrees. So, a half circle like this is equal to 180 degrees. In the software we can also specify the number of degrees that we would like our motors to turn. Let's do this. In the software we have our large motor block and we program this large motor block to move for one rotation forward. But now we can change this. And we can set the number of degrees. We can also set seconds, degrees and rotations. I'll just click on 'On for degrees' and this will automatically equal to 360 degrees. If I modify this to let's say 90, you can see this even in the picture here. Only 1/4 of the circle is filled. This means that the whole wheel will rotate for 1/4 of the circle. Download and run.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eStarting the program.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd you saw that our wheel rotates for 1/4 of the whole circle. This is 90 degrees. For a quarter of the whole rotation. Again.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhen you need to be more precise and need to have a fine adjustment you can always use degrees for setting the number of degrees that you would like the wheel to turn.\u003c/p\u003e"},"567":{"position":567,"title":"Tetrix FTC. Construct a ball collecting attachment - rotation axle","description":"\u003cp\u003eHow to construct an axle with a plastic plate connected to this axle and make this plate rotate and collect balls.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eFinding Axle\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThere is no such axle with the Tetrix set so we bought one. The diameter of the axle is 4mm - 4.5mm (0.16\"-0.17\"). We cut the axle about 200mm. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eAttaching the axle to the robot with a Coupler\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWe add the motor from the back of the robot to the front. We would use this motor for rotating the axle. Then coupler makes the connecting between the motor and the axle. It has a motor hub and an axle hub. The motor is connected to the motor hub, while the axle is connected to the axle hub. The size of the holes on the coupler are with different sizes. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWhen attaching the coupler to the motor shaft you must fix the coupler screw on the flat part of the shaft. Check out the video to see exactly how. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Tetrix,Classes with students,Construction","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eIn this episode we'll stop at how do you construct an axle that you place at the front of the robot that will rotate and on this axle then we'll attach the plastic that collects the different balls. But first we need to start with this axle and how did we come up with this axle, why does it look like this, where did we find it from and how did we attach it do the robot? Here is the axle. There is no such axle in the Tetrix set so we bought one. And the diameter of this axle is important. In our case because of the different parts that we have in the set and we need to attach this axle to the parts we stopped at an axle that's 4.5 mm this is something that you can buy and in inches it's 0.17-0.16. And this axle came like 3 m. It was 3 m in length so we had to cut it. And this is the first challenge. Find such an axle and then cut it to about 20 cm. And we'll give you the specific measurements below the video so that you can have it and this is the first important part - find the axle, buy one and cut it to the dimensions that we give below the video. After you have the axle you must somehow rotate this axle. For this we'll use a motor. And we just move the motor from the back of the robot right here to the front of the robot and there are no modifications here. We just attach the robot to the front right here to this C-section. Then we use this very interesting coupler. And the idea of the coupler is that we have the motor rotating one of the hubs and from there it rotates the other hub that's called the axle hub. So, we have a motor hub and an axle hub. And they are with different sizes. So, you could see the holes here and measure them and you can see that one of the holes is larger that the other. So, we have the axle hub where we place the axle and we also the motor hub right here. Now, I'll add the motor hub to the motor. I'll take the coupler and the motor hub right here. And we attach the motor hub to the shaft of the motor. This here is the shaft of the motor and you can see that it has a flat part right here and the idea is the following: You place the hub and then we must fix the hub to the shaft and because it has a flat part we must attach and fix with the hex instrument right here. And there is a small bolt and we fix it. And while fixing we move to make sure that the bolt fixes the whole hub on the flat part. Ready. We have the coupler fixed to the motor. Next. We must fix the axle. We have the coupler attached to the motor and now using the gamepad we can rotate the whole coupler. And in the reverse direction.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe next step is to attach this axle to the coupler and this will rotate the whole axle. And this is where it gets really interesting. First, we have the axle and then we take this bronze bush. Place it on the axle. Then we have a spacer - this white spacer.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd then we have this axle set collar.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd we add the whole axle to this opening and then to the axle hub. And now we must fix the axle to the axle hub. And I'll have to rotate the hub like this. You can see right here the screw that we must rotate and we use this screw to fix the axle.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eJust use the screw and\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003ewe fix the axle. Now, if we move, if we rotate, the whole axle also rotates.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThen we must also fix the other part with the set collar.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eBut probably I need the other instrument not this one.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd as a result we have a very cheap axle and now we can attach something on this axle to collect the balls. We have the axle but it's not perfect. And there are some slight modifications that we must do. And first we must move this coupler closer to the motor. And as you can see there is some gap right here between the coupler and the motor and we must move it closer. So, I'll just rotate the coupler\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eand move the whole coupler closer to the motor so that there is no gap right here. And then fix again. The next thing is that for this axle because of the shape of the axle it might be possible to fix it with the axle hub but it is always a good idea to use a tool to flatten this axle, to build this flat surface on the axle. Now, it's very difficult to see it on the camera but I hope that you can see it now and as I move, you can see that the light reflects in a different way. So, there is a very small flat surface right here and on this flat surface we can fix the screw.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd we rotate the axle. Now it looks much better.\u003c/p\u003e"},"83":{"position":83,"title":"How to calibrate the Light Sensor for the Catapult build from Mindstorms EV3/NXT","description":"\u003cp\u003e\"What is the light in the room?\" - should it even matter. You can use one program for all lighting conditions by calibrating the color/light sensor of the LEGO Mindstorms EV3/NXT robots. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eThis is the seven video tutorial on the \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/search/lego+catapult\"\u003eCapapult\u003c/a\u003e and we show how you can calibrate the \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/search/light+sensor\"\u003elight/color\u003c/a\u003e sensor to make sure the \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/search/lego+catapult\"\u003eCatapult\u003c/a\u003e could still work in different lighting conditions.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe problem is simple - you build a robot for a specific task. For solving a specific problem and this robot uses a \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/search/light+sensor\"\u003elight/color sensors\u003c/a\u003e. It probably works every time until you change the lights in the rooms or you switch to a different room.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThis is where calibration comes to play. You tell the sensor basically how \"much light\" there is in the room and what should be considered black/white as colors. This could greatly vary. Another example where you should use calibration is when \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/search/line+follow\"\u003efollowing lines\u003c/a\u003e with \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/search/lego+mindstorms\"\u003eEV3 Mindstorms robots\u003c/a\u003e.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eAll episodes from the series:\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/82-how-to-use-the-light-sensors-with-the-catapult-built-from-ev3-nxt\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;\"\u003eHow to use the Light/Color Sensors with the Catapult built from EV3/NXT\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/69-how-to-use-the-ultrasonic-sensor-with-the-catapult-build-from-mindstorms-ev3-nxt\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;\"\u003eHow to use the Ultrasonic Sensor with the Catapult built from EV3/NXT (Part 5)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/68-catapult-build-from-lego-mindstorms-ev3-nxt-part-4-ev3-clutch-and-loading\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;border-image-source:none;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;\"\u003eCatapult build from LEGO Mindstorms EV3/NXT (Part 4 - EV3 clutch and loading)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/67-catapult-build-from-lego-mindstorms-ev3-nxt-part-3-automatic-loading\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;border-image-source:none;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;\"\u003eCatapult build from LEGO Mindstorms EV3/NXT (Part 3 - Automatic loading)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/66-catapult-build-from-lego-mindstorms-ev3-nxt-part-2-base\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;border-image-source:none;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;\"\u003eCatapult build from LEGO Mindstorms EV3/NXT (Part 2 - Base)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/62-catapult-looking-like-a-trebuchet-launcher-build-from-lego\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;border-image-source:none;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;\"\u003eCatapult build from LEGO Mindstorms EV3/NXT (Part 1)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Gears,EV3,Light and Color Sensor,Fun,Programming","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003e- In the previous episode we implemented a catapult that can load and fire automatically using the color sensor but we stopped on calibrating. In this episode we're going to implement the calibration of the sensor so that when the light turns off the catapult will continue working.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eInitially we start with the program from the previous episode. Check out the link below and you can remind yourself. We would like to calibrate the sensor and the parts of calibrating process holes. We wait for a push of a button. We compare that we have pressed, for example the second button is pressed and released. When the second button is pressed, released this means the last button in the middle, we take the value of the color sensor and to set this value as the maximum value.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe purpose of a calibration process is to keep the minimum and the maximum value detected by the color sensor applied for your lighting conditions in their own currently. The next step is to calibrate the minimum value. Again we wait for red button to be pressed, second button bumped. We set the minimum value. Again, we wait for a button. We set the maximum value. We wait for a button, we set the minimum value. We will wait again, and after the button is pressed for the third time, the program continues as it shoots. Loading can find... Let me just check, bump. This is the whole program. I'll move this here to make it more readable, and let's run the program. The program is running and we are at our maximum value that the sensor detects the back of the brick which we consider the maximum. We press the button once. Then as the second step, we must load the catapult manually.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe sensor detects black or this should be considered its minimum value. Let's press the button again.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNow we release the catapult and we start the program.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eLet's do the same experiment, this time turning the lights in the room off. The lights in the room are turned off, and again we detect our maximum value. Press the button, then reload the catapult. Now we detect our minimum value. Press the button, then we release the catapult and restart the program.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAs you can see, even without lights in the room because we have calibrated the sensor, the program still works.\u003c/p\u003e"},"547":{"position":547,"title":"VEX IQ Crossover. Preventing gear wheels from skipping a tooth while rotating","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"VEX IQ,VEX IQ 2016,Construction","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eThe third important thing about this attachment is that we've incorporated a solution for these two gear wheels on how not to skip a tooth when they rotate. And we've discussed this in many previous videos but let's stop at this problem one more time. The rule is very simple. If you have gear wheels, what you should try to do is to have a beam on both sides of the gear wheels. So a beam here. And a beam here. And this will keep the two gear wheels in place and they won't bend and they won't skip a tooth. Right here we don't have a beam on the other side of the gear wheel. And that's because we need to attach this beam to rotate. But that's an exception. As a rule - always try to have a beam on both sides of the gear wheels. As we have one here and one here. And the same applies here. We have the motor on one side of the gear wheels and we have the beam on the other side of the gear wheels. This will prevent the gear wheels from skipping a tooth.\u003c/p\u003e"},"448":{"position":448,"title":"Improving FLL Robot Game. Using a rack for Lifting.","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe next step of lifting a robot to a mission model is to try to use a rack.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eRack\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eYou have gear wheels and you have the straight parts of the Rack. By rotating the gear wheels you move the rack forward and backwards. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eTransfer of motion\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThis process of rotating a wheel and this resulting in a Rack being moved is a transfer of motion. You transfer a circular motion to a linear motion.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Construction,Rack,Classes with students,FLL","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eThe next step when lifting the Box Robot on the mission model is to try to use a rack for lifting. We have our rack here and it's a rack built for another mission but because we have it constructed already and I'll use just this rack but you can also construct on yourself and this is one of the tasks. So, what is a rack? First, you have these straight parts here the black ones and on these parts you can move with a gear wheel. And while moving with a gear wheel you can transfer the motion from the gear wheel to the rack. And the rack moves forward and backward. Or up and down depending on how you construct it. So, you have this large straight part that's actually called a rack but we also refer to the whole mechanism as a rack. And it consists of a gear wheel and this gear wheel is black and it's difficult to see it on the camera but it's right here and it's a black gear wheel - small black gear wheel. And this small black gear wheel rotates. And while it rotates it transfers the motion from a circular motion to a linear motion. And the whole rack moves up and down or forward and backward. What you can do with the rack is to place the rack at the front of the robot or at the back of the robot or at the sides of the robot. And the advantage of using a rack is that while you're moving you can have the rack up like this and it will not interfere in any way with the movement of the robot and then when you reach your destination you just transfer some power from the motor to the gear wheel and this will make the rack move down. And this will lift the whole robot if the rack is attached. And that's the basic idea of the rack. It's a very useful mechanism and you should try to construct one, see what happens and how you use it. Try to place one of the racks that you do on the front or on the back. Don't use this specific example. I'm using it just as an example here but you should try to construct on yourself to see how you fit the different parts together - the rack with the gear wheel. And try to lift the robot.\u003c/p\u003e"},"548":{"position":548,"title":"VEX IQ Crossover. Task. Build the attachment with gear wheels for VEX Grabbing","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"VEX IQ,VEX IQ 2016,Construction","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eA little more advanced task now. Try to follow the instructions and to build this attachment and finally as you build it spend 20-30 minutes on trying to make it work. But don't spend too much time because it's very difficult. At the end you'll have a very good understanding on how the different motions are transfered in this very complex attachment.\u003c/p\u003e"},"460":{"position":460,"title":"Improving FLL Robot Game. Extend axles to reach from the motor to the wheels","description":"\u003cp\u003eConstruct two legs for both sides of the robot. The task for this video is to attach this two legs on both sides and to build a system of gears and axles that power those legs.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eImportant things about the lego axles\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eTorsion and bending\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eTorsion\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWhen part of the axle moves while the other stays in place. This is very visible when using LEGO Mindstorms axles that are built from plastic but is a general effect even if you have steel axles. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eBending/Sagging\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThis could permanently deform the axle or even break it. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Construction,Classes with students,FLL","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eIn the Box Robot we have the motor at the front of the robot and the axle right here, we have two of the legs that are on each side of the robot that will lift the robot, we know how to change the direction and the next task is to discuss some of the rules for extending the axle. So, if you change the direction right here at the front of the robot then you must extend the axles so that you can reach actually the scissor mechanism. Two things you should know about the axles. We have the Lego axles, we have a black one and a gray one and I'll add these two beams right here. When we apply some force on the axle and try to rotate the axle what can actually occur is torsion. Where one side of the axle is actually not rotating while there is force on the other side of the axle that tries to make the axle rotate. And this is the result. It happens mostly because the parts are from the parts are from plastic material but even if you have them from steel depending on the forces on the two sides of the axle, it can again happen. And this is the first problem that we should address. To prevent the axles from torsion. The next problem with the axles is sagging or sometimes referred to as bending. So, you remember torsion, like this. And we have the axle and we apply some force on this side of the axle and it can do this, it can bend. That's called sagging. And this could break the axle or it could permanently deform the axle. And these are two of the problems that we face when we move when we transfer power from the motor that's at the front of the robot to the side of the robot. So, we must use axles and probably there will be some torsion and some sagging of these axles that would make the whole mechanism work incorrectly or probably not work at all.\u003c/p\u003e"},"965":{"position":965,"title":"Construction and Theory","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"","subtitles":null},"659":{"position":659,"title":"Experiment with Coefficient to the Integral Part of the Gyro Sensor straight moving robot","description":"\u003cp\u003eIn this video tutorial, we would do a few experiments with the coefficients for the Integral compensation. There are actually two coefficients - \"c\" and \"b\"\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eAdding gyro sensor value to the integral\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe first coefficient is \"c\". On every loop, the value of the gyro sensor is added to the integral. The coefficient controls this process and the influence of the gyro sensor value over the integral part.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eIntegral to steering\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe second coefficient is \"b\". This coefficient controls how much of the integral part is applied to the steering block. The greater the coefficient, the greater the steering. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Math,EV3,Datalog,Experiment,Gyro Sensor,Sensors,Physics,FLL,Programming","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eThis is the last discussion of the program for the integral part for moving forward before we actually implement the final program. And I would like to discuss something that we have as an end result. These are the different coefficients in our program. And in the end we'll have like 3 coefficients. We'll have this 'c', 'b' and this 'c' here. And these are different coefficients we can use. Most important are the 'c' and the 'b' and it is important to understand them because the program as you download it from our site might not directly work with your robot and you might have it depends on where is the gyro sensor, the wheels, the tires, the power - many things. And it will probably work in most of the cases but you can always improve this by modifying some of the coefficients. So, let's do a few experiments and discuss them. First, we'll do a number of experiments with the Box Robot and the Five Minute Bot with different values for the coefficients and you can watch them in the recordings and then we can discuss them.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe first coefficient - this one here 'c' gives us the following control. We have the integral part and the integral part is the error that was accumulated while the robot was moving. And the integral part tells us how far away we are from the line. So, when we make a new sample we would like to add this new sample and this sample is with the gyro sensor so we take the value of the gyro sensor and we add this value to the integral part. But do we add it directly to the integral part or we multiply this by a certain percentage? And this is important because we don't want to add to the integral part the whole value of the gyro sensor and we must normalize this, we must move it in a range that's appropriate for us. So, we just multiply by 0.25 to reduce the control that the gyro sensor has over the integral part. And this is specifically for the Box Robot and for our robot. So, we found out that 0.25 is kind of like okay but it might be 0.20 or 0.30 so it's worth experimenting but 0.25 means that we add the current error to the old error so we have this integral part that's the accumulated error. So, we add this new error to the accumulated error but not directly. We first reduce this by a certain percentage and we add just 25% of the gyro sensor value to the integral part. The next coefficient that's important is this one here at almost the end of our program where we set the value for the steering and this value is calculated in a certain way and we take the integral part and we do some calculation and this calculation involves multiplying the integral part by 1 in our case and we apply this directly to the steering. And we might want the integral part to have more control over the steering and if you want to have more control and then we must multiply by 2. And in this way a value of 10 for the integral part will mean a steering of 20. So, it will steer more. Or if we multiply by 0.5, it will steer less. And you saw some changes in this like multiplying it by 1, by 2, by 4 in the recordings below. So, we found out that 1 is kind of like okay and it works for about 2 meters, probably after 2 meters it will not work that well but in most cases we have the fields like for 2 meters and something. So, this is the next important coefficient and if the robot is behaving strangely, try to modify this coefficient. And first try to lower it and then try to rise it and see what are the edge conditions and then you should choose a value for your coefficient. And basically the program is quite simple as you understand the values and the control that these two coefficients have and from now on we are ready to implement the whole program from scratch and this is something that we'll do in the next video.\u003c/p\u003e"},"666":{"position":666,"title":"A robot a 'day'. Time to attach a first sensor and explore with the Space Explorer","description":"\u003cp\u003eWe call the next robot Space Explorer. It is part of our classes in robots and is like the 7th robot in the sequence, but we decided to make it the third robot in \"A robot a 'day'\". The goal of the robot is to explorer and that's why it has an Ultrasonic Sensor. So get yourself ready.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch2\u003eUsing the ultrasonic sensor\u003c/h2\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWith the ultrasonic sensor, we would do a number of tasks. If you haven't now it's a good time to check the \u003ca href=\"/course_sections/10\"\u003eUltrasonic Sensor section\u003c/a\u003e of the \u003ca href=\"/courses/1\"\u003eEV3 Basic Course. Introduction to robot programming, construction and sensor use\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch2\u003eAdditional Part\u003c/h2\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eYou might see in some of our robots the following part\u003cimg alt=\"\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/013/content/lego_technic_flat_panel_5_x_11_64782.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThis is a LEGO Technic Flat Panel 5 x 11 (64782). Most of the time this part is not mandatory. We add it to make the robot more beautiful and complete here and there. It is worth the exercise of trying to replace this part with others that you have in your set.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Learn At Home,EV3,LEGO Parts,Basic","subtitles":null},"73":{"position":73,"title":"BigDaddy Competition Robot (Part 4 - Complex Transfer of Power in a Triangle)","description":"\u003cp\u003eWe continue from part 3 where we finished part of the 'rear'. Power is transfered from a motor to the wheels but having about 16 gear wheels makes it more than complex for this LEGO Mindstorms EV3 Competition robot. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eThe Construction\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe robot is constructed with a 'front', 'back' and a frame in between. In this video lesson we are working on the 'back' (also called 'rear' part when it comes to vehicles). Power is transfered by a differential to both wheels and more then sixteen gear wheels are used. It is interesting because the gears are placed on a triangle. However, due to the large number of gears there are many gaps, friction and loss of power which makes the whole transfer inefficient .\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eThe Gear System\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eContinuing from \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/72-bigdady-competition-robot-rear-part-3-front-to-rear\" style=\"font: inherit;margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;border-image:none;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;vertical-align: baseline;\"\u003eBigDaddy Competition Robot (Part 3 - Front to Rear)\u003c/a\u003e we transfer power from a motor to a Mindstorms differential which then rotates a system of gears which finally transfers the power to the wheels.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eThe Process\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWe construct, experiment and post. You give us feedback and based on the feedback we make modifications on the robot. So, build it with us on the way, try to take up a specific challenge with it and leave us a comment below on what has and what hasn't worked for you in this robot.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eThe Name\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eYes, we have watched the Marvel 'Kick Ass'. And yes, this robot will be big and angry.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eOther episodes from the series:\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/70-bigdady-competition-robot-part-1\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;\"\u003eConstructing BigDaddy Competition Robot (Part 1 - Front)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/71-bigdady-competition-robot-front-part-2\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;\"\u003eConstructing BigDaddy Competition Robot (Part 2 - Front)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/72-bigdady-competition-robot-rear-part-3-front-to-rear\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;\"\u003eConstructing BigDaddy Competition Robot (Part 3 - Front to Rear)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,FLL,Construction","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eIn the previous episode we finished with constructing part of the rear part of our new competition construction and we added the differential gear. In this video we are going to transfer power from the differential gear to the wheels. I've again chosen to use the large wheels And I've already constructed one of the wheels and now I'll walk you through adding the other wheel and transfering power from the differential gear to the wheel.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAgain, the construction is rather complex. It involves one, two, three, four, five, six, seven gear wheels. And not even including the differential gear. Let's try to transfer some power from the differential gear to the wheel. Imagine that the motor is attached right here. So, I'm turning the motor and we can see that the wheel is turning. And the ratio between the driving and the driven wheel is approximately 1 to 4 or 5. Now, let's try to attach the other wheel. I would like to attach the wheel to the frame, on the lower part of the frame. But it's kind of difficult to transfer power from the gear wheel to the wheel because the distance between the wheel and the gear wheel is 8 Lego units. The frame has 7 - one, two, three, four, five, six, seven. And there's one more Lego unit, since the axle is attached one unit above the frame. It's difficult. For that reason we've come up with a solution that involves transferring power in a triangle. So, we are going in this direction and then return to the axle. I had several options for this video. One of the first options was to just take a notebook and start explaining the different theorems for applying geometry. But I'll skip this and I'll show it in one of the next videos. In this video I will just show you an example and you'll have a link to a specific video about the geometry of the Lego parts below this video. Now, let's begin the construction step by step. First, I have this kind of a complex construction that is a triangle. So, I have it in one direction and I have an angle here for the other parts. How do we add this? First, it's rather complex - again.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eOne part here and the other one here.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eOK. Then we need to add some extension to the frame.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eOK. We have the gear wheel which transfers power from the differential gear to another small gear wheel. Right here, below the construction. Then we add this angled beam.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eLet's try this.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThese are parts that are very difficult to access; very difficult to attach.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eSo, you might be wondering why we are doing this. Because that was a nice, interesting experiment that we did. And we proved it wrong. In the end, it turned out to be very fragile.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhat do we have now? We have the gear wheel transferring power from the differential gear to a small gear wheel. Then to another black gear wheel and then to this grey gear wheel. As a last step, we need to introduce three more gear wheels. The first one goes right here.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThen the small one.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd as a result we have the wheel.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eVoilà! We have the wheel connected to the differential gear. And we have the other wheel connected to the differential gear. And we can transfer power from the differential gear to the wheels. It's kind of difficult. We need to have some very powerful motor for this. Let's again count the number of gears. We have one, two, three, four, five, six, seven gears from the differential gear to the wheels. And because of the many gaps in the construction, because of the difficult construction that involves transferring power from the differential gear to the wheels in a triangle, as you can't do this in a straight line, it turns out the construction is not very appropriate for our new competition robot. It's very easy to start the robot; it's kind of difficult to stop it. We have the power but once the robot is turning it will be very difficult to stop it. So, one thing that you should always consider is to put down your ideas and try to implement them in the new, more appropriate way; in a more beautiful way. And this is something I would like to do in the next video - try to remove this construction and replace it with something that is much more beautiful.\u003c/p\u003e"},"478":{"position":478,"title":"Improving FLL Robot Game. Task. 9 out of 10 repeatable operations","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe task in this tutorial is to execute the program 10 times and to do it yourself. If you have your attachment then use it. If you have our attachment then use it. But execute the program 10 times and make sure that it works. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"","tags":"EV3,Attachments,FLL 2016,Gears,Construction,FLL,Classes with students","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eHere is a task for you. Using your robot, your attachment or if you are following us with the Box Robot and with the attachment for lifting: Execute the program 10 times and record on a sheet of paper, or on a white board or on a black board how many times it is successful. You'll do it a couple of times and if there is an error, you think, try to solve the error and then you continue. And then you should reach about 9 out of 10 times working. If there are errors, if there are error runs, try to take pictures, try to take videos of them. Send them to us. I'm sure they might be quite fun to watch it and to discuss, to comment on them, to give you some feedback, So, if you have a phone while doing the runs, try to even record them. And it's very useful because then you have the recording on your phone or on your camera and then you can see exactly how the robot behaves and where the error was. So, record them and send us some of the results.\u003c/p\u003e"},"634":{"position":634,"title":"Advanced Light/Color sensors calibration for a minimum value for a single sensor","description":"\u003cp\u003eIn this tutorial, we would implement a program that finds the minimum and maximum value detected by the sensor and stores this two values in an array.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eSensor Raw Value\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eFirst, we detect the raw sensor for the given sensor. The block is available in the \"advance\" blocks palette.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eCompare of previous Min\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eFinding minimum and maximum values is one of the first programs in every programming course. In the implemented program, we constantly compare the currently detected value from the sensor with the value that is already considered a minimum. If the currently detected value is less than the known minimum that the currently detected value should become the minimum.  \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe comparison as pseudo code looks like this\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-family:Courier New,Courier,monospace;\"\u003eif currentValue \u0026lt; knownMinimum then currentValue is set to the value of knownMinimum\u003c/span\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe same logic is implemented in the program with the only difference that the knownMinimum is stored in an array.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eStoring min and max in an array\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe array is organized in the following way. Cell 0 stores Minimum for Sensor 1. Cell 1 stores Maximum for Sensor 1. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eCell 2 stores Mimimum for Sensor 2. Cell 3 stores Maximum for Sensor 2. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eSo the odds store the minimum values and the evens stores the maximums.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Sensors,EV3,Light and Color Sensor,FLL,Programming","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eIn the previous tutorial we stopped at the initialized block where we start the program, it initializes the array, shows the value of this array on the brick screen and now it's time to actually move forward and find the minimum and maximum value for a single sensor - to calibrate a single sensor. If we look at the program that we've provided with the course the calibration EV3, you can see the whole logic of the program and we've already in our example that we are developing during the tutorial we've already implemented the InitArray. Next, we need to do the calibration. And this is the part with the calibration. So, we'll do it in a very simple way for a single sensor. And then we'll do it for more than one sensor. First, what we want to do is to move forward. And I'll just move forward with both of the motors for unlimited amount of time and just forward with a power of 20.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThen we must do some logic in a loop. Detect the minimum and maximum. And we'll do this for exactly one second. There are many different ways to stop the calibration but the simplest way is to just wait for about a second. And then we stop with both motors. We just set off here. We start moving forward, we do some calibration and we'll have to implement the calibration in this loop, we do the calibration for about 1 second and then we stop. To do the actual calibration let's first look at the example at the program that we've attached to the course and it has a new block that's called CalibrateMinMax. And if you enter into this new block,\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003ewe have 4 different min and max values that are calibrated. And the whole logic is actually it's pretty large you can see\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003ebut you can also see that there is a repeating pattern.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThese are switches. It is a repeating pattern. And we'll do it for a single sensor. Let me just zoom in. The logic for calibrating the first sensor is actually in these few blocks here. And the rest are the same blocks but just for the other sensors. This is for sensor on port 1 and the rest are for port 2, port 3, port 4. And we have the whole block calibrating the minimum and maximum for the different sensors. How do we do this? Let's just go through the solution that's already implemented and then we'll implement it ourself. First, we read the value from the sensor - the raw value then we compare it with the minimum value that we already have in the array and if we found a new value that's less than the minimum value, we set this value as the current minimum value. And we do the same thing for the maximum. So, we get the value from the sensor and if this value from the sensor is more than the current maximum value then we just set this new value to the current maximum value. And that's basically the logic. Let's implement it ourself. Going to our example program in the loop what I'll do is just read the value - the raw sensor value on let's say in port 2 because I have a light sensor detected on port 2. Then I must read the value from the array. And to read it from an array I first need the block for an array and we read a numeric array and this is the MinMax Array then we have an operation for reading this array and the operation is to read the value in the first cell - on cell 0. Then we must compare these 2 values. The way we compare them - we use a compare block - right here. And we compare the value from the array - the current minimum value with the value from the sensor. And if the value from the array is greater than the current value, this means that we have a new minimum value. For this we must check with a switch. Configure this switch for logic, make it flat, attach the logic.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd if value 'a' is greater than value 'b' this means that the array minimum value is greater than the current minimum value, we must store the current minimum in the array. The way we store it - we take a variable,\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003ewe take an operation, we read the numeric array,\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eit's a single array and then we write in the first cell a value and this value is the value from the sensor. And here I'll just zoom out, take the value from the sensor and add it right here. So, this is our block for we have the minimum variable then we have this operation and after we write the value we must write a whole array in a new array block right here. And we write a numeric array MinMax\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eand in this way we read a value from an array and we write it back. So, again this is only for calibrating the minimum value for sensor 2. While moving we'll store this because these sensor 2 let's store it in the second cell not the 0 cell because the 0 and 1 are for the first sensor but for the second sensor we have the second and the third cell. And in this way we store the minimum value in the second cell - in the cell with index 2.\u003c/p\u003e"},"669":{"position":669,"title":"Keep the LEGO robot orientation straight. Proportional Part. Coefficients.","description":"\u003cp\u003eWe should multiply the error by a certain number and then add it to the steering of the LEGO Mindstorms Steering block. In this way, by changing the coefficient we change how much/fast should the proportional part influence the steering of the robot. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eInfluence of the coefficient\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch4\u003eWhen the robot is oscillating too much - this means that the coefficient for the proportional part is too large. It should be reduced.\u003c/h4\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWhen the robot is not returning fast enough to the straight orientation - this means that the coefficient for the proportional part is too small. It should be increased.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Math,EV3,Gyro Sensor,Sensors,Physics,FLL,Programming","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003ePreviously we did this very small and interesting program for keeping the orientation of our robot straight and it was using the gyro sensor and it is a proportional algorithm where we just apply the value of the gyro sensor to the steering block. And if the value of the gyro sensor is like 10, this means that the steering will steer more to the left or more to the right and the larger the value, the more the steering. And there is one more thing that we have to mention and this is how to add a coefficient here to control how much should the gyro sensor apply to the steering. And this is the thing I would like to do in this video. What you should generally do it's a good practice is the following way: In this program you use the math block and it's a very simple equation we must do. And we take the value of the gyro sensor and we add it to the math block and then we multiply this value by something. And the result goes in the steering block. Now this is a very simple change but very powerful. The idea of the change is the following. If the gyro sensor detects an angle of 10 degrees for example then we apply these 10 degrees to the steering. If the gyro sensor detects 100 degrees, then we apply 100. So, we directly take the value of the gyro sensor and we directly apply to the steering. And this might be too much for the steering or it might be too little and this depends on the robot. So, what should happen for example if we detect with the gyro sensor a value of 2? And we would like to apply a steering of 10 to the steering block because this is the way our steering is constructed. What we should do is multiply this value by some coefficient and let's say this coefficient is 2. This means that if the gyro sensor detects 1, so this is the difference between moving forward and slightly to the right and if it detects a value of 1, we multiply this value by 2 and it will try to faster return to the straight position. It will much faster try to return to the straight position. If we have a value of let's say 10,\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003ethen even a very small change in the gyro sensor would make the robot turn very fast and try to return very fast to the straight position. And this is something that you should experiment with depending on your robot and the size of the field and the requirements of the competition that you are trying to achieve. So, it is important to have this coefficient. It could be just one or it could be even less that 1 let's say 0.3. And there is no golden rule here or no golden value. It is something that depends on the conditions. So, you should experiment and find the value that matches the best for your robot and the behavior that you would like to get from your robot.\u003c/p\u003e"},"676":{"position":676,"title":"Different power sources for the Raspberry PI and the motors ","description":"\u003cp\u003eWe have two power sources (batteries) - one power source is for the controller, the Raspberry PI, and one power source is for the motors. What is the separation between the power sources and why it exists? Why do we need two power sources? We need the different power sources because there is not enough power otherwise. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003ePowering the motors\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe Remote control car comes with a place for batteries to be included. These batteries power the motors and the electronics that the car has by default. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/117/content/power_batteries.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eAdditional Power source for the Raspberry Pi\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe Raspberry Pi is a small, but powerful computer. Its consumption of energy is rather large compared to the default electronics in the car. Because of this large consumption, we need an additional power source. Otherwise, we would have to change the batteries of the car way too often and that would be very inconvenient.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/110/content/power_bank.jpg\"\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/110/content/power_bank.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/118/content/raspberry_pi.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy not power the motors with the power bank?\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eYes, it is possible to power the motors with the power bank. But this is what would happen: The current output of the power bank is about 2A (ampers - a measurement for current flow). The Raspberry Pi requires about 2A. Not all the time, but generally. Each motor could also drain about 2A. In the end, if we power everything from the Power Bank the Raspberry Pi will turn off. It's like turning off your brain and leaving your legs working. Bad things could happen :) That's why it is a good practice to keep two power sources. One for the electronics and one for the motors. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Learn At Home,Batteries,Raspberry PI,STEM,Fun","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eBy now the first step should be completed and you should have the application downloaded and installed on your phone. And this is the current layout of the application as we recorded the video. In future versions the layout might be different but now this is the layout. First step is completed - we have the application downloaded on the phone. The second step is to power this microcontroller and for this we'll use a power bank. And now comes the natural question - why do we need a power bank when we have batteries that could alright be placed on the car. Let's start with this question and with the simple answer of this question. We have two power sources - batteries. One power source is for the microcontroller and the other power source is for the motors. What is the separation between the power sources and why it exists? Why do we need two power sources? We need different power sources because there is simply not enough power in the system. The remote control car - this one here it comes with a place where we can put the batteries. These batteries power the motors and the electronics of the remote control car. And we've prepared such batteries - these are just standard batteries. Additional power source for the Raspberry Pi is the power bank. The Raspberry Pi is quite small but it's a powerful computer. Its consumption of energy is rather large compared to the default electronics that's in the car. Because of this large consumption we need an additional power source. Otherwise we would have to change the batteries of the car way way too often. Some of you might ask why not power the motors of the car with the power bank. Yes, it is possible to power the motors with the power bank but this is what would happen. The current output of the power bank is about 2 A and an ampere (A) is a measurement of the flow of current. The microcontroller that we are currently using requires about 2 A to function not all the time, but generally it requires about 2 A. And each motor of the car also drains about 2 A. In the end if we power everything from the power bank, the Raspberry will turn off. So, if we power everything from the power bank, the Raspberry will turn off. There's simply just not enough power. It's like turning your brain off and leaving everything to your legs. That's why it's a good practice to keep two power sources. One for the microcontroller and another power source for the motors. So, if we turn off something, it will be just the motors when we drain these batteries. And our brain will continue working. How do we connect the power bank to the Raspberry Pi? It's quite easy. You might have a different power bank but they are currently working all in the same way. We use this USB cable, we connect it to the out of the power bank and we connect the other end to the Raspberry Pi. And right here you can see the input for the power and then there might be a button on the power bank we press the button and the power bank powers the controller. And you can see a small diode right here that's turned red. And I could remove the cable and the diode will no longer emit light. Again I place the cable and we see this small diode. So, we've successfully powered the microcontroller but nothing happens. Follow the instructions below and connect the power bank to the microcontroller.\u003c/p\u003e"},"683":{"position":683,"title":"Opening the RC Remote Control Car","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe course is designed to be used with almost every remote controlled car. The process of opening the car will be different for different cars but there are basic principles that you could follow.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eTL. DR.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eRemove the screws and open the car\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eDifferent cars\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe following three cars were part of the cars with which the course has been completed.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/148/content/bmw_remote_controll_car.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cdiv class=\"row\"\u003e\r\n\u003cdiv class=\"col-sm-6\"\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/143/content/car1.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/div\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cdiv class=\"col-sm-6\"\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/144/content/car2.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/div\u003e\r\n\u003c/div\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eRemoving the screws\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eAt the bottom of the car, this is where the screws are. The car might have 4, 6, 8 or actually any number of screws. Be prepared.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cdiv class=\"row\"\u003e\r\n\u003cdiv class=\"col-sm-6\"\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/145/content/car_holes.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/div\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cdiv class=\"col-sm-6\"\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/146/content/car2_holes.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/div\u003e\r\n\u003c/div\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eSpecial cases and hidden screws\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eSometimes there are some special cases and hidden screws. Some manufacturers like to hide them where the wheels are. Like in the picture below.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/147/content/car_hidden_screw.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Learn At Home,Reverse Engineering,Classes with students,Fun","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eIn this tutorial I would like to open with you this remote controlled car. In the course we can use all sorts of cars and the idea of the course is to learn more about artificial intelligence and to learn how to program, and to develop mobile applications, and to learn to communicate with the Internet but I would also like to keep in touch with the hardware. And that's why we are using a remote control car. The course is designed to be used with almost every remote controlled car. The process of opening the car will be different for different cars but there are some basic principles you could follow. As a summary of the video we just remove the screws that are at the bottom of the car with a screw driver. You could see that at the bottom of the car there are a number of holes - this one, this one, this one, this one and there are 2 at the front. So, depending on the car that you have there might be 4, 6. We've seen cars with 8 different screws that must be removed. So, let's remove them.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eOkay, so right here in my improvised holder I have 4 screws so the other two are somewhere here in the holes. And this is a magnetic screw driver so probably you should be able and I should be able to just pull them out but it is possible that they're stuck. This one is right here. Okay, so we have 5 and it is very important to keep them close to you not to lose them. And now let's try to open the car. Very careful without any force and the last screw falls. And this is the car. We've opened our remote control car and now we're ready to discuss what's inside this car.\u003c/p\u003e"},"684":{"position":684,"title":"Name of the parts in a opened Remote Control car","description":"\u003cp\u003eGive it a name and you will have power over it. I learned this from an MIT professor. So let's give the part of the car names. Then we could refer to them. Talk to them. Change them. Do all kinds of things with them. Give it a name and you will have power over it.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eTL. DR.\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eFront Motor, Back Motor, Diodes, Cables, Controller (default), Switch\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eThe car when opened\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/149/content/open_bmw_stem_car.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eFront Motor\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eLocate the front motor at the ... front of the car. It is this small white element. Or at least this is its body.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/150/content/front_motor_bwm_rc_car_stem.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eBack Motor\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/151/content/stem_bmw_back_motor_rc_car.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eDiodes - use for the car lights\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/152/content/bmw_diodes_for_lights.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eController\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThis is the default controller. The one that we are going to remove\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/153/content/controller_default_for_bmw_rc_toy_car.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eSwitch\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe switch is used for turning the car on an off. It is connected to the batteries. We will keep the switch.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/154/content/switch_batteries_stem_on_bmw.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eCables\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWell, you can see them. They are all over the place.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Learn At Home,Reverse Engineering,Classes with students","subtitles":null},"714":{"position":714,"title":"What are the indications that the Raspberry Pi controller has started?","description":"\u003cp\u003eWe've just plugged in the power bank in the Raspberry Pi controller. Has it started? Is it doing something? Why is it not moving? Simply put the raspberry power a small red diode and it just emits light. Well, it's on, but it will do nothing else.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eThe electronics starts, but nothing much happens\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWhen you power the Raspberry Pi you start the processor and it will try to process different instructions that are given to it. It tries to read the instructions from the memory. But since there is no memory installed currently on our microcontroller there is nothing that the controller could do. It is not consuming any energy (or at least very small). It is more or less in a standby mode.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/118/content/raspberry_pi.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eStandby mode\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe controller is ready to do something useful if we give it instructions to do something useful. The way we give it instructions is to record those instructions on the SD card and place the SD card in the controller. This will be something that we would do in the next section of the course. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Learn At Home,STEM,Raspberry PI,Batteries,Fun","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eWe've just plugged the power bank into the microcontroller. Has it started? Is it doing something meaningful? Why is it not working? Simply put the Raspberry power a small diode located right here and it emits light. Well, it's on but it will do nothing else. When you power the microcontroller you start the processor and it will try to process different instructions that are given to it. It tries to read instructions from the memory. But since there is no memory installed currently on our microcontroller there is nothing that the controller could do. It is not consuming any energy or at least very small. It is more or less in a standby mode. The controller is ready to do something usefull if we give instructions to it to do something useful. The way we give instructions is to record those instructions on the SD card and place the SD card into the controller. This will be something that we'll do in the next section of the course.\u003c/p\u003e"},"746":{"position":746,"title":"Types of breadboard jumper cables in the set for the Perfect Course.","description":"\u003cp\u003eIn the set for the Perfect Course, you have 3 different type of cables. They are called Breadboard Jumper Cables. We would need to use them to extend the default cables on the car and to connect the car components to our new controller\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eTL. DR.\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThere are three types of cables: M-M (\u003cstrong\u003eM\u003c/strong\u003eale to \u003cstrong\u003eM\u003c/strong\u003eale), M-F (\u003cstrong\u003eM\u003c/strong\u003eale to \u003cstrong\u003eF\u003c/strong\u003eemale) and F-F (\u003cstrong\u003eF\u003c/strong\u003eemale to \u003cstrong\u003eF\u003c/strong\u003eemale)\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy do we need these cables?\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe ends of these cables are with \"special\" pins that allow us to more easily connect them to the driver, to the controller and to other elements and all this \u003cstrong\u003ewithout soldering\u003c/strong\u003e. See the picture below. The goal of the course is to have all of the tasks accomplished without soldering.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/164/content/easy_attach_cable_with_jumpers.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Learn At Home,Reverse Engineering,Electronics,Basic,Classes with students","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eIn the set for the Perfect Course we have 3 different types of cables. They are called breadboard jumper cables. We would need to use them to extend the default cables of the car to connect the car components to our new controller. Based on the connectors of these cables they are referred to as female to female male to female and male to male. This is the way cables are referred in our world in the engineering world. Now, why do we need them? At the end we would like to connect the components of the car with some of the components like the driver or the microcontroller that we have and these cables have some connectors at the end - some special ends that are called pins that make this very convenient. For example, if I open the cable, and now if I need to connect the driver, I could just put this pin right here and connect it. Then I can connect something else at the other end\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003elike this and we can extend them, connect them to something else and then I could connect them to the Raspberry Pi in our case to one of the pins. And in this case without any soldering because our goal for this first module of the course is to have the whole module without any soldering we can use the cables and we can connect the different components without any soldering. So, that's the goal of these cables and that's why we are using these breadboard jumper cables.\u003c/p\u003e"},"749":{"position":749,"title":"Extending cables with Heat-shrink tubing","description":"\u003cp\u003eAt the beginning of this video tutorial, we would have two separate cables. At the end of the tutorial, we would have a single, longer cable. The two cables will be connected to each other using a Heat-Shrink Tubing  \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eTL. DR.\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003ePlace Heat-Shrink Tubing on one of the cables. Twist the two ends of the cables together. Move the tubing above the twisted ends. Heat the tubing with the lighter and the cables will be connected. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is Heat-Shrink Tubing?\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThis is a tube from a special material. When heated with a lighter the tubing will shrink. If the two ends of the cables are in the shrink it will glue them together. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/165/content/heat_shrink_tube.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to use the heat-shrink tubing?\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eGet the elements that you need. Cable to be extended. 2-3 centimetres of Heat-Shrink Tubing and a cable. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/166/content/heat_shrink_cut.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eCut one end of a M-M cable.\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/167/content/cut_the_end.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eAfter cutting this is what you have.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/168/content/cut_result.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003ePlace the Heat Shrink Tubing on the cable.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/170/content/heat_shrink_put.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eTwist the two ends of the cables\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/171/content/twisted_cables.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eMove the Heat-shrink tubing over the twisted ends.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/172/content/heat_shrink_over.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eHeat the tubing with a lighter. This is the final result.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/173/content/final_heat_shrink.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eCongratulations. You have one of the cables extended. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Learn At Home,Jumper Cables,Basic,Classes with students","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eIn the beginning of this video tutorial we have two separate cables - the one on the car and the one in this bag. At the end of the tutorial we would have a single longer cable. The two cables will be connected to each other using a heat shrink tubing. Let's start with what we need. We need a heat shrink tube and what is this? It's a special kind of material that when heated it shrinks and it glues the cables that are inside. And it is easily found. We've added a few meters in the set. How do we prepare? First, we unwrap the heat shrink tubing then we cut about 2-3 cm or an inch like this\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003ethen from the bag with the cables we take one cable that's male to male.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd let's take one cable that's male to male.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eBecause I would like to extend this white cable here it is convenient to use a white cable. It is not mandatory but it is convenient.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd I take a single white cable. Then we take the scissors\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eand we cut one of the ends. Now, be careful here because you measure twice, you cut once. You have a male to male cable and you cut one of the ends. Then we take the lighter and we must prepare this cable to be extended.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWe have the conductor.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNow we take the heat shrink tubing that we've prepared earlier and now we place the cable inside. Like this.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThen we take the cable that we would like to extend and we twist the two ends of this cable of both cables. We twist them. Let's turn this\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eso that you can see it.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eTake the cables\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eand we twist them one to the other.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIn this way we attach the two conductors to each other.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eSomething like this.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd then we place the heat shrink tubing over this part\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003elike this. And now we take a lighter and we are careful not to light and to burn the cable but the heat shrink tubing. Just small is enough.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd that's it. The cable is now attached. And we have this cable extended. It starts from the front motor right here and at the other end of the cable we have a very convenient connector that we can now use to further extend the cable or to attach to some of the controllers, drivers and other components. Use some of the others male to male cables and extend all the cables in your car. It will take some time. You should extend the cables at the lower part of the car - the bottom and the upper part of the car. And at the end you would have all the cables extended and ready to use and we can then continue attaching them to the different components.\u003c/p\u003e"},"798":{"position":798,"title":"How to connect the front car motor to the L298N Motor Driver","description":"\u003cp\u003eIn this tutorial, we would look at how to connect the front motor of the car to the L298N motor driver. The driver is already connected to the Raspberry Pi or if it is still not connected you should connect it now. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eTL. DR.\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\"Right\" cable from front motor goes to Output 3. \"Left\" cable from front motor goes to Output 4.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eFront motor to Motor Driver\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eMake sure cables are extended. Connect the loose ends to the PCB Terminals (what a nice word we've learned).\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/216/content/motor_driver_front_motor_perfect_course.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Learn At Home,Raspberry PI,Motor Driver,Basic,Classes with students","subtitles":null},"981":{"position":981,"title":"Introduction","description":"\u003cp\u003eWelcome to the first week of the Mindstorms EV3 Robotics Training and Certification Course. Before we can proceed with the main part of the course, you will need to start with some preliminary tasks.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe first thing that we need to know about you is your profile and your background. In order to streamline the process, we have assembled a list with questions for you to fill, which you can find out below.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eSecond, you will need to setup yourself a Google profile, as we will be using Google Hangout as a meeting environment. Take your time and try out before the start of the first meeting that you have installed the necessary plug-ins to run Google Hangout in your browser, as well as that your microphone and camera work properly.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eFinally, you will have to build a robot with which you will work during the first learning session and have to take a look at our Methodology of teaching in robotics classes. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThat is all for now. If you need any assistance you can drop us a line in the chat in the bottom right corner or \u003ca href=\"/contact-us\"\u003econtact us\u003c/a\u003e.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"","tags":"","subtitles":null},"467":{"position":467,"title":"Improving FLL Robot Game. Recap on Lifting the robot","description":"\u003cp\u003eLet us do a quick recap of the whole lifting mission and its solution\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eStrategies\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eFrom which side do you lift the robot? Is the robot horizontal, vertical or there are other possibilities? This is an important strategic question that you should take into account when deciding how to approach such a mission.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eTypes of lifting\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eYou could use simple legs with gear wheels, or a rack or, as we did finally, a scissors mechanism with some planetary gear wheels. Yes, it sounds difficult, but as you have seen it could be very easy. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Attachments,FLL 2016,Construction,Rack,FLL,Classes with students","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eAnd while recording the previous part of the video I thought that it would be a good idea to lift the whole mission model so that you can see below the robot. You see that the whole robot is actually in the air and it's like 6 or 7 Lego units in the air. And it is stable. This mission model is fixed during the competition and it's not moving. I am fixing it here with hands but during the competition it is fixed. And this is how it looks like.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eI would like to stop for a moment and to recap how we lifted the robot and why we stopped at this solutions and what are other solutions for lifting and attaching the robot. First, we started with the Box Robot and with the Box Robot we draw some strategy of how we want to attach this robot and where is the center of gravity, how heavy is the robot and from where we could approach the mission model. So, we decided we should move to the front but it is also an idea to just rotate the whole robot or lift the robot like this. So, there are many different ways. The robot has 4 sides and has up and down so this makes it 6 sides and you can come up with solutions for attaching it to the mission model on either of the sides. Either on the 4 sides or from the bottom or from the top. The other thing that was interesting is that we presented 3 solutions and these 3 solutions involved the first one was with the large 40 teeth gear wheels, the second one was with a rack. I have the rack here. It will be for another mission but it's a principle for the rack. And finally we decided to use a scissor mechanism right here on the two sides of the robot to make it work and attach to the mission model. One of the very very interesting solutions that we solved from one of the teams this year is that they have a large robot and with this large robot they move around the field, they solve most of the missions but then when they go for the attachment they just remove the brick and the motors and just place it on the side and it's a very small robot. Again, looking like a box but a very small and they go for this mission model. When the robot is not that heavy and it's easier to attach itself to the mission model. And that was an interesting solution.\u003c/p\u003e"},"894":{"position":894,"title":"Introduction","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"","subtitles":null},"812":{"position":812,"title":"How to program the EV3 color sensor","description":"\u003cp\u003eAs with the two sensors we have covered so far, the color sensor can be used as a condition for the wait block, the switch block or the loop block. The color sensor, as well as the ultrasonic sensor, has several modes. Nevertheless, these modes are substantially different. While the ultrasonic sensor has two modes - one to work in centimeters and one in inches, the color sensor has three modes - one for detecting the color of an object, one for ambient light and one for reflected light.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eIf you put a wait block on the canvas, then from the drop-down menu select color sensor and then \"\u003cstrong\u003eCompare\u003c/strong\u003e\", you will see the three available modes: \u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/230/content/color_sensor_modes.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cul\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eColor\u003c/strong\u003e - If you choose that mode, the sensor will evaluate the color of an object. We use that mode for solving the Rubik's cube, for sorting balls, for programming color code etc. The diode of the sensor emits red, green and blue light. Depending on the intensity of the reflected light in each of the three light spectrums, the robot can differentiate 8 colors. Each color is encoded as a number:\r\n\r\n\t\u003cdiv class=\"row\"\u003e\r\n\t\u003cdiv class=\"col-md-4\"\u003e\n\u003ccode\u003e0\u003c/code\u003e = No color;\u003c/div\u003e\r\n\r\n\t\u003cdiv class=\"col-md-4\"\u003e\n\u003ccode\u003e1\u003c/code\u003e = Black;\u003c/div\u003e\r\n\r\n\t\u003cdiv class=\"col-md-4\"\u003e\n\u003ccode\u003e2\u003c/code\u003e = Blue;\u003c/div\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/div\u003e\r\n\r\n\t\u003cdiv class=\"row\"\u003e\r\n\t\u003cdiv class=\"col-md-4\"\u003e\n\u003ccode\u003e3\u003c/code\u003e = Green;\u003c/div\u003e\r\n\r\n\t\u003cdiv class=\"col-md-4\"\u003e\n\u003ccode\u003e4\u003c/code\u003e = Yellow;\u003c/div\u003e\r\n\r\n\t\u003cdiv class=\"col-md-4\"\u003e\n\u003ccode\u003e5\u003c/code\u003e = Red;\u003c/div\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/div\u003e\r\n\r\n\t\u003cdiv class=\"row\"\u003e\r\n\t\u003cdiv class=\"col-md-4\"\u003e\n\u003ccode\u003e6\u003c/code\u003e = White;\u003c/div\u003e\r\n\r\n\t\u003cdiv class=\"col-md-4\"\u003e\n\u003ccode\u003e7\u003c/code\u003e = Brown;\u003c/div\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/div\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eReflected Light Intensity\u003c/strong\u003e - If you choose that mode, the sensor will measure the amount of light reflected. We use that mode, when we want to differentiate lighter from darker objects, as in following a line. Here, the diode of the sensor emits red light and measures the amount of light reflected from the surface of the object. The value, returned by the sensor is between 0 and 100. The greater the number is, the lighter the object is.\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAmbient Light Intensity\u003c/strong\u003e - If you choose that mode, the sensor will measure the ambient light. That mode is similar to the mode used in the sensors of lamps that turn on on their own when it gets dark. We can use it to build a robot following a light source. In that case the diode does not emit light. The value returned by the sensor is between 0 and 100. The value is small if the room is dark and bigger if the there is light in the room.\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ul\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eLet us take a look at the settings for each of the modes in greater detail.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eColor Mode\u003c/strong\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cdiv class=\"row\"\u003e\r\n\u003cdiv class=\"col-md-4\"\u003e\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/231/content/color_mode.jpg\" style=\"float: left;\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\u003c/div\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cdiv class=\"col-md-8\"\u003e\r\n\u003cp\u003eAs with every other sensor, we start with the port number the sensor is connected to. This is shown by the number in the upper right corner of the block. Afterwards, from the first (and only) field we choose upon which color to wait. \u003cstrong\u003eNote that you can choose more than one color, hence wait for more than one color.\u003c/strong\u003e So, for instance, if we want to go forward until we detect a red or black line, we just need to select 1 and 5.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\u003c/div\u003e\r\n\u003c/div\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eReflected Light Intensity Mode\u003c/strong\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cdiv class=\"row\"\u003e\r\n\u003cdiv class=\"col-md-4\"\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/233/content/reflected_light_mode.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/div\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cdiv class=\"col-md-8\"\u003e\r\n\u003cp\u003eAgain, we can set the number of the port we have connected the sensor to from the number in the upper right corner of the block. The other two settings of the block are similar to the ones of the ultrasonic sensor. From the first parameter we choose whether to wait for:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\u003c/div\u003e\r\n\u003c/div\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cdiv class=\"row\"\u003e\r\n\u003cdiv class=\"col-md-4\"\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/236/content/threshold_signs.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/div\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cdiv class=\"col-md-8\"\u003e\r\n\u003cul\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\r\n\t\u003cp\u003e\u003ccode\u003e0\u003c/code\u003e = the value the sensor reads to be \u003cstrong\u003eequal\u003c/strong\u003e to the threshold value;\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\r\n\t\u003cp\u003e\u003ccode\u003e1\u003c/code\u003e = the value the sensor reads to be \u003cstrong\u003edifferent\u003c/strong\u003e from the threshold value;\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\r\n\t\u003cp\u003e\u003ccode\u003e2\u003c/code\u003e = the value the sensor reads to be \u003cstrong\u003egreater than\u003c/strong\u003e the threshold value;\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\r\n\t\u003cp\u003e\u003ccode\u003e3\u003c/code\u003e = the value the sensor reads to be \u003cstrong\u003egreater or equal\u003c/strong\u003e to the threshold value;\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\r\n\t\u003cp\u003e\u003ccode\u003e4\u003c/code\u003e = the value the sensor reads to be \u003cstrong\u003eless than\u003c/strong\u003e the threshold value;\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\r\n\t\u003cp\u003e\u003ccode\u003e5\u003c/code\u003e = the value the sensor reads to be \u003cstrong\u003eless than or equal to\u003c/strong\u003e the threshold value;\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ul\u003e\r\n\u003c/div\u003e\r\n\u003c/div\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cdiv class=\"row\"\u003e\r\n\u003cdiv class=\"col-md-4\"\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/240/content/reflected_light_mode_threshold.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/div\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cdiv class=\"col-md-8\"\u003e\r\n\u003cp\u003eFrom the next parameter, we can set the threshold value with which we compare the current read value of the sensor.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\u003c/div\u003e\r\n\u003c/div\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eSo, if you want to program the robot to move forward until it detects a black line and the sensor reads 23 on black and 48 on the mat, then you need to set the block to wait until the value is less than 35.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Light and Color Sensor,Physics,Basic,Classes with students","subtitles":null},"847":{"position":847,"title":"Make sure that students go through the next couple of tasks","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"Teacher's Note,Classes with students","subtitles":null},"90":{"position":90,"title":"How to solve \"Using the Right Senses\" mission from FIRST LEGO League World Class competition","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis time we stop on \"Using the Right Senses\" mission, or actually on how to solve the \"Right Senses\" mission without \"Senses\" (sensors). To achieve that we use the carabineer counstructed in one of the previous tutorials, of course after a small modification.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eOnce again the video begins with repeating the mission requirements. \u003cimg alt='\"Using the Right Senses\" mission requirements' src=\"http://media.fllcasts.com/assets/episodes/notes/090/mission_requirements.png\" style=\"border-style:solid;border-width:1px;height:112px;width:600px;\"\u003eYou can find the full document with all mission rules \u003ca href=\"http://www.firstlegoleague.org/sites/default/files/Challenge/FLL_WORLD_CLASS/FLL-WORLD-CLASS-Challenge-FINAL-v2.pdf\"\u003ehere\u003c/a\u003e. As in \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/89-solving-the-first-lego-league-world-class-robotics-competition-mission\"\u003eEpisode 89\u003c/a\u003e, where we were interested not only in solving the mission, but in taking the loop, here we proceed the same way. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIn \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/47-how-to-on-taking-loops\"\u003eEpisode 47\u003c/a\u003e, we made an overview on how to take loops and suggested a carabineer attachment for taking the loops. In the \"Robot Competition\" mission it was hard to implement this solution, but today I have stopped on using a carabineer for taking the loop from the mission model. You could find building instructions under the Materials tab, below the video in \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/47-how-to-on-taking-loops\"\u003eEpisode 47\u003c/a\u003e.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eHowever we face another challenge. When the lock falls down it locks the carabineer. To overcome this we add one more part to the carabineer as shown below:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"Tweaking the carabineer, step 1\" src=\"http://media.fllcasts.com/assets/episodes/notes/090/carabineer_001.jpg\" style=\"border-style:solid;border-width:1px;height:338px;width:600px;\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"Tweaking the carabineer, step 2\" src=\"http://media.fllcasts.com/assets/episodes/notes/090/carabineer_002.jpg\" style=\"border-style:solid;border-width:1px;height:338px;width:600px;\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"Tweaking the carabineer, step 3\" src=\"http://media.fllcasts.com/assets/episodes/notes/090/carabineer_003.jpg\" style=\"border-style:solid;border-width:1px;height:338px;width:600px;\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"Tweaking the carabineer, step 4\" src=\"http://media.fllcasts.com/assets/episodes/notes/090/carabineer_004.jpg\" style=\"border-style:solid;border-width:1px;height:338px;width:600px;\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"Tweaking the carabineer, step 5\" src=\"http://media.fllcasts.com/assets/episodes/notes/090/carabineer_005.jpg\" style=\"border-style:solid;border-width:1px;height:338px;width:600px;\"\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"Tweaking the carabineer, step 6\" src=\"http://media.fllcasts.com/assets/episodes/notes/090/carabineer_006.jpg\" style=\"border-style:solid;border-width:1px;height:338px;width:600px;\"\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"Tweaking the carabineer, step 7\" src=\"http://media.fllcasts.com/assets/episodes/notes/090/carabineer_007.jpg\" style=\"border-style:solid;border-width:1px;height:338px;width:600px;\"\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"Tweaking the carabineer, step 8\" src=\"http://media.fllcasts.com/assets/episodes/notes/090/carabineer_008.jpg\" style=\"border-style:solid;border-width:1px;height:338px;width:600px;\"\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eYour turn\u003c/strong\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eDid you like the idea? I would love to hear your suggestions for solving the mission!\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e\u003cem\u003eLet us know in the comments below!\u003c/em\u003e\u003c/strong\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,FLL 2014,Attachments,FLL,Construction","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003e- Today, we continue with the next mission from the 2014 First Lego League World Class Competition. I have decided to review using the Right Senses mission. The mission is easy I believe, but the challenge is how to achieve 100% success rate and how to solve it as easy as possible in order to have the opportunity to solve other missions on the same run.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAs usual, we begin with repeating the rules. The required condition visible in the end of the match to score the mission is that the loop is no longer touching the mission model. Here, once again, we have a required method for solving the mission-- the loop should be released due to the movement of the slider only. So you could not lift the part that walks the loop and take loop, but you need to push the slider in order to unlock the loop. The tricky part is that you should be careful with how much you push the slider because it can fall back and lock the loop once again. Here, I believe that taking the loop out of the mission model and taking the loop back to base are equivalent, but the second could give you extra points if you're planning to solve the project based learning mission. So from now on, my goal will be to take the loop back to base. We have many possibilities to achieve that, such as using an angle beam to walk the loop to the ground, or use an exo and et cetera. However, I believe the easiest way is to use a carabiner like the one from Episode 47. Actually, I will use the exact same for the purpose of the tutorial. Now, let's move on to the actual solving of the mission. You could attach the carabiner to the front of the robot and depending on robot construction you are using, this can be done in different ways. But here, I will use this dummy front where I have attached carabiner. Now when you put the robot against the mission model, the loop is unlocked and then, if you go back, the loop is taken. This will work in most cases, but have one downside--you need to be precise with how much you go forward. If you go to much, you can break the carabiner or the mission model and therefore fail the mission. If you do not, it is possible that the carabiner will not lock the loop. Of course, you could use the black line in front of the mission model to align, but it would be better if we make it simple, wanted. To achieve that, you need to put the carabiner closer to the center of your robot or if this is not possible, just add the parts, such as this one, to the front. Now we can make our robot go forward for a second or so. And first, the carabiner will lock the loop and second, the robot will be aligned to the mission model. In this case, we push the model in more stable point, so the probability to break is small. However, we face another challenge. If you push the slider all the way, the lock falls once again and locks the carabiner. So now, you could not go back without breaking the model. To overcome this, we will put something between the two axels. I have put this Lego Technic cross-block here. And now, if I push dummy against the mission model for one second and then go back, the loop is taken and the mission accomplished. Now, let's see a team using this technique. Now is your turn. Do you like the idea? I would love to hear your suggestions for solving the mission in the comments below. Bye.\u003c/p\u003e"},"764":{"position":764,"title":"Simulating servo behaviour","description":"\u003cp\u003eNow you should develop a program to make the motor reach the required position.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp id=\"yui_3_17_2_2_1520502934342_2285\"\u003eLet’s expand the table we have already discussed by including information about the position in degrees at which the motor was, the degrees at which it should rotate and its position in degrees in the end. Do you notice anything?\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/221/content/table2_english.jpg\" style=\"width: 762px;height: 509px;\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIf you subtract the degrees at which you want the motor to be from the degrees at which the motor was, you will get the degrees at which you should rotate the motor. Or:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cb\u003eDegrees of rotation = new position in degrees – previous position in degrees\u003c/b\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWe show that in the following program:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/192/content/servo_motor.jpg\" style=\"width: 404px;height: 167px;\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe first block reads the current position of the motor in degrees. Then you subtract it from the number below \u003cb\u003ea\u003c/b\u003e,\u003cb\u003e \u003c/b\u003ewhich is the required position. As a result, you get the degrees which the medium motor should rotate.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eCombine the upper two blocks in a MyBlock, so that when you input the required position in degrees, the motor will rotate the necessary number of degrees.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Classes with students","subtitles":null},"97":{"position":97,"title":"Rubber bands attachment for circular motion - solving FLL 2012 stove","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe attachment builds on previous episodes this time using two LEGO rubber bands. When a lever is released the rubber band exerts pressure on it and moves it in a circular motion. As an example we are solving the 2012 FIRST LEGO League, Senior Solutions, stove mission (which was quite interesting as a mission)\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eThe \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/resources/1\"\u003eFIRST LEGO League 2012\u003c/a\u003e, \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/search/senior+solutions\"\u003eSenior Solutions\u003c/a\u003e, Oven mission involved a circular motion. Teams had to build \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/search/attachments\"\u003eattachments\u003c/a\u003e that could move the Oven lever in half a circle. Now this proved to be challenging to do without the use of a motor. It is always a good idea to do every possible mission without a motor because you could save the motor for missions where it is actually not possible to accomplish without them. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eHaving said that, rubber bands for this mission is a very elegant solution.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eCheck out the video and leave a comment if you have any questions or suggestions for new videos.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003ePrevious videos on rubber bands:\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003col\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/91-rubber-bands-solving-the-first-lego-league-world-class-community-tree\" style=\"color: rgb(46, 49, 171);margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\"\u003eRubber bands - Solving the FIRST LEGO League World Class COMMUNITY TREE\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/92-rubber-bands-robot-attachment-that-trigers-with-a-motor\" style=\"color: rgb(46, 49, 171);margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\"\u003eRubber bands - LEGO robot attachment that triggers with a motor\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/93-rubber-bands-lego-robot-attachment-triggered-with-a-motor-part-2-removing-the-motor\" style=\"color: rgb(46, 49, 171);margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\"\u003eRubber bands - LEGO robot attachment triggered with a motor - part 2 removing the motor\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/94-rubber-bands-one-more-way-to-remove-the-lego-attachment-dependency-on-the-motor-for-triggering\" style=\"color: rgb(46, 49, 171);margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\"\u003eRubber bands - one more way to remove the LEGO attachment dependency on the motor for triggering\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/95-rubber-bands-pinless-attachment-for-taking-loops\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\"\u003eRubber bands pinless attachment for taking loops\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ol\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eOther pinless attachments:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003col\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/63-quick-pinless-attachments-for-competition-robots\" style=\"color: rgb(46, 49, 171);margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\"\u003eQuick Pinless Attachments for LEGO EV3 Competition Robots (Part 1)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/64-quick-pinless-attachments-for-lego-ev3-competition-robots-part-2\" style=\"color: rgb(46, 49, 171);font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;vertical-align: baseline;text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\"\u003eQuick Pinless Attachments for LEGO EV3 Competition Robots (Part 2)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ol\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Rubber band,Attachments,Lever,FLL,Construction","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eIn his video we'll use our rubber band attachment to solve the 2012 Senior Solutions competition model, the oven. Previously we used this for taking the loop and now we're gonna use this for the oven.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAs a reminder, this here is the competition model. It's a very interesting challenge because you must find the way to take this lever half circle and all the parts at the end must be black, all the parts that are facing up. Initially we have two black parts, two red parts and at the end we must have four black parts. So it's a complex mission and you can solve it with the motor, you can solve it with the rubber band. It's a little bit difficult to solve this mission with a passive attachment, attachment that does not use any motors or any rubber bands. And in today's video we will use attachment with the rubber band. This here is the attachment that we built. Just a small demonstration how the attachment works, we load the attachment. As we can see, it has a lever with a rubber band. And when we push on this axel here, this whole module will move back and it will release the lever like this. Again we load the attachment, we push on the axel and the lever is released. The rubber band is released and we can solve the mission. Now the whole attachment is, again, a pinless attachment. It's very easy to attach the robot. Just place the robot on top of the attachment and that's it. Very fast, very easy. Now let's see this in action. I'll turn the robot so that you can see it on camera. Now the robot is again moving on the field. It somehow reaches the mission model and we push to the oven. And as we push to the oven, the lever is rotated and we can see all the black parts here. So this working like 100% of the time. It's very interesting to see this second rubber band here. The purpose of this rubber band is to ease the loading. If we remove the rubber band. As you can see when we load, it's very difficult to fix this whole module. Because of the pressure from this rubber band, these axels are moving back. That's why we must add a second rubber band. And now it's very easy to load. This is a principle on how you can use levers and rubber bands. Of course the attachments will be a little more complex because we have this white part here for navigation and for easily moving to the oven. But at the end we just move to the oven, push. And as we push, the mission is solved.\u003c/p\u003e"},"1001":{"position":1001,"title":"Structured content at FLLCasts. Courses, CourseSections, Playlists, Tasks","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe content consists of \"Tutorials\", \"Materials\", \"Programs\", \"Playlists\", \"Courses\", \"CourseSections\", \"Tasks\"\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\"Courses\" and \"CourseSections\" structure the content and put the Tutorials and Programs and Materials in order. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch2\u003eCourse\u003c/h2\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eDifferent Tutorials combined with Materials and Programs and presented to students and teachers in a specific sequence all make up a course. The course gives us the order. Which tutorial is first. Should there be a specific program run on a robot after that. Which robot should be built by following a building instruction in the Material.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThink of Courses as a book. The Course does not have a starting date where students gather to participate in the Course. No. Students and teachers gather in a Group and they work with Tutorials, Materials and Courses. The Group of students and teachers could consume many course in an year and they could decide which course to follow today. The course is the book. When you enroll in the course we just measure when did you first enroll and what is your progress in the course. Not with whom you are participating, or who are the teachers and students in the course. Courses, as books don't have teachers and students. They could be read by anyone.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch2\u003eCourse Section\u003c/h2\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe CourseSection is a chapter in the course. Think of a course section as one class, or one topic or any way in which the structure of the course could be divided on smaller pieces. This is the CourseSection. A Course for students could be divided on 14 different sections, suitable for each week of the term. Or it could be divided on topics that are not connected with school years and terms. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch2\u003ePlaylist\u003c/h2\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThese are simpler than courses. These are just Tutorials in sequence. No Materials. No Programs.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch2\u003eTask\u003c/h2\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eA Task is something that should be completed. The Tasks are the glue between the content on the online platform and the actual world. A Task could require you to \"Build a robot\" or to \"Program a robot\" or to find a solution to a specific problem that was discussed in a Tutorial. Some Tasks require you to submit a picture or text. In this way we know the Task was completed. Tasks could be reused. The task to \"build a five minute bot\" could be used in lesson 1 of a course and in lesson 10. This means you have to complete the task in the first lesson and in the 10-th lesson. It's the same task, but it has a different context and could be completed many times.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"FLLCasts","subtitles":null},"524":{"position":524,"title":"VEX IQ. System of gears when throwing a ball with levers","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe topic of this tutorial is the purpose of a system of gears when throwing a ball.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eGears\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe two large gear wheels are powered by the motor and they rotate the smaller gear wheels. With a few gear wheels in the system, the speed of the lever is increased and the attachment could hit on the ball with larger speed and throw the ball further.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"VEX IQ,Lever,Construction","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eIn this video I would like to discuss the purpose of the system of gears and in this attachment there are two systems of gears for throwing the ball. Again, the attachment works in the following way. If I have the ball and I rotate the motor,\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eI could actually throw the ball.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIn the attachment we have two large gear wheels and I'm not sure about the number of teeth but you can check this. And we have the levers connected to two axles. These two axles are right here connected to a very small gear wheel. And this gear wheel works with the large gear wheel which is connected to an axle that's attached to the motor. So, it's actually the motor transferring power to the large gear wheel and from there to the small gear wheel and we do this to increase the speed. When you move you can first increase the length of the lever to increase the speed of this part that's actually hitting on the ball or you can use a system of gears. In our case we've used a system of gears with only two gear wheels on each side but you can extend this with 4 or 6 or 8 gear wheels and this will further increase the speed with which you hit on the ball. So, whenever you hit on the ball in a mission and you have to hit a ball or another object you can use a system of gears to increase the speed with which the lever moves.\u003c/p\u003e"},"842":{"position":842,"title":"Connecting Distance sensor to the Raspberry","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis is going to be one complex connection with four pins and three resistors, so brace yourselves!\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eTL:DR.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eYou better read the whole section, we are about to create voltage divider!\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003col class=\"arabic simple\"\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003ePower off the Raspberry.\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eConnect the VCC pin of the sensor to a 5V pin on the Raspberry (pin 2 or pin 4).\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eConnect the TRIG pin of the sensor to GPIO 5.\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eConnect the GND pin of the sensor to a ground pin on the Pi (pin 39).\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eConnect one end of a 220Ω resistor to GPIO 6.\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eConnect two 220Ω resistors one after the other and both of them to GND pin of the Raspberry (pin 34 or pin 30);\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eUse heat shrink tube to connect the single resistor, with the pair of resistors and an F-cable to the ECHO pin of the sensor.\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ol\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch2\u003eThis is a distance sensor\u003c/h2\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThat sensor is an ultrasonic distance sensor model HS-SR04. It can measure from 2cm up to 4m. The sensor works like a bat from the animal kingdom - it sends 40MHz sound impulse and receives reflections of that sound. The shorter the time between the transmission and the receiving, the closer the object is. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWe will use the sensor so that our car avoids obstacles.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch2\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/286/content/20180420_181654.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/h2\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch2\u003e \u003c/h2\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch2\u003eBasic connection of the first three ports of the sensor\u003c/h2\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eConnect Vcc of the sensor to +5V of the Raspberry, the red cable on the picture. There are at least two pins with +5V - pin 2 or pin 5.\u003cbr\u003e\r\nA reference image with the pin layout is attached in the end of the lesson.\u003cbr\u003e\r\nConnect TRIG to GPIO 5, the yellow cable on the picture.\u003cbr\u003e\r\nConnect GND of the sensor to some GND pin of the Raspberry, pin 39 for example with the gray cable on the picture.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/287/content/20180420_143344.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch2\u003e \u003c/h2\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch2\u003eCreating a voltage divider step by step\u003c/h2\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003ePurpose of voltage devider\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe sensor receives 5V as input and returns 5V output to the GPIO pins of the Raspberry. But the GPIOs are designed to receive up to 3.3 Volts. In order to lower that voltage we will create a voltage divider. \u003cbr\u003e\r\n \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is our target\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWe will connect the ECHO pin between two resistors. One is 220Ω, and the second is 440Ω. Because we don't have a 440Ω resistor, we will create one by connecting two 220Ω resistors one after the other.\u003cbr\u003e\r\nIn the end we connect 220Ω resistor to GPIO 6 and 440Ω resistor to GND.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/288/content/vd-0target.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eConnect two resistors one after the other and both to GND\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/289/content/vd-1.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e \u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eConnect a 220Ω resistor to an F-F cable and GPIO 6\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e[no image here]\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eConnect the ECHO pin between two of the resistors\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThat is the complex part. We must create three endings at once. We will use heat shrink tube again to connect them. \u003cbr\u003e\r\nCut a cable by half and use the F-ending to connect it to the ECHO pin. The loose end goes between two resistors ending and in a heat shrink tube.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/290/content/vd-3.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eHeat up the tube\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/291/content/vd-3_5.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e \u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eEnd result\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/292/content/vd-4result.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eLet'e repeat all the connections\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003col class=\"arabic simple\"\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eConnect the \u003cstrong\u003eVCC\u003c/strong\u003e pin of the sensor to a \u003cstrong\u003e5V\u003c/strong\u003e pin on the Raspberry (\u003cstrong\u003epin 2\u003c/strong\u003e or pin 4).\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eConnect the \u003cstrong\u003eTRIG\u003c/strong\u003e pin of the sensor to \u003cstrong\u003eGPIO 5\u003c/strong\u003e.\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eConnect the \u003cstrong\u003eGND\u003c/strong\u003e pin of the sensor to a \u003cstrong\u003eGND\u003c/strong\u003e pin on the Pi (\u003cstrong\u003epin 39\u003c/strong\u003e).\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eConnect \u003cstrong\u003eECHO\u003c/strong\u003e via 220Ω resistor to \u003cstrong\u003eGPIO 6\u003c/strong\u003e.\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eConnect \u003cstrong\u003eECHO\u003c/strong\u003e via two 220Ω resistors to \u003cstrong\u003eGND\u003c/strong\u003e pin of the Raspberry (\u003cstrong\u003epin 34\u003c/strong\u003e or pin 30);\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ol\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eReminder of the pin layout of the Raspberry Pi\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/293/content/raspberry_pi_layout.png\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"STEM,Python,Raspberry PI","subtitles":null},"1025":{"position":1025,"title":"Introduction","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis is the first lesson in which you will have to work with another pair of students. In each team of students one of the pairs will have to build the crane and the other one – the dump truck. The aim is to cooperate and the crane to load mineral resources in the dump truck which will have to transport them to the respective point.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eYour first task will be to choose another pair of students you will work with.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"","tags":"Classes with students","subtitles":null},"191":{"position":191,"title":"WRO Elementary 2015. Field Run. Part 1","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis is the final run for our World Robotics Olympiad (WRO) 2015 Elementary Challenge Robot. In \"dives\", detects the color of the pearl and then counts the number of Ping-Pong balls to release. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eThis WRO elementary challenge is great for working with students in the field of STEM. It has everything one could search for at this age of the students. The task involves working with a sensor and manipulating and object. It has a goal. And the whole program should be repeated three times. Which means that the robot should be stable. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eAll the episodes from the series are available at: \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/playlists/26\"\u003eWorld Robotics Olympiad 2015 Elementary\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eHere is how the robot looks at the end:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"FLLCasts Robot containing and releasing ball for WRO 2015\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"http://media.fllcasts.com/assets/episodes/notes/191/191_attachment2.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,WRO 2015,Gyro Sensor,Sensors,WRO,Construction","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eIn the previous videos we did a small introduction on the World Robotics Olympiad (WRO) 2015. This is the field. We've build a number of robots and that's our probably final version of the robot. In today's video we're going to solve part of the competition mission.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eFirst, the rules of the competitio,we have the robot and this robot dives. When it dives it collects different pearls and they are in different colors. They can be placed in different ways on this part of the field. Now when the robot dives, it must detect the colors of these blocks, these are the pearls and depending on this color it releases a number of ping pong balls in this red region and that's the mission and we must repeat this for the red region, for the yellow and there is a green region, right over there on the field. Generally at the competition you start with the green but, because we don't want to solve the whole competition we start in reverse with the red, so that we can show the principle. Let's see a complete run now of this robot and how it works. This here is the robot, it has a gyro sensor, a color sensor and all the balls are loaded. Now I'll start it and see how the mission is completed. Waiting.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe robot comes and aligns with the gyro sensor, so it is facing east then it comes and dives for the second pearl,\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003edetect the color of the pearl, it is red it aligns again, it is facing east, move, now is facing north, comes detects blue, then returns and it must release a different number of balls depending on the color.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eSo that's how we complete this mission. Let's go into more details how the robot works. A step by step execution of this mission along with a few explanations will look like this. Starting the program. I'll place the first pearl, right here. Program is downloaded, The robot moves, takes the first pearl and we here wait, we now face west but we move back, then we go for the second dive, we wait and now we dive and we take the second pearl, because we are facing north with the gyro sensor and we have a special block that's called align and it will face the robot in different directions using only the gyro sensor.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt will now go for the third pearl, return and now continue back to base and we release some of the balls.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhat is interesting for this program is that we face\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eeast or west only using the gyro sensor, so we have a special block that's called accurate turning. This block can accurately turn the robot to 90 degrees to face a certain direction, whether it is west or east or north or south because this here is the north. That's one of the special blocks, the other blocks are quite easy and they are not even following the lines, they are just detecting the lines and detecting the colors of the different pearls. Of course, this whole program is repeatable for the yellow and green and it must be completed in about 30 seconds and we complete it in about 28 seconds. So this is for the World Robotics Olympiad (WRO) 2015 Elementary challenge. Detect color of the pearls, release different balls and face different directions using only the gyro sensor. You can find the instructions for building this robot along with the program for it in the materials below the video. Chck them out, try to implement them and I hope they'll be usefull for you.\u003c/p\u003e"},"150":{"position":150,"title":"EV3 basics course. Color Sensor. Stop on third line. Improve program (part 4) ","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe program from part 3 should be refactored and improved to make it easier to understand and support. We extract most of the repeatable behaviours in a loop and this reduces the size of the program three times in terms of the number of blocks used. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003ePrevious tutorials\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cul\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/147-ev3-basics-course-color-sensor-detect-line-part-1\" style=\"color: rgb(46, 49, 171);margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;font-size: inherit;line-height: inherit;font-family: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\"\u003eEV3 basics course. Color Sensor. Detect line (part 1)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/148-ev3-basics-course-color-sensor-stop-on-third-line-hack-part-2\" style=\"color: rgb(46, 49, 171);margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;font-size: inherit;line-height: inherit;font-family: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\" title=\"EV3 basics course. Color Sensor. Stop on third line. Hack (part 2) \"\u003eEV3 basics course. Color Sensor. Stop on third line. Hack (part 2)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/149-ev3-basics-course-color-sensor-stop-on-third-line-without-wait-block-part-3\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;font-size: inherit;line-height: inherit;font-family: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\" title=\"EV3 basics course. Color Sensor. Stop on third line without Wait block (part 3) \"\u003eEV3 basics course. Color Sensor. Stop on third line without Wait block (part 3)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ul\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Light and Color Sensor,Basic,Programming","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eIn the previous video we stopped at the third line. We can now count the lines using the EV3 color sensor but the program was not very nice and had a lot of redundancy that now I would like to remove.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis here is the program. As you might remember we just copy and paste these 6 blocks 3 times. We are now counting to the third line. What happens if we want to count to the 5th line or to the 100th line, we must copy these 6 blocks a 100 times. This is not how programming is supposed to be. This whole program is very redundant. As a rule of thumb always when you are developing a software, program if you copy and paste something you are making a mistake. That's the professional rule of thumb, if you are copying and pasting in a software program you are adding redundancy and you are making a bug, that's the rule. We must remove these 12 blocks and what we would like to do is actually execute these 6 blocks 3 times and for this we have a special block called a Loop. We just move this whole program in a loop.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWe would like to loop not for unlimited amount of time but for 3 loops. It's the same program, the same blocks but only we removed the redundancy and we added a loop. It's following the same idea, logic. Move forward detect a black line, stop, move forward, detect the table, stop. Then repeat this again and then repeat this one more time.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe robot again stops at a third line only this time the program is restructured and it is 3 times shorter and much more clear.\u003c/p\u003e"},"199":{"position":199,"title":"WRO Junior-High 2015. Treasure Hunt. Part 2. Rules","description":"\u003cp\u003eWe would look at the rules of the competition over our small model and we would start solving the field.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eThe field of the competition is a great. On the different points of the grid we have treasures. What the robot must do is to collect all the treasures from the field.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eComplete playlist\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eFind the complete playlist at \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/playlists/33\"\u003eWRO Junior-High 2015. Treasure Hunt\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"WRO 2015,EV3,WRO,Light and Color Sensor,Programming","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003e- In this video we continue with the World Robotics Olympiad 2015, Junior High Competition. And we'll look at the rules of the competition. We have a small model of the field here. And we'll continue with our robot. This was the robot built in the previous video and will detect some of the colors on the field and we'll try to initially start solving the field.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWe have the model of the field, it's a small map. And we have the different treasures that are on the field and you that it looks like a grid. Now there are different colors right here on one side. This would be the east, the west side of the field and this is the east, and this is the north, and this is the south looking from my perspective. And on this field we have a grid and this grid has many points. And on these points we might have different treasures. We have five treasures on the whole field. And different treasures are positioned on different places. Here on the west side we have 1, 2...we have 10 different colors. And this is the code, and we use this code to know what are the positions of the different rows and columns. And it goes like this; first we move and we see yellow. It's yellow and it's right here. Let me just show it to you. It's yellow. This means that the first column, the color of the first row is yellow. Then we detect red. This means that the color of the second row is red. Then we see that it is blue and green and this means that this row is blue and this row is green. So these are the colors of the different rows, yellow, red, blue, and green. Then these are the first four colors in the code then we detect the next four colors. And in the next four colors we see blue. This means that the first column is blue, second yellow. The second column is yellow, third red and fourth green. And we now know the colors of the different rows and the different columns. And this is something that's configured before the competition. And these are the first eight colors. Then the competition goes the following way, we detect column, we detect row and column. And because the two colors are yellow, yellow. And this means that we must go to the intersection between the yellow row and the yellow column. And we see yellow row, yellow column, somehow the robot must get from this position of the field, the west to this intersection. And here it will find a treasure. And this treasure will have a color. The color of this treasure might be red, we don't know. But when the robot goes to the place and takes the treasure, we'll see the color. Then it lifts the treasure and below the treasure there's another color. And this gives us the row and the column where we should go next. For example if we have the treasure that's red and below the treasure we have blue. This means that we must go to the red row and blue column. And this would be this intersection here so the robot must find its way from here to the next intersection then detect again the treasure and below the treasure and move to the next intersection and the next and the next. And it must collect five treasures and return these treasures. So that's the goal of the mission. It's a very interesting mission and it's not very simple. I would say that it's with the medium complexity but it's quite interesting. And the first thing that we will do for this whole field is to detect these 10 colors. Let's start from here. And this is something that we'll do in the next video. This here is the program for our robot. And it's pretty straightforward. We just move the robot forward and then we detect first, we detect the first eight colors and then the last two colors. So these are the rows and the columns for the grid. And these are the coordinates of the first intersection that we must go. And at the end we just turn. And the program is pretty simple but if we enter in the grid, block, we decided to do the following thing. How does the program work? First we wait with the color sensor to detect white. This is where we start. Then we wait to detect one of the colors, two, three, four, five. These are green, blue, yellow, and red. We wait for 0.1 second just to be sure that we are over the color spot. And then we detect the color. And so we get red, we get green, we get blue. Where do we store these values? We decided to store these values in variables, and we have eight different variables. For row one, we have a variable called Row One. For row two, Row Two, for row three and four again, and for the columns, we have Column One variable, column two, column three and column four. These are eight different variables. And in these variables we store the color that was detected by the color sensor and after each detection, after each measurement we just play a tone. And we have our solution with eight different variables. The problem that we saw with this solution is that it is getting pretty complex after that to move the robot on the field with intersection because it has too many switches. Because we must switch and detect if the value for one is one and then another switch inside the switch for the column and then another switch inside the switch and it's getting pretty complex. So we've built this solution but it's not very clean. And the next solution that we are working on is using arrays but this will be in the next video.\u003c/p\u003e"},"375":{"position":375,"title":"EV3 Phi. Teacher's Note about the motors with which to impress the students","description":"\u003cp\u003eSometimes a good teacher needs a few tricks in his sleeve, so that he can surprise and entertain his students.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eMotor and Generator are reversible\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eConnect two motors together with a cable. Turn motor one. Motor two will start turning. The reason behind this is that you hand rotating the motor generates electricity that travels to the other motor and makes it turn.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\r\nUsing the generator effect\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIf you need to test a motor with an attachment and you don't have a program yet, you may connect two motors together and activate the attachment.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eServo motor with an encoder\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eEV3 LEGO motors are actually servo motors. That means that there is encoder inside that can measure the turning of the motor.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eSynchronization between two motors\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eA move block controls both motors at once. If one of the motors is blocked or disconnected, the other will not move as well. This situation is detected with the help of the encoder in the servo motor.\u003cbr\u003e\r\nThe controller (the Brick) tells both motors to turn a little bit and measures the result of the turn, returned from the encoders. If there is difference, the faster motor must wait for the slower motor.\u003cbr\u003e\r\nSo when the cable is disconnected, there is no turning detected and both motors stop. When there is obstacle for one of the motors, the second one also stops.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Teacher's Note,EV3,Classes with students","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eIn this video I'd like to stop at a few very important points for the teacher, for the instructor with which you can actually impress most of the students.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eFirst, I'll remove the cables and now I'll connect both motors, I'll connect this motor like this to the other motor. So, we have no connection to the brick, we can actually remove the brick. I am not going to remove it because I need a constructed robot. But I have the two motors connected to each other. And now if I rotate one of the wheels, I am going to rotate this one, the other motor will also rotate.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eSee. And you can even do it in reverse. I'll rotate this one and the other motor will rotate. Now if I rotate this one very slowly\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003ethe other does not rotate. The basic idea is that this motor consumes electricity. It needs electricity so that it can rotate. This could come from the battery of the brick. But it could also come from another motor that generates electricity. With the work that you do with your hand you rotate the internal parts of the motor and they generate electricity. And when you generate electricity we have the conductor the cable between the two motors and we can generate electricity from one of the motors and this electricity will be consumed by the other motor. These are simple electromotors.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt is very useful if you have a robot with an attachment. You can imagine a third attachment. And you'd like to experiment but you haven't implemented the program. Then it's very useful to just connect another motor to the attachment if you have the attachment somewhere on the robot. Like this.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis here is the attachment. And now I don't have a program but I'd like to experiment. And I just rotate it and this will rotate\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003ethe axle of this motor. So, this is very useful and you can sometimes probably most of the times impress the students with this because this is something very tricky. Next thing about the motors is the synchronization between the two motors. When you start a program you've probably seen in the previous videos but when you start a program and you disconnect one of the cables. And now I'll start the program. They don't move. The moment you connect they start moving.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eSo, if one of the motors is disconnected the other also does not move. The other interesting thing is that if you have both motors connected, if I just hold one of the motors with my hand like this, so that it does not rotate and I start the program\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003ethey both don't move. And the moment when I release the motor they will start rotating. If I catch them again they stop. Now these motors are servo motors. These servo motors return some feedback to the controller. So, when the controller directs the motor move forward for a couple of rotations the motor has an encoder the so called encoder inside. And this encoder helps the motor return some feedback to the controller. Okay, I've rotated one degree then I've rotated a second, I've rotated 0.10 rotations and in this way there's a constant communication between the brick and the motor. Now, when you use this steering block, this steering block tries to keep the motors synchronized in the configuration that the steering motor is set. And as it tries to keep the motors synchronized when you stop one of the motors the other will also not move. If you just hold them. Because the motor returns some feedback to the brick that it cannot move. The one the time holding and the brick tries to keep the motors synchronized so it stops also the second motor. And this happens mostly because these motors are servo. With other type of motors with other set this probably wouldn't behave in the same way. But with servo motors this is the way they work and especially with the settings configurations of the steering block.\u003c/p\u003e"},"450":{"position":450,"title":"Improving FLL Robot Game. Teacher Notes. Liftting the robot with a Rack","description":"\u003cp\u003eUsing the rack depends on the experience of the team. Based on this a different number of gear wheels and racks would be used.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eMany of the straight rack parts\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWhen using a rack it is important that the rack is stable. Direct the students on using more than one of the straight rack parts with more than one gear wheels. This will result in a much more stable rack.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eWhere to place the rack\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003ePlacing at the front of the robot would be more difficult than placing on the sides of the box. Robot. Depending on the student's robot construction they could choose different places for the rack, but try to direct them to place it at the sides. This would generally be much more easier\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Construction,Rack,Classes with students,FLL","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eA few notes for the teacher when using a rack with the experienced or not that experianced FLL Team. Depending on the experience of the team you might have already used a rack for different missions. What's interesting is that on the rack on the whole mechanism and I refer to the whole mechanism as a rack we also have these straight black parts that are also refered to as 'rack'. And you can have one of these racks with one gear wheel and this will make the mechanism work but you can also have two or even three and this will make the whole mechanism much more stable. Now, in the set there are a limited number of these parts but I would assume that you have more sets so that you can experiment. The idea is that the more racks that you have on each side, the more stable the whole mechanism will be. Two is enough, one is probably not that stable especially for lifting the robot. The next note is that when working with students what you can do is to direct them as within the task to build a rack just for the front of the robot. And that's a nice exercise because at the next competition the mission won't be to attach the robot here at the top of this mission model. It might be a different mission and this different mission might involve just lifting the front of the robot. And a rack at the front of the robot is a nice exercise for lifting just the front of the robot. That's why it's a good exercise because some of the next missions of FLL in the next years might be easily solved with a rack. Then you can also do a nice team exercise. You can have one of the teams build one rack, another team build another rack, a third team - a rack and a forth team - a rack. And then you have 4 different racks built by 4 different groups of students and they should all attach the racks to the different sides of the same robot. So, you have like 4 groups working on the same robot. And then they should try to somehow transfer power from the motors and this will involve a lot of discussions between them. How do you tranfer power from a single motor to 4 different racks? And you can of course experiment. Now, this depends on the experience of the teams or the small groups in the class. If they are not that experienced, you start with a single rack and if they are very experinced, you can separate the whole team on different subgroups and try to solve a task where you have 4 different racks at the 4 different sides of the robot and they all lift the whole robot. And if you do, don't forget to send us a video of this, it will be very very interesting for us and for the rest of the community.\u003c/p\u003e"},"485":{"position":485,"title":"EV3 Phi. Teacher's Note. Extend a construction by changing the plane of building","description":"\u003cp\u003eWith the last few videos, we entered the math world. Why we do it and what to keep in mind\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eWhy we keep it simple\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eUsually, we stay away from mathematical details in class. Students usually shut down when they hear about math or math concepts.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\r\nWhy we like it\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWe just introduced dimensional and spatial concepts to the students. Those will develop their spatial thinking over time and we find that a very important subject.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\r\nThe actual planes\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe top and the bottom of the brick lie in two parallel planes, that correspond to the horizontal orientation of the parts.\u003cbr\u003e\r\nThe left and the right sides of the brick lie in other two planes that vertical-sideways orientation of parts.\u003cbr\u003e\r\nAnd the front and the back of the brick, where the ports are, correspond to the planes in which the vertical-facing orientation of the parts is.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\r\nOpen-ended challenges\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIf you feel like it and your students have the potential to solve such challenges, you can play with free building and give task like:\u003cbr\u003e\r\n - change orientation from horizontal to vertical;\u003cbr\u003e\r\n - then change the orientation from front to left;\u003cbr\u003e\r\n - then change once again and return to a horizontal orientation.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Methodology,Teacher's Note,Classes with students,Construction","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eWith the last few resources we kind of entered into the math world where we have dimensions, space, planes and now I would like to do a short teacher notice on how you can use this in class. Your students that are taking this course might be of different age and they might have different knowledge so we'll try to keep the whole material more common without entering into much details about the mathematics but we like these few resources - the last ones because we are trying to describe things like dimensions and how you think about a construction in a dimension, about the construction in space and this will greatly improve the dimensional and the space thinking of the students. We discuss planes. A plane is an abstract mathematical geometry object that we use as an abstract in which we can extend our constructions and on which we can base our thinking. And what we have done is we take the brick and we think of the brick as formed by 4 different planes. A plane on the left, a plane on the right this is from my point of view a plane at the front of the robot, at the back of the robot, the bottom of the robot and at the top of the robot. And these are actually 3 different planes because the bottom and the top you can connect them in one, the left and the right again in one and the front and the rear you can connect them in one again. And with the different Lego parts you can extend the construction and change the direction of the construction in different planes. So, we'll probably think about different tasks for changing the orientation of different parts and changing the planes but you can also experiment with the parts and with the students by giving them different tasks like for example 'Okay, you have the construction in one plane, change this construction so that the other parts are in another plane. Then return to a third plane, then come back to the first and in this way change the different constructions.' It's a nice example, it might get very difficult that's why we are not doing it but depending on the age of the students and their knowledge you can experiment with this.\u003c/p\u003e"},"200":{"position":200,"title":"WRO Junior-High 2015. Treasure Hunt. Part 3. Decoding field color code","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe robot works on the field and decodes the different colours that represent the rows and the columns.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eIt actually moves on the field and with the color sensors decodes the different colors.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eArrays vs Variables\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe robot could store the values of the detected colours in variables or in arrays.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch4\u003eVariables\u003c/h4\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIf we choose to store in variable we need eight different variable. R1 to R4 and C1 to C4. This is possible and is shown in the video, but makes the program difficult to maintain, read and use. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch4\u003eArrays\u003c/h4\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eAnother option is to store the values of the colours in an EV3-G array. The first detected colour will be stored as a first element of the array. The second will be stored as a second element of the array and so on. We could have two arrays - columns and rows each storing the values for the different rows and columns.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eComplete playlist\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eFind the complete playlist at \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/playlists/33\"\u003eWRO Junior-High 2015. Treasure Hunt\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Array,WRO,Light and Color Sensor,Programming","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eThe next step of World Robotics Olympiad 2015 (WRO) Junior high competition is to use the robot and its color sensor and to work on the real field not this small model here and to detect the colors so that we know the rows and the columns. Here is how it goes.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhat the robot does is that it detects a different colors from the grid and then we display this color and the value that we detected on the display of the brick. Currently what you can see are the values for the row, the values for the columns, the values for the first detected color and for the second. And, for example, for the first row we have the color 5, for as the second row we have the color 2. And in the same way we had the different colors for the different rows and columns. So we have decoded this code and we know the color of the different row and columns. Let's see how we do this in the program.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis here is the program for our robot and it's pretty straight forward, we just move the robot forward and then we detect. First we detect the first 8 color and then the last 2 colors. So this are the rows and the columns for the grid and these are the coordinates of the first intersection that we must go. And at the end we just turn and the program is pretty simple, but if we enter in the grid block, we decided to do the following thing. How does that program work? First, we wait with the color sensor to detect white. This is where we start. Then we wait to detect one of the colors from 2 to 5. These are green, blue, yellow and red. We wait for 0.1 second, just to be sure that we are over the colored spot and then we detect the color. And then we get red, green, blue. Where do we store these values? We decided to sort the values in variables. And we have 8 different variables.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIn these variables we store the color that was detected by the color sensor and by each measurement we just play a tone and we have our solution with 8 different variables. The problem that we solve with these solution is getting pretty complex, after that, to move the robot on the field, with the intersection, because it has too many switches.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eSo we built this solution, but it's not very clean. And the next solution that we are working on is arrays, but this will be in the next video.\u003c/p\u003e"},"29":{"position":29,"title":"How to align LEGO NXT Robot to a line using a block with direction","description":"\u003cp\u003eIn this video tutorial I give a step-by-step explanation of how to implement a block for aligning to a line. The block was first used in lesson 28. Aligning to lines is probably the most powerfull way to know the position of the robot on the FLL Competition field and to be able to execute the missions precisely at 100% of the time.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eMentioned Episodes\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThis block is heavily used in lessons:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cul\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/28-solving-senior-solutions-woodworking-similarity-gardening-stove-and-ballgame-with-one-rune\"\u003eEpisode 28 - Solving Senior Solutions Woodworking, Similarity, Gardening, Stove and Ball game in one run\u003c/a\u003e.\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ul\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eBuilding instructions:\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eYou can find the instructions for building the robot in \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/13-building-a-competition-robot\"\u003eEpisode 13\u003c/a\u003e.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Align,Advanced,Light and Color Sensor,Programming","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eIn our last video we solved some of the First Lego League Senior Solutions missions. These were the WOOD WORKING the GARDEN the SIMILARITY the BALL GAME and the STOVE We were using a block for aligning to green and to black lines right here. And as I promised you in this video we will go into details of how this block works, how it is implemented and what are the details of aligning to a line.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eFirst we have to add some definitions. If the robot is moving in a forward direction - the motor on the left, the one here is motor B and the motor on the right, the one here is motor C. The light sensor on the left is attached to port 1, and the light sensor on the right is attached to port 3. Our first task is to make the robot move to the right until sensor 1 reaches a green line. We can do this with moving motor B unlimited until the light sensor on port 1 reaches something that is below 50, and after it reaches something that is below 50 motor B should stop. Let’s see how the program works.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAs you can see when the sensor attached to port 1, the one on the left reaches a green line the robot stops. Now I would like to do the same thing, but with motor C - the one on the right. Let’s do the program, and what is important is that I will do this in parallel. So I will leave motor B and motor C moving in parallel. Motor C moving unlimited until the light sensor attached to port 3 reaches something below that is 50 and then we have motor C stop. Let’s check this program.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAs you saw from the last video the robot is not perfectly aligned to the green line. Sometimes this happened with this program. There are other programs that can solve this problem. We will solve it in a more straightforward way. We will just return motor C backward until it reaches the border between the green and the white lines here. Let’s do this. I will open my program and I would like to have motor C moving backward again unlimited until it reaches something that is lighter than 50. Of course these values here they depend on the calibration that you have on the robot. And we even have an another lesson for calibration I recommend that you take a look at this lesson. But let’s return to aligning we are mooving backward until we reach something that is lighter than green and then we stop. And we want to do the same thing with motor B. I will just copy this and move in the other direction. Move backward until we reach something that is lighter than 50. Let’s check the program.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eImplemented in such a way the program has one great limitation and it is that the robot is moving only forward and aligning to theline that is in front of the robot. What about if we have a line that is behind the robot and we would like to move backward and align to this line. We will have to add a parameter to this program and could do this in several different ways, but let’s stick to the general one. First we will add a new variable. It is a logic variable and we will attach this logic variable to the direction of the robot. So what we have now is if this value is true the robot will move forward. If this value is false the robot will move backward. And what we are doing here in this program is that we would like to first move in one direction and then move in another direction - in the opposite direction. We will use a block that is called logic. We will take the value form the first movement. We will have the logical operator work on it and we will chose not in this way. When the robot is moving forward initially then it will moving backward as a second step. And if it is moving backward initially it will be moving forward as a second step. So we have this program. Now we can sellect all the blocks without the logic and click edit, make a new block and call this block: AlignWithDirectionForRecording. Finish. If we now open this block we see that we have this logical value passed as a parameter to the whole block. And we will just take the other part of the program edit here. Connect it as a separate thread. And now connect the direction of the motor C to the initial value.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd the same rule applies for changing the direction. The same rule applies for Motor C, so if we are moving forward initially then we should be moving backward at the end. And if we are moving backward initially we should be moving forward at the end. We will take this result, the opposite of the result and attach it to the direction. And now we have now a very, very powerfull block for aligning. And we can use this block in the following way.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIf we now select for this align with direction block that we want to move in backward, we must leave this value valse so we are not checking this checkbox here. And the robot will be aligning to a line that is behind the robot. Let’s see this.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eYou should now be feeling quite comfortable with aligning to green and to black lines. It is the same logic to align to other lines with other colors. Every year at the competition we have got different lines and the purpose of these lines are to help you learn where exactly is the robot on the field at a given moment. Just to make an even stronger case here. Let’s take a look at the missions from the last video and try to count how many time we have aligned to green or black lines.\u003c/p\u003e"},"954":{"position":954,"title":"Incrementing and decrementing","description":"\u003cp\u003eTwo of the most common operations with variables are adding 1 to the value of the variable or subtracting 1. Those are the cases when we have the variable as a counter. The process of adding 1 is called incrementation and the process of subtracting 1 is called decrementation.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eThe set up\u003c/strong\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eLet us get back to the example from the \u003ca href=\"/tutorials/934\"\u003etutorial regarding the variables\u003c/a\u003e. We want to use a variable to track the amount of lemonade we have instead of piece of paper. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIncrementation\u003c/strong\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe first way to achieve that is to count the amount of lemonade we have sold. So basically the variable is a counter and it will increase its' value by one each time a lemonade is ordered. As mentioned that process is called incrementation and can be achieved within the LEGO EV3 Software as follows:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cdiv class=\"ckeditor-html5-video\" style=\"text-align: center;\"\u003e\r\n\u003cvideo class=\"img-responsive\" controls=\"controls\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/attachment_files/data/000/000/464/original/LEGO-Mindstorms-EV3-incrementation-of-a-variable-fllcasts.webm\"\u003e \u003c/video\u003e\r\n\u003c/div\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eLet us take a closer look at what we are actually doing. So first you need to read the current value of the variable, which is performed by the first block.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/476/content/LEGO-Mindstorms-EV3-incrementation-highlighted-read-variable-block-fllcasts.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eNext you have to use a math block to add 1 to the read value\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/477/content/LEGO-Mindstorms-EV3-incrementation-highlighted-math-operations-block-fllcasts.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eand finally you have to write down the result back into the variable.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/478/content/LEGO-Mindstorms-EV3-incrementation-highlighted-write-variable-block-fllcasts.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDecrementation\u003c/strong\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eAnother approach will be to have the variable (the counter) storing how much lemonade is left. That would mean that each time a lemonade is ordered we will need to subtract 1 from the current value or decrement the value. This can be achieved the same way, but this time instead of setting the math block to \u003cstrong\u003eAdd\u003c/strong\u003e we will set it to \u003cstrong\u003eSubtract\u003c/strong\u003e. The final program should look as follow:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/465/content/LEGO-Mindstorms-EV3-decrementation-of-a-variable-fllcasts.png\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Fun","subtitles":null},"30":{"position":30,"title":"How to Solve Senior Solutions Medicines, Cardiovascular and Strength exercise missions with one attachment","description":"\u003cp\u003eIn this tutorial we will go through a solution for three of the missions from 2012 FIRST LEGO League competition using only one attachment. By accomplishing the medicines, strength exercise and cardiovascular missions we earn 55 points. You can download the programs from the link in the Materials tab. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eWe use a robot based on LEGO Mindstorms NXT. For EV3 solutions look at newer episodes.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eMentioned Episodes\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eHere is a list of episodes, that might be useful to watch. The following videos explained things we use in this tutorial:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cul\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/10-making-menu-as-my-block\"\u003eEpisode 10\u003c/a\u003e - Here you can find more about the programming of the Menu myBlock.\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/11-calibrating-light-sensors\"\u003eEpisode 11\u003c/a\u003e and \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/14-programmatic-calibration\"\u003eEpisode 14\u003c/a\u003e -You can find more on calibration of the light sensors in these episodes.\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/13-building-a-competition-robot\"\u003eEpisode 13\u003c/a\u003e - Here you can find building instructions for the robot used in the tutorial.\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/29-aligning-to-a-line-block-with-direction\"\u003eEpisode 29\u003c/a\u003e - In this episode we have explained step by step how to we make the myBlock for alligning with direction\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/31-quickly-follow-a-black-line-with-one-sensor\"\u003eEpisode 31\u003c/a\u003e - You can find an explanation of how to follow a black line using one sensor and five states.\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ul\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eMissions solved:\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cul\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eMedicine mission;\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eClick the clock of the Cardiovascular Exercise mission;\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eStrength Exercise mission.\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ul\u003e\r\n","tags":"FLL 2012,Attachments,FLL","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eIn today\u0026#39;s video I will show you how to solve the Medicines, Cardiovascular exercise and the Strength exercise missions (\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/search/senior+solutions\" target=\"_blank\"\u003eview other Senior Solutions\u0026nbsp;mission solutions\u003c/a\u003e). All of this I will solve with only one attachment. Again for a base I will use the competition robot I have build in episode 13.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eSo for solving the Medicine mission again I will use Ultrasonic sensor as in episode 14. But this time I will make a way more simpler attachment. So first let\u0026#39;s attach the Ultrasonic sensor. We have got this. And I will put it here, like this. Okay and I will attach the Ultrasonic sensor to port 4.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eSo I have the Ultrasonic sensor. Then let\u0026#39;s make the attachment. First I will attach a 15 bar to the gears, then I will use this part.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eAnd on the other side the same way.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eOops.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eOkay and we will use this one for the Strength exercise mission. For the Medicine I will use these several parts, attach them.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eAnd we are ready to program the robot and hopefully solve the missions. First we will begin with solving the Medicine mission. I have divided it in three parts: First we detect the medicine. Then we take the medicine. And finally we return it back to base. The whole program and the three MyBlocks you can find under this video. So let\u0026#39;s begin with the first MyBlock. The idea here is almost the same as the solution in episode 16 of the Medicine missions. First using the MenuMyBlock we have created in the previous tutorials. We chose which medicine the robot should take, the result we store in a variable called \u0026#39;Result\u0026#39;. And then we go unlimited. First we wait until the Ultrasonic sensor detects an object further than 25 centimeter away. Which actually is the gap between the medicines.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eOkay, whatever. And then we wait until we see an object which is less then 20 centimeters away. Which actually is the medicine. When we have detected the medicine we subtract one from our variable. And repeat the process until we reach zero. Then we stop and move back 200 degrees in order to align our attachment with the medicine.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eAfter we have aligned with the medicine we make two consecutive turns with Motor C and Motor B at 45 degrees which is 45 degrees of the robot not 45 degrees of the motors. And with those two turn we have actually taken the medicine, now we move up our attachement in order to not push any of the other medicines. And after this block we have taken the medicine. Now we only have to return the robot back to base this is done by aligning to the black line. With the MyBlock you can find in the previous tutorial. And then we make 90 degrees turn with motor C and move for seven rotations in order to get in base.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eSo let\u0026#39;s see how does the program work. I see that the Green medicine is the second one. So I start the program and choose medicine number two. The robot starts sees the first medicine now the second one, takes the second one and returns back to base.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eSo let\u0026#39;s now continue with the Cardiovascular exercise and the Strength exercise. Again I have divided the solution in three main parts. And again you can download the three MyBlocks under this video. So first we go to the Cardiovascular exercise. This is done with this MyBlock first we move forward for two rotations in order to get out of the base. Then using the Light sensor on port 3 we follow the black line with five states. Which is a really fast algorithm to follow a black line and will be covered in the next tutorial so I won\u0026#39;t stop right now on it. But the important thing is that we follow the line until we reach the Green line and we detect it with the Light sensor on port 2. Another important thing is that you must calibrate your sensors before using this program. Because otherwise it won\u0026#39;t work. When we reach the Green line we stop and by reaching the Green line we actually have clicked the Cardiovascular exercise. Next we will lift up the Strength exercise. This is done by moving forward for one rotation then we make several turns with motor B and C. And then we move forward with the two motors for 1 second in order to align the robot with the Strength exercise.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWe lift up our attachment again for two seconds and with this we have executed the Strength exercise mission. Finally we must return to base, this is done by making a 90 degrees turn with motor C then we align on the black line using the MyBlock from the precious episode. And then we make another 90 degrees turn and finally we move forward for 12 rotations in order to get in base. Now let\u0026#39;s run the program. Now let\u0026#39;s run the other part of the program. The robot makes two rotations and gets out of base, follows the black line until it reaches the Green line. Meanwhile clicks the clock, aligns to the Strength exercise - raise it, align to the black line. And afterwards gets back base.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003ePerfect.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n"},"40":{"position":40,"title":"How to setup LEGO Digital Designer and Ldraw on Windows","description":"\u003cp\u003eLearn how to set up LDD and Ldraw on your Windows computer. Get one step closer to building your first 3D LEGO Model.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eWe begin the tutorial with the installation of LEGO Digital Designer. You can install it by downloading the setup \u003ca href=\"http://ldd.lego.com/en-us/download/\"\u003ehere\u003c/a\u003e. After following the link, choose your operating system. We have covered only the Windows setup in the video. \u003cstrong\u003eRemember to check the minimum system requirements, especialy the graphics card.\u003c/strong\u003e The indows installer will install LEGO Digital Designer for you, as well as Adobe Flash Player if you do not have it installed on your computer.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eNext we install Ldraw. You can do this by following this \u003ca href=\"http://media.peeron.com/ldraw/LDraw_AIOI_2013-01_setup_32bit_v1.zip\"\u003elink\u003c/a\u003e. Do not worry, after following the link you have to enter the symbols you see on the image shown, before proceding with the download. The LDraw installation may take some time.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIn order to build 3D model of your robot you must have the MINDSTORMS parts in your LDraw library. You can find the zip archive with the NXT parts on \u003ca href=\"http://www.philohome.com/nxtldraw/nxtldraw.htm\"\u003ethis\u003c/a\u003e site. There you should download the \u003ca href=\"http://www.philohome.com/nxtldraw/nxtkit-ldraw_new_col.zip\"\u003eLDraw Stone Colors version\u003c/a\u003e file and copy the files to the LDraw folder on your computer as shown in the tutorial. For the EV3 parts you should download the LDraw unofficial parts from the Ldraw site. You can find the zip file with these parts \u003ca href=\"http://www.ldraw.org/library/unofficial/ldrawunf.zip\"\u003ehere\u003c/a\u003e.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eLDraw is just an open source system for building 3D LEGO Models. If you want to build your own model, you can use one of the following programs:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cul\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"https://code.google.com/p/leocad/downloads/detail?name=LeoCAD-0.80.1-7439.exe\u0026amp;can=2\u0026amp;q=\"\u003eLeoCAD\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://sourceforge.net/projects/lddp/files/LDDP%20Windows%20Binaries/LDDP%202.x/LDDP%202.0.4/LDDP204.zip/download\"\u003eLDDesignPad\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ul\u003e\r\n","tags":"3D Models,Construction","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eWith the beginning of the new season of the First Lego League competition. It is time to start working on the challenge. But before we event think about programming we must have a build robot. During the next few minutes I will show you several ways to build 3D models of your robot. And why you should do this. I will show you how to setup Lego Digital Designer and LDraw on your computer.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eFor the purpose of this tutorial I will use a clean installation of the Windows Xp. First let's begin by set upping the Lego Digital Designer. You can download it by simply looking for it in Google or by following the link in the description below.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eSo when you reach the download section you must choose the installer depending on your OS. In my case this will be Windows. Before I clock the \"Download now\" link I make sure that my computer covers the minimum system requirements listed here. So let's download it. And I will save it on the Desktop.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eFew moments later the setup is downloaded so I will click and run it. The installer will start self extracting so you will need to wait several seconds before you can proceed with the installation. There are several things that you should be aware of. One: That it need OpenGL and the second one is that it needs Adobe Flash Player. If you do not have it the installer will install it for you, so don't worry. Okay now we have our setup ready and I have to choose the language I will choose English. And from then on the setup is pretty much straight forward.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eSo I will install it on my computer. As I said the setup has found that my computer does not have Adobe Flash Player so now it will install it for me. After the installation of the Flash player is completed I will click close and then proceed with the installation. Now the setup is installing so you just have to wait until it's ready.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe installation is complete so we are ready to start the Lego Digital Designer. After the installation is completed we are ready to start using Lego Digital Designer. The fist time you start the program you will have to wait a minute or two in order all the bricks to be downloaded or updated. Afterwards you will see this popup where you should click the second tab. The MindStorms tab and then you should click \"Free Build\". Now in the left you see the parts you can use and they are grouped. So let's say you need a gear. You could click here and the will expand so you can take the gear that you need. The cool thing about Lego Digital Designer is that the parts stack together easily. So it's really easy to build your robot. After you have finished building. You could go to \"Building Guide Mode\". Which will automatically be generated and you will see instructions for building you robot. Okay let's go back. The problem with Lego Digital Designer is that there are many parts missing. In that case you could use LDraw. With Ldraw it's exactly the opposite. There are many many Lego parts, but unfortunately it's kind of hard to build using it. So my proposition is to build your robot as far as possible with Lego Digital Designer. And then go to the \"File\" menu, click on \"Export model\" and then from the drop down here. You could choose LDraw files so that you could export the model we have build into LDraw.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNow let's setup LDraw. Again we will search for it in Google or you cal follow the link in the description below. But in one way or another we reach the \"LDraw.org\" downloads section. Here you have to download LDraw-All-In-One-Installer so you click on it. And then this picture appears on your screen so you have to enter the symbols you see.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd then your download will begin shortly.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAfter the download is completed you open the \"zip\" file and there you can find the installer. So double click on it and the installer will install LDraw on your computer. Unfortunately it will take you some time, so don't worry just follow the instructions and you will have LDraw installed on your computer. Finally the installation of LDraw is finished. Next we must add the NXT and EV3 parts to the library. In order to do this we must download the two \"zip\" files you could find under the materials tab below this video. When you open the \"zip\" file you will find two directories \"p\" and \"parts\" you must copy the content of the two directories in the LDraw folder. So we open \"explorer\" go \"C:\\ProgramFiles\\LDraw..\" And here are also two directories \"p\" and \"parts\". So as I said you must copy the content. So this without the \"s\" directory goes to \"parts\" and then copy the content of the \"s\" directory also. This should be done also for the \"p\" directory and for the other \"zip\" file. After you finished coping all the files you must run LD makelist in order to refresh the library. So double click on it then you are asked whether you want to sort it by description or number. Choose number, so \"n\", \"Enter\" and then the program will refresh the list of the parts. Finally we have setup LDraw on your computer, but actually Ldraw is just an open source system for building 3D Lego Models. There are several programs for actually building you model. One option is MlCad which comes with the LDraw installation. Another option is LeoCad which is more user friendly, but still is a CAD program. Finally there is LD Design Pad which is the text editor for building Lego Models. And I personally prefer. Links for downloading and installing the last two could be found in the description below. Also there is the LD View program which is used for visualization of the models-build using LDraw. And LPub which is used for producing \"PDF\" instructions for the models you have build. Both are installed along the LDraw installation so you should already have them installed on your computer. Today I will stop here! In the next tutorial I will cover in details how to use the programs I mentioned for building your model using LDraw.\u003c/p\u003e"},"314":{"position":314,"title":"Arduino Basic Course. Blinking diode implementation and demonstration","description":"\u003cp\u003eAs a result from the previous two videos we have a diode that is blinking. What will now happen with the diode if we remove the power and change the position of the legs.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eThese are again things to experiment with. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003ePower \u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe power to the diode comes from the usb cable. This is what gives power to the how microcontroller. If we remove the USB cable there will be no power and no current flowing. There are no embedded baterries on the controller to keep the diode blinking.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eChange of position of the legs\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe shorter leg must be connected to the ground. The longer leg to PIN 13. This is because the current flows from the longer to the shorter leg. If we change the position of the legs we would see that there is no current flowing. Remember: The current in the diode flows in only one direction. The diode is an electronic element that allows the current to flow in only one direction.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Arduino,Diode","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eAs a result from the previous few videos we have a diode that is blinking.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes, it took us a couple of minutes because all the different explanations but as you saw it is very very easy. A few things for this blinking diode. Now, if I just remove the power\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003ethere is no more current flowing in the system and the diode stops. If I again add the USB cable and the other end of this USB cable is connected to the computer. If I add this USB cable the diode starts blinking again. And I'll also change the legs of this diode. Remember that the shorter leg must be connected to the ground. What happens if I take the diode out. And I connect the shorter leg to pin 13.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe diode is not working because it allows the current to flow only in one direction. Again I'll change it. While changing be sure to use only port 13 and the ground. Don't use any of the other ports for now and there are reasons for this. Congratulations! You have your first blinking diode. Below the video you can find the program. You can also find the scheme of how this diode is connected to pin 13 and the ground pin.\u003c/p\u003e"},"806":{"position":806,"title":"Construction and Theory","description":"\u003cp\u003eBuild the robot using the instructions below. Pay attention to the way the truck is driven and how it steers. What are the differences with the robots we have built so far?\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eOnce you have finished with the construction of the robot, please attach a color sensor to it.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"","tags":"Classes with students","subtitles":null},"57":{"position":57,"title":"Active attachment for changing gears direction - part 3: moving up\u0026amp;down","description":"\u003cp\u003eIn this video lesson I am building a LEGO Mindstorms EV3 active attachment powered by a small gear wheel. The attachment could move up and down, it is very useful for collecting objects. It could easily be adapted and used on other robots.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWe are making a parallel with Video Lesson 56 from the series and we are also showing ways to improve the stability of an axle which is most of the time neglected, but could lead to great problems.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eChanging the orientation of gear wheels involves at least to axles that are perpendicular to one another. Check \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/55-active-attachment-for-changing-gears-direction\"\u003eVideo Lesson 55\u003c/a\u003e and \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/56-active-attachment-for-changing-gears-direction-part2-improving-durability\"\u003eVideo Lesson 56\u003c/a\u003e for details on changing from vertical to horizontal.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe challenge is how to position those axles. As a general rule of thumb the driver wheel should be smaller than the drive wheel (also known as input and output wheels).\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIn next episodes we would improve the construction to make in more reusable and applicable to more situations.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Gears,Attachments,FLL,Construction","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eIn our last episode I showed you how you can convert the direction of the gear from vertical to horizontal. In this episodeI'll try to show you how to achieve the same movement by using an attachment that can move up and down. This is very useful when you have to collect things. For example, this is the chair from the Senior Solutions 2012. And if our motor is placed like this and if we want to collect the chair, we should find a way to move the attachment up and down.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe first thing that you should take into account when you have a gear system is to have a driving wheel, a small one (this is described in some of the previous episodes). So, I'll use this 20-teeth small gear as a driver one and I'll find a way to connect the larger wheel so that the attachment can move up and down. If we find a way to connect the wheel, it will be pretty easy to attach the attachment to the wheel and then to move up and down. A basic idea is to use the holes near the motor. I have prepared two constructions.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eOne like this and the other one. You can find all the constructions below the video. Now you need an axle. Given that you have an axle, it will be pretty easy to connect the wheel. I'll take the black wheel.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNow we have our gear system almost working.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThere are certain problems with this system. The large wheel is moving left and right. So, we could use different parts that would fix the large wheel. For example these.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAs you might remember from the previous episode, when you are using the black gears, you would always have half a Lego unit and that's why you should add yellow parts to the axis.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eLet's see now.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eI'll again need a yellow part.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNow the gears are fixed. You could see that the axle is fixed; it's not moving in any direction. So, it's very stable. And the system is working. Now, let's try to somehow attach this attachment to the axle, so that it can move up and down. I've prepared the following parts.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eI'll put one of them on the left\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eand one of them on the right.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eI'll add the attachment to the front.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNow it is already working. It can move up; it can move down. As you can see, there are problems with this attachment. I'll try to move it. The small gear is not very stable. And the whole attachment is not very stable too. You can see that even when the gears are not moving, it is kind of fragile. So, we should find a way to imrpove the stability of this system. A major problem with this construction is that the driver wheel is not very stable. I'll remove the attachment to show you what I mean. We have the axle connected to the motor and now you can see that it's not very stable; it's moving freely. There is a basic principle for solving this. You should always have the axle connected to at least two points. Now it's connected only to the motor and we should find a way to connect it to another point. For example, some beam like this. It will make it much more stable. I've already prepared a construction for this, so we have our attachment. We could add an additional part to this attachment. It's a number of parts. You can see, of course, the whole construction below the video.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNow, when I add these parts and connect them with the axle of the driver wheel,\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e(it's kind of difficult; ok) the gear wheel becomes much more stable; it is not moving. Then we add the attachment.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eYou can see that it's very stable. It's again moving up and down. But it's not that fragile and it looks great. Now, let's see what will happen if we have to attach the attachment to the robot during the competition. Let's disassemble it.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt looks something like this - the robot as a basic construction and the attachment that is ready to be placed on the robot. As you can see, you need at least three hands for this to work.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt is really difficult. If we try to add this attachment to the robot, it will take us something like 1, 2, 3, 4 seconds. OK. So, 4 seconds and we have the attachment. In the next videos we'll improve this construction so that it's much easier to attach. Again, what you could use such an attachment for, is to collect things that are on the field. You could program it and you could then go, move the robot, collect the chair, return, lift the attachment, do something with the chair, place it back, then move again and it's a basic principle for collecting things.\u003c/p\u003e"},"334":{"position":334,"title":"VEX EDR Intro. Arc turn with the VEX robot","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe next important step when turning with a robot is to learn how to do an Arc turn.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eTurn in an Arc\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eTo turn in an arch just set different power to each of the motors. This will make on of the motors move faster than the other and from there the figure that is \"drawn\" by the robot while it is moving will look like an arc.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eExample:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-family:Courier New,Courier,monospace;\"\u003emotor[port2] = 100;\u003c/span\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-family:Courier New,Courier,monospace;\"\u003emotor[port3] = 20;\u003c/span\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIn this way, the motor on port 2 will move faster than the motor on port 3 and the whole robot will move in an arc. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Motors,RobotC,VEX EDR,Programming","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eAt this video we'll look at the third type of turning. We call it an Arc turn. And sometimes you need it because you need some more precise movements with the robot. At the end of the resource we'll have this type of turning. The robot turns in an arc.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWe have our program for moving forward with the robot. And in this program what we'll do is just change the values for the power of motor 2 and motor 3. These are the left motor and the right motor. First, I'll set this motor to 100 and this motor to 20. This will make the motor connected on port 2 that's the left motor turn faster than the other motor. And at the end we just wait for 1000 milliseconds which is a second. Let's see the program.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe robot turns in an arc.\u003c/p\u003e"},"60":{"position":60,"title":"Reusable geared active attachment for changing LEGO gears orientation","description":"\u003cp\u003eIn this episode we build a reusable attachment for a LEGO Mindstorms EV3 robot that changes gears orientation and direction. It is one of the most useful attachments that you could use to move levers up/down and right/left. Adding the attachment on the robot takes 2-3 seconds and shows a very useful general principle of how to build reusable attachments.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eSuccessful teams have the experience, but even more importantly they have attachments build from previous years that could directly be used in next year missions. We have seen teams that just reuse the last year robot and with small modifications and adaptations use it on this year missions.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIn this episode we build such an attachment. You could also use it in classrooms to challenge students to improve speed/power, to use different gear wheel, to solve specific challenges.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWhat I would challenge you to do is to think of a way to build a similar attachment, but without the grey framework used in the video, but stud part or straight beams. Send your solutions to us at team@fllcasts.com or as comments on the page and we could give you feedback on them.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Gears,Attachments,Construction","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eIn some of the previous episodes I showed you how you can build active attachments that you can put in front of the robot and attach to the driving motor and you can change the direction of the wheel from vertical to horizontal or you can change it in a way that the attachment moves up and down. In this episode I'd like to try to show you how you can build a general attachment because you can see that the problem is actually the same. Whether we place the gear like this or like this, or like this - it's always the same problem. It will be great if we can build a general attachment using, for example, this part and we can place it like this, like this, like this - depending on the movement that we'd like to achieve.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eLet's start from what's given. I've decided to use this part. We can combine different wheels - for example, in the following way.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNow, this will be our driving wheel. We can place it in front of the robot. And we should find a way to position this large 30/60 wheel - somehow that it works with the driving wheel. Again, we'll use a different axle.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis is it. We can attach one of the wheels to the motor and the other wheel will be driven by the first one. As you can see, there is a gap - right here - in the axle. As always, we fix this gap with a small yellow part.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd now we already have this general attachment. Can we place it in front of the robot? Yes.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt's not stable and we'll use these two black parts to attach it to the robot.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd we already have our attachment. We can attach anything to the other side of the axle and we can move up and down with this robot.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNow, let's see how this would work. I'll attach this orange part to the axle and when the motor is turning we can see the gears working and now it's pretty easy to build an attachment that would move up and down. We have this as a general, abstract attachment that we can use in different ways - for example: if we want to have an attachment that moves up and down, we place this construction like this; if we want to have an attachment that moves left or right, we just place it like this. Can we do this? Yes. Now, there are certain modifications to this attachment that might be useful depending on the situation, on the mission that should be accomplished. For example, we can use the same parts on the other side of the attachment.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd we'll get a very interesting result. When the driving wheel is turning in one direction, we have one of the driven wheels turning forward; the other one turning backwards. Let's attach it to the robot.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eOf course, this might prove useful in certain situations\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eand it's kind of interesting. Of course, we can place the attachment horizontally.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eOne more modification that I'd like to show you for this attachment (you can find the instructions for this attachment below the video) is that when the driving wheel is turning left, one of the wheels is turning forward, the other backwards, we might want both wheels to turn in the same direction. To have them turning in the same direction, we should have them on the same axle. So, I'll just extend this one.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhen we have the driving wheel turning left or right, we have the driven wheels turning in the same direction. Either both of them forward or both of them backwards. As a last step, I'd like to clean this attachment a little bit. It's kind of ugly, let's say. For example, we have three different sizes of gear wheels on this attachment. We have a medium one - right here. We have a larger and a small one. It's always a good idea to keep the complexity as little as possible. So, I'll try to replace this medium wheel with a small one. To achieve this, let's disassemble the construction. Take the small wheel;\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eplace it like this. And now you can see that there is a certain gap between the wheels. It's not very stable. We can fix it as we have discussed it in previous episodes - by adding one more yellow part. I'll place it right here.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThen the gear wheel.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eOK. We have our attachment fixed. We are using only two wheel sizes - the small ones and the larger ones. We can place this on the robot. Like this. One more thing that we should consider is that there is friction between this part that's holding the whole construction and the wheel. Another good idea is to have some space so that we can reduce the friction. If we place this on the robot,\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003ewe can see that it's working much more smoothly and it's cleaner when it comes to the design. I hope that you can find a way to use this attachment in your competition robots or in your classroom robots. You can always place the attachment in different ways - for example up and down. And we'll get the same result.\u003c/p\u003e"},"64":{"position":64,"title":"Quick Pinless Attachments for LEGO EV3 Competition Robots (Part 2)","description":"\u003cp\u003eIf you think that the quick pinless attachments shown in video 63 are quick enough, see this tutorial and you will find out that the quick pinless attachments could be even quicker. These attachments can work without motors but by using the inertia forces.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eThis tutorial shows the logic of creating quick pinless attachments which do not have any moving parts. This facilitates their placement and is the key to the quicker change of attachments on the \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/search/robot+construction\"\u003eLEGO Mindstorms robot construction\u003c/a\u003e.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThere is a short description of how the attachments work; how the inertia forces affect the robot parts and what causes these inertia forces. The tutorial once again focuses on the building process of the quick pinless construction base, the attachment and the adaptor.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eTry to use this type of quick pinless attachments and see how many new opportunities it will give you. Share with us your comments and ideas.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Pinless,Attachments,Construction","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eAnother type of quick pinless attachment will be shown in this episode. The attachment will use inertia forces instead of motors. You are going to see why some of the robot parts stop moving and some continue when the robot stops.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eOn this robot you can use the sensor shield to place the quick pinless attachment base. You can make it stick to it with these parts. For example, here and here. For the construction you may need these parts.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eLike that.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe same on the other side. And they need to be positioned like that.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eYou can connect them with that part.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd to make it a little bit durable we will place this part. Now. This is how it sticks to the robot. But it's not very stable. To make it better, you can make these connections - here and here.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eLike that and that too. And here is the base.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNow it's much more durable. The attachment that is going to be created will be for the Senior Solutions Chair Challenge Solving. The attachment has to catch the chair in that way and bring it to the base.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eFor that purpose you may use two fifteen pin hole beams and one thirteen pin hole beam. You may connect them with that element. Like this and here it is.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd this is the attachment. But in that way it is not very safe. The chair may fall off the attachment. Thus, you may construct the same construction.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd connect both elements in that way. You may use this kind of element.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eYou may leave the last holes for the adaptor between the attachment and the base.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eLike that and here. And it's ready. But as you see it isn't stable. To make it a little bit more stable, you may use this element. And now it's much more stable. Up to now, you have the quick pinless attachment base and the attachment. You need to construct the adaptor. For the adaptor you may use these small axles here with that element.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eLike that.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAfter that, you may use this small axle - again like that. And this part - like that.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd one three-unit axle with a cap.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd you have to do the same on the other side.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eLike that.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd here it is. That axle here.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd the other one here.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd the cap.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNow everything is ready. But as you can see, it's very difficult for the attachment to fall in that way. You have to speed up the robot a lot. So, you may use this part.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eYou may attach it here.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eSo, you can use it to make this construction vertical. Now let's see how it works.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNow - this is what happened. While the robot is moving, all parts are moving with it. The robot stops and the inertia forces come into play. The inertia drives the parts to continue moving forward. The parts that are rigidly connected to the robot also stop. But the upper part of the frame isn't rigidly connected, so it falls. Now you are going to see an example of how quickly we change the attachment. Try to use the same principle in your robots and leave us a comment below. Thank you.\u003c/p\u003e"},"1028":{"position":1028,"title":"How to set up VEX IQ robot to be controlled by the Controller - mechanism","description":"\u003cp\u003eIn this tutorial you will learn how to set up your robot to be controlled with the Controller. We start from the program created in the tutorial \u003ca href=\"https://www.fllcasts.com/tutorials/1008-setting-up-vex-iq-robot-to-be-controlled-by-the-controller\"\u003eSetting up VEX IQ robot to be controlled by the Controller\u003c/a\u003e. Then add two more motors to be controlled from the joystick, so that you can operate the lifting mechanism of \u003ca href=\"https://www.fllcasts.com/materials/583-pesho-bot-with-two-bars-lifting-mechanism\"\u003ePesho Bot with two bars lifting mechanism\u003c/a\u003e. However, this can be applied to other robots with such a mechanism. The program we create can be found in the Materials tab of the tutorial.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eLoad the program from tutorial \u003ca href=\"https://www.fllcasts.com/tutorials/1008-setting-up-vex-iq-robot-to-be-controlled-by-the-controller\"\u003eSetting up VEX IQ robot to be controlled by the Controller\u003c/a\u003e. Next, rename the project, so that it reflects the program content.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cdiv class=\"ckeditor-html5-video\" data-responsive=\"true\" style=\"text-align: center;margin-top:20px;margin-bottom:20px;\"\u003e\r\n\u003cvideo controls=\"controls\" src=\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/attachment_files/data/000/000/635/original/Modkit-for-VEX-renaming-the-project-to-reflect-the-change-fllcasts.webm\" style=\"height: auto;\" width=\"100%\"\u003e \u003c/video\u003e\r\n\u003c/div\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eAfter you have changed the name, we can proceed with modifying the program:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003col\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eFirst of all, we need to update the hardware that will be used. As we have introduce two more motors to the robot, we need to do the same thing in the robot area:\r\n\t\u003cul\u003e\r\n\t\t\u003cli\u003eDrag there one MOTOR for moving the arm up and down,\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\t\u003cli\u003eDrag a second MOTOR for the hand to grab and release ... objects.\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/ul\u003e\r\n\r\n\t\u003cdiv class=\"ckeditor-html5-video\" data-responsive=\"true\" style=\"text-align: center;margin-top:20px;margin-bottom:20px;\"\u003e\r\n\t\u003cvideo controls=\"controls\" src=\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/attachment_files/data/000/000/636/original/Modkit-for-VEX-adding-two-more-motors-fllcasts.webm\" style=\"height: auto;\" width=\"100%\"\u003e \u003c/video\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/div\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eFrom the drop down list of the first motor choose \"PORT5\". \r\n\t\u003cdiv class=\"ckeditor-html5-video\" data-responsive=\"true\" style=\"text-align: center;margin-top:20px;margin-bottom:20px;\"\u003e\r\n\t\u003cvideo controls=\"controls\" src=\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/attachment_files/data/000/000/638/original/Modkit-for-VEX-configuring-the-port-of-the-lifting-motor-fllcasts.webm\" style=\"height: auto;\" width=\"100%\"\u003e \u003c/video\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/div\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eSelect the little Controller \u003cimg alt=\"\" src=\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/627/content/Screenshot_from_2019-01-17_15-27-04.png\"\u003ein the bottom right corner of the first motor next to the little gearwheel icon. This will open the \"Controller Actions\" page.\r\n\t\u003cul\u003e\r\n\t\t\u003cli\u003eSet \"REV\" for \"R v\" to set the right bottom button to control the arm move downward.\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\t\u003cli\u003eSet \"FOR\" for \"R ^\" to set the right upper button to control the arm move upward.\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/ul\u003e\r\n\r\n\t\u003cdiv class=\"ckeditor-html5-video\" data-responsive=\"true\" style=\"text-align: center;margin-top:20px;margin-bottom:20px;\"\u003e\r\n\t\u003cvideo controls=\"controls\" src=\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/attachment_files/data/000/000/637/original/Modkit-for-VEX-configuring-the-controls-of-the-lifting-motor-fllcasts.webm\" style=\"height: auto;\" width=\"100%\"\u003e \u003c/video\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/div\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eFrom the drop down list of the second motor choose \"PORT2\".\r\n\t\u003cdiv class=\"ckeditor-html5-video\" data-responsive=\"true\" style=\"text-align: center;margin-top:20px;margin-bottom:20px;\"\u003e\r\n\t\u003cvideo controls=\"controls\" src=\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/attachment_files/data/000/000/639/original/Modkit-for-VEX-configuring-the-port-of-the-grabbing-motor-fllcasts.webm\" style=\"height: auto;\" width=\"100%\"\u003e \u003c/video\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/div\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eSelect the little Controller \u003cimg alt=\"\" src=\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/627/content/Screenshot_from_2019-01-17_15-27-04.png\"\u003ein the bottom right corner of the second motor next to the little gearwheel icon. This will open the \"Controller Actions\" page.\r\n\t\u003cul\u003e\r\n\t\t\u003cli\u003eSet \"REV\" for \"L v\" to set the left bottom button to control the hand to release.\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\t\u003cli\u003eSet \"FOR\" for \"L ^\" to set the left upper button to control the arm to grab.\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/ul\u003e\r\n\r\n\t\u003cdiv class=\"ckeditor-html5-video\" data-responsive=\"true\" style=\"text-align: center;margin-top:20px;margin-bottom:20px;\"\u003e\r\n\t\u003cvideo controls=\"controls\" src=\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/attachment_files/data/000/000/640/original/Modkit-for-VEX-configuring-the-controls-of-the-grabbing-motor-fllcasts.webm\" style=\"height: auto;\" width=\"100%\"\u003e \u003c/video\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/div\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eWith that we have updated our program to use two more motors for controlling the lifting mechanism. Now you can \"Save to Robot Brain\" the program (to run it from the robot), or \"Play Program\" and \"Stop Program\" directly from the Modkit software\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ol\u003e\r\n","tags":"VEX IQ,Programming,Modkit for VEX,Driver controlled","subtitles":null},"998":{"position":998,"title":"Overview of the FLLCasts Platform","description":"\u003cp\u003eAt FLLCasts we develop the content and the software for organizing classes with students in the field of technical science. There are concepts like \"Tutorial\", \"Course\", \"Group\", \"Enrollment\" and others that are used in the industry and although we kind of understand all of them there are different definitions and understandings.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWe mostly differ in the industry in our understanding of what is a \"Course\" and what is \"Group\" and how do they relate to each other.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eAs you learn and integrate more with FLLCasts it is important that we share a common understanding of what is what. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch2\u003eTL; DR\u003c/h2\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eHere is probably all you need to know if you don't want to enter into the details.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eAt FLLCasts we provide the \"Content\" and the \"Software\" for organizing classes. Content is formed from Tutorials, Building Instructions, Courses and others.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eCourses are like books. You open them and read them. Courses are actually Tutorials, Programs, Tasks that are in sequence.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe Group is where Instructors and Students work together, not the Course. The Group has a start, end, schedule. Each Group is in an Organization like a Team, School, Library, etc. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eUsers subscribe to FLLCasts and based on the subscription they receive access to different software features and content. Schools could buy the subscriptions for the students or students could buy them themself  \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"FLLCasts","subtitles":null},"854":{"position":854,"title":"Task: Move specific distance forward","description":"","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003ePreparation\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cul\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eThe teacher has created \u003cstrong\u003eone\u003c/strong\u003e challenge section on the floor in the classroom:\r\n\r\n\t\u003cul\u003e\r\n\t\t\u003cli\u003eHe has marked a starting line on the floor.\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\t\u003cli\u003eThere is a second line 50cm (20 inches) away from the first one.\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/ul\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ul\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eProgramming\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cem\u003eThe idea is to experiment with the software. After you have experimented, we will show you our approach to the task.\u003c/em\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003col\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eMake several attempts with your robot in order to adjust the distance that it travels.\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eThe task is successful when the robot stops on the second line, or very, very close to the line, so that, when looked from above, the tires seem to cross the line.\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ol\u003e\r\n","tags":"STEM,Tasks,Classes with students,Programming","subtitles":null},"393":{"position":393,"title":"Teacher's Notes about sound and display blocks","description":"\u003cp\u003eHow to keep the discipline in the classroom and how to cheer up the students.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eKeep it strict at the start\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThere are many sounds that the robot can make. There are many expressions to show. We start with a smile and a greeting to set a productive tone in the classroom.\u003cbr\u003e\r\nLater on, when every new subject is covered, you as a teacher, can let students explore and play.\u003cbr\u003e\r\nSimply don't start with a kung-fu program at the very start. By the end of the class, there will be chaos!\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\r\nAdd a promise\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eOne trick for a teacher in a class is to promise that you will show something \"cool\" once all tasks are solved. And then do the \"kung-fu\" sound robot.\u003cbr\u003e\r\nThat adds some \"effort and reward\" dynamics in the classroom and usually strengthens the teacher's authority in the classroom.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Teacher's Note,EV3,Classes with students","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eIt is not always necessary to do a smile and to say hello with the robot. So, today with the teacher note I'll stop at this.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe first program that we wanted to do with the students was this one. The robot moves with an angry face and at the end it's a kung-fu sound. And we thought that this will be very funny.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe concern with this approach is that if this is the first task that you do with the students you'd probably lose the discipline in the class. Because they'll start experimenting with all the other sounds and from there build all the other programs which is from one point of view very good but let's first leave them to implement the smile and the hello and it happens naturally. They are curious and they start experimenting with the block and they'll find most of the interesting sounds by themselves. And you can also use this task if the whole class is more quiet and you'd like to add more energy into the class you can use this program. Just an angry face with a kung-fu sound. But be careful because you can lose the discipline in the class.\u003c/p\u003e"},"71":{"position":71,"title":"Constructing BigDaddy Competition Robot (Part 2 - Front)","description":"\u003cp\u003eBased on your feedback we have decided to show you the live process of building a complex LEGO Mindstorms Competition robot without having the whole robot ready yet. We are continuing from part 1 where we finished part of the 'front' of the robot and we arrived at a construction that we didn`t like and would fix in this video lesson.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eThe Name\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eYes, we have watched the Marvel 'Kick Ass'. And yes, this robot will be big and angry.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eThe Construction\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/search/robot+construction\"\u003erobot construction\u003c/a\u003e has a 'front', 'back' and a frame in between. In this video lesson we are working on the 'front' where we use a paired gear wheel. The power would be transfered from a mindstorms motor to the front wheels.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eThe Frame\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eContinuing from \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/70-bigdady-competition-robot-part-1\" style=\"font: inherit;margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;border-image:none;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;vertical-align: baseline;\"\u003eBigDady Competition Robot (Part 1)\u003c/a\u003e we add a frame that could be used to align the robot to walls which is a technique successfully used in easy robotics competitions.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eThe Process\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWe construct, experiment and post. You give us feedback and based on the feedback we make modifications on the robot. So, build it with us on the way, try to take up a specific challenge with it and leave us a comment below on what has and what hasn't worked for you in this robot.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eOther episodes from the series:\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/70-bigdady-competition-robot-part-1\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;\"\u003eConstructing BigDaddy Competition Robot (Part 1 - Front)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,FLL,Construction","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eIn the previous episode we finished constructing a very interesting front part of a robot with two wheels. We can transfer power from the motor to the wheels and achieve a very stable movement. In this episode I'd like to build something on the gear wheel that we could later attach the motor to.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNow that we have this gear wheel, we should find a way to add additional holes on which we can continue the construction. The holes of the gear wheels are placed horizontally and it's very convenient to add this frame on top of the gear wheel so that we can have more holes. For example, horizontal and vertical, on which we can continue the construction. In order to add this frame to the gear wheel, I'll show you a way with two black pins that's kind of difficult but interesting. Watch carefully. Now. It will be very stable but first we add one of the beams, then we add the other and now we have the construction. If we add one red pin to the other side, we'll get a very stable construction. But it's difficult to construct and it's even more difficult to remove it. Another way is to add the frame with the red pins only. So, I'll remove this axle from here, I'll add the red pins. The order is very important - first one of the sides, then one pin on the other side,\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003ethen on this side again\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eand then we add the frame. After adding the frame, we can just push the red pins and we have the frame attached to the gear wheel. We can use these interesting special LEGO parts that are available only in the EV3 Mindstorms set that are not used very often but will be very useful for own construction. We add them to the frame. Like this.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd this one here. And we can continue from here with improving the construction so that we can attach a motor and probably the back of the robot or the front. (We still haven't decided whether this would be the front or the back.) Something that should be mentioned is that this construction is not very stable with these two parts because it bends, as you can see. That's why we should add one additional beam on this side of the robot. And in this way we'll prevent the parts from bending. We've achieved a very, very stable construction that can transfer the power. Now we can again add the axle and turn the wheels. The last step of our video is to actually add a frame around the wheels and the construction. This frame, as you probably know from other videos, is very useful as you can align the robot to different walls. You can see the instructions for adding the frame in the materials section below the video. I've already prepared the frame. I'll add one of the frames to the back part of the robot. Like this. Then I'll add the large frame (it's mainly constructed from beams and angled beams). I'll add it to the front. Like this. There are four pins that we should attach. One, two, three, four. Then from the back - as you can see it's very modular. We add just two modules and we have the frame at the front ready. As to the wheels, you can see they are connected very loosely. We should add additional parts, so that they are more stable.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eEach axle should be connected to least two points. One is ready.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd the second one is ready. In the next video we'll continue with improving the front of the robot and adding a motor, a back.. Let's see what will come out of this construction. Leave your comments below and we'll be happy to hear from you.\u003c/p\u003e"},"72":{"position":72,"title":"Constructing BigDaddy Competition Robot (Part 3 - Front to Rear)","description":"\u003cp\u003eBased on your feedback we have decided to show you the live process of building a complex LEGO Mindstorms EV3 Competition robot without having the whole robot ready yet. We are continuing from part 2 where we finished the 'front' of the robot and now we will extend it so that we could also attach the rear part. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eThe Name\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eYes, we have watched the Marvel 'Kick Ass'. And yes, this robot will be big and angry.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eThe Construction\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eAgain the \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/search/robot+construction\"\u003erobot construction\u003c/a\u003e has three parts - 'front', 'back' and a frame in between. In this video lesson we are working on the link between the 'front' and the 'back' (also called rear part when we come to vehicles). For the 'rear' part we are using a differential that would help us transfer power to both rear wheels only with one motor.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eThe Base\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eContinuing from \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/71-bigdady-competition-robot-front-part-2\" style=\"font: inherit;margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;border-image:none;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;vertical-align: baseline;\"\u003eBigDaddy Competition Robot (Part 2 - Front)\u003c/a\u003e we add a base that would extend the construction from the front to the rear part of the robot.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eThe Process\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWe construct, experiment and post. You give us feedback and based on the feedback we make modifications on the robot. So, build it with us on the way, try to take up a specific challenge with it and leave us a comment below on what has and what hasn't worked for you in this robot.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eOther episodes from the series:\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/70-bigdady-competition-robot-part-1\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;\"\u003eConstructing BigDaddy Competition Robot (Part 1 - Front)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/71-bigdady-competition-robot-front-part-2\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;\"\u003eConstructing BigDaddy Competition Robot (Part 2 - Front)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,FLL,Construction","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eIn the previous episode we started constructing the front of a new competition construction and we finished approximately here. In the next few episodes I'd like to show you how we came up with the rear part of the construction and how we've changed it a few times. We had some gear wheels and now we have a differential. And now it's a very stable and very powerful construction that we'll improve in some of the next video lessons.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eSince we are now constructing the rear part of the robot, and we have the front part already constructed, I will introduce you to a new mechanism - it's called a differential. I suppose we should have a special video on differentials. So, here I will just use it as an example and I'll let you to think about differentials for a couple of weeks and then we'll give a detailed explanation on how differentials work. Basically, the idea is that you can control both wheels with one motor. And the wheels can turn separately, although they are controlled by one motor. Here's the differenetial part that comes with the LEGO EV3 Mindstorms set; we also have these special gear wheels that are not like the others; and we have a frame. I'd like to attach the wheels to these axles right here.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eI'll have one of the wheels attached to one axle and the other - to the other one. I'd like to add the motor to this gear wheel. So, I'll have to find a way to transfer power from this gear wheel to these two axles. I'll use the differential. It's an interesting mechanism. Probably all cars on the market now have a differential. Some have two, others have four.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNow we attach one of the axles here; the other axle there. As a result, we have two axles. We can transfer power to both axles using only one motor. The good thing about the differential is that we can, for example, stop one of the wheels and the other one will continue turning. This is very useful when we have very large wheels - like these. Because when turning, there will be some friction between the tire and the surface, and we should use a differential. Now that we have the differential constructed, it will be used at the rear part of the robot, so we should find a way to attach it to the front part of the robot. We should extend the construction now. It's really convenient that we have these grey frames in the EV3 set and in some of the NXT Mindstorms sets. But probably in some of the next videos we'll explore how to construct the same construction using only beams. But for the time being let's stick with the grey frames. I'll add this frame right here and you'll probably remember from the previous episode that our idea was to use these black parts that are kind of strange but simply very useful and to find a specific example where we can use them. So, I'll add the frame right here. And you can see that the holes here and the holes of this frame are on different levels. So, it's one hole above and we can, for example, extend the construction in the following way: from the left and from the right. And then attach the whole construction to the front. There are six pins and it's not that easy but it's very stable. Now you may be wondering about these blue pins right here (I've assembled them in advance). We need to extend the construction even further to have a larger robot so we can add more attachments, more sensors, etc. I'll use another grey frame. It's very interesting that you should first add the frame and then lock it with the blue pins. Now I have the front part of the robot extended. We can now look for ways to somehow attach the differential to this frame and then the wheels to the differential. I've prepared another construction consisting of three frames. You can find all the instructions below the video. I'll attach the differential to the frame. Now we have a lot of possibilities for attaching the differential. How exactly should we add the rear part to the front part of the robot? There are a number of options. We have the grey frames and we see that we have a lot of holes on them. We can attach the frame like this or like that or probably in another way. We've come up with an interesting solution where we also use these blue pins over here because they are still not used. And it's a good idea to use the pins whenever you have them in the construction and use all the options the pins present. Now I'll add the following construction.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eRight here. One is ready. The idea is that this construction will hold the differential. The second one is also ready. Now we can add the differential and attach it to these parts.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eSo, we've solved the problem with the blue pins. We no longer have unused pins in our construction. However, you can see the differential is not very stable. So, we should attach it to at least one more point so that we can have a stable construction. It's good to attach it to three points. It's also good to have it attached to two points. Probably three would be perfect. Now, following the same principle, we'll again use these angled beams. I'll remove one of the axles.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eI'll attach the whole differential frame to the frame coming to the front using this part - following the same principle.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd then again add it. Now it's much more stable, not that fragile. I'll add the axle, the extention for the axle. Then we add the wheel. And we repeat the same thing on the other side.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNow we have the front part of the robot, the extention of the front part, or the base, and we have the rear part. Now we should find a way to attach the wheels and transfer power from the differential to the wheels. But since we are over nine minutes already, I prefer to leave this for our next episode. Stay tuned and see how we continue with this construction.\u003c/p\u003e"},"410":{"position":410,"title":"EV3 Phi. Inertia. Simple explanation and example","description":"\u003cp\u003eWe will explain inertia non-scientifically so that we make it easy to understand concept.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eDefinition of inertia\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe desire of an object to keep doing what it is currently doing, the way it is doing it.\u003cbr\u003e\r\nSometimes you may hear about some person being INERT.\u003cbr\u003e\r\nUsually, old people with a lot of experience will keep doing things the way they know it works.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eBack to inertia for robots and all other objects:\u003cbr\u003e\r\nEvery object is trying to maintain its current movement. If you try to stop a bike downhill, it will try to keep moving.\u003cbr\u003e\r\n \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eExamples of inertia\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIf you try to move a bike at rest, it will try to remain at rest.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eSame applies to the cup on top of the robot.\u003cbr\u003e\r\nWhen the robot and the cup are at rest, the cup tries to remain at rest and falls behind.\u003cbr\u003e\r\nThen the robot is moving the cup and suddenly stops, the cup tries to keep on moving and falls off.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThat is inertia in a nutshell.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Classes with students","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eThe cup falls from the robot for two reasons. First, inertia. Second, acceleration. They are very tightly connected so it's a good idea to now discuss what is inertia and what is acceleration.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eInertia, not the scientific definition but a definition that I'll give in this video. Inertia is the desire of an object like a cup of coffee constructed from Lego parts to keep moving the way it is moving. Sometimes you might here about some person that's called that's being inert. Usually, old people with a lot of experience will keep doing things the way they know it works. Back to the inertia for robots and for all other objects. Every object like a robot or a construction every object is trying to maintain its current movement. If you try to stop a bike while you are moving downhill it will try to keep moving. If you try to move the bike at rest, it will remain at rest. Same applies for the cup of the robot. When the robot and the cup are at rest the cup tries to remain at rest and it falls behind when you accelerate. When the robot is moving and suddenly stops the cup will try to maintain its current movement so it just moves forward and it will fall from the robot. Again, to see it as an example.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eBecause the robot stops but the robot with the cup has some inertia the cup will continue.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNow, the robot does not continue because we have the wheels and we have the tires and there is some friction between the tires and the table and that's why to robot stops. But for the cup the cup just continues.\u003c/p\u003e"},"506":{"position":506,"title":"Box Robot Two. Frame for pinless attachments","description":"\u003cp\u003eIn this Episode, we stop at the pinless attachments for the Box Robot 2 and especially for the constructing a frame. This frame is then used for further extending the robot with attachments.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eRobot Building instructions\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWe have provided the building instructions for this robot as part of the whole course \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/courses/6\"\u003eBox Robot Two. Fewer parts and one motor. Simplifying a robot.\u003c/a\u003e (this will require a course subscription)\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eFrame Building Instructions\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eFind the instructions in the course \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/courses/6\"\u003eBox Robot Two. Fewer parts and one motor. Simplifying a robot.\u003c/a\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy a frame\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe whole frame is one large pinless attachment. If you have more parts it is much easier to build a few frames and use this frames for different attachments. The frame assures that you could have a stable pinless attachment. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Construction,Attachments,FLL","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eIn this video that's the first one section for the attachments we'll start with building attachments for our Box Robot 2. When building attachments for our Box Robot what we try to do is to have all of the attachments as pinless attachments. So, you can first use the box of the robot and you can try to build attachments for this box but what we have done is to build a frame. A frame that's a pinless frame that we can just place on the robot. And when we are building attachments for our Box Robot we have the attachments on the frame and then we place the frame on the robot. Why? Because in the following videos we'll show you about 4 different attachments and it's very convenient to have the frame and to be able to place the different attachments on the frame and from there just move the frame. The interesting thing about the frame it's a pinless frame. You can find the building instructions in the course for this frame. When you place it on the robot you get one attachment for free right here at the front of the robot.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhen I now rotate the motor\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eyou can see the axle at the front of the robot that also rotates and we have an extending attachment and this attachment extends the axle. And right here on the inside we have one more axle and we add the frame\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003ewe extend the axle further to the front. So, that's one of the first things that you can use this extending frame for and the way we extend the axle.\u003c/p\u003e"},"82":{"position":82,"title":"How to use the Light/Color Sensors with the Catapult built from EV3/NXT","description":"\u003cp\u003eVision is still one of the very few fields where a human being could outsmart a computer. Still. Colour/Light sensors are the cornerstones of implementing a smart LEGO Mindstorms robot that could at least partially do \"vision\". In this video tutorial, we are using the robotics sensor to detect loading and unloading of the catapult.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eLight \u0026amp; Colors are all around us. Humans are designed to do vision and to do pattern recognition. What we know for certain is that when an \u003ca href=\"http://waitbutwhy.com/2015/01/artificial-intelligence-revolution-1.html\"\u003eartificial intelligence becomes smart enough\u003c/a\u003e to do vision, as good as humans do, we would mark a great milestone in robots development.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe EV3/NXT Catapult \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/search/robot+construction\"\u003erobot construction\u003c/a\u003e is very fun and we use the \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/search/ev3+color+sensor\"\u003eEV3 color sensor\u003c/a\u003e to detect when the Catapult has just fired and when to stop loading it. In this way, we completely automate the robot. The program is implemented with \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/search/ev3+programming\"\u003eEV3-G Software\u003c/a\u003e.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eAll episodes from the series:\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/69-how-to-use-the-ultrasonic-sensor-with-the-catapult-build-from-mindstorms-ev3-nxt\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;\"\u003eHow to use the Ultrasonic Sensor with the Catapult built from EV3/NXT (Part 5)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/68-catapult-build-from-lego-mindstorms-ev3-nxt-part-4-ev3-clutch-and-loading\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;border-image-source:none;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;\"\u003eCatapult build from LEGO Mindstorms EV3/NXT (Part 4 - EV3 clutch and loading)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/67-catapult-build-from-lego-mindstorms-ev3-nxt-part-3-automatic-loading\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;border-image-source:none;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;\"\u003eCatapult build from LEGO Mindstorms EV3/NXT (Part 3 - Automatic loading)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/66-catapult-build-from-lego-mindstorms-ev3-nxt-part-2-base\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;border-image-source:none;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;\"\u003eCatapult build from LEGO Mindstorms EV3/NXT (Part 2 - Base)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/62-catapult-looking-like-a-trebuchet-launcher-build-from-lego\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;border-image-source:none;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;\"\u003eCatapult build from LEGO Mindstorms EV3/NXT (Part 1)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Gears,Light and Color Sensor,Shoot,Fun,Construction","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003e- In this video lesson, we are returning back to the \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/search/lego+catapult\"\u003ecatapult\u003c/a\u003e. As you recall we can load the \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/search/lego+catapult\"\u003ecatapult\u003c/a\u003e manually and automatically and you can fire small, LEGO\u0026nbsp;parts. The problem was how do we load the catapult, and when do we stop loading and then we\u0026#39;re going to use the \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/search/ev3+color+sensor\"\u003eEV3 Color Sensor\u003c/a\u003e.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eFirst, let\u0026#39;s think of where should we place the sensor. It\u0026#39;s a good idea to place the sensor in a way that it can detect the back of your brick. In this way when you load the catapult and get the sensor right here, it will see nothing but when we fire and we will start it, again it will see the back of the brick. Let\u0026#39;s place sensor. Here it is and from your angle, again the purpose of placing the sensor here is that when we fire an element at the end we will see the back of the brick and we know that we should load the catapult again and then we fire. We see the back of the brick. We load again. Let\u0026#39;s go and do the problem. Initially the catapult has just fired an element and the brick is down. The current sensor detects the back of the brick, and the \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/search/light+sensor\"\u003elights\u003c/a\u003e are affected from the back of the brick and the value of this \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/search/ev3+color+sensor\"\u003ecolor sensor\u003c/a\u003e is currently 22. So if we now load the catapult we can see that the color sensor no longer detects the back of the brick and the value of the color sensor is two. Twenty something and two. We\u0026#39;re going to this threshold values to implement our algorithm. Keeping in mind these two values 2 and 24. This is our problem. We wait until we have just fired an element and we can detect the back of the brick and we detect the back of the brick if we see a value of more than let\u0026#39;s say 15. If we see something that\u0026#39;s more than 15 this means that we should just fire an element the brick is down and we are ready for loading. We wait for about a second and then we start the medium motor. We start the medium motor in the opposite direction because it\u0026#39;s how the \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/search/robot+construction\"\u003econstruction \u003c/a\u003eis. and we just turn it on. The medium motor, turn it on opposite direction and we wait. We wait until we see something that\u0026#39;s less than two or at least three-value threshold. We\u0026#39;ve got to make it more, not that fragile to make it working in more cases we use a lot of five. It\u0026#39;s just an experimental value, experiment with this and the problem we have. We are waiting for the catapult to fire, put the brick down then we start loading and then we wait until the catapult is loaded and then we stop. We stop motor A and we put all this in the loop. Let\u0026#39;s now see how the \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/search/ev3+programming\"\u003eprogram\u003c/a\u003e works. Let\u0026#39;s now run the program. We start, we load the catapult, we are currently waiting because you can see this block to detect something that\u0026#39;s more than 15 which means the back of the brick, we fire. We load again, we fire, load again and this is how you have a catapult using a color sensor to detect when to load and when to fire. In the next video, we\u0026#39;re going to calibrate the sensor because in this video, we are not \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/82-how-to-use-the-light-sensors-with-the-catapult-built-from-ev3-nxt\"\u003ecalibrating it\u003c/a\u003e, and you might have different light conditions in the room and you always want to calibrate the sensor before using it.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n"},"611":{"position":611,"title":"The robot is repeated on purpose","description":"\u003cp\u003eYes, this is the same robot we showed last time.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eTry to build the robot without the instructions\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eLet’s play a game: can you build the robot without looking at the instructions?\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\r\nTry to build the robot faster than yesterday\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWe don’t expect you to remember yesterday’s robot. But we expect you to build it faster.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"","subtitles":null},"77":{"position":77,"title":"Positioning motors on BigDaddy Competition Robot - Second try (Part 7)","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis second way of positioning the LEGO Mindstorms EV3 motors on the robot leaves more space for the Mindstorms brick and for attaching a third motor. We are experimenting and showing the advantages and disadvantages of this particular construction.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eWhy a second way?\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIn the BigDaddy series of video tutorials on \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/search/lego+mindstorms\"\u003eLEGO Mindstorms\u003c/a\u003e robotics constructions we are trying to show the whole process of engineering and re-engineering. We are coming up with a design and we are re-designing when needed. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/76-positioning-motors-on-bigdaddy-competition-robot-part-6\"\u003efirst positioning of the motors\u003c/a\u003e made us use a \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/76-positioning-motors-on-bigdaddy-competition-robot-part-6/\"\u003eCardan Shaft with Cardan Joins\u003c/a\u003e to transfer power at a large angle. The great disadvantage is that we loose power for every cardan join we add. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eThe Robot Construction and the motors placed at an angel\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eAgain the 'front', 'rear' and 'central' frame of the BigDaddy competition robot are ready. Most of the time you should consider placing the motors along or perpendicularly to the central frame. But in this particular video tutorial we are positioning the motors at an angel. Constructing LEGO robots where different moduls are at an angle always seem challenging. Use the building instructions to learn and improve your toolbox of solutions on this topic.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eOther episodes from the series:\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/70-bigdady-competition-robot-part-1\" style=\"color: rgb(46, 49, 171);margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;text-decoration: none;\"\u003eConstructing BigDaddy Competition Robot (Part 1 - Front)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/71-bigdady-competition-robot-front-part-2\" style=\"color: rgb(46, 49, 171);margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;text-decoration: none;\"\u003eConstructing BigDaddy Competition Robot (Part 2 - Front)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/72-bigdady-competition-robot-rear-part-3-front-to-rear\" style=\"color: rgb(46, 49, 171);margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;text-decoration: none;\"\u003eConstructing BigDaddy Competition Robot (Part 3 - Front to Rear)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/73-bigdaddy-competition-robot-part-4-complex-transfer-of-power\" style=\"color: rgb(46, 49, 171);margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;text-decoration: none;\"\u003eBigDaddy Competition Robot (Part 4 - Complex Transfer of Power in a Triangle)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/74-bigdaddy-competition-robot-part-5-power-to-rear-wheels\" style=\"color: rgb(46, 49, 171);margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;text-decoration: none;\"\u003eBigDaddy Competition Robot (Part 5 - Power to Rear Wheels)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/76-positioning-motors-on-bigdaddy-competition-robot-part-6\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;\"\u003ePositioning motors on BigDaddy Competition Robot (Part 6)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n","tags":"Advanced,EV3,Motors,Construction","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003e- In this lesson, we will continue with improving the BigDaddy construction and last time we finished with adding a Cardan shaft that transfers power from a motor to the front of the robot where we add an attachment. The problem with the Cardan shaft is that in such a situation where you have a large degree the whole shaft is very fragile and you have large power loss. In this video, we are going to remove it and search for other ways to position the motors. Again, we are starting from the base construction and I'll try to position the motors in another way. In the previous video, they were positioned like this. There are actually like this and now let's try to position them like this so one of the motor is for the rear wheels, one of the motor is the medium motor for the front wheels and one of the motors for attachments. Let's first place the medium motors. It's quite straightforward we have two black pins and we have an axle over here that's turning the front of the robot and we just add the medium motor and that's it. Now we will transfer power to the medium motor from the brick. We can control the front tires and we can turn. The next step is to add the motor for the rear part of the robot. We will need an axle. Let's add one here and the motor should be something like this. As you can see, we have many options to position the motor and we've chosen to use a simple beam. Now if we add the beam like this you can see that it's on another level so it's one hole above this frame and I will add one more beam here to have additional holes and we are done. Now the beam is not very stable but we add the motor and we do use the fact that these two holes or the brick are on the same line as the center of the motor where we place the axle.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eHere it is one of the motors. It's not very stable and that's why I would like to attach the beam on one more place not only on one place but on the second and for this I'll weight this part right over here on the framework.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAs a result, we have an additional part and this part is right here and we can attach the beam to this part and we have a much more stable construction.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eJust lock it and now one of the motors is already here. The next thing is that we must have the second motor and for the second motor I will try to position it like this and in this way we have the first motor for the rear part of the wheel, the medium motor for the front part and the third motor probably for attachments. Again, we use the same principal. How do we position the motor on the frame? Something that we should do is that I must free this hole right here and I'll want one more blue pin so that I could attach the motor to this blue pin.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eHere it is I have the blue pin and now I could place the motor and in order to find a way to place it we add some additional beams.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAgain, the motor is attached only on one part and for this we want a second beam and the second beam over here and here we are. As a result, we have a construction with three motors one for the rear part, one for the front part and one for attachment. We can add an axle on this motor but as you can see it's quite difficult now to transfer some power from this motor to an attachment that's placed at the front of the robot. It's possible but you must have a quite complex system of gears or so some other solutions and it won't be competition ready. So again, we will continue searching for other solutions and how do we place the brick and the three motors on this construction.\u003c/p\u003e"},"703":{"position":703,"title":"Configuring the Raspberry PI Linux to send you emails ","description":"\u003cp\u003eYou talk with the car. You can send it email. And it can even receive emails, but that's for another time.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"","tags":"Learn At Home,Raspberry PI,STEM,Linux,Fun","subtitles":null},"1006":{"position":1006,"title":"How to on 'Easy Detach of Modules' in LEGO Mindstorms. Example with SUV Box Robot","description":"\u003cp\u003eWe've recently received a number of question on how could the \u003ca href=\"/materials/554-suv-competition-box-robot-from-lego-mindstorms-ev3\"\u003eSUV box robot\u003c/a\u003e be charged. The answer is simple - you detach the back pane. The question and topic of detaching modules from a robot and attaching them again is really interesting and powerfull and yet not very often implemented in many robots. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch2\u003eDetaching modules\u003c/h2\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eBuilding your robot as a collection of different modules gives you the ability to detach and attach parts of the robot, to reuse and to make your design much more agile. And agile designs are easier to modify to answer the new requirements. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eDetaching modules is not a new concept and in LEGO Mindstorms it is easily implemented. There are \"Techin Pin Long with Stop Bush\" that could be used for this.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch2\u003eExample\u003c/h2\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe example above shows you how to easily detach the back pane of the robot and to allow for the robot to be charged. There are 6 Pins that should be pulled and then the pane. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch2\u003eHow many pins for locking\u003c/h2\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIt is a good practice to use 2 pins for each side where your module is connected. In our case we are attaching the module on 3 sides so we have 6 red pins with Stop Bush.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Attachments","subtitles":null},"711":{"position":711,"title":"Install Robopartans Bluetooth Control application on your phone","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"Learn At Home,Phone,STEM,Raspberry PI,Classes with students","subtitles":null},"824":{"position":824,"title":"Introduction","description":"\u003cp\u003eToday we will construct a tank. Do you remember what was important when building robots with treads? We will also attach a color sensor to the construction which will make the robot stop on a black line and follow a black line.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"","tags":"Classes with students","subtitles":null},"1024":{"position":1024,"title":"Introduction to the Meduim motor","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe medium motor is the first motor that we can use to drive the attachments on our robots.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eThe medium motor is the first motor that we can use to \u003cstrong\u003edrive the attachments\u003c/strong\u003e on our robots.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eSo far, we have been moving only the wheels of our robots. With the help of the medium motor, we can now move \u003cstrong\u003earms, lifts, actuators\u003c/strong\u003e or anything else attached to a robot.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch2\u003eCharacteristics of an EV3 Medium motor\u003c/h2\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThis is what the medium motor looks like:\u003cbr\u003e\r\n\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive img-content\" src=\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/938/content/LEGO-Mindstorms-Ev3-Medium-Motor-Fllcasts.png\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWhen you are looking at its red drive opening, the \u003cstrong\u003epositive direction is a clockwise\u003c/strong\u003e rotation.\u003cbr\u003e\r\n\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive img-content\" src=\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/939/content/LEGO-Mindstorms-Ev3-Medium-Motor-With-Arrows-Fllcasts.png\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe default port for a medium motor is port A, so make sure you\u003cstrong\u003e plug your cables in port A\u003c/strong\u003e of the Brick.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch2\u003eProgramming the medium motor\u003c/h2\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe Medium motor block is the very first block in the green action palette.\u003cbr\u003e\r\n\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive img-content\" src=\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/940/content/LEGO-Mindstorms-Ev3G-Sowtware-Green-Pallet-To-Medium-Motor-Arrow-Fllcasts.png\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eAside from its different picture, there is nothing special about the block:\u003cbr\u003e\r\nit can rotate for rotations, degrees and seconds,\u003cbr\u003e\r\nit can be programmed to turn OFF or to turn ON indefinitely, just like the other motors.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch2\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\r\nTypical use of the medium motor block\u003c/h2\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThis motor is more \u003cstrong\u003eprecise\u003c/strong\u003e, than powerful. You will have a hard time lifting heavy objects with a medium motor.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eOn the other hand, it is the most precise motor that can turn to one degree of precision and has very \u003cstrong\u003esmall \u003c/strong\u003e\u003cstrong\u003elashback\u003c/strong\u003e (\u003cspan class=\"ILfuVd\"\u003ethe play between adjacent gears in the motor itself\u003c/span\u003e).\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWhen you use this motor, 99% of the time you will be using \u003cstrong\u003eTurn for Degrees\u003c/strong\u003e, so that the attachment does not hit any other part of the robot or get jammed. You will rarely have to programme the motor outside the range of +180 to -180 degrees and most often you will need +90 or -90 degrees.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,STEM","subtitles":null},"726":{"position":726,"title":"Different issues with burning the image on an SD Card","description":"\u003cp\u003eLet's list what are the different issues that might occur when burning the image on the SD card. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eTL. DR.\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eProbably there is not enough space.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eNot enough space\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp style=\"text-align: justify;\"\u003eThe image is about 7.7 GB. Some 8 GB cards are manufactured in a way that there is only 7.6GB of space on them. Yes. Manufacturers are lying. You should get used to it. They will try all kinds of marketing tricks to sell you something with almost the features that you need, but not entirely. A quick solution is to buy a 16GB SD card (that will have approximately 15.4GB of space, but we already know that manufacturers are lying to us, don't we :)) \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e \u003c/h3\u003e\r\n","tags":"Learn At Home,Image,STEM,Basic,Classes with students","subtitles":null},"79":{"position":79,"title":"Correct position of motors on BigDaddy Competition Robot (Part 8)","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis third way of positioning the LEGO Mindstorms EV3 motors on the robot seems to be the most productive with the most advantages. We have named it \"correct\", but we completely understand there might be other even more efficient ways to position the motors on the robot.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eThe third way\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIn the BigDaddy series of video tutorials on \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/search/robot+construction\"\u003erobot constructions\u003c/a\u003e build with \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/search/lego+mindstorms\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;\"\u003eLEGO Mindstorms\u003c/a\u003e we have showed three different ways to position the motors on the construction. Engineering and re-engineering as needed and explaining the advantages and disadvantages of decisions we have made. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWhether and how you could use this robot during the FIRST LEGO League competition or other robotics competitions depends highly on the tasks involved. In some of the next tutorials we would look at specific examples on how some of the FLL tasks are solved.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eOther episodes from the series:\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/70-bigdady-competition-robot-part-1\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;\"\u003eConstructing BigDaddy Competition Robot (Part 1 - Front)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/71-bigdady-competition-robot-front-part-2\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;\"\u003eConstructing BigDaddy Competition Robot (Part 2 - Front)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/72-bigdady-competition-robot-rear-part-3-front-to-rear\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;\"\u003eConstructing BigDaddy Competition Robot (Part 3 - Front to Rear)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/73-bigdaddy-competition-robot-part-4-complex-transfer-of-power\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;\"\u003eBigDaddy Competition Robot (Part 4 - Complex Transfer of Power in a Triangle)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/74-bigdaddy-competition-robot-part-5-power-to-rear-wheels\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;\"\u003eBigDaddy Competition Robot (Part 5 - Power to Rear Wheels)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/76-positioning-motors-on-bigdaddy-competition-robot-part-6\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;\"\u003ePositioning motors on BigDaddy Competition Robot (Part 6)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/77-positioning-motors-on-bigdaddy-competition-robot-second-try-part-7\" style=\"color: rgb(46, 49, 171);margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;text-decoration: none;\"\u003ePositioning motors on BigDaddy Competition Robot - Second try (Part 7)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n","tags":"Motors,EV3,Advanced,Construction","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003e- Up until now we've constructed a robot that's very stable, the BigDaddy construction, and it has a front part. It has a rear part with a differential. You can check out the previous videos. And in this episode, we will explore different ways in which we can attach the motors so that we have control over the front part of the robot and the rear part of the robot.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eContinuing from last video, there are a few slight modifications for our construction, and we've improved the construction right here. There's our new gray parts and these gray parts we use them because they are just beams and we have much more beams in the construction than the other parts. And we've also add some additional modules here to make the whole construction much more stable. Having in mind that, our next step is to find a way to position the motors, here are two motors and we would like to use one of the motors to transfer power to the rear wheels and one of the motors to turn the front wheels left and right. First, I'll add the axles right here. And right here now we we're experimenting with different solutions. We could add the motors in different ways. In this video, particularly we decided to add to the motors in the following way. First, we attach the two motors together like this, and that way have motors touch. We put them in the way that we have the axles. One and the other. Now as you can see this construction would not work since the motors are attached only on the axles. We must also attach the motors to the frame of the robot. Let's remove them. One second. Now there's a frame. There are different ways, we've decided to use.. I've already prepared the module for this.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd it's a simple module with a few beams and a few pins. And if we add...\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNow we have the motors. We have the frame. We should just push them and they'll attach to the pins.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eOne more pin is missing right here, and we're done. We have our motors attached in a way that we can transfer power to the rear wheels and transfer power to the front wheels. As a last step, we are left with a third medium motor that we used for different attachments. And if we consider that this is the front part of our robot, as mentioned, you can always think of this being the front part of the your robot but let's just for moment think that this is the front part, and probably the attachments will be somewhere around here and we need to somehow transfer power from the motor to the attachments. We have the medium motor in the inter-construction in three sets and we can add the medium motor for example here above, or here or over here, and just for the sake of the experiment we decided to add the motor right here, on the left part. And now we are going to transfer power from the motor to the attachment with this very interesting module. It's called a shaft and specifically it's a Cardan shaft and it can transfer power in a certain angle. For example, you can transfer the power when you hit the whole shaft vertically but if one of the parts is a certain angle from the other you can again transfer part of the power. And we should mention that you're always losing part of the power. For example if you go to more than 45 degrees, it's now becoming even impossible to transfer a reasonable amount of power from the motor to the end of the shaft. Let's attach this shaft on our robot.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eHere it is. Technically, it would be possible to transfer power from the motor to the end of the shaft, but practically it's not a good idea. That's why in the next video we're searching for other ways to position the motors so that we could get the two driving motors, and the medium motor with the brick and position them in ways to have space.\u003c/p\u003e"},"89":{"position":89,"title":"Solving the FIRST LEGO League World Class Robotics Competition mission","description":"\u003cp\u003eHere we continue examining FLL 2014 World Class missions. We show different ways, for putting the insert in place as well as taking the loop from the robotics arm. Some of them are quite specific, which reminds us, that you need to think out of the box, while solving the missions.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eIn the tutorial we have divided the mission into three tasks. The first one is to put the robotics insert in place. We have suggested one straight forward solution and one that count on the shape of the insert. In both cases you need to be precise, while leaving the insert. You could achieve that, by aligning either to the border of the field, to the green line in front of the mission model or to the mission model itself. Find more by watching more tutorials on the topic \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes?tag_id=11\"\u003ehere\u003c/a\u003e. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe next challenge is how to push the insert, so that it unlocks the loop from the arm. With the first \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/search/attachment\"\u003eattachment\u003c/a\u003e we make a small modification, while with the second we make a modification in the program. This is great example how you could solve a problem both with hardware and software, depending on the situation.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe third part is how we catch the falling loop. This is not necessary for completing this mission, but it is part of the Project-Based Learning mission. Here the main point is that you must try to catch the loop as close to the arm as possible. The larger the distance from the arm is, the larger are you will need to cover to be sure that you catch the loop.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eAt the end we illustrate the methods with examples from teams competing in the FIRST LEGO League 2014 World Class Challenge.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eYour turn\u003c/strong\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eHow did you solved the mission? Did I missed an interesting way for solving it?  \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e\u003cem\u003eLet us know in the comments below!\u003c/em\u003e\u003c/strong\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,FLL 2014,Attachments,FLL,Construction","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003e- Today I would like to show you some ideas I find interesting in completing one of the 2014 first Lego Leagues missions called Robotics Competition. The mission seemed fairly easy, but it has its little tricks.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAs usual, let's begin with repeating once again what was required. There are two required conditions for scoring the mission. It follows. The robotics insert is installed in the place shown and the loop is no longer touching the robotic arm model. However, for scoring the mission it is not enough to accomplish the required conditions, but also it matters how you did it. So at the end of the match no team supplied object should be touching the robotics insert and the loop has been released due to the movement of the slider only. That means that you could not push the lever with the robot, nor it could lead level pieces together with the robotics insert. Now when we're properly informed about what should be done, let's begin with the execution. The mission could be divided into three challenges. The first one is how to put the robotics insert in place. This is the easiest part because you can just slide it so it falls in place. However, you need to be precise in positioning the robot. This could be achieved by aligning either to the border, the green line, or even to the mission model itself. You can find more on the topic just by searching \"align\" on the silver bar above or following the links in the description. Another way is to count on the shape of the robotics insert. You could use the fact that it has a slide from the side, so if you put it on axis and push it against the mission model, the robotics insert will slide and trace the height while bending the axis. Once the insert has passed the front beam of the model, the axis will return the insert to its initial height. Now if you pull back the attachment, the insert will hook on the front beam with its edge and the insert will stay in place. This I believe is a rather clever way because it uses a static attachment for solving the mission. The next challenge is how you put the insert so that it releases the loop from the arm. With the first attachment I showed, it is hard to push the insert after it has fallen. However, if you make a small modification to the slide and have two of the beams to jut out a little bit, you could use them to push the insert so that the loop is released.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWith the second attachment, we have a problem with this beam over here. When you push the insert, it face the beam and could not push the lever. In this case, it is enough to pull back with the robot a little bit, but enough for the axis to be not all the way into the insert so that the front of the insert could drop in height. Then you just push and loop is released. The third and most challenging part is how to catch the loop. It is not part of this mission, but is part of the project-based learning mission. The problem is that the loop do not fall on the same place each time and you have to cover a large area. I have seen several solutions of this problem and all of them count on the fact that this area is smallest when you are close to the arm. Here you could see a team using this Lego Deathstar as a cup where the loop falls. What is amazing is that the success rate of the team was almost 100%. Another way is to have a fork below the arm as this one and when the loop falls, it hangs on one of the axis and you take it back to the base. Now let's take a look at several video clips of teams completing the mission. Now it's your turn. Have I missed a way to solve the mission in that video? Let me know in the comments below. Bye.\u003c/p\u003e"},"85":{"position":85,"title":"How to Know the Balance of your LEGO Mindstorms Competition Robot","description":"\u003cp\u003eПовторяемостта на един състезателен робот от голяма степен зависи от неговия баланс. В предишния погледнахме гумите - в този -  баланс. В днешния епизод ще ви покажем метод по който да определите дали роботът е добре балансиран още преди да започнете да решавате мисиите.   d\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eScenario\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e1. Connect the robot with the weight and дали буксува\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e2. Conclusion - ако робота може да издърпа собственото си тегло значи е добре балансиран. Ако буксува, има къде да се подобрява.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eConstruction (ldd for the pulley, basket, robot)\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eExperiments for the balance\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eVideos and pics\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"","subtitles":null},"573":{"position":573,"title":"Tetrix FTC. How to prepare a container to store balls and what should you buy","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe tutorial is about what are the parts that you should buy to have the Ball Collecting mechanism. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003ePVC Pipe\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eOur pipe is 110mm in diameter with thin walls. You can take a pipe with other dimensions for width/height depending on the objects that you are about to collect. The pipe is with thin walls. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eCap for the pipe\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eYou place the cap at the top of the pipe to prevent the balls from escaping from the pipe.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eTools\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIn a new robotics tutorial, we would do a short tutorial on how to use different tools to cut the pipe. Prepare a drill, grinding stone, hex saw.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Tetrix,Classes with students,Construction","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eIn this episode I would like to discuss what you should buy, what are the different parts because these are not parts that are directly included in the set so you should acquire them, buy them and have them on your class or in your team to continue the course and to build this Ball Collecting Mechanism. First, you need a pipe and this here is a PVC pipe and in our case it's 110 mm in diameter. This is about 4 inch. And it is with thin walls. I'll open it right here and show it on the camera. So, it's a pipe with thin walls and the size of the pipe because there are different pipes with different lengths, with different diameters you can choose the size based on the diameter of the objects that you are going to collect. And this pipe is designed for the FTC balls. These balls here are slightly smaller than the FTC balls but I currently have them for the recording of the video so we have these balls and the pipe is with a size that's suitable for these balls. So, if you need to collect something larger, probably you'll need a larger pipe. And that's about the pipe. Also for the pipe we have a cap. It's a PVC cap that we put on top of the pipe like this again I'll show it on the camera and this will prevent the balls from escaping the pipe because when you are collecting them and we store them in the pipe and they could actually escape from the pipe from the other side. That's why we need this PVC cap. We would also need some tools in the following few tutorials because we need to cut this pipe. And for cutting we need of course a drill. Now, there are different tools and we'll prepare an entirely new video of how we can use the different tools to cut the pipe but for you to know now at the start of this section is that we'll need a drill. We'll need a drill if we have a grinding stone with this drill. We also need a hacksaw and it will be good if you have a hacksaw to cut this pipe and we also can use some other instruments in the process but these are the most important ones. So, try to prepare them and to have them around the classroom or around the place where you're gathering and building this robot and we'll use them to cut the pipe.\u003c/p\u003e"},"484":{"position":484,"title":"EV3 Phi. Extend a construction by changing the plane of building","description":"\u003cp\u003eIn this video, we introduce two pieces: beam with pins and the angular beam with pins\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eThree sides and two planes\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eTake a look at the brick. There are holes on three sides of the brick: the left, the right and the bottom one.\u003cbr\u003e\r\nAs left and right sides are parallel, they are actually on the same plane.\u003cbr\u003e\r\nThe bottom is another plane.\u003cbr\u003e\r\nThose two planes cannot be connected together with simple beams and pins.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eThe angular beam with pins\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eLet's try to connect a vertically oriented sensor to the bottom plane of the brick.\u003cbr\u003e\r\nThere is a turn in the directions, the planes are perpendicular to one another.\u003cbr\u003e\r\nA part that can connect them together is the angular beam with pins.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eYou can think of the angular beam with pins as changing the planes \"direction\":\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cul\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003efrom forward to upward;\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003efrom forward to downward;\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003efrom forward to left;\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003efrom forward to right;\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ul\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\r\nThe straight beam with pins\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cul\u003e\r\n\u003c/ul\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe straight beam with pins changes only the orientation:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cul\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003efrom forward-horizontal to forward-vertical;\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003efrom left-vertical to left-horizontal\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ul\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Construction,Classes with students","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eWe would give this video a stranger more complex name and we'll call it 'Changing the plains in which you extend your construction' What exactly does this mean and how do we use these beams with pins?\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eLooking at the robot you have holes on the right side of the brick, on the left side of the brick, at the bottom of the brick. And you don't have any holes at the front side of the brick, at the back side of the brick and on the top of the brick. You can think of building with this brick in building in three different plains. This is the first plane. It's a vertical plain that's on the right side. This is another plain on the left side which is basically the same plain and you have one at the bottom. When you do a construction at the bottom of the robot you can see that you are building in this plain and you have the holes in this direction. What will happen if you want to change the direction and to build in another plain? And you want for example to have your sensor positioned like this. And it is kind of difficult to do it. You should somehow extend the construction and position the sensor like this. You should change the plains in which you are working. How do you do this? First, you take this beam.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd then we use this beam with pins.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe correct name of this part is angular beam with pins and it looks like a beam it has holes but it also has 4 pins. So, it has like 5 holes and 4 pins. And it is used do change the plain in which your construction extends. If I place the beam like this and then another beam, now I can continue building this construction in another plain and this plain is right here. And as you can see this is kind of like the plain that we would have if we had any holes at the front of the robot. So, if there were any holes right here somewhere we can attach this beam, this is the same plain in which we are working. It is a plain that's at the front of the robot. And now we can just place our touch sensor. Again, the touch sensor here is used just as an example. We can also use this part - a beam with pins and it serves the same purpose. We change the plain. Imagine that we have some holes at the top of the robot - at the top of the brick but we don't. But if we had, we would be able to do the following thing. To attach a beam at the top of the robot. But there are no holes. We can for example try to attach this beam right here but you can see that these holes are pointed vertically and these ones are horizontal and these are different plains. So, we take this beam with pins and we can change directly the plain in which we are building. By adding one you see that it's almost the same as having holes at the top of the robot. So, from a side of the robot - the right side we've changed the plain to the top of the robot. And then we can add one more like this and we can directly add the touch sensor.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd you can see that the whole touch sensor it's tilted right and it's actually rotated right. And it's in another plain. It's in the plain that's for the top of the robot. So, with this angular beam with pins and the normal beam with pins we change the plain in which we are extending our construction. You can stack this solutions. For example, an interesting way to show this is how would you place the touch sensor to point to the right of the robot. How would you do this? You'd use an angular beam with pins. This will change the plain of buiding from right to front. Then we use a beam as an extention and then we use two pins\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eand we have our sensor pointing to the right. Now, it's probably not that useful to have the touch sensor pointing to the right but you can have other sensors and you can have the construction generally extended to the right which is a very nice way to use the angular beam with pins. I think these are some of the most useful parts in the LEGO Mindstorms EV3 set.\u003c/p\u003e"},"91":{"position":91,"title":"Rubber bands - Solving the FIRST LEGO League World Class COMMUNITY TREE","description":"\u003cp\u003eRubber bands can be quite powerful. Based on several requests from you we are starting a series on using the LEGO Rubber bands available in the Mindstorms set. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eUsing Rubber Bands is not always very accurate, but is quite fun and can do the job. This video tutorial is showing a simple solution to the FIRST LEGO League World Class Community Tree challenge. The challenge involves a loop that should be pulled out from the mission model.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWhat a rubber band gives you in this situation is the ability not to use a motor for solving the challenge. You \"save\" the motor for other attachments and mission models.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://media.fllcasts.com/assets/episodes/notes/091/fll_world_class_community_tree.jpg\"\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"FLL World Class Community Tree Challenge\" src=\"http://media.fllcasts.com/assets/episodes/notes/091/fll_world_class_community_tree_360p.jpg\" style=\"height:338px;width:601px;\"\u003e\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eAs a result the loop should be removed from the mission model. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"FLL World Class Community Tree Challenge Removed\" src=\"http://media.fllcasts.com/assets/episodes/notes/091/fll_world_class_community_tree_removed_360p.jpg\" style=\"height:338px;width:601px;\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Rubber band,FLL 2014,Attachments,FLL,Construction","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003e- Based on a number of your requests, in this video we decided to start a new series on how to use rubber bands. In the Mindstorm sets, there are rubber bands that come with the parts. For a particular example, you're going to solve the First Lego League 2014 Team Challenge. It's called the Community Tree.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe mission goes like this: the robot must go to the mission model and then pull the loop. And then bring it back to base, but that's not the most important part. It's actually how do you pull the loop out of the mission model? In this video, we are using the rubber band. A few things to mention about the rubber bands. They are not very accurate but they are quite fun, and you get the advantage that you have the model free for the specific mission. Now, let's look at the attachment that we have built. This here is the attachment, and this is our robot. You can find a link for building the robot. Intructions for building it are below the video. This is our robot. We use this robot from Video 58. This here is the attachment. We add the attachment at the front of the robot. First I will show you how it works, and then we will look further and explain the mechanism. Then, we load the attachment. It's ready, and we have our loop.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNow, when we approach the mission model with the attachment, and we get the loop. Then we can return and bring the loop back to base.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNow, let's take closer look at our attachment. I'll first deconstruct it. It consists of two parts. This is the first part. It's not very interesting. And the second part with the rubber band. Just show you this part here. It's quite important because it makes the rubber band stay at the position. Then the second important part with the rubber ban, this one here, because now we can attach the lever--we call this a lever, the wide part--and, as you can see, there is some force applied from the rubber band to the lever. The rest is just a frame. The mechanism is important; the rest is a frame that's for this particular robot, but for another robot it will be different. Here we have the mechanism, so we pull and it returns. Now, let's add the second part of the attachment. Here it is. And what the second part does is to help us have the lever in place and load it, and only release the lever after we push the second part. Here it is.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNow, when we move, and we move towards the mission model, we push the second part of the attachment, the lever is released, and we can return back to base with the loop. You can use this mechanism in many other competition models for solving other challenges, and in some of the next video, we will stop at how do we solve different other competition challenges with the rubber bands?\u003c/p\u003e"},"603":{"position":603,"title":"How to abort a running program which is too long or wrong","description":"\u003cp\u003eWhen and how to abort a running program.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eIn which direction to start the robot\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eRobots should be started to go forward. \"Forward\" depends on the programmed direction and means that when we run the program, the robot should start moving away from us.\u003cbr\u003e\r\n \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eWrong run\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIf we run a program which makes the robot move towards us, we should lift the robot and stop the program.\u003cbr\u003e\r\n \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to stop а program\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eYou can stop a program by shortly pressing the button on the left, under the screen.\u003cbr\u003e\r\n \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cdiv class=\"ckeditor-html5-video\" data-responsive=\"true\" style=\"text-align: center;\"\u003e\r\n\u003cvideo controls=\"controls\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/attachment_files/data/000/000/321/original/HowToStopAProgram.webm\" style=\"height: auto;\" width=\"100%\"\u003e \u003c/video\u003e\r\n\u003c/div\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to abort a long program or the program of a robot which has diverted\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eSometimes you may have to abort a program which has made a mistake as a result of which the robot got lost or started hitting against objects.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Classes with students","subtitles":null},"626":{"position":626,"title":"Teacher's Notes: Today we have graduation - finish early","description":"\u003cp\u003eFor students who will \u003cstrong\u003enot take\u003c/strong\u003e \u003cb\u003etwo levels in a row\u003c/b\u003e \u003cb\u003etoday is their last lesson\u003c/b\u003e.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3 id=\"yui_3_17_2_2_1503482905295_486\"\u003eParents\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIt is important that you invite parents to the classroom to take pictures with their children about \u003cb\u003e30 minutes\u003c/b\u003e before the end of the class.\u003cbr\u003e\r\nYou should \u003cb\u003etime your class very well\u003c/b\u003e and students should start \u003cb\u003eprogramming\u003c/b\u003e on time so that they have \u003cb\u003e30 minutes\u003c/b\u003e to solve the complex task for the lesson.\u003cbr\u003e\r\nIn order to have time for everything related to the graduation procedure, you should finish work 30 minutes before the end of the class.\u003cbr\u003e\r\n \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eGraduation\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eYou should have the students’ \u003cb\u003ecertificates\u003c/b\u003e \u003cb\u003eprinted\u003c/b\u003e and prepared in advance. When students are finishing their first levels, they will also receive \u003cb\u003epresents\u003c/b\u003e - a stainless steel \u003cb\u003edog tag\u003c/b\u003e inscribed with the Robopartans’ logo.\u003ci\u003e You should mention that the ball chain will start leaving stains after a few days and will have to be replaced.\u003c/i\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eNow all students should stop working and the teacher will open \u003cb\u003ea discussion\u003c/b\u003e about what students have learned during the level.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eRobots \u003cb\u003eremain\u003c/b\u003e assembled.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eAfter the end of the discussion, the teacher should share his/her \u003cb\u003epositive impressions from the group as a whole\u003c/b\u003e and focus on the material to be studied in \u003cb\u003ethe following levels\u003c/b\u003e in the most inspiring way. The teacher should also mention how students can enroll for the next levels.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe teacher asks the following questions:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cul\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cb\u003eDid you like\u003c/b\u003e the level?\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eWill you \u003cb\u003eenroll\u003c/b\u003e лin the next level?\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eTell us:\r\n\t\u003cul\u003e\r\n\t\t\u003cli\u003eWhat you \u003cb\u003elearned\u003c/b\u003e in the level;\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\t\u003cli\u003eWhat you did not learn in the level but \u003cb\u003eyou wish you learned\u003c/b\u003e;\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\t\u003cli\u003eWhat you \u003cb\u003eexpect\u003c/b\u003e from the next level;\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/ul\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ul\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe teacher explains there are \u003cb\u003eranks\u003c/b\u003e such as a scale which should be filled in. The maximum is \u003cb\u003ea full star\u003c/b\u003e and the teacher should \u003cb\u003eadvise\u003c/b\u003e every student about what to pay attention to in order to receive a full star.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cb\u003eGiving out individual certificates\u003c/b\u003e: The teacher awards the certificates to every student, \u003cb\u003eshakes his/her hand\u003c/b\u003e and makes some positive comments on their rank. The teacher should not embarrass the students in front of the group and their parents. The teacher’s comments should be \u003cb\u003epositive and inspiring.\u003c/b\u003e Students should be \u003cb\u003ecompared only with themselves\u003c/b\u003e, and not with others.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThen the students take \u003cb\u003ea group picture\u003c/b\u003e with their teacher, robots, and certificates. Students should not hide their faces behind the certificates. After the boring \"Say cheese\" and \"Smile\" the teacher says something fun like \"And now, for the special picture, \u003cb\u003esay Sensor!\u003c/b\u003e\"\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThen students should \u003cb\u003edisassemble\u003c/b\u003e their robots and, together with their parents, they could ask the teacher for \u003cb\u003epersonal feedback\u003c/b\u003e or general information about the next level.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Teacher's Note,Classes with students","subtitles":null},"94":{"position":94,"title":"Rubber bands - one more way to remove the LEGO attachment dependency on the motor for triggering","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe previous rubber bands video showed a way to trigger the rubber band without a motor. This video gives one more idea on how to lift an axle and in this way release the rubber band. Use the idea for you LEGO Mindstorms robot constructions.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003ePrevious videos on rubber bands:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/91-rubber-bands-solving-the-first-lego-league-world-class-community-tree\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\"\u003eRubber bands - Solving the FIRST LEGO League World Class COMMUNITY TREE\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/92-rubber-bands-robot-attachment-that-trigers-with-a-motor\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\"\u003eRubber bands - LEGO robot attachment that triggers with a motor\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/93-rubber-bands-lego-robot-attachment-triggered-with-a-motor-part-2-removing-the-motor\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\"\u003eRubber bands - LEGO robot attachment triggered with a motor - part 2 removing the motor\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Rubber band,FLL 2014,Attachments,FLL,Construction","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eIn this video, we continue building attachments that use rubber bands from the Lego Mindstorms EV3 set. And today's attachment, again, won't use any motors. And the rubber band will be triggered entirely with the push of the attachment.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis here was the attachment that we built in the previous episode. One thing that we improved first it was a little difficult to load the rubber band. As you can see, doing this with fingers, it's a little tricky. So, we've built this small mechanism and we can load the attachment in the following way. We add this to access here, then we just push the rubber band, and we have the attachment loaded as you can see right here. Now, we are again solving a mission model. The challenge is to trigger the mission model by pushing the element over here, just as a reminder. Now, if we release the rubber band, it will fire the small mission element and will solve the mission, like this. Now, how can we do this without the use of a motor? Because we don't want to use the motor, so that we can have the motor free for other missions. We must find a way to push on this attachment and to lift the axles here. And we've come up with this solution. Now, we add axles, so that one of the axle is a little bit longer. And when we push to the mission model, as you can see here, we've pushed to the mission model. Then, we see that those model- this model moves. We push again. And now, if we add the attachment like this, we would have the desired behavior. Now, if we move- when we move the robot, we program the robot. Then we push to mission model, and as you can see, as we push the axles here, they are lifted. And so, the rubber band will be released and we can fire the element. And it's a pretty simple, elegant solution, it will work-- at least on our side, it works all the time. And so, it's quite straightforward. So again, we push to the mission model and we can see that this model here is lifted. Now, let's see this in action. First, we've added some additional parts to the competition robot. You can find instructions for building this competition robot below the video. Now, we have the whole attachment and this is the first part of the attachment, this is the second part. We take the model for lifting, we place it like this. Then we add the attachment, something like this. Then we load it. And now, the only thing that we should do is load the rubber band like this.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAdd the mission model. And again, the details of how we reach the mission element are not the subject of this video. We program the robot. It moves on the field. It reaches the mission model. For example, something like this. Then it slightly pushes. And when we move, we fire. We can do this again. One important thing is that this model here, it moves when we fire with the rubber band and we must stop it. So, we've added a small additional part that stops the model from moving. If we don't have the part, let's see what happens. Again, we move on the field, we reach-- let me just load it. We move on the field, we reach the mission model, then we start pushing. And we don't have the additional part here, so, the model will probably be fired like this. Push it. So that's the purpose of this additional part here. As a conclusion, it's an interesting attachment. You can find the instructions for the attachment below the video. It's a general mechanism for using the rubber bands. And you can use the ideas whenever you need to use rubber bands, and you need to trigger them without the use of a motor. You can use the motor for other missions.\u003c/p\u003e"},"729":{"position":729,"title":"Reconstruct diode connection again if necessary. Teacher's Note (Copy)","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis section depends on the fact that the diode is already connected. If the students have not connected it you should return them to the previous section and connect the diode again. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"","tags":"Learn At Home,Raspberry PI,Teacher's Note,Fun","subtitles":null},"731":{"position":731,"title":"Mount and un-mount Raspberry SD Card with Ubuntu Linux","description":"\u003cp\u003eHere is the process of mounting and unmounting the SD Card if you are using Ubuntu Linux\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eMounting\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003ePlace the card in the SD card reader. It should be automatically shown in Nautilus if you are using Ubuntu. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/387/content/linux_mount_sd_card.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eUnmounting\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIf you want to unmount the SD card just press the unmount button in Nautilus \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/388/content/linux_unmount_sd_card.jpg.png\"\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Learn At Home,Raspberry PI,Linux,Basic,Classes with students,Programming","subtitles":null},"852":{"position":852,"title":"Line Following 101","description":"\u003cp\u003eWhen you hear the task \"program the robot to follow a black line\", most probably you will imagine a program operating as follows:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cul\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eif the color sensor reads black (hence the robot is over the line), the robot goes forward;\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eif the color sensor reads some other color (hence the robot is \u003cstrong\u003enot\u003c/strong\u003e over the line), the robot turns towards it.\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ul\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eThis program seems logical and will probably work. However, the second task is quite hard, if not impossible. The part where the sensor reads black and goes forward is easy:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/348/content/OnTheLine-Arrow-Green-Forward.png\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eHowever, the part where the sensor is outside of the line is impossible. Let us say that the robot is on the right side of the line:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/349/content/RightOfTheLine-Arrow-Red.png\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThen it has to turn left to return to the line. Now, if the sensor is on the left side of the line:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/350/content/LeftOfTheLine-Arrow.png\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIt has to turn right to return to the line. That is great but the values the sensor reads on both sides of the line are close if not the same. Hence the robot will not know if it has to turn left or right.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThat is why, when we say that we program the robot to follow a line, we usually lie. The truth is that the robot is not following the line but one of its edges.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/354/content/Line.png\"\u003eThe edge is an imaginary line which separates the line from the other part of the field (the red dotted lines on the image above). So the line has two edges - one on its left side and one on its right side.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWhen we are following the edge of the line, the robot, which uses only one color sensor, knows if it is on the left or on the right side of the edge it follows. For clarity, let us assume that the robot is following the right edge of the line. So, if the sensor reads black, this means the robot is on the left side of the edge and should turn right:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/352/content/OnTheLine-Arrow-Orange-Right.png\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIf the sensor reads white, it is on the right side of the edge and should turn left:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/353/content/RightOfTheLine-Arrow-Orange.png\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eHaving said that, the program for following a black line should look like this - if the sensor reads black, it turns right, otherwise it turns left. Of course, this check is repeated in a loop. Go through the next few exercises and then try and see if the robot follows the line successfully.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Classes with students","subtitles":null},"319":{"position":319,"title":"Getting to know the teacher and the rest of the students","description":"\u003cp\u003eIn this course you will be working with other students in the group. These might be your classmates, teammates or students you know from other activities. It is important to know your group so that you could work together with them in the best possible way.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eKnow your teacher\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eYour teacher will tell you something about himself/herself and then you will acquaint with the students in the group.\u003cbr\u003e\r\nRemember the name of the teacher and address him/her \u003cstrong\u003eby name\u003c/strong\u003e!\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eListen to others\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eMake sure you listen to the rest of the group and pay attention to details about them, the same way you wish they would listen to you.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eDetails that you all should share are:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cul\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eyour name;\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eyour age;\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eyour grade;\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003ewhich school you are attending;\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eyour favourite sport, extracurricular activity, hobby.\u003cbr\u003e\r\n\t \u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ul\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eShare a story\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eAlso, if the teacher considers it appropriate, you could share a short story or an achievement along the lines of \"I've done something you haven't done\"\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Methodology,Classes with students,Basic","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eIn this course you are working along with other classmates, teammates. It might be a club or it might be some kind of an extracurricular activity and it is very important to know the people that you are working with. To know their name, their age, to know something interesting about them. That's why there are some very interesting games called Ice Breakers. Where you break the ice so that the one that's left behind could join the team. And continue working in this team. For example, a very interesting Ice Braking game is called I've done something you haven't done. So as you are in a group in turn each of you try to tell something and to tell a story about something that you've done but you think that nobody else in this group has done.\u003c/p\u003e"},"104":{"position":104,"title":"Rubber band attachment with a flywheel - solving FLL 2014 Search Engine (part 1)","description":"\u003cp\u003eLet's try to integrate more of the things we have learned into a single attachment. One that could accumulate energy, conserve it and use it at the appropriate time. All this because of a Rubber Band and a Flywheel - and if you don't know what a flywheel is you should definitely watch this videos \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eThe FIRST LEGO League 2014, World Class competition has a mission called Search Engine. It is the standard loop collection mission and we have done many videos on this. But the mission challenge has a random element. You should return to base a specific loop with specific color and the color is drawn by rotation a system of gears. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://media.fllcasts.com/assets/episodes/notes/104/LegoMindstormsFlywheelRubberBandAttachment.jpg\"\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" src=\"http://media.fllcasts.com/assets/episodes/notes/104/LegoMindstormsFlywheelRubberBandAttachment.jpg\" style=\"height:596px;width:600px;\"\u003e\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWhat we are doing in the video is to introduce Flywheels without going into the physics of a Flywheel. Just the observed behaviour. The flywheel allows us to solve the mission without a color sensor and without depending on the random element of the challenge. Which is just magnificent. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eInteresting information\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eFlywheels are part of the design of a new robot that would be used to land on Asteroids and Coments and generaly objects with less gravity - \u003ca href=\"http://www.iflscience.com/space/hedgehog-robot-could-hop-and-tumble-over-asteroids-and-comets\"\u003eThis \"Hedgehog\" Robot Could Hop And Tumble Over Asteroids And Comets\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eFlywheels could be used in various \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eThe attachment\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/search/attachments\"\u003eattachment\u003c/a\u003e is again a pinless attachment and could be added to almost any \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/search/robot+construction\"\u003erobot construction\u003c/a\u003e in a very fast and precise way. For more on pinless attachments check out these videos: \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003col\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/96-pinless-attachment-added-below-the-robot\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\"\u003ePinless attachment added below the robot\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/64-quick-pinless-attachments-for-lego-ev3-competition-robots-part-2\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\"\u003eQuick Pinless Attachments for LEGO EV3 Competition Robots (Part 2)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/63-quick-pinless-attachments-for-competition-robots\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\"\u003eQuick Pinless Attachments for LEGO EV3 Competition Robots (Part 1)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ol\u003e\r\n","tags":"FLL 2014,Rubber band,EV3,Attachments,FLL,Flywheel,Construction","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003e- In today's video, we continue using rubber band attachment to solve mission challenges and we're working on 2015 World Class Challenge. It was a very interesting mission where you have to push the element here. And depending on the color that you get, you must take the corresponding loop. Now that's a very interesting mission, and it is basically solved with a color sensor or light sensor. But today, we are solving it without any sensors and only with the use of attachments with rubber bands. The mission was quite challenging because there is a random element here. When you push the attachment, it is always a different color. And depending on the color, you get the different loops. The challenge is-, and there was a-, one thing for the mission that this whole model must turn at least 360°; so, it must make a full circle. So you can't just push it, very, very lightly, and get blue. You must push it at least to 360°, like this. We're going to try to solve this mission by pushing it at exactly 360°. So at the start, you have blue here. And then we push it exactly toward 300°. No, so it was red. We have red here in the bottom. And then we push it exactly at 360°, and we get red. And then we know at the start of the competition, what is the loop that we have to take. It does not depend on what color we draw, because we know that we are going to draw red.In the challenge this is where the rubber band attachment comes in. Now, as for the attachment, it is quite complex but very interesting. It has a number of interesting elements. But first, let me demonstrate it, only the attachment. We have an axle. And whenever we push the axle, we get this element here that is pushing the mission model. Then, we lower it again and push the axle. As you can see, there are no motors here, it has only one or two rubber bands, and this is actually the attachment. Now, when you're at the competition, we have the border, and this mission model was placed something like this, very close to the-, at the border. Something like this. The idea is that we program the robot. The robot moves, it reaches the border. And then by pushing the robot to the border, we actually push this axle here. So, it goes something like this. Let me just load it. Now it's loaded. And if I move to the border, let me just find the right angle, so that you can see it on the camera. When I push, we have this part here pushing the whole mission model. Again, I load. Program the robot, it moves on the field, then reach the border. We push to the border, and the attachment is activated. Again, it is a pinless attachment, so we can just place the robot on top of the attachment very easily. That's it. And now, we can program the robot. We have the mission element here. And let's say that, we have it red. So red is color, which is currently selected, and we would like to turn the attachment at exactly 360°. We load the attachment. We move. We reach to the mission element. And we slightly push now, it would be difficult now because I have to hold the elements because they are not attached to the table. But when I push it, we can see that the attachment turns at 360°. And we have the red again as the selected color. Now let's go into more details on how the attachment works. Now, I've zoomed in so that you can see the attachment clearly and closely. So first, we have this attachment, a pinless attachment. So we have our pinless mechanism here, and we can put the robot over the attachment like this, done. No pins involved. That's the first interesting thing for the attachment. The second is the triggering to the attachment. The triggering is done with this axle here, and we have our rubber band. And this rubber band has a worm gear attached to it. So, actually, the worm gear is attached with the rubber band through the axle. And as you can see, you can see we have this gear wheel right here, and the worm gear attached to the gear wheel. And this worm gear is not letting the gear wheel rotate. And when we push on the axle, we release the gear wheel and will start rotating. Again, I'll load the attachment. The worm gear is stopping the other gear wheel from rotating. And now when I push the axle, we're releasing the attachment and the gear wheel rotates. So, that's the second interesting part from this element. Third, because we are pushing, and we are pushing to the border, and pushing always involves some kind of force. What happens is that when we push, the whole attachment bends, like this [[indiscernible 00:07:26]]. So, when we place the attachment, we load the robot. We add this element here that are stopping the attachment from bending. When we are pushing, it's not bending. So it's-, we don't have this movement here. And finally, we have this large wheel over here, and I'll get in more details about this in a second. We can get more details about the attachment, we have this large wheel attached to the axle. And this is actually a flywheel, this is where the physics come to work. And so, there's a lot of physics involved in flywheels, but I'm not gonna stop on this currently, I'll just demonstrate it. And in the description below, I'll give you more links about other resources that were built about flywheels. But as you can see now, if I release the attachment, we have a very slow movement like this. If I load it again now, and remove the wheel, this latch will work here. And if I now release the attachment and I pushed the axle, what will happen is that this part here, it will move very, very fast, like this. So the slow movement is actually because of the flywheel, well, not only. We also have the gears that have some ratio and they exert power. But in connection with the flywheel, we make the physics work. But again, we will stop on the physics in some of the next videos. Now, let me stop here, because we are over 10 minutes now, and so, about 10 minutes. And in the next video, we'll enter into the attachment, we will deconstruct it and I'll show you the exact way that it works. There is a rubber band inside that makes this movement. And with the flywheel, we will see this slow movement of the attachment, like this. It's very interesting. Check out the next video.\u003c/p\u003e"},"110":{"position":110,"title":"Rubber bands, gear wheels and motors attachment for solving FLL 2013 Truck and Ambulance (part 2)","description":"\u003cp\u003eExtend the previously build attachment for the FIRST LEGO League (FLL) Nature's Fury competition so that we can move the Truck and Ambulance up and down. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eChallenge at the FIRST LEGO League (FLL) competition\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWhen moving the Truck and the Ambulance we could lift them in the air. This would require us to transfer power from a LEGO Mindstorms Motor to the \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/search/attachments\"\u003erobot attachment\u003c/a\u003e.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003ePrevious video tutorials\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cul\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\r\n\t\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/109-rubber-bands-gear-wheels-and-motors-for-solving-fll-2013-truck-and-ambulance-part-1\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\"\u003eRubber bands, gear wheels and motors for solving FLL 2013 Truck and Ambulance (part 1)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ul\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,FLL 2013,Gears,Rubber band,Attachments,FLL,Construction","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003e- Previously we started building an attachment for solving the the 2013 \"Nature's Fury Truck\" challenge. The attachment was using the crowbar bands and the gear wheels and a bunch of levers. This here was the attachment. And we ended when the attachment was just catching the truck. Now we are going to throw some power from the robot to this attachment.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eOf course, check out the link below for more information about the mission, and what exactly is required. Let's now try to again take the EV3 competition robot from episode 58. I have a cable here that I want to attach. This here was the robot.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd we must now find a way to add this attachment to the robot. Why? Because we can catch the truck using only the rubber bands. So again, like this. We move. We reach the truck and just fix this...like this. We move and when we reach the truck, we have the levers working with the rubber bands and we catch. But now, we would like to lift the truck like this. And if we can lift it, we will just move along on the field, and leave the truck in the yellow region. So it's much wiser to lift the whole truck because there will be no friction between the gear wheels (the wheels of the truck) and the mat. For lifting the whole truck, we've put an axle here with a gear wheel and now if we can transfer some power to this gear wheel, we will be able to lift the whole truck. Let's see how we can do this. This here is our robot. It has a medium motor on the front and we first change the direction of rotation because we need it in one direction. We have it in one direction here and we need it in another direction here. And we must also attach this whole attachment to the robot. We've come up with a simple idea. You can find out more about this below the video. It comes from a series of videos about changing direction with gear wheels. And we have it again here. We have the drive wheel - this small one here. Let me just find an axle to show you. We have this small gear wheel here and it's the driver wheel and this here is the driving wheel and we can transfer power from one wheel to the other. We add this whole attachment to our robot like this. And now as we have this part because it's quite heavy with the attachment, we have two gear wheels both on the left and on the right side. This here is the right side gear wheel. Let me just show it to you. And this here is the left side - right here. And now if we add our attachment and we can now move with the robot on the field, reach the truck, move to the truck, catch the truck, and now we transfer some power from the model to the gear wheels here, we will lift the truck. I will now start the motor and we can see that we are lifting the truck.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThat's it. Not very high. Just below the field, and we can now move with the robot and the truck on the field. In the next video we will extend the attachment so that we can also take the ambulance and then we will look at how do we release the truck from the attachment.\u003c/p\u003e"},"429":{"position":429,"title":"EV3 Phi. Building Castor Bot. Intro","description":"\u003cp\u003eOur next robot is called CastorBot, because of the castor ball.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eDon't mind the beams\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThere is a difference between the beams we used and the ones that are in the instruction. This comes to show that sometimes you can vary with the parts, as long as you keep the general idea of the construction.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eShare pictures of your robot with us\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Construction,Castor Wheel,Classes with students","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eIn this section of the course your goal is to build the Castor Bot. This is the robot. It has a brick, two motors, two wheels and it has the ball wheel at the back. Your goal is to follow the PDF instructions and build the robot. While you are following the instructions you'll see that these two beams here will be different. Currently we didn't have the 13-beam so we added 15 hole beams but this should not be a difference for the behavior of the robot. Follow the instructions and build the Castor Bot. Of course, at the end don't forget to take a picture of your robot, a short video and share this picture or video with us.\u003c/p\u003e"},"58":{"position":58,"title":"How to build an EV3 LEGO Mindstorms Competition Robot Construction","description":"\u003cp\u003eIn this episode, we introduce a LEGO Mindstorms EV3 version of competition robot construction. It is a modular construction, with medium motor for additional attachments and two light or colour sensors for orientating on the field.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eIn the video, we take a look at the construction and point out some key characteristics of the construction. Under the materials tab, you can find pdf instructions for building the construction of the tutorial. Use the video as a reference to lock the modules together.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIf you find the robot too wide, just take out the side frames. If you do not possess two EV3 colour sensors, do not worry, just use old NXT light or colour sensors.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eFor any suggestions or questions, just post your comment below.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Robot Base,FLL,Construction","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eIn this tutorial I\u0026#39;ll show you an EV3 construction that could give you ideas for building your competition robot or you could just use it as a base for your robot. It consists of two large motors that drive the robot, one medium motor that could be used to power additional attachments, two light or color sensors for orientating on the field and, of course, a brick.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eBelow the materials tab following the video you could find pdf instructions on how to build these modules. There is also a pdf file where you could find instructions on how to build the whole robot. Now, I\u0026#39;ll assume that you have already built the modules and I\u0026#39;ll go through the process of assembling them and focus on some of the key features of the construction. First of all, we have the two large motors and you may notice that there are these Lego pieces at the back of the motors. Their purpose is to hold the cables firm so, before we proceed with building the robot, we have to take them out, take a cable, put it into the motor, hold the cable firm and put the Lego pieces back.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThis is quite a good technique to have the cables in place and you could use it in other constructions as well. Now I\u0026#39;ll do the same thing on the other motor. Again, put a cable into the motor, hold it firm; and put the Lego pieces back.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eOK. Now I can proceed with building the robot. First, we have the front frame. You attach the two motors onto the frame. Like this. And the other on the other side. Then, you have the back frame that should go into the three holes at the back of the motor. First, I\u0026#39;ll attach the first motor and then the second one. OK. Then you have the back wheel which, as you see, has this flexible pin which is turning. You have to put it into the middle hole of the back frame. Here.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eAfter you put it, place back the back wheel on the back frame and press the red pin so that it will lock the back wheel. As you can see, it\u0026#39;s firm now. OK. Next, we have the sensors. In the instructions we use two EV3 color sensors but you could use one \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/search/ev3+color+sensor\"\u003eEV3 color sensor\u003c/a\u003e and one NXT light sensor if you do not have two EV3 color sensors. So, I\u0026#39;ll attach the sensors to the lower two points of the frame. Then, I\u0026#39;ll attach the EV3 color sensor.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThen, we have the medium motor. We use these four blue long pins to attach it to the front frame. So, they should go into the four wholes on the upper part of the frame. I\u0026#39;ll attach them.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eOK. Next, we have the shield which has several purposes but the main one is to cover the two sensors so that they will be more accurate. I\u0026#39;ll just attach it to the angled beams. OK. The holder has fallen.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eSo, I\u0026#39;ll put it back.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eNext, we have the side frames. They are attached to the motors via these two black pins. So, they go in here - in the two holes. Their purpose is to hold the wheel from the outer side because if you just hold the wheel to the motor, it will move all around and it will be inaccurate while moving on the field. OK. I\u0026#39;ll use the red pins in here and at the back to lock the frame. Now, as you can see, the wheel is hardly moving while the other one is quite unstable. So, I\u0026#39;ll put the other frame on the other side. Again I\u0026#39;ll attach it to the motor using these black pins.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eAnd lock it with the red pins.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eOK. Now it is a good time to attach a cable to the medium motor because when we put the brick onto the robot it will be difficult to place the cable inside. So, I\u0026#39;ll attach the cable. The cable should go through the back frame. Then I\u0026#39;ll put the brick onto the construction.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eOK. Finally, I\u0026#39;ll connect the cables to the brick.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eAnd you have your construction ready.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n"},"105":{"position":105,"title":"Rubber band attachment with a flywheel - solving FLL 2014 Search Engine (part 2)","description":"\u003cp\u003eIn this tutorial of the series we would get into more details on how the flywheel works, what's its purpose and how the whole attachment is triggered with the first rubber band.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eAs you so in the previous video - \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/104-rubber-band-attachment-with-a-flywheel-solving-fll-2014-search-engine-part-1\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\"\u003eRubber band attachment with a flywheel - solving FLL 2014 Search Engine (part 1)\u003c/a\u003e,  the FIRST LEGO League 2014, World Class, Search Engine mission is very interesting. We are accomplishing it by slowly and precisely pushing to the mission model.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://media.fllcasts.com/assets/episodes/notes/104/LegoMindstormsFlywheelRubberBandAttachment.jpg\"\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" src=\"http://media.fllcasts.com/assets/episodes/notes/104/LegoMindstormsFlywheelRubberBandAttachment.jpg\" style=\"height:596px;width:600px;\"\u003e\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/search/attachments\"\u003eattachment\u003c/a\u003e is a pinless attachment build for the EV3 competition robot.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003col\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\r\n\t\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/58-ev3-competition-robot-construction?playlist=3\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\" title=\"EV3 Competition Robot Construction\"\u003eEV3 Competition Robot Construction\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\r\n\t\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/96-pinless-attachment-added-below-the-robot\" style=\"color: rgb(46, 49, 171);margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\"\u003ePinless attachment added below the robot\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\r\n\t\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/64-quick-pinless-attachments-for-lego-ev3-competition-robots-part-2\" style=\"color: rgb(46, 49, 171);margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\"\u003eQuick Pinless Attachments for LEGO EV3 Competition Robots (Part 2)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\r\n\t\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/63-quick-pinless-attachments-for-competition-robots\" style=\"color: rgb(46, 49, 171);margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\"\u003eQuick Pinless Attachments for LEGO EV3 Competition Robots (Part 1)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ol\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Rubber band,FLL 2014,Attachments,FLL,Flywheel,Construction","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003e- Previously, when we were discussing the rubber band attachment that was solving 2015 World Class Mission Challenge, and it is a rubber band attachment with the rubber bands, and it has quite interesting mechanism, and there is a lot of physics involved in this attachment. As you can see currently, when I push the axle, we see the attachment driving slowly, and pushing to the mission model. Check out the previous video. Today, we're gonna discuss how exactly does the attachment works, and to why we have gear wheels, where is the rubber band, and for the purpose of this flywheel over here. Now, just as a reminder, for the attachment, it was a pinless attachment. We can place the robot over the attachment. We also have this stopper here when we push to the wall, so that the attachment does not bend. We have the worm gear over here that is holding the attachment loaded, and we must push to the axle, so that we can release it. And we also have this small part here, that are actually driving the worm gear when we are pushing to the worm gear. This is introduction to the attachment. Now, we have the flywheel. The purpose of the flywheel was to make the movement of this part here slow. Let's deconstruct part of the attachment. Let's see what's inside. The problem that we are solving is as following: because we have the laws of physics that energy is always conserved, so it's-, so we never lose energy; and we also have the mission model, and we must push to the mission model. And we must push to the mission model slowly but there's a certain power involved here, so it requires a certain force. That's why we have this flywheel over here, and the gear mechanism. So, we have one gear, two gears-, two gear wheel, three, four; we have a mechanism of five gear wheels. When inside in these frames, we have a rubber band. This rubber band is released and it rotates the gear wheels. When it rotates the gear wheels, it rotates them quite fast. So, we have the gear mechanism to reduce the speed of rotation. But as we reduce the speed of rotation, part of the energy from the rotation of the gears is conserved in the flywheel. And at the next stage when the flywheel actually has to push, part of the energy from the flywheel is returned back to the system, and we can push on the mission model. So again, we have a flywheel and a system of gears. The system of gears reduces the speed, the speed of rotation generated by the rubber band. Part of the energy is conserved in the flywheel and at the second later when we actually push to the mission model. Part of the energy is again returned from the flywheel to the gear system, and we can push actually on the mission model. Let's now remove the flywheel and see what's inside the attachment. We have a system of two gear wheels here. I'll remove this part holding the axle. And the upper side of the-, of this gear system, we have two black gear wheels, I'll also remove them. One second, let's now remove the frame. And as I remove the frame, we can see that we have a small gear wheel that is driving we have the large gear wheel that is driving the small gear wheel. And inside, we'll have the rubber band removed. Large gear wheel and I'll continue deconstructing the attachment.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eI want to open this so that you can see the rubber band. As I have deconstructed the attachment, we can actually finally see the rubber band right here. And when we load the attachment, we can see how we rotate the axle. And we have the rubber band right here, it's a white rubber band. And now I don't have the whole attachment, so I can't stop but-, as I stop it now with the axle, you can see that there is some force from the rubber band to the axle. And if I now release, it will rotate. Again, this here is the rubber band. So, this is a very interesting attachment. You can find the instructions below for building this attachment and choosing it in other competitions. And in some of the next video, we will enter into more details on the physics of this attachment, and how exactly we transfer power from the rubber band to the gear wheel and to the flywheel, and from then to the power that is actually pushing on the mission model.\u003c/p\u003e"},"532":{"position":532,"title":"VEX IQ Crossover. Two hex balls with an extended attachment. Part 1","description":"\u003cp\u003eIn this robotics tutorial, we present a solution to extending a VEX IQ attachment to handle two hex balls at a time\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eMake two sides grabbing mechanism \u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWith the use of a number of gears, pulleys and belts we can control the two sides of the attachment to come together and grab a VEX hex ball or to move away from each other and release a hex ball. The system of gears, pulleys and belts is controlled by a motor.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eTo achieve the movement of one of the sides we need two wheels. The two wheels should move in sync. This mechanism is very interesting and important. Check out the video on how exactly it works. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe construction of one side of the VEX attachment is replicated. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"VEX IQ,VEX IQ 2016,Construction","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eHere is our solution on extending this single Hexball attachment to an attachment that could work with 2 Hexballs. And we've also use the opportunity to build the attachment in a different way - this one here so that we an show you a couple of other principles for building such attachments for grabbing. Let's get into details of this attachment. Here's how it works. You can come to the Hexballs, you rotate the motor and you grab the Hexballs.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhere do we start from? We start from the right side of this attachment right side from my point of view and this is the part of the attachment currently with the orange Hexball. We are thinking of a way to make the two sides and we are using the same constructions for the sides right here with the rubber bands to move to each other and away from each other. And we can do this with wheels. The gear wheels and the other wheels in the VEX IQ set have some holes on them and we can attach the sides of our attachment to these wheels. What will happen is that for example if we have the construction like this,\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003ewe can have the wheel moving and it will move with this side like this. The problem is that we are not fixed and this side can also move freely. It can move with the wheel but it can also move freely. That's why we need a second wheel. And we attach the side to the second wheel. Now, depending on the length of these parts it will have different effect. But if we do it like this, when we rotate these two wheels the whole side will move to the inside. And if we rotate in a reverse direction, it will move to the outside. These two wheels are large wheels and there is not enough space between them to change the rotation, to change the direction in which they are moving. So, these two wheels are moving in the same direction. And this makes the whole side move to the inside. We replicate this construction to the other side of the attachment but we just mirror it. The same principle. This means that at the end we should have both of the wheels rotate in a different direction. These two wheels right here. They should rotate in a different direction. So, recap. We have the sides, we have the wheels, we can attach the sides to the wheels because the wheels have small holes on them. From there because we attach the sides to the wheels they are loosed and they can move freely along with the wheel. That's why we need to attach the side not only to the first wheel but also to the second wheel and this makes the side move only with the wheels. Then we mirror the same image to the other side of the attachment and then we should think of a way to rotate these two wheels in the opposite direction. An important part from this whole attachment is the synchronization between the two sides and the 4 wheels here. The wheels are 2x2 connected with belts. You can see one of the belts right here. It's black and the other belt is right here. So, whenever there is some power transfered to the first wheel it will also transfer to the second wheel. The real challenge here is to synchronize the two wheels. And because of the synchronization you want to move the whole side like this. You should move it in one plain. For example, this here just moves horizontally without an angle. Currently the two sides are not synchronized and the two wheels are not synchronized correctly and you can see that the whole side moves one of its sides to the inside of our attachment. And we should avoid this because that's our goal to avoid this. What we should do is correctly synchronize these two wheels. How do we synchronize them? Now, that's the difficult part of the whole attachment. We remove the belt and we align the two wheels so that the holes on which the whole side is attached are to the right. And then when we've aligned them like this - they are horizontally and both are on the right - this hole here and this hole here. This is the correct alignment. If you have it like this, this will be a wrong alignment. Now we have it like this, we position it like this and now it's a little difficult because you should move the belt and in the same time avoid moving the other parts which is not very easy but let's try to do it.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd now we have the two\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eholes on which the side is connected on the same line right here. And now if I rotate this gear wheel, you see that the whole side again moves slightly to the inside but not that much because again the synchronization is not very perfect. And we could change this to make it more perfect and the side will move just horizontally.\u003c/p\u003e"},"941":{"position":941,"title":"What is a ultrasonic sensor","description":"","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eToday’s lesson will focus on the ultrasonic sensor. This is how it looks like:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cdiv class=\"ckeditor-html5-video\" data-responsive=\"true\" style=\"text-align: center;\"\u003e\r\n\u003cvideo controls=\"controls\" height=\"100%\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/attachment_files/data/000/000/443/original/Ultrasonic.webm\" style=\"height: auto;\" width=\"100%\"\u003e \u003c/video\u003e\r\n\u003c/div\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eA little bit of theory\u003c/strong\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe ultrasonic sensor is used to \u003cstrong\u003emeasure distance\u003c/strong\u003e. It helps the robot know whether there are objects around. We can use the sensor to detect whether there is a wall or some other solid object ahead and how far it is.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cem\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow does the ultrasonic sensor work?\u003c/strong\u003e\u003c/em\u003e - Many of you say the ultrasonic sensor resembles a head with two eyes. Generally speaking:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cul\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eOne eye emits an ultrasonic wave at a very high speed. \u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eWhen this wave hits the target, the sensor receives the wave reflected back from the target. \u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ul\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe second eye receives the reflected wave. Ultrasonic sensors measure the distance to the target by \u003cstrong\u003emeasuring the time\u003c/strong\u003e between the emission and reception. The more the time, the farther the target.    \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Learn At Home,Sensors,EV3,STEM,Ultrasonic Sensor,Physics,Basic,Classes with students","subtitles":null},"510":{"position":510,"title":"Box Robot Two. Central axle attachment for moving the axle 6 units up","description":"\u003cp\u003eSometimes the way an axle is placed is just not suitable for a certain attachment and you should transfer the motion to another axle a few LEGO units above the current. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eKeeping the orientation of an axle\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWhen an axle is positioned horizontally and in a certain direction you could keep this direction and orientation and still transfer the motion to another axle. For this, you should use a couple of gear wheels and frame. Probably the direction in which the axles rotate will change and you should be aware of that. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eBuilding instructions\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/courses/6\"\u003eBox Robot Two. Fewer parts and one motor. Simplifying a robot\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n","tags":"Construction,EV3,Attachments,FLL","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eNext attachment for our Box Robot. A number of times we got the question of how we use this central wheel at the center of the robot so it's like in the middle axle. And we tried to build an attachment for this. What we do is actually we move we transfer the motion to another axle that's a few LEGO units above our current axle.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd it works like this.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eLet's see more datails how we build this attachment.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe details: We have our main axle that's at the front of the robot connected to the medium motor. And the medium motor is right here below the brick. If I even remove the brick, you'd be able to see. I won't remove the brick. We have the main axle and it's connected to the medium motor and then we have done is to add a system of two gear wheels so that we can move the axle or at least we can transfer the motion to an axle that's 3 LEGO units above the main axle. And you might need for a certain mission to transfer the motion to an axle that's even higher more LEGO units and this is where the attachment comes from. It's a very simple attachment and this attachment is added to the frame. First, we add the frame like this, then we add the attachment\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003elike this and this gives us a pinless attachment where we can just remove the frame and add the frame on the robot. From there it works. We've transfered the motion to a third axle and this third axle is about 6 LEGO units higher than the main axle. And that's also another way in which you can build attachment and then when you have a second axle that's at the front you might use this second axle for different missions.\u003c/p\u003e"},"568":{"position":568,"title":"Tetrix FTC. Construct a ball collecting attachment - add a plastic plate","description":"\u003cp\u003eHow to add a plastic plate to the FIRST Technical Challenge Robot build with Tetrix. The plastic plate is for collecting the balls. The plate should rotate and should be connected to the axle.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eSize of the plastic plate\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe first thing you should decide on is the size of the plastic plate to add to the robot. The material is just plastic. Find it in you local tools shop.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eCut the whole in the plastic\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eTake the 160 mm flat channel and add it to the middle of the plate. Take the screwdriver. You first it in the middle and you start to rotate and push marking the whole on which to add the screws. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/014/content/tetrixholesinplastic.jpg\" style=\"width: 681px;height: 345px;\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eFix/mount the plastic plate to the axle\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eUse the nuts and the screws. We fix the axle between the flat channel and the plastic plate. There is some friction that would keep the plastic plate fixed. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Tetrix,Classes with students,Construction","subtitles":null},"67":{"position":67,"title":"Catapult built from LEGO Mindstorms EV3/NXT (Part 3 - Automatic loading)","description":"\u003cp\u003ePart three of the Catapult series is about loading the catapult automatically. We use a gear system with a medium complexity along with a very interesting \"clutch\" developed with parts entirely from the LEGO Mindstorms NXT kits. As a result, at the end of the video, the Catapult automatically loads and fires.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eAutomatic Loading\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eA motor for loading the catapult is added to the construction shown in this and in the following video lessons of the Catapult series. Firing is achieved by using gravity force again while loading is achieved with a motor. The power from the motor is transferred to the lever by a system of gears located on different axles. In this way the orientation of the gears is changed twice and transmitted four times.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eTouch Sensor\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe touch sensors used in the robot are very important. We should have a way to find out if the Catapult is already loaded and when we should stop loading. Configuring the motor to use rotations or degrees is a very bad practice and we should try to avoid it. Always try to use sensors.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eAdditional video lessons\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eYou could find more explanations about changing gear orientation in the following video lessons:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/55-active-attachment-for-changing-gears-direction\" style=\"font: inherit;margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;border-image:none;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;vertical-align: baseline;\"\u003eActive attachment for changing gears orientation\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/56-active-attachment-for-changing-gears-direction-part2-improving-durability\" style=\"font: inherit;margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;border-image:none;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;vertical-align: baseline;\"\u003eActive attachment for changing gears direction - part 2: improving durability\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/57-active-attachment-for-changing-gears-direction-part3-moving-up-down\" style=\"font: inherit;margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;border-image:none;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;vertical-align: baseline;\"\u003eActive attachment for changing gears direction - part 3: moving up\u0026amp;down\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eAll episodes from the series:\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/69-how-to-use-the-ultrasonic-sensor-with-the-catapult-build-from-mindstorms-ev3-nxt\" style=\"color: rgb(46, 49, 171);margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;text-decoration: none;\"\u003eHow to use the Ultrasonic Sensor with the Catapult built from EV3/NXT (Part 5)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/68-catapult-build-from-lego-mindstorms-ev3-nxt-part-4-ev3-clutch-and-loading\" style=\"color: rgb(46, 49, 171);font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;border-image-source:none;text-decoration: none;vertical-align: baseline;\"\u003eCatapult build from LEGO Mindstorms EV3/NXT (Part 4 - EV3 clutch and loading)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/67-catapult-build-from-lego-mindstorms-ev3-nxt-part-3-automatic-loading\" style=\"color: rgb(46, 49, 171);font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;border-image-source:none;text-decoration: none;vertical-align: baseline;\"\u003eCatapult build from LEGO Mindstorms EV3/NXT (Part 3 - Automatic loading)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/66-catapult-build-from-lego-mindstorms-ev3-nxt-part-2-base\" style=\"color: rgb(46, 49, 171);font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;border-image-source:none;text-decoration: none;vertical-align: baseline;\"\u003eCatapult build from LEGO Mindstorms EV3/NXT (Part 2 - Base)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/62-catapult-looking-like-a-trebuchet-launcher-build-from-lego\" style=\"color: rgb(46, 49, 171);font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;border-image-source:none;text-decoration: none;vertical-align: baseline;\"\u003eCatapult build from LEGO Mindstorms EV3/NXT (Part 1)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eRobotics Set\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe current video lesson shows the robot built from LEGO Mindstorms NXT parts while the next one would use LEGO Mindstorms EV3 motors and sensors.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Gears,EV3,Lever,Fun,Shoot,Construction","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eIn the previous episodes of the series on how you can construct your own catapult I showed you how you can construct the frame of the catapult, the nest, the base. And it's quite stable - you can turn the robot and you can fire small Lego parts using the gravity force. Like this. In this episode I'd like to improve the robot so that we could load and fire different elements completely automatically. For that purpose, we would use a motor and a very interesting clutch that I have developed.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe first thing that we should do is to attach a gear wheel to the axle over here.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIn this way we could load the catapult we turn the lever, we load the catapult, we release the gear wheel and we fire an element. Again - load, release, fire. Now, the challenge is where we should put this NXT motor. In this video I'm using the NXT version of Mindstorms but in the next video we'll use the EV3 version. So, where should we put this NXT motor, so that we can transfer power from the motor to the gear wheel? One requirement that we have for our construction is to be able to fire an element with only a push of a button or a push of a lever. So, we should again use the gravity force for firing. We are using a motor only for loading the catapult but for firing we should again use the gravity force. So, the motor should bring the lever down - like this. Then we press something and it fires. Thus, we've decided to use a clutch. The clutch is a very interesting mechanism and the purpose of the clutch is to engage two gear wheels. This is the construction here. After we attach it, you'll completely understand how it works. But the purpose of the clutch is to engage this black wheel and the small black wheel. Like this. When we move the lever, when we move it down it engages, when we move it up, it releases. In this way we could, for example, have the gears engaged while we are loading and then we disengage the gears and we fire an element. One thing you can see about this module with a clutch is that we are changing the orientation of gears and we have three or four videos on this subject so you can check them out. How to change the orientation of gears? The name of the video is Active attachment for changing the orientation of gears. We have, let's say, a verticle axis which transfers power to a horizontal axis. Now, let's attach this very interesting construction to our robot.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eHere it is. Then we attach a motor.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNow, we load the catapult. The clutch is working, so one of the gears engages with the other. When we release the clutch, we fire an element. Again - we load,\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003epush the lever up, we fire. Again - we load and we fire. And this is how it works. So, we load,\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eengage both gears, the clutch is on, then we release the clucth\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eand we fire. Now, the next thing will be to develop a program for our motor so to be able to load the catapult. There's one problem that we are going to face. How do we know when we should stop loading the catapult? How does the brick know that we should stop the motor? For that purpose we'll use an NXT sensor. It's a touch sensor - like this one.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWe'll attach this touch sensor on the other side. The logic behind attaching the sensor is that when the sensor is pressed, like this, we should stop loading the catapult. Now, we have our clutch; we have the gear system. We load the catapult; we release the lever; release the clutch and then we again load, stop, release, fire. Now, as I mentioned, the problem is how we know where we stop turning the motor. For example, we can turn the motor for five rotations, for three or for two or we should always use a sensor so that we are completely sure that the catapult is loaded. For this purpose, we can use a touch sensor. The basic logic here is the following: we add a small part on this side.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThen we add the touch sensor below. And we'd like to stop loading the catapult when the touch sensor is pressed. So, can we find a way while loading the catapult to have some part touch the touch sensor in the end? That's the main question. Again, it's loaded; release. We can use the following parts. These are the parts. We add them to the axle. The same axle where the lever is attached.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNow, in this way we release, fire, then load and we are loading until we touch the axle of the touch sensor. When we touch it, we stop loading and the robot is ready to fire. Now, let's see how we can develop the program. The last step of the process is to write the program. I'm using here the NXT version. In the next video we'll use the EV3 version. So that you have a way to build the robot with both NXT and EV3. We'll use the action motor. So, I'm starting motor A. This motor A is turning for an unlimited amount of time until something happens. And we need the axle to touch the touch sensor. So, we need to have the touch sensor pressed. Then, we stop motor A.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd, as a final step, we wait for this touch sensor to be released. It's again \"wait\".\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAfter the touch sensor is released, probably the firing will take some milliseconds but let's wait for a second.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWaiting for 1 second. And we put all this in a loop.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAgain: loading until the touch sensor is pressed; stopping the motor; then we wait until the touch sensor is released, so we are actually firing with the lever, and then we wait for about a second for the element to be fired; and then again we reload the catapult. Let's see how this works. Now, let's see how the whole program works. I've downloaded it onto the robot. I'll start it. The program is running. As you can see, the catapult is loaded. We have the touch sensor over here. We have the gear system and the clutch here. They are working together. And now, when I release the lever, we fire; we load again. We fire; we load again. And let's see how it happens on the side of the touch sensor. We fire; the touch sensor is released; we load again; the touch sensor is pressed. Loading stops. We add something that we can fire. For example, two or three parts. And if I now release the lever, we'll fire the parts. Let's just fire only one of the parts. This one didn't work. The next one.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd it's falling down. So, in the next video we'll focus on how we can construct the same robot using the EV3 version. I'll welcome any comments on this. Try to build it and try to fire the parts as far as possible.\u003c/p\u003e"},"515":{"position":515,"title":"Tetrix Gamepads. Simple program for moving the robot with the gamepads","description":"\u003cp\u003eIn this tutorial, we would build a simple program for controlling the Tetrix robot motors with the GamePads. We use the stick and when the stick is pushed forward the motors move forward. When it is pushed backwards the robot moves backwards. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eThe phones are connected\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eFor this tutorial, I would assume that the phones are already connected to each other. If you have any problem connecting them then write us in the comments section and we would try to help you.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eControl with the stick\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe program that we are developing controls the motors. If you push or pull the stick this will rotate the wheels. If you slightly push or pull the stick than this will slightly rotate the wheels. We are directly setting the power of the motors based on the push/pull of the stick.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Tetrix,Java,Android,Gamepad,Programming","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eIn this episode we'll build a simple program for the gamepad and we'll control the motors of our FIRST Technical Challenge robot. How? We have this stick and if I move up, you can see the motors moving. Now, the robot is not moving because I don't have enough space for the camera and you won't be able to see this because it's kind of a large robot but we move and we control the motors.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA few things to notice here. To start from the beginning. First, we have the software and it's probably a good idea to disconnect the joystick, connect it again. Now, we have the driver station and we have the robot station. The driver station is here and the robot station is on the robot. They are both connected and we can see that they are communicating. We would build a couple of other videos how exactly we connect them but there are a number of other tutorials so I assume that you have both phones connected. If you don't have them, drop a comment below and we'll try to help you. Probably with another video for connecting or just in the comment sections to figure out how you can connect both phones. So, the phones are connected then I press start A and we see a small icon right here on the phone. And then what we do\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003ewe've developed a program and this program is My Op Mode. Probably you don't see it from the camera but it's the only program on the software and I select this only program and click on it, then play. The robot is placed on some objects so that the wheels are in the air. They are not touching the table and the robot will not be moving but we'll rotate the motors. And now with the left stick if I move up, the wheels rotate in this direction. If I move back, the wheels rotate in reverse. And we can call this backward or this forward or we can have other definitions of forward and backward for this robot. Interesting: When you use the stick you can slightly move the stick up\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eand this is directly the power that you are setting to the motors.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eSmall power\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eand larger power. And in reverse.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis is the program that we want to have in the end. Let's go and develop it in the Android studio.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIn the Android studio we have the FtcRobotController project and the team robot project and we have everything set up for these projects. So, this is again subject for other videos. I suppose that most of you have done this. Now, in the team code this is the place where we put the code for our team and this is the place where we put our operation mode. What I'll do is go to the FtcRobotController. And in the FtcRobotController there are a number of examples that we can use and these are all examples of how to use different modes and the different sensors and motors, etc. Here we have one template Op Mode Linear. I'll take the template Op Mode Linear, copy it and paste it in our project.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd this is a starting point for developing our program. This is how the code looks like. Now, with your view it won't look like this. What I've done is I've increased the font here so that you can see it actually on the screen and it will be easier to follow the tutorial. There are a number of comments, you can of course read the comments. The important parts of the template Op Mode are the following: First, we have a number of annotations here and the first thing that we should change is the name of our operation mode. This is what we'll see at the software. And the name will be My New Op Mode like this. Then we have a disable annotation and this means that the Op Mode is disabled and you can use these annotations if you have many Op Modes and you'd like to keep them in the same project but only part of them are visible in the sofware so we must comment this. This is the second step. So, first change the name to something that you are familiar with and then comment the disable annotation. Then we must control the motors. And we have two motors. We have a DcMotor that's called left motor and DcMotor that's called right motor. As you uncomment this there will be an error. And this error is that DcMotor cannot be resolved. How do we resolve this? It is even said in the suggestion we press Alt and Enter. And here we select import class. The DcMotor is part of the library provided by the FIRST Technical Challenge project and we must import this library. We click and now we can resolve them. Technically what we've done is right here in the import section there is a new import DcMotor. This import previously was not here. If I do an undo and then a redo, you can see that the redo - can't do a redo.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eI'll again import it, import class and I have the DcMotor two variables declared here. Then we have the public void method and that's the Op Mode. And here I'll just remove the telemetry. I don't want to discuss telemetry currently. But it's used to display things on the screen. Remove the telemetry.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd then we must initialize our left and right motor. The way we do this. We even have it in the template and we initialize the variable leftMotor to hardwareMap.dcMotor.get(\"left_drive\") and rightMotors is harwareMare.dcMotor.get(\"right_drive\"). I want you to remember these two names because these two names - left_drive and right_drive are the same names that we've given to our motors in the robot controller software. So, these are actually the same names. And at the end what we'd like to do is we are waiting for a start, we press play, we reset runtime while the operation mode is active. This means while we are working. I would like to remove the telemetry again. And what I would like to do is to just set leftMotor its power to be equal to -gamepad1.left_stick_y. This means the 'y' access of the left stick. And right motor is rightMotor setPower -gamepad1.right_stick_y. And with the plus and minus you control the direction. Let's leave the program like this. And what we need to do now is to just recap this program and then download this program to the robot controller. Again, for a recap we name our Op Mode then we mark disabled as a comment because we don't want this operational mode to be disabled. Then we declare two variables leftMotor and rightMotor. There will be an error for DcMotor that's not important. We must import it with Alt+Enter. Then I've removed the telemetry because we don't need it now. Then we initialize leftMotor variable and rightMotor variable with using this special code hardwareMap.DcMotor.get which actually assigns the left motor to a special object that can control the left motor. And the important thing here is that we look for name left_drive and this must be the same name as in the robot controller.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eFinally, we have the opModeIsActive() and we have leftMotor.setPower to something in this case we use the left stick and setPower something we use the right stick. Now, this program will work but will not work in the way we want to. And we see on more comment in the template. And this comment is right here. Because of the way we've placed our motors one of the motors should be set as a direction - forward while the other is set as a direction - reverse. And this is strictly because of the construction. You can do another construction where you don't need to do this depending on how your motors are positioned. But in our care the direction of our left motor is forward while the direction of the right motor is reverse. And these are the last two things we should do. Finally, we connect.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eI would assume again that you have the phone correctly connected to your operating system and that's whole lot of subject for another video and even for these phones when I was doing it it took us about 3 hours to correctly set up the phone to be visible from the operating system. So, there might be problems but again this is a subject for another video and now I assume that you have them connected correctly when you click start\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003ewe'll see our phone and for this phone press okay and this will download the project.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWe are now waiting.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd this will download the software to the robot controller. Let's see how this works. We downloaded the software right here and I'll unplug this is the USB cable from the computer and I have to plug the other USB cable.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThen I'll take the robot, place it over our supporting objects. If there are some errors or something that's not connected correctly what we do is self inspect and then back and now the robot station is correctly working. On the driver station we see the software again and we select right here on the right arrow and you can see the My New Op Mode here and we can select it.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003ePress on it. Press play. Leave the phone. Take the gamepad and we are controlling only one of the motors.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eFor the second motor we use the other stick on the gamepad and this is the right stick and if I move the right stick, we can see the right motor. Again, this is our left motor, this is our right motor if this is the front of the robot. And we can even rotate it back and with different power - slowly\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eand faster.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWith this I hope that you have a basic understanding on how you develop a program on the Android studio, download it on the phones and then control the robot with the gamepad. In the next few episodes we'll enter into more details and specifics about the programs.\u003c/p\u003e"},"131":{"position":131,"title":"EV3 basics course. Programming motor from EV3-G on the computer (part 4)","description":"\u003cp\u003eFirst time programming the motors of the robot using the EV3-G software installed on a computer. We would explore how to move forward/backward and turn with the robot.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eFind more videos about programming searching for \"\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/search/programming\"\u003eProgramming\u003c/a\u003e\". \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Basic,Programming","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eAfter we've learned that we can program the robot from the brick, now it's time for us to go and check out the software. Now, these bricks, they can be programmed in many different languages and LEGO provided an environment that's suitable for students at all ages and that's a very interesting environment it's called EV3G. It's EV3 graphic so it's a programming language. For you to program this brick with the computer you need an USB cable. So we need the USB cable and we connect the USB cable right here on the PC port or we can use a Bluetooth connection, so it depends on what you have. Do you have Bluetooth connection or you need to use the USB cable and most of the time I prefer to use the USB cable. Let's have a look at the program.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIn the previous video we built an EV3 robot called The Easy Robot, The Easy Bot and we stopped at programming with the EV3 software. This here is the EV3 software, you start the program and you get this screen open. And on this screen you develop the program for the robot. The goal is to give certain instructions to the robot that will be executed in an order and this is how the robot actually is programmed and how it behaves, so you give instructions then you start the program and the instructions are executed. Now, this here is very powerful and very interesting graphic environment and in this graphic environment you don't program the robot using the keyboard and typing some kind of code, you do this with blocks but it is again a very complete programming language and you'll see in the next couple of videos that you can do very complex things with this environment. In the EV3G software you have the main screen and you have here a palate a palate with different properties and different blocks and some of you that've used the previous NXT version might find this a little different from the NXT. For those of you that are only using the EV3 version of the MINDSTORMS sets, you won't have any difficulties because you don't have any legacy from NXT. Now in the software what we would like to do today is to stop just at moving the robot. Just at controlling some of the motors. How do we control the motors, we have different blocks and we drag and drop these blocks in the program Like this and these are different blocks for moving Now as you may see some of the blocks have different color For example, this one here this is because currently this block is not part of the program in order to add this block as part of the program you must attach it to the main line of the program. Like this Ok, you can delete with the delete key if you make a mistake and what I want t do now is to program the robot, especially port D and I would like to move the motor that's on port D and I'll take one of these blocks Large motor and in this block I can configure several things For example, I can configure which port am I controlling which means actually which motor because I have the two motors connected on port A and port D and I can say that I would like to control the motor on port D, that is the first thing. Next thing is what would you like the motor to do. Currently I would like the motor to rotate forward so I'm rotating the motor forward with a certain power and this power is a percentage, so the motors have minimal power: 0 and a maximum power: 100 and this here is actually the percentage of the maximum power I would like this motor to move with 50% of it's power and I would like this motor to move for one rotation so rotate the motor only once, not the robot, but the motor the motor will rotate once and the third property is what would you like the motor to do when the motor stops would you like the motor to stop exactly after one rotation or this here is the break option or we would like the motor to coast so this means it will have some inertia and it will continue we'll see different options Let's leave this to break now. And now as we have the first instruction we must run it on the robot and see if it works. How do we run this block We have a few options right here down in the corner, the lower right corner we can Download the program to the robot or we can Download and run the program or we can just Run selected. The option that I'll use is download and run. I'll now switch the camera and we'll download the program to the robot.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis here is the robot, it's connected with the USB cable to the laptop and let's now download and run the program\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eLet's do this again. Download and run What you can see is that motor D it's this one here motor D connected to port D. This motor rotates for one rotation. One full rotation of the motor and that's different from one full rotation of the robot. One full rotation of the motor will take us - here and in order to make a full rotation with the robot we need to continue rotating the motor. So probably for, I don't know, 3 or 5 rotations. So this will be one full rotation of the robot and one full rotation of the motor is just this.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eOK, let's try to add additional blocks to our program. Other thing that we can do in our program is of course to control other motors. For example, let's also include motor A and I'll again use a Large motor and I'll configure it to rotate motor A and I'll like motor A to rotate for one rotation again but this time I would like motor A to rotate in reversed direction. So by adding minus to the power we rotate the motor in reverse.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eLet's see how the program goes. And now downloading and running the program.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAgain, let's see what happens.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eFirst move with motor D and we move forward and then we move with motor A and we move backward. Again. Both of the motors are moving for one rotation and it's one rotation of the motor not the robot. How can we do this but let's move the motors simultaneously In this program both blocks are executed one after the other so we first have motor D and then motor A. Now I would like to move both motors simultaneously. So while moving motor D also to move motor A and there are a couple of solutions. First, there's another block called Move Tank and this block gives us the following options, we can I'll delete this one, no I won't I'll leave them here so that we can have them as a solution.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis block is Move Tank and we can control OK we want to move the first motor, motor A forward with power 50 and the second motor D backward with the power of 50, -50 and let's do this for 2 rotations and this will move A and D simultaneously. Let's check this.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNow I download and run the program.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd we see that the robot moves with motor A and motor D and motor A is moving forward and motor D is moving backward Again.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eBoth motors are moving for 2 rotations and very important these are rotations of the motor, these are not rotations of the robot. Of course, there are many more things we can do with moving the motors and we'll explore them in the next video.\u003c/p\u003e"},"209":{"position":209,"title":"Gapped \u0026amp; Crossed Line Following. Part 6. Move after the Gap","description":"\u003cp\u003eWe've detected the gap. It's time to move over it. This is difficult because we have to detect where the line is after the 0.1 meters gap on the line following field.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eStates\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWe would add a new state with a new behaviour (transition between the states). The state will be called \"Gap\" and we enter this state when we lose the line. The behaviour (transition) is moving over the gap until we reach the new line.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003ePrerequisites\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eMake sure you understand light/color sensors and line following. Take a look at the following courses:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/playlists/17\"\u003eEV3 basics course. Color Sensor\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/playlists/20\"\u003eProportional Line Following with LEGO Mindstorms EV3\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,State machine,EV3-G,Light and Color Sensor,FLL,Programming","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eWe stopped at detecting the gap. Move, lose the line, detected the gap. Now we'll move over to the next line and continue following the line.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis here is our program and in this program we have the 2 main parts of the program. First calculate the state and then executing something depending on this state. Now I would like to group some of these blocks together. And we want these 2 blocks. What we do here is detecting the gap. If we are following a line or detecting a gap. So I add a new My block and it will be called CGap (Check Gap)\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003ebut first we must select these 2 blocks. Then we call it CGap (Check Gap) and it accepts only one parameter. This parameter is the sensor value and icon for this parameter is an integer.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eSo this here is our program now, much more simple and I'll turn it to a flat view. We have the following states, first we'll check if we are on a gap or follow a line, then if we are in state 0 which means follows, we just follow a line, if we are in state 1 we must somehow move trough the gap. Here it's a number of a motor movements, for example, we have stopped and then I would like to turn back with motor B, our right motor, I just turn it on in a reverse direction and I do that until we detect a black line. So we are returning and aligning to our black line. This will be for sensor, we want to detect with sensor 2 a black line. Not only with motor 2, which is the middle sensor, we also want to detect, the black line with the right sensor, so that we can align to our line.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis whole behavior here is, detecting the gap and moving through it. After we detect the line with both sensors, we stop motor B,\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003ethen we rotate the whole robot to 90 degrees and this means, for this particular construction, we must rotate motor B for approximately 1 rotation forward, then we just move with both motors, forward for, let's say, 0.5 rotations. These are approximately 10 cm and this is our behavior for moving through the gap. It's just simple movements with different motors, we stop the motors, we turn back until we align to our black line that we have just followed and lost, we stop, we turn left and we move forward and we move over the gap. This here is the block that moves over the gap. Let;s see how our program works.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe robot follows the line, loses it, wait for about 5 sec and then we continue following the line.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis is the program with which we can pass through this gap.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA few more modifications before we can continue with our next video. A few final changes to our program. Our whole behavior here is actually moving through the gap. I'll build a new My block and I'll call it Pass Gap.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThere are no parameters it's just a procedure, finish and this is how the program looks. Let's see the whole picture again.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWe have our second sensor, the one on port 2 and we detect, then we check if it's a gap or we are following a line. If we are following a line, we are in state 0 and we follow a line, but if we are in a gap, then we are in state 1 and we must pass it and at the of this Switch we just set the state to -1 and we loop the whole thing. Now what we must do is add different states for turning left and right. Let's do this in the next video.\u003c/p\u003e"},"242":{"position":242,"title":"Fourth state - Collecting The Coordinates And The Treasure","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"EV3,WRO 2015,State machine,WRO,Programming","subtitles":null},"312":{"position":312,"title":"Arduino Basic Course. Write your first Arduino program. Use example programs","description":"\u003cp\u003eFor making the diode blink we just use one of the examples available in the Arduino Software. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eRunning one of the examples\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe Arduino software comes with a number of example programs. This example programs could be open in the main window, modified and then uploaded to the controller.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Arduino","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eAfter we've downloaded and installed the Arduino Software we start it and this is the main window currently as version 1.6.12. And what we should do to make the robot blink is just use one of the examples.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWorking with the Arduino Software is very easy. And writing program is also very easy because you can even start with some of the very basic examples and they are developed for you. So, we just go to File\u0026gt;Examples. And in the Examples sections we see all different categories of examples and we need just a basic example. Basic\u0026gt;Blink. And that's it. That's the program for blinking diode. All we have to do now is upload this program to the controller.\u003c/p\u003e"},"955":{"position":955,"title":"Printing the value of a Variable within the LEGO EV3 Software","description":"\u003cp\u003eAlthough we use values to store data and perform some manipulations on it, sometimes we need to display the value stored. Now we will take a look at how we can achieve it.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eOf course, to display the value, we need a display block. So go ahead and take a display block and put it on the canvas:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cdiv class=\"ckeditor-html5-video\" style=\"text-align: center;\"\u003e\r\n\u003cvideo class=\"img-responsive\" controls=\"controls\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/attachment_files/data/000/000/466/original/LEGO-Mindstorms-EV3-taking-a-display-block-fllcasts.webm\"\u003e \u003c/video\u003e\r\n\u003c/div\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eNext you need to set it to \u003cstrong\u003eText \u003c/strong\u003emode. It does not matter if you select \u003cstrong\u003eText-\u0026gt;Pixels\u003c/strong\u003e or \u003cb\u003eText-\u0026gt;Grid\u003c/b\u003e. For the purpose of this tutorial I will select \u003cstrong\u003ePixels\u003c/strong\u003e.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cdiv class=\"ckeditor-html5-video\" style=\"text-align: center;\"\u003e\r\n\u003cvideo class=\"img-responsive\" controls=\"controls\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/attachment_files/data/000/000/467/original/LEGO-Mindstorms-EV3-setting-display-block-to-text-mode-fllcasts.webm\"\u003e \u003c/video\u003e\r\n\u003c/div\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eNow in the upper right corner you will find the text that the block will display. If you select it, you can edit it or select \u003cstrong\u003eWired\u003c/strong\u003e. If you choose the later you will be able to use data wires to pass the text to be displayed. So go and select \u003cstrong\u003eWired\u003c/strong\u003e.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cdiv class=\"ckeditor-html5-video\" style=\"text-align: center;\"\u003e\r\n\u003cvideo class=\"img-responsive\" controls=\"controls\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/attachment_files/data/000/000/468/original/LEGO-Mindstorms-EV3-setting-display-block-to-wired-text-mode-fllcasts.webm\"\u003e \u003c/video\u003e\r\n\u003c/div\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eNote how a new parameter has appeared at the beginning of the block.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cdiv class=\"ckeditor-html5-video\" style=\"text-align: center;\"\u003e\r\n\u003cvideo class=\"img-responsive\" controls=\"controls\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/attachment_files/data/000/000/469/original/LEGO-Mindstorms-EV3-setting-display-block-to-wired-text-mode-highlighting-the-input-param-fllcasts.webm\"\u003e \u003c/video\u003e\r\n\u003c/div\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eSo now we have only left with creating a new variable and passing it to the display block:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cdiv class=\"ckeditor-html5-video\" style=\"text-align: center;\"\u003e\r\n\u003cvideo class=\"img-responsive\" controls=\"controls\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/attachment_files/data/000/000/470/original/LEGO-Mindstorms-EV3-displaying-a-variable-fllcasts.webm\"\u003e \u003c/video\u003e\r\n\u003c/div\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eHowever, if you download and run the program, nothing will happen. That can be really frustrating and confusing for both students and teachers. Actually the program works perfectly, but you need a wait block at the end of it, in order to have time to be able to see the displayed variable on the screen of the brick. So if we add a wait block and set it to 5 seconds, the program will be ready.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cdiv class=\"ckeditor-html5-video\" style=\"text-align: center;\"\u003e\r\n\u003cvideo class=\"img-responsive\" controls=\"controls\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/attachment_files/data/000/000/471/original/LEGO-Mindstorms-EV3-adding-wait-block-at-the-end-fllcasts.webm\"\u003e \u003c/video\u003e\r\n\u003c/div\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePretty Print\u003c/strong\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eSo far, we have seen how we can display a value. However if we display numerous variables, we would like to print some more information about the value that we are displaying. To achieve that we will use another block called Text. The text block can take up to 3 texts and concatenate them into one. So using the text block we can display \"Some info to be printed: \" before the value. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cdiv class=\"ckeditor-html5-video\" style=\"text-align: center;\"\u003e\r\n\u003cvideo class=\"img-responsive\" controls=\"controls\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/attachment_files/data/000/000/472/original/LEGO-Mindstorms-EV3-pretty-printing-a-variable-fllcasts.webm\"\u003e \u003c/video\u003e\r\n\u003c/div\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Fun","subtitles":null},"283":{"position":283,"title":"Box Robot for Robotics Competitions. Introduction","description":"\u003cp\u003eIt's a box! It's a robot! It's a box robot.  Box robots are very popular on different robotics competitions involving LEGO Mindstorms like the FIRST LEGO League or World Robotics Olympiad. Let's start with a brief introduction and continue in the next videos with explanation on the features of the robot and why such robots are frequently used.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eWe have provided the building instructions for this robot as part of the whole course  Box Robots for competition (this will require a course subscription)  \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,WRO,FLL,Robot Base,Box Robots,Construction,Knob Wheel","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eOne of the very popular types of robots during competitions like the First Lego League or the World Robotics Olympiad or other competitions that involve Lego Mindstorms robots are robots that look like a box. And we can call them box robots. And they basically look like this. So, in this course we present one robot that looks like a box. We also provide the building instructions and we stop on some of the interesting features of this robots. This is our design and in the course we'll look at things like the accessibility of the brick how we can charge, the cable management, how we add different attachments, how are the different motors positioned and the sensors, how can we add pinless attachments like this in a very fast way. So, this is the goal of this course. To present this box robot, to give you an opportunity to construct it and to also see some of the interesting feastures that you should be aware of. So, let's start with the box robot.\u003c/p\u003e"},"387":{"position":387,"title":"Teacher's Notes on building the FiveMinuteBot","description":"\u003cp\u003eNotes on building the FiveMinuteBot\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eName\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe name of the robot is interesting. It basically means that you could build the robot in about 5 minutes. But this is if you have the experience. Generally, students could do it in about 20-30 minutes when building it for the first time.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eYou can even have a competition with your students. An experienced teacher from our team managed to build this robot without instructions in about 2.5 minutes. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Teacher's Note,EV3,Construction,Classes with students","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eA few notes for the teachers when using the Five Minute Robot in class. The Five Minute Bot.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eOne of the very funny things about this robot is the name. Because we call it a Five Minute Bot and it will take students approximately 20 to 30 minutes to construct this robot. So, you can always use the name as a joke for this robot like 'I'm giving you this Five Minute Bot but I'm sure that nobody will do it in 5 minutes.' Or something of that sort. And the name is funny because you can actually track them and measure them. It is possible to do it in about 2 minutes when you have all the parts removed and sorted and you can just use them so they are not in the box. But if the parts are in the box it will take you more than 5 minutes. But we've done a competition in our team and it's like in about 2 minutes you can construct this robot. The next thing is the steel wheel at the back of the robot and this wheel comes only with the EV3 sets. This wheel is not available in the NXT sets. And it was something new introduced with the EV3 but our experience with this steel ball is not that good because it provides a very easy solution to a very complex problem. And most of the students just fall back for this solution. And then they learn to use only this type of wheels as back wheels. Only the ball. And these are the few things for the Five Minute Bot.\u003c/p\u003e"},"474":{"position":474,"title":"Improving FLL Robot Game. Teacher's Note. Correct solution on calculating gears.","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis is a teacher's note about the math behind calculating gear ratios with for our lifting attachment. It math model we build in previous tutorials is not exactly correct and here is the explanation why.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eMath model calculation\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe calculation from the math model shows that 18.75 rotations should be enough to rotate the beam to 90 degrees. What would actually happen is that the driven gear wheel would rotate to 90 degrees and not the beam to which this gear wheel is attached. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eWrong math model\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWhat we've missed is an important part of the math model. It is a little bit more complicated for the current course and we would explain it in some of the next tutorials. It is a good practice to give this as a task for the students to find our what is wrong with the calculation and the math. They could come ask us. It is a good exercise for every student to try to formulate a question and direct it to us and we would lead them to the answer, or if we've recorded the tutorial we would direct them to the explanation.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Attachments,FLL 2016,Gears,Methodology,Construction,Teacher's Note,FLL,Classes with students","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eA short teacher note on the wrong mathematical model here and what's actually the problem there and what are the different losses in the system and how they affect the behavior of our attachment. Our goal was to calculate the number of times that we should rotate this driving wheel in order to have this beam right here rotate to 90 degrees. So, that's the initial position and it should be something like this as a final position. This will make the whole robot move forward and up. And attach. The question to the students was: How many rotations should we make to have this wheel rotate to 90 degrees? And they will find out this. And what they'll notice is if they use 18.75 as we found in the previous video, this gear wheel will rotate to 90 degrees but this will not make the beam rotate to 90 degrees. And because the reason for this and the mathematics is one more level more complex we decided to leave this for the next step. So, we can simulate an engineering process where you do part of the calculation then you experiment with these calculations then you see that your calculations might be wrong because it will be like two times less than the real value. And when you see such a difference between the expected value and the calculated value you should return and do the calculations again. And what we have missed is actually a very important part of the calculation. Again, when rotating with this wheel to 18.75 the final wheel - the driven gear wheel will rotate to 90 degrees. So, 10 teeth but this will not result at the beam rotating to 90 degrees.\u003c/p\u003e"},"1003":{"position":1003,"title":"Subscriptions at FLLCasts","description":"\u003cp\u003eA subscription gives you access to the platform. You can subscribe for different levels of access for a different payment. The subscription knows only this: when have you subscribed and to what level of access. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch2\u003eSubscription\u003c/h2\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003ePeople could be added to your subscription. In the case of a Team the mentor of a team can add more people to the team and to give access to more students.\u003cbr\u003e\r\nOr you could be a Parent that would like to add two, three children in the same subscription. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe owner of the subscription is the one who pays for the subscription. The owner could upgrade it or cancel it. The users of the subscription get access to the platform based on the level this Subscription provides.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"FLLCasts","subtitles":null},"713":{"position":713,"title":"Using the phones in class for the STEM Course. Teacher's Note","description":"\u003cp\u003ePhones in class! Well yes, we are going to use them and there are a few things you should be prepared for. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eContradiction with school policies\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIt might be the case that bringing a phone in the classroom might contradict the school policies. If this is the case the students will not be able to use their phones. You should provide them with phones that should be used specifically for this course. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eGames, social networks and chats on the phone\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWhile the students are working with the phone they will probably have Internet. This means that during the class they will receive messages from different chat clients or they could visit social networks or they could play games. These are all things that would distract them from the goal of the course. But they could also use the phone to visit online resources and research for different topics. So the phones are not bad, but we should focus on establishing clear boundaries between using the phone for the course and using the phone as a personal device.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat are the boundaries?\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eEstablish a rule for the course at the beginning of the phone setup process. Yes, phones could be used, but only for the application for remote control. No other usage of the phone is allowed. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Learn At Home,Raspberry PI,STEM,Phone,Teacher's Note,Classes with students","subtitles":null},"574":{"position":574,"title":"Tetrix FTC. How to cut and prepare a pipe to store balls. Shape of the pipe","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe robotics tutorial is about the shape of the pipe its advantages and disadvantages.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eHow the balls inside of the pipe\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe shape of the pipe opening for this \u003ca href=\"https://www.firstinspires.org/robotics/ftc\"\u003eFIRST Technical Challenge\u003c/a\u003e Robot should allow for the balls to be held inside of the pipe. The plastic plate should hold them while rotation. The shape fo the opening should allow for the rotation of the plate.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eAllow the ball to enter\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe plastic plate is at the front of the \u003ca href=\"https://www.firstinspires.org/robotics/ftc\"\u003eFTC\u003c/a\u003e Robot and it \"grabs\" the balls. When the ball is grabbed it should enter the pipe. The two edges of the opening should allow for exactly that.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Tetrix,Classes with students,Construction","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eIt's time we discuss some of the details of how exactly we cut the pipe in such shape, what's important about this shape and what are some of the advantages and disadvantages of this shape. The first thing that we have to consider is that we have this plastic plate. And this plastic plate must rotate and while rotating the plastic plate must hold the balls inside of the pipe. So, we should design and think of the shape of the cut in such a way that we can keep the balls inside while the plastic plate is rotating. And you can see that one of the sides of the plastic plate is constantly touching the pipe - as the upper side will stop touching the pipe now, the lower side is already on the pipe and it holds the ball. So, if you have a ball right here,\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003ethe ball stays and it's not falling. And especially if you move this at a greater speed, the ball will constantly stay right here. So, this is the first important thing for the shape. And that's important for every shape for each of the pipes that you might have. You must constantly have the ball up in the pipe. And the plastic plate constantly touching the pipe. The second thing I would like to mention is the edge of the pipe. So, the pipe has two edges and I hope you can see them on the camera. They are carefully designed with the following things in mind. First, when the ball enters right here we should have this edge to prevent the ball from coming right here after the pipe. So, currently it's possible because I'm applying some force with my hand but when it is only the ball, the ball is not coming to this part of the robot because there is an edge here. And it's specifically designed for this - to keep the ball from coming on this side of the robot or this side of the robot. So, it's not possible to keep the balls and to collect them in the pipe if you don't have these two edges right here. The other advantage of these two edges here is that if you rotate in the reverse direction the whole motor so you rotate the motor like this, you can fire the ball. And when firing the ball, what you can do is that you can use these two edges to direct the ball. So, they do not allow the ball to move to the left and to the right and it will keep the ball from going too much on the left or too much on the right. It will just move forward because you have these two edges here. So, the shape is important. It's important that the plastic always touches the pipe and that you have these two edges right here.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eSo, these are some of the important things about the construction and the cut that we have on the pipe and the shape that we've designed this cut into. So, the next interesting question is how we design such a cut and how we make this cut precise. At this stage using this robot it is not a good idea to have only tries especially when you are cutting something so we should learn how to measure and how to design a specific cut in a certain shape. What we'll try to do is to provide you with a template on a sheet of paper that you can cut and then you can glue to the pipe then you can draw around this template, we'll show you how to use it and then you can cut using this template. And this is something that we'll try to provide somewhere below the video in the materials sections. And then we'll try to build some more videos or tutorials that will show you how to design such shapes, how to implement them. But for now let's stop here. You know the advantages of this shape and you know that you should build it in a more precise way. We've provided a template that you can use to apply to the pipe and cut the pipe precisely. In some of the next videos we'll design some new templates.\u003c/p\u003e"},"108":{"position":108,"title":"Important improvements on Rubber band attachment with a flywheel","description":"\u003cp\u003e\"The devil is in the details\". We are improving the Rubber band attachment with a Flywheel by introducing a few small, but important modifications that make the whole robot attachment more stable and reliable. With the conclusion of the series this attachment could be used as a basis for some very interesting STEM demonstrations on energy accumulation and conservation.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eChallenge at the FIRST LEGO League (FLL) competition:\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWith this video tutorial we conclude this series on whole to complete the World Class Search Engine mission without using any of the LEGO Mindstorms EV3 sets and using a rubber band with a flywheel. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe goal was to give you an idea how you could accumulate energy and use this energy at a later moment to complete a robot competition task. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://media.fllcasts.com/assets/episodes/notes/104/LegoMindstormsFlywheelRubberBandAttachment.jpg\"\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" src=\"http://media.fllcasts.com/assets/episodes/notes/104/LegoMindstormsFlywheelRubberBandAttachment.jpg\" style=\"height:596px;width:600px;\"\u003e\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eThe attachment\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003ePinless, of course. Discussed in previous tutorials, but you should also check out these videos for more on pinless \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/search/attachments\"\u003eattachments\u003c/a\u003e and different \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/search/robot+construction\"\u003erobot constructions\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003col\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/96-pinless-attachment-added-below-the-robot\" style=\"color: rgb(46, 49, 171);margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\"\u003ePinless attachment added below the robot\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/64-quick-pinless-attachments-for-lego-ev3-competition-robots-part-2\" style=\"color: rgb(46, 49, 171);margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\"\u003eQuick Pinless Attachments for LEGO EV3 Competition Robots (Part 2)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/63-quick-pinless-attachments-for-competition-robots\" style=\"color: rgb(46, 49, 171);margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\"\u003eQuick Pinless Attachments for LEGO EV3 Competition Robots (Part 1)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ol\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003ePrevious videos tutorials\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003col\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\r\n\t\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/104-rubber-band-attachment-with-a-flywheel-solving-fll-2014-search-engine-part-1?playlist=12\" style=\"color: rgb(46, 49, 171);margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\" title=\"Rubber band attachment with a flywheel - solving FLL 2014 Search Engine (part 1)\"\u003eRubber band attachment with a flywheel - solving FLL 2014 Search Engine (part 1)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\r\n\t\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/105-rubber-band-attachment-with-a-flywheel-solving-fll-2014-search-engine-part-2?playlist=12\" style=\"color: rgb(46, 49, 171);margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\" title=\"Rubber band attachment with a flywheel - solving FLL 2014 Search Engine (part 2)\"\u003eRubber band attachment with a flywheel - solving FLL 2014 Search Engine (part 2)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\r\n\t\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/106-rubber-band-attachment-with-a-flywheel-solving-fll-2014-search-engine-part-3-two-tasks-at-once?playlist=12\" style=\"color: rgb(46, 49, 171);margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\" title=\"Rubber band attachment with a flywheel - solving FLL 2014 Search Engine (part 3). Two tasks at once \"\u003eRubber band attachment with a flywheel - solving FLL 2014 Search Engine (part 3). Two tasks at once\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\r\n\t\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/107-rubber-band-attachment-with-a-flywheel-solving-fll-2014-search-engine-part-4-two-tasks-at-once\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\" title=\"Rubber band attachment with a flywheel - solving FLL 2014 Search Engine (part 4). Two tasks at once\"\u003eRubber band attachment with a flywheel - solving FLL 2014 Search Engine (part 4). Two tasks at once\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ol\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Rubber band,FLL 2014,Attachments,FLL,Flywheel,Construction","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eWhile recording the videos for this rubber band attachment, we noticed that it could be improved in a number of ways and today we are going to discuss 2 of the improvements. Just let me remind you how the attachment works. It's a rubber band attachment, we reach the mission model, we push on this lever here and we can see that it move the rack here and we can solve different challenges with this.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eOne thing we noticed is that every time we load the attachment and then we can trigger it, at the end the rack might fall. It's a good decision to have some kind of a stopper and we'll add a small pin right here that will do this for us and now the attachment is loaded we push to the border\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eand we stop the rack. Another modification, another improvement to this attachment that is also very important is the following. There is some friction between the black gear wheel here, the small and the large gear wheels and the beams. Because of this friction, sometimes when we are at a competition and for example we have pushed on one of the beams and this friction occurs then it's difficult for the whole attachment to work, for example we release here with the push of the axle, but the attachment doesn't work, because there's a friction right here, the gear wheel. How do we solve this? We must add additional parts right here that are supporting the frame and the beams. That won't allow any friction between the beams and the gear wheel.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eI've chosen to use this part but you can also use other parts.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eHere they are.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNow because of this 2 parts there's no friction between the gear wheel and the beams. Now if I release with the push of the axle the attachment works. These are 2 very small interesting modifications that are a must if you want this attachment to work a 100% of the time. We welcome any comments on this. Try to use it, try to construct it and see if you can modify it in other ways so that it works even better.\u003c/p\u003e"},"577":{"position":577,"title":"Tetrix FTC. Tools and example for cutting a pipe","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis robotics tutorial is about the different tools that you could use to collect the balls in a pipe on a FIRST Technical Challenge competition.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eTools for cutting\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eDrill, grinding stones, hacksaw. This are just some of the mandatory tools that you need and in the video, we would show you how to use them\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eSafety\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eFor safety, you should prepare glasses. Gloves are an option but should be generally avoided with grinding stone.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Tetrix,Classes with students,Construction","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eIn this video I would like to discuss some of the tools that we need to use to cut the pipe to its length and with a specific shape in order to collect the balls with the FIRST Technical Challenge PushBot. So, we'll take a look at some of the tools and how we use them. First, we start with a drill. For this pipe and to cut and to make a good shape on this pipe we need a drill and for this drill we need some grinding stones like this. And you can find them in your local shops, different shops for tools and this is how it looks like. So, it's a grinding stone. And we have two of them but we'll probably use just one of them. We also need this hacksaw and for this video we bought a new one specifically because the old one was looking terrible and again you can find it in your local shops for different tools. We need some measuring device like a roulette and this one measures in centimeters. We also need some safety glasses because we'll use a drill and we need to put some safety glasses on our eyes and these are plastic safety glasses. And we need two other things specifically for the shape that we want to achieve with the pipe. We need a large piece of paper\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003ethat we'll use for a nice trick when measuring you'll see in the video. And we need a template for cutting. Now, you can download this template directly below the video and in some of the more advanced videos we'll discuss how you prepare such a template with a software and how you measure the exact dimensions of this template. But for now you have the template ready. And this is what we need for cutting the pipe. And we also have some material right here that we place on the table. And we'll cut over this material in order to preserve the table. Okay, in the next video we'll start with actually cutting the pipe.\u003c/p\u003e"},"566":{"position":566,"title":"Tetrix FTC. Modify the PushBot to collect balls","description":"\u003cp\u003eThere are modifications that you must do on the FTC PushBot robot. Let's discuss them\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eRemove the arm\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eOn the original robot, you have an arm and we've removed this arm to free some space for the controller and for the rotating plate. When removing the arm try to keep the pieces together. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eChange the directions of the robot\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWe've changed the direction - what was previously considered the front of the robot is now considered the back of the robot.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eMove the controllers\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe controllers are on the back to free space for collecting. With the controllers, we removed the C-sections from he front and increase the volume. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eImproved the phone holder\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWe modified it slightly to hold the phone more easily.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Tetrix,Classes with students,Construction","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eLet's discuss what are the modifications of the PushBot that we made so that we have the attachment at the front and some space for this attachment to work. The first important modification is that we've removed the arm of the robot. And on the original PushBot you have an arm right here at the top of the robot and we've removed this arm to free some space for the controller, for this mechanism for collecting the balls. And that's the first important modification. It will take you probably a couple of minutes 10-15-20, probably more to remove the arm. And as you remove the arm, try to keep all the pieces together because you will not be using all the pieces from the arm but just some of them like the motors. So, first thing, remove the arm. The second important modification is that we've changed the directions of this robot. Initially on the PushBot this was the back of the robot while this was the front of the robot and currently on this modified version of the PushBot we consider this to be the front of the robot. So, the robot is moving forward and is collecting some balls. Again, you can change this and you can think of the different sides in different ways but for these few tutorials we'll use this side of the robot and we'll name this side of the robot as the front part of the robot and this one is the back part of the robot. Third important modification for the PushBot is that we've moved the controllers at the back. And all the controllers are here with all the cables and we've modified the front side of the robot first initially on the PushBot there were some C-sections. Now, we'll refer to these parts here as C-sections because they kind of look like C - like the letter C. So, these C-sections were other parts at the front of the robot, we've removed them and we move them slightly to the back and there were some C-sections here and again we removed them and we've constructed only one C-section right here at the middle of the robot. And depending of course on the topic, on the task and what exactly should be collected you can move these C-sections to the back or to the front and reduce or increase the space right here, the volume in which you place the different balls. And finally we added one of the motors that were used for the arm and we've moved this motor. It was right here and we added this motor to the front of the robot. The last modification that was again important is that we've improved the phone holder right here. And if you follow the instructions for collecting, you would have a phone holder that can keep the phone quite stable. And these are the important modifications for our robot. What you should try to do now is if you have the PushBot, modify your PushBot to look like this. We have the building instructions for this robot and if you don't have the PushBot, construct this robot so that we can continue in the course.\u003c/p\u003e"},"106":{"position":106,"title":"Rubber band attachment with a flywheel - solving FLL 2014 Search Engine (part 3). Two tasks at once ","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe third part of the series the goal is to extend the robot attachment so that we could solve the second part of the FIRST LEGO League World Class mission challenge - to take the loop.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Search Engine mission consists of two parts:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003col\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003epush on a lever to select a color\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003etake the loop with the specified color\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ol\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIn the previous video - \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/105-rubber-band-attachment-with-a-flywheel-solving-fll-2014-search-engine-part-2\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\"\u003eRubber band attachment with a flywheel - solving FLL 2014 Search Engine (part 2)\u003c/a\u003e, we finished with just pushing the lever and now we should also build an attachment for taking the loop.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://media.fllcasts.com/assets/episodes/notes/104/LegoMindstormsFlywheelRubberBandAttachment.jpg\"\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" src=\"http://media.fllcasts.com/assets/episodes/notes/104/LegoMindstormsFlywheelRubberBandAttachment.jpg\" style=\"height:596px;width:600px;\"\u003e\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/search/attachments\"\u003eattachment\u003c/a\u003e is a pinless attachment build for the EV3 competition robot\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003col\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\r\n\t\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/58-ev3-competition-robot-construction?playlist=3\" style=\"color: rgb(46, 49, 171);margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\" title=\"EV3 Competition Robot Construction\"\u003eEV3 Competition Robot Construction\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\r\n\t\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/96-pinless-attachment-added-below-the-robot\" style=\"color: rgb(46, 49, 171);margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\"\u003ePinless attachment added below the robot\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\r\n\t\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/64-quick-pinless-attachments-for-lego-ev3-competition-robots-part-2\" style=\"color: rgb(46, 49, 171);margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\"\u003eQuick Pinless Attachments for LEGO EV3 Competition Robots (Part 2)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\r\n\t\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/63-quick-pinless-attachments-for-competition-robots\" style=\"color: rgb(46, 49, 171);margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\"\u003eQuick Pinless Attachments for LEGO EV3 Competition Robots (Part 1)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ol\u003e\r\n","tags":"FLL 2014,Rubber band,EV3,Attachments,FLL,Flywheel,Construction","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003e- In the last video of the series, we started building an attachment that was solved in the first Lego League 2014 Search Engine Mission. I didn't explain the mission well enough, this is something I will do today. And so, we are also-, we were solving part of the mission, only pushing the lever without taking the loop. In today's video, we will also take the loop, so we will extend our attachment.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNow let me first return to the mission model, and to why it was so difficult as a challenge. At the start of the round, you have the lever here. And one of the colors, in this case, red is selected. Then you must reach the mission element, push the lever. And depending on which color is selected, you must take the corresponding clue. And because of the way this mission model is constructed, it is always a different color. So now it's blue, but if I push, it will be yellow. And you must take the yellow, this will require that you have some kind of motor here for pushing the lever. And then you must also have a color sensor to detect the selected color, and to know which loop to take. Our goal is to solve this whole challenge without motors and without color sensors, because, as a requirement, you must rotate, you must have at least one rotation of the colors. So when you push, they should rotate at least once. And so, one way to solve this challenge is to see the color initially selected. Then reach the element, and then push it so gently that you get the color that you want, which is in this color-, in this case, yellow. So that was the mission, and we are gonna solve it with our attachment from previous videos, and we'll also build an extension that takes the loops. This here is the mission model, position it like this, and we program our robot. This is the attachment. So, we program the robot, it moves on the field, then it reaches the attachment-, the mission model. We push this axle here to the border, so the border is right here. And then by pushing the attachment, we have one of the levers here moving and the other here, and we actually push like this. Then we would like to when returning with the robot back to base, to automatically take the corresponding clue. And for this, we've built the following solution. First, if you would like-, initially, you see that the color is-, so let's say, yellow. Let's say that you would like to take the yellow loop. Then we extend our attachment in the following way. We add a small pin and then we add this model here from rear axles. like this. And then, let's say that we want to take the yellow loop, we reach the mission element, we trigger the attachment. And then when we return back to base we take the loop with us. This works 100% of the time. Of course, currently, our mission model is not fixed. But when it is fixed, it works every time. Again, we reach the mission model, we position, we trigger because we push on the weight of the axle here. We push on the border. And then when we return back to base, we take the loop with us. And the robot is right here. Now, I've zoomed in closer, so that you can see how the attachment works. Again, we have this model of axles here. We move with the robot, we move, we reach the attachment. Then when we reach the attachment, we position the attachment to the mission model, we trigger the attachment. And then when we return back to base, we take the loop with us. It's very important to know that the pin right here, it's a black pin, it's a friction pin, it's not frictionless. Because when we are returning, we are actually taking the loop with us. And this, of course, could slightly be modified, the whole attachment with axles. Because you can modify how long would you like to have these axles, so you can move this red pin. Or you can even change this gray axle with a shorter red one, this depends on the task, of course. Again, return-, go to your mission model and return back to base. Now we'll extend this to make it work also for the other loops.\u003c/p\u003e"},"792":{"position":792,"title":"How to close the car after placing all the electronics inside and outside of it","description":"\u003cp\u003eAfter we've placed the Motor Driver, the Raspberry Pi and all the other elements it is time we close the car. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch2\u003eHousekeeping\u003c/h2\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eAll the screws that were removed when the car was open must now be used to close the car. Do you remember where you've put them? How many of them were used? Do you have the same number now? Use the screwdriver to close the car. Be careful not to cut a cable by accident while closing it.     \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Learn At Home,Reverse Engineering,Raspberry PI,Basic,Classes with students","subtitles":null},"210":{"position":210,"title":"Gapped \u0026amp; Crossed Line Following. Part 7. Turn right state","description":"\u003cp\u003eNext important state is Turn Right with our robot. This happens when we detect a line on the right. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eStates\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWe enter the Turn Right state whenever we detect a line on the right. This is one of the top priorities for our robot - to look for a line on the right.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eTurning right is in the course done with just the motors. In an idea case we would not be dependent on the motors rotation, but we would use sensors while turning. Let's first start with the simpler case and in some of the next courses we would explorer how to make the \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/categories/construction\"\u003erobot\u003c/a\u003e use the sensor when turning on 90 degrees.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,State machine,EV3-G,Light and Color Sensor,FLL,Programming","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eThe next step in our program is to make the robot decide on turning right. So move forward, turn right and then continue and if there is a gap just pass through it. So our next state will be turning right.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eBefore turning right, I noticed a small problem in the program from the previous video and it is in the pass gap block and I would like first to fix this problem. The problem is that after we pass the gap and we just move with the motors, we must actually detect the line, that is continuing after the gap. This detection must happen in this block. So we must start motor B, just on with a small power, like 20 and we wait until we detect black with the second sensor.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd after that we stop with motor B. So this is a small modification that we must add to make sure that our robot works every time. Let's first download the program and then we'll go for the right.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eSo the program is working now let's focus on turning right. Our idea for turning right was that if we see a line to the right, then we must turn to this line. Again, these were our cases. if we see a line to the left and there is nothing to the right we just turn left, but each time there is something to the right, like in this 4 cases, we must always turn right first. So if we detect something with the right sensor, we must turn right. Let's implement this in the program.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNow we must check the value of sensor 1, in this case this is our color sensor, connected on port 1 and it's the right sensor. And we compare, if the color on the right sensor is back, then we must set the state to turn right. If the color is black, only then we set the state to be, let's say that state 2 is turning right, state 2. 0 is following a line, 1 is detecting a gap, and 2 is turning right. For this we'll just turn the robot right. First, we'll stop both motors, then we turn right. Since the right motor is motor B and the left one is C we'll just turn motor C forward for one rotation.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eBefore that I would like to return back for like a few degrees and this is very dependent on the robot construction that you have and where the sensors are located. In our case we stop both motors, we return back a little and then we turn right, by rotating motor C 1 rotation forward. And this should turn the robot right. Then we again enter into the same state for following a line. Robot moves, detects, and we turn right and pass the gap.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWe can even start the same program not from turning right, but from this position, it will follow and again continue. So we can start it from different positions and it will decide. One more modification to the program so that you can make it more stable. This is the part of the program that is making the robot turn right, we stop both motors, we move back a little, then we turn with the left motor, so it can turn right and to make sure that the program works correctly. We must be on the black line after we turn right. What we'll do is to move motor, let's say B\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eand we'll just turn the motor On, forward, slowly. Most of the time we are over the black line after the turn, but to make sure that the robot does not make mistakes, we have to wait until we are on the black line and we'll compare with color for the middle sensor and this middle sensor will be the one on port 2 and we're waiting until we detect black line with this sensor. Then we stop motor B.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd this whole behavior here is the one for turning the robot right. I'll take this, build a new block,\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt's not general turn right, it is especially designed for this motor, for this robot on this field.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eOur whole program now looks in the following way.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eCalculate the state in which our robot is based on the sensors, for now sensor 2 which is the middle and sensor 1, which is the right sensor. Based on the state we are in, we can be either in following a line, state 0, state 1, we are passing a gap and state 2 we are turning right. One more run of the robot.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe robot turns right on this section and then detects the gap. We can even start it from here, the same program.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIn the next video we continue with turning left.\u003c/p\u003e"},"604":{"position":604,"title":"Introduction - Building a robot without instructions","description":"\u003cp\u003eIt is time to construct our first robot without instructions. As with every other task we will divide it into \u003cstrong\u003eseveral smaller tasks\u003c/strong\u003e. Make sure you ask your teacher for feedback after each completed task, before moving to the next one.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\r\nThe tasks will be as follows:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cul\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eFirmly attach a motor to the brick;\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eAttach a second motor on the other side of the brick in the same way;\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eBuild wheels on both motors;\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eConstruct a third wheel.\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ul\u003e\r\n","long_description":"","tags":"EV3,Classes with students,Construction","subtitles":null},"384":{"position":384,"title":"EV3 Phi. Move tank block - finish the whole 180 degrees turn","description":"\u003cp\u003eOnce you start turning how to do you a whole 180 degrees turn. The robot almost does it, but not completely\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003e180 degrees turn with Mindstorms robots\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe duration of the turn configured by the previous episode is not enough. We must increase the number of seconds/rotations that the motor moves in order to complete a full 180 degrees turn. The experiments with our robot give us a value of 2.7 rotations.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eExperiment with another ratio for left and right turn\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe ratio is currently 10% power for the left and 90% power for the right motor and for this we have 2.7 rotations. But how many rotations should we make if the ratio is 20% left and 90% right. It would be more, but how much more.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Motors,Classes with students,Programming","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eThe robot almost turns around the pole and in this video we'll finish the turn.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIn the program we have the block for moving forward and then we have the block for turning left. And the duration of the turn is not enough. We must increase the number of rotations that the motors should do. And after a few experiments we've reached a value of 2.7. This will make the whole robot move forward and turn 180 degrees. So, the robot will turn. The next experiment and you can do it for your robot and for your battery it should be basically the same. We turn with the left motor with a power of 20 and with the right motor with a power of 80. At the end we add one more steering block. At the end of the program. And this steering block is just moving forward with a power of 50. What you'll have: move forward, turn, move forward. And for this block again we've just experimented with the values and we've seen that 20 is good for the left motor and 80 is good for the right motor and the whole duration of the turn should be 2.7. Download and run.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt is not 2.7. You see that 2.7 is still not enough as a number of rotations for turning. Probably it was 3.7 let's try with 3.7.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd I'll download and run the program again.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes, for this robot we have the value 3.7 and the robot will make a full U turn to 180 degrees. And in this way the robot will move forward, turn and return back to base.\u003c/p\u003e"},"800":{"position":800,"title":"How to find place for the driver. Where to place it","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe driver is pretty large (compared to other drivers that we could have used). So we should plan on how to position it on the car, where exactly and how to keep it there. Glue might be one solution\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eTL. DR.\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eMost Remote Control cars have enough space in the body of the car. Somewhere on the inside. Look and think where exactly to place the driver. It is not a problem to place it on the roof, but more beautiful solutions might be possible. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIn the case of one of the cars that we've used here is how we placed the driver:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/218/content/motor_driver_place_perfect_course.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Learn At Home,Raspberry PI,Motor Driver,Basic,Classes with students","subtitles":null},"805":{"position":805,"title":"Introduction","description":"\u003cp\u003eIn this course, we will construct different military vehicles and constructions. In today's' lesson we will build an Ammo Truck. We will attach to it a new sensor - color sensor. We will learn more about it, how it works and how to program it. Later, we will use it to give different commands to the truck.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"","tags":"Classes with students","subtitles":null},"136":{"position":136,"title":"Contain and release ping pong balls. WRO Elementary 2015. Part 1","description":"\u003cp\u003eA robot that contains balls and releases them. It counts how many balls to release depending on the \"treasures\" it has hunted on the field. This is part of the World Robotics Olympiad 2015 Elementary challenge. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eThe World Robotics Olympiad 2015 Elementary challenge requires you to detect the colour of a treasure and depending on this colour to release a number of balls in specific region. The task is pretty basic, but it requires a stable robot that would repeat the release of the balls. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThis construction was the first idea and it had some problem. We present them and try to fix them in the next videos. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Container,Balls,WRO 2015,EV3,Robot Base,WRO,Construction","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eIn this video tutorial we looked at the \u003cstrong\u003eWorld Robotics Olympiad\u003c/strong\u003e and the challenge from 2015\u0026nbsp;- The regular elementary challenge. You can check out the links below for the rules for the competition. It will be probably very nice competition and it involves the following challenge. \u003cstrong\u003eThe robot must move and the robot is previously loaded with 27 balls, that is the maximum and when the robot moves on the field it must at certain moment release the balls.\u003c/strong\u003e That\u0026#39;s the challenge. The ball must fall on the field.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch2\u003eOur First Solution\u003c/h2\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" src=\"http://media.fllcasts.com/assets/episodes/notes/136/WRO-solution.jpg\" style=\"float:left; height:259px; margin:10px; width:350px\" /\u003eOur idea was to build a robot that is in the specified dimensions and it has a container at the top end. You can see that this container is tilted at a certain angle. The idea was that the balls would fall on the field when we move with the motor. Here we have a motor and then when the motor rotates, the balls will fall on the field.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eYou can find the instructions for this container below the video but it seems that it was not working as we expected.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eLet\u0026#39;s now fill the container with the balls.\u0026nbsp;The maximum was 27 so we can have fewer balls but we decided to go for the maximum.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThat\u0026#39;s it, these are all the balls. Now the container is full and the idea was that we move on the field and we have the motor at the front of the robot and then when the motor turns, probably some of the balls would fall on the field. As you now see, this doesn\u0026#39;t quite work. Let me just start the program.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eNow you\u0026#39;re moving. You\u0026#39;re shaking it. But they\u0026#39;re locked. And it\u0026#39;s quite difficult for the ball, one, second.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWe thought it was an interesting solution. \u003cstrong\u003eBut at the end it seems that it does not work without manual push on the balls.\u003c/strong\u003e So in the next video we\u0026#39;ll explore other solutions and ways we can build a container from which the balls could fall. Let\u0026#39;s see what we came up with.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n"},"875":{"position":875,"title":"In 5 minutes only","description":"\u003cp\u003eTry your hand with this challenge, but be prepared to end it in 5 minutes.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"","tags":"STEM,Tasks,Classes with students,Fun,Programming","subtitles":null},"418":{"position":418,"title":"Pivot turn around a corner using a Large Motor Block","description":"\u003cp\u003eWe will show you the most reliable way to turn with your robot.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eWhat is a pivot turn\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe most reliable way to turn with a robot is the pivot turn when only one motor moves.\u003cbr\u003e\r\nInterestingly enough, in order to turn to the left, we must move only the right wheel.\u003cbr\u003e\r\nAnd vice versa, for a right turn, we move the left wheel.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eTo achieve that, we will use а Large motor block.\u003cbr\u003e\r\n \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eLarge motor block in the EV3 Software\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIn the green action palette find the Large motor block. Carefully check the port of the motor, as the selected port is A by default and our motors are connected to ports B and C.\u003cbr\u003e\r\n\u003cimg alt=\"\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/046/content/largeMotor.jpg\" style=\"width: 587px;height: 133px;\"\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\r\n \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Classes with students","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eIn this video we'll look at how the robot does a pivot turn and goes to the other room to take our cup of water.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe most reliable way to turn to the side of the robot either the left side or the right side and this is my right and my left is to use a pivot turn where only one of the wheels is rotating. If I just with my hand catch one of the wheels and move the other, you can see that the robot is turning right. Then I'll just block the left wheel and move the right and the robot is turning left. If I move the left wheel, the robot is turning right. If I move the right wheel, the robot is turning left. And that's a very reliable way of turning. For this turning we'll use the large block. Of course, we can use the other blocks in the software and we an achieve the same thing but our recommendation is to always use the large block for pivot turns. Let's go to the program and see how we do this turn. I'll just move forward with the tank block for let's say 2 rotations and then we use the large motor block and we have this blcok in the actions pallet - Large Motor block. And we say: Okay, we want to do 1 rotation with motor B. And we want this rotation to be with the power of 50. Probably this will be okay but we just have to check. And after we rotate for 1 rotation with motor B then again we move forward with the tank block. And this block here - the Large Motor block will make the robot pivot and it will turn to the right because motor B on our robot is the left motor.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eLet me start it again so that you can see it on the camera. The robot moves forward,\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eit turns but it does not turn exactly to the right. It just turns slightly to the right. And in the next video we'll try to improve this program to make the robot turn exactly to the right.\u003c/p\u003e"},"833":{"position":833,"title":"Add a button to your car","description":"\u003cp\u003eWe want to be able to interact with the car and its programs and we are going to add the simplest sensor, a button.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eTL;DR\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eConnect two close pins of a button to pin 17 3.3V and to GPIO 26.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eA button\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/284/content/Button_new.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThere is a joke that if you don't know how a button works, you must be from the past.\u003cbr\u003e\r\nWhat is interesting about that button is that it has 4 pins, and they are connected internally in pairs. Those four pins help with the mounting.\u003cbr\u003e\r\nA button closes a circuit and electrical current flows from the first pin to the second.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eConnect the button to the Raspberry Pi\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eOne pin of a button must be connected to a GPIO pin, that is kind of expected. The other pin can be connected eighter to ground (GND), as a diode, or to 3.3V. Here we should start explaining about pull-up and pull-down resistors, but we are not going to. We will keep things simple and straightforward.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIn order to simplify our Python code a few minutes later, we are going to connect the other end of the diode to pin 17 - 3.3V. The other pin goes to GPIO 26. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eDo you remember where to find an image with all the pins? Which section had the image in it? It is a vital skill to remember where to look things up. \u003cbr\u003e\r\nUse the navigation to the right, the section was something about connecting the driver to the Raspberry Pi. Open it in a new tab.\u003cbr\u003e\r\n\u003cbr\u003e\r\nSignature,\u003cbr\u003e\r\n/ your friendly evil online teacher /\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eThe end result\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eHere is a picture how a connected button looks like:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"a button and led connected to raspberry pi\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/279/content/20180407_124210.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWe have purposely folded the button pins to the side.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Learn At Home,STEM,Python,Raspberry PI,Classes with students,Construction","subtitles":null},"935":{"position":935,"title":"Construction and Theory","description":"","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eDesign a construction of your own by following the requirements below:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cul id=\"yui_3_17_2_2_1534329488355_454\"\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli id=\"yui_3_17_2_2_1534329488355_453\"\u003eIt should be stable - there should be no loose elements or falling parts when lifting the robot.\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli id=\"yui_3_17_2_2_1534329488355_470\"\u003eIt should have a high rate of maneuverability – the robot should easily move forward and turn 90 degrees.\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli id=\"yui_3_17_2_2_1534329488355_472\"\u003eNo parts should be dragging on the floor.\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli id=\"yui_3_17_2_2_1534329488355_474\"\u003eYou should be able to attach simple attachments to the sides of the robot for clearing the debris.\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ul\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Classes with students,Construction","subtitles":null},"111":{"position":111,"title":"Rubber bands, gear wheels and motors attachment for solving FLL 2013 Truck and Ambulance (part 3) ","description":"\u003cp\u003ePreviously we caught the Truck with two rubber bands. The next step was to lift it. For lifting we used the Medium LEGO Mindstorms EV3 motors. In this video we are extending the attachment so that we could catch also the Ambulance. In forth video we would explore how to release both vehicles after transporting them.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eThe robot attachment is again pinless. The robot moves, catches the vehicles, and lifts them. For the FIRST LEGO League (FLL) Nature's Fury mission the \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/search/robot+construction\"\u003erobot\u003c/a\u003e should also transport them to a specific region the competition field.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003ePrevious videos:\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cul\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/109-rubber-bands-gear-wheels-and-motors-for-solving-fll-2013-truck-and-ambulance-part-1\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;font-size: inherit;line-height: inherit;font-family: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\"\u003eRubber bands, gear wheels and motors for solving FLL 2013 Truck and Ambulance (part 1)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/110-rubber-bands-gear-wheels-and-motors-attachment-for-solving-fll-2013-truck-and-ambulance-part-2\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;font-size: inherit;line-height: inherit;font-family: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\"\u003eRubber bands, gear wheels and motors attachment for solving FLL 2013 Truck and Ambulance (part 2)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ul\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Attachments,Rubber band,FLL 2013,EV3,FLL,Construction","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003e- In the previous video from the series we finished off with building an attachment that was added to the robot and we could lift the 2013 First Lego League Nature's Fury competition model, the truck. And now we can move and take the truck back to the yellow region. Today we are improving this competition attachment so that we can also take the ambulance. As you've probably already figured out, the whole ambulance is pretty similar to the truck. Because both the truck and the ambulance, they are basically the same shape, they look the same and the whole challenge is the same, the whole mission is the same. So if we can find a way to add a similar attachment to this one here but on the other side of the robot, we could take both the truck and the ambulance. And we've added this attachment which is basically the same attachment with a few modifications. First, I'll add the rubber band right here. Then I'll load it. And again we have our lever that when we reach the ambulance it will catch the ambulance. So the whole attachment catches the ambulance. And now we can lift the ambulance and bring it to the yellow region which is quite interesting. The only modification that we did to the previous attachment...let me just take it off...are actually the following. These are both attachments. And on the first attachment for the truck we have a different set of beams for catching the truck. And here we have of course other sets of parts. But the principle is the same. And the other small difference is this black part here. But it's needed for the truck because the truck also has some cargo. And we don't want the cargo to fall from the truck when we lift the truck. That's why we have this black part here. But it's basically the same attachment. Again you can find the instructions below the video for both attachments and for their modifications. Let's now see them in action on the robot. We have the EV3 competition robot from episode 58. This one here. And we have the attachment. Let me just show it to you. Again we have the motor in front of the robot and we have the attachment. There is a series on these attachments and it's called the active attachment for changing gear's orientation. More information below the video in the links. Now we add this attachment to our robot like this. We have one gear wheel on the right side and one small gear wheel on the left side. And we add both attachments so first the one on the right side like this. And then the other one on the left side like this. So this is our whole large attachment separated in three blocks. First, the right attachment for the ambulance then the left attachment for the truck and the middle attachment that is actually transferring power from the motor to both attachments. Now if we have the ambulance like this. And we have the truck...this is some of the cargo on the truck...like this. We now program the robot. It moves on the field. It reaches the truck and the ambulance. And when we reach them, we catch them. First probably the truck then the ambulance like this, and then we continue moving from the field. And when we decide, we give some power to the motor like this. There is an axle that is not connected. And we lift both the ambulance and the truck. And it's only enough to lift them about a millimeter from the mat so that we can move them. Now the next question is how do we release the ambulance and the truck when we want to leave them in the yellow region.\u003c/p\u003e"},"940":{"position":940,"title":"Teacher's notes: Introduction to the lesson","description":"","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eConstruction\u003cspan\u003e:\u003c/span\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cul\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\r\n\t\u003cp\u003eBuild the \u003cspan\u003e Underside Motor Attachment \u003c/span\u003eas the base for the robot and add wheels\u003cspan\u003e.\u003c/span\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ul\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cul\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\r\n\t\u003cp\u003eAttach the ultrasound sensor. Finish the robot so that it looks like a bat\u003cspan\u003e:\u003c/span\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\r\n\t\u003cimg alt=\"bat on a wall\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/442/content/prilep.png\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ul\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cul\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli id=\"module-1923\"\u003e\r\n\t\u003cp\u003eTheory and programming:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\t\u003cul\u003e\r\n\t\t\u003cli\u003e\r\n\t\t\u003cp\u003eA little bit of theoretical information about ultrasound without going into detail. \u003cem\u003eHuman beings cannot detect ultrasound waves.\u003c/em\u003e Unlike humans, bats depend entirely on ultrasound as they are in fact blind. Ultrasound helps them find their way at night and in dark places such as caves.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\t\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\t\u003cli\u003e\r\n\t\t\u003cp\u003eTask: Your robot-bat should not hit against walls. \u003cem\u003eCheck whether the task is successfully completed even when the lights are off\u003c/em\u003e\u003cem\u003e.\u003c/em\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\t\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\t\u003cli\u003e\r\n\t\t\u003cp\u003eTask: the robot-bat should find its prey and chase it.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\t\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/ul\u003e\r\n\r\n\t\u003cul\u003e\r\n\t\t\u003cli\u003e\r\n\t\t\u003cp\u003eStudents can build the prey on their own. It should be big enough so that the ultrasound sensor can detect it. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\t\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/ul\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ul\u003e\r\n","tags":"Teacher's Note,Classes with students","subtitles":null},"952":{"position":952,"title":"Teacher's notes: How to throw a ball succesfully","description":"","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eIn a word, don't rotate the arm 180 degrees, because that hammers the ball into the ground.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eTo make the ball fly high in the air, the arm should stop early. Probably, it should stop after it has rotated 45 or 90 degrees compared to its initial position. However, if you rotate the arm more than 90 degrees, you will aim the ball down to the ground and not up in the air\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Teacher's Note","subtitles":null},"961":{"position":961,"title":"Construction and Theory","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"","subtitles":null},"997":{"position":997,"title":"Anatomy and vocabulary of a steering robot","description":"\u003cp\u003eThese robots are new of their kind and we must introduce some vocabulary to make sure we are always referring to the same thing.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch2\u003eSteering wheels and steering motors\u003c/h2\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003efront\u003c/strong\u003e wheels which the medium motor steers left or right are called \u003cstrong\u003esteering\u003c/strong\u003e \u003cstrong\u003ewheels\u003c/strong\u003e. In cars drivers use the steering wheel to steer the wheels.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThere are no human drivers in robots which is why the latter should steer the wheels. The motor which steers the steering wheels is called \u003cstrong\u003ea steering motor\u003c/strong\u003e.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe steering wheels in our robots are not moved by a motor. The steering wheels move freely and the power comes from the rear wheels.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIn \"4 х 4\" vehicles all four wheels are driven by the motor. Nevertheless, we will not focus on such type of constructions in this course.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch2\u003eDrive wheels and drive motors\u003c/h2\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRear\u003c/strong\u003e wheels which cannot turn and move only forward and backward are called \u003cstrong\u003edrive wheels\u003c/strong\u003e. The force which moves the car forward or backward is applied to these exact wheels.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eUsually, the drive wheels are connected to one or two large motors which we will call \u003cstrong\u003edrive motors\u003c/strong\u003e.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch2\u003eThe application is what matters\u003c/h2\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWe have already mentioned that medium motors are steering motors and that large motors are drive motors. Here we have to point out that we will call the motors differently depending on the task they have to perform and not on their size.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eA medium motor could be a drive motor if you build your robot that way and a large motor could be a steering motor. It is important to know how you will use the motors when you give them names.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,STEM","subtitles":null},"1012":{"position":1012,"title":"Balancing the Jib of the Crane","description":"\u003cp\u003eBalance is of utmost importance when we talk about constructions. In the case of cranes, balance is even more important. If a crane is not well-balanced, it may easily fall due to its weight and cause a lot of damage. Now, we will see how we can balance our crane.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eBefore we start balancing our crane, we will explain an important term. In today’s lesson you will often come across \u003cstrong\u003ethe jib of the crane\u003c/strong\u003e. The jib of the crane is a horizontal arm on the upper part of the crane where the hook or grabber of the crane is attached:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive content-img\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/574/content/Arrows-Showing-The-Crane-The-Jib-fllcasts.png\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eAfter you have constructed the crane, it will heavily lean to one side due the weight of the arm at the end of the jib:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive content-img\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/568/content/LEGO-Mindstorms-EV3-Crane-unbalanced-no-weight-fllcasts.png\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThis might damage the motors and the crane will most probably crash very quickly if you decide to use it. To avoid that, you should install a counterweight at the back side of the jib, just like in real cranes:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive content-img\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/575/content/Arrows-Showing-The-Crane-The-CounterWeight-fllcasts.png\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eYou can use other LEGO parts or tires as counterweights and attach them to the big grey frame. Choose the right amount of counterweights. If their number or weight are not enough, the crane might remain inclined:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive content-img\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/569/content/LEGO-Mindstorms-EV3-Crane-unbalanced-too-little-weight-fllcasts.png\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIf you attach too many, the crane will lean to the opposite side and will remain unstable:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive content-img\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/573/content/LEGO-Mindstorms-EV3-Crane-unbalanced-too-much-weight-fllcasts.png\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe aim is to attach as many tires and LEGO parts as to make the jig of the crane horizontal:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive content-img\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/571/content/LEGO-Mindstorms-EV3-balanced-fllcasts.png\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Classes with students,Construction","subtitles":null},"117":{"position":117,"title":"Physics in LEGO Mindstorms: Energy Accumulation and Conservation. Part 4 - experiment for energy in Joules","description":"\u003cp\u003eWe dispay the speed of rotation of the wheels on the brick screen. We use the math blocks to do a proper calculations from rotation to radians per second. Knowing the speed, the radiuses and the mass of the wheels we find energy in Joules accumulated in the construction.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003ePrevious video tutorials:\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003col\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"/episodes/114-physics-in-lego-mindstorms-energy-accumulation-and-conservation-part-1\"\u003ePhysics in LEGO Mindstorms: Energy Accumulation and Conservation. Part 1\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\r\n\t\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://w/episodes/115-physics-in-lego-mindstorms-energy-accumulation-and-conservation-part-2-theory\"\u003ePhysics in LEGO Mindstorms: Energy Accumulation and Conservation. Part 2. Moment of Intertia\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\r\n\t\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"/episodes/116-physics-in-lego-mindstorms-energy-accumulation-and-conservation-part-2-theory-angular-velocity\"\u003ePhysics in LEGO Mindstorms: Energy Accumulation and Conservation. Part 3 - angular velocity\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ol\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Physics,Construction","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eWe did number of calculations and we went through the theoretical part of conserving energy into the construction that we built. Last we built an EV3 program that was showing on the display the speed of rotation of our motor. If I now start the program\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003ewhat you can see is that the speed of rotation of our motor is about 960 degrees. Previously it was 800 but I suppose that the battery was not that charged and now because of the battery we can see that it is rotating faster. This is the speed of rotation of our motor in degrees per second . so it's about 960 degrees per second. Because we did a calculation we need actually the speed of rotation\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003ein radians per second. Now I'll show you how to improve the program so that you can show the speed of rotation in radians per second.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis here is the program developed previously. It was a motor, we reset the rotation sensor, we start with the large motor, we waited for a second and we measure the number of degrees that it rotated and we displayed this value on the display of the brick.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eand we are doing this in a loop for 20 times, so actually 20 seconds and this will show the speed of rotation for 1 second, the speed of rotation in degrees, the angular velocity. But we want to show this in radians per second. How can we do this? We must convert this value of degrees to radians. We'll take 1 mathematical block\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eand we can choose advanced and in the advanced tab we need the following.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThese are the degrees per second, so we must delete these degrees per second on 360. So we divide,\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003ea is divided by 360 degrees and the result from this is multiplied by 2 pi and pi is 3,14. So that's the formula for converting degrees per second to radians per second.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWe take the result and we display it on our brick.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis here is the brick, let's start the program, we start the program, it starts rotating and the result is actually the radians per second. It's about 16,7 radians per second, that's the speed of rotation of our motor. Now I'll stop this and let's try to connect this motor to our construction. In our construction we have 3 wheels. We have the first, the second and the third wheels. Let's try to rotate them with the motor.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWe have here the axle for rotation. What will happen now is that the motor will input some power to the system. Because of the motor the wheels will start rotating and they'll start rotating faster and faster and more energy will be accumulated. Let's transfer the brick right here so that you can also see it and I'll now start the program.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eYou can see that the construction is rotating faster and faster.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe maximum speed that we reach is about 8 radians per second. So when we have the 3 wheels and we are trying to rotate these 3 wheels with the motor. The maximum speed that we reached was about 8 radians and this is the speed of the whole system. The motor is inputting a speed with 8 radians and we can calculate 8 by 25 it's about 200 radians per second, the speed of rotating of the 3 wheels. The conclusion here is that this motor has a finite power.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhen there are no wheels attached to it, it rotates with 16 rad/s but when there are wheels attached to it, it rotates with about 8 rad/s. How much energy is accumulated here, in this construction when it is rotating with 8 radians per second? Let's do the calculation. Now let's do the calculations again. We have the mass of the 3 wheels and it's about 0,12 kg, we also have the angular velocity of our motor and it was about 8 rad/s. From there we can derive the speed, the angular velocity of the wheels, because there is gear system that increases the speed and actually the angular velocity is 25 times larger than the one on the motor. So it's 25 times 8, so the wheels are turning with 200 rad/s. From there we know the radii, I made a mistake in the previous videos. I was referring to the radii but I was using the values of the diameters. I'll fix this mistake now, we have the diameter of the wheel, the outer diameter that is 0,07 meters, we have the inner diameter that is 0,049 m.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eFrom there we can get the radii, so the outer radii is 0,07 divided by 2 and the inner radius is 0,049 divided by 2\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eSo we have the 2 radii, now the inertia moment from the previous video you know it was one half of the mass multiplied by the sum of the square of the 2 radii.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThat's the moment of inertia. Then for the energy it is pretty straight forward. The formula is from the previous video. We get one half of the inertia moment multiplied by the square of the angular velocity. And we get about 2,2 joules. This is actually the energy that we have accumulated in our construction 2,19 J. Approximately of course, we've done many assumptions here but the principle is the same. Now what can we do with this energy? Can we use it, for example, to lift something or to power a light bulb or to drive a car. These are questions that we would answer in some of the next videos and we'll add a small task on this video for converting and finding different accumulated energy in different constructions. Just to give you a hint for now. If we have a light bulb that is, let's say, 30 W then you can power this light bulb for about 80 milliseconds. This energy will be enough to power this light bulb for 80 milliseconds. Check out the next videos, leave a comment below and we welcome you to build other resources on how the physics in the LEGO constructions work. I hope that the formulas were not that difficult. We tried to keep them minimal with only the formula for the energy and then deriving the rest from there.\u003c/p\u003e"},"114":{"position":114,"title":"Physics in LEGO Mindstorms: Energy Accumulation and Conservation. Part 1","description":"\u003cp\u003eHow can you accumulate some energy in an LEGO Mindstorms EV3 construction an use this energy at a later moment? How does a Flywheel work, why is it important and what is the purpose? What is energy, inertial moment and angular velocity. These are just some of the questions we would answer in this series on Physics and LEGO Mindstorms.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eWhile recording the attachment with a Flywheel and a rubber band we felt we should try to get deeper into the physics of the Flywheel. It is pretty interesting to see the formulas in action and to understand the purpose of the mathematics behind the flywheels. We would try to keep it very simple, and introduce every concept clearly and at the end of the series you would have a good understanding of Energy of rotating objects, Flywheel, Inertia Moment, angular velocity.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003ePrevious video tutorials from which the idea came:\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003col\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"/playlists/12\"\u003eRubber band attachment with a flywheel - solving FLL 2014 Search Engine\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ol\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Flywheel,Physics,Construction","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eIn the previous video that you can find in the links below we did a very interesting attachment that was using a flywheel to solve a competition model. Now there's much physics involved in the flywheel and we got a number of questions from you, so we decided to dig deeper into the subject. For the last couple of years we stayed away from the physics, but actually the LEGO Mindstorms robots are very interesting tool with which we can explore different laws of physics and we can talk about motion, energy and in this series, we'll try to explore flywheels, accumulation of energy, inertia momentum and we'll get into more physics and I think it would be quite fun, quite interesting and you'll learn a lot.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNow my plan for the series is to use model that we built especially for this purpose and we'll do a number of videos first, we'll try to build a block that will accelerate this whole module and accumulate some energy. Then we'll calculate what exactly energy is and then we'll think about how can we use this energy to do other things, for example, if we have the attachment, it's not actually attachment it's whole module. When we rotate the tire with my right hand we can see that the 3 tires inside start rotating, we accumulate some energy in them and we can do something with this energy at a later stage. For example, we can rotate.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eYou can see this same laws in many cars, for example, in F1, you can see them in flywheels and we'll try to do a number of calculations about the inertia momentum, what momentum is, what energy is, how it is accumulated and how can we use it. First, I'll start with something very simple as you can see if we now rotate the wheel here we'll rotate the 3 wheels on the inside. There's a gear system here inside you can find the instructions for building this construction below the video. If I rotate the gear, we rotate the 3 wheels here, some of the energy is accumulated. If I rotate it very slowly, like this I'll have enough energy for something like 50-60 degrees of turning, but if I rotate it very fast, like this,\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eI'll have more energy accumulated and we can turn for a longer distance, so it's like 200 degrees. Now the question is if we have a motor, EV3 motor from the set, how fast can we actually rotate the 3 wheels on the inside, that's the question. So we must first find what the speed of rotation of this motor on it's maximum power and what's the speed of rotation that we can actually use to rotate the 3 wheels.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis here is the EV3 software, it's a teachers edition so it is possible for me to add program and experiment, this is important distinction because with an experiment I could actually find the speed of rotation of the motor. I assume that some you will have the retail version not the teacher edition so I'll have to implement a program without the experiment option here. A program that will give us the speed of rotation of the EV3 motor. The maximum speed of rotation. The question is the following. If we have a large motor and we set this large motor to rotate for let's say 10 rotation and a 100% power. Then what will be the speed of rotation of this motor and by speed I mean what's the number of rotations that this motor does for 1 second.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eI have now connected motor D to our robot and I'll configure it to rotate for seconds, let's say 10 seconds. We are rotating motor D for 10 seconds and we're searching for the speed of the motor. How many rotations is the motor making for 1 second? I'll now start the program. We can hear that the motor is running for about ten seconds, exactly 10 seconds. Then when we finish, we can see the result in the lower right corner.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWe see that we've done 8400 degrees. That's the number of degrees that we've rotated for 10 seconds. We can also switch this to rotations.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt's 23,5 rotations for 10 seconds, which means that for each second we are doing 2.35 rotations. That's the speed of the motor. Let's now try to show this speed on the brick display. I would like to show the speed of the motor on the brick screen because it would be much easier to show the experiment. How do we display the speed of the motor? First, the speed is actually the number of rotations that we're doing for 1 second so we must measure the number of rotations. We'll take one sensor from here, the motor rotation sensor for port D and we'll reset this. Then we rotate the motor with the power of a 100 and we rotate this motor constantly we wait for 1 second and after this second has passed we measure how much is the motor rotated. We measure the number of degrees. We measure the number of degrees this motor has rotated for 1 second. We reset, we start rotating, we wait for a second, we measure how much has the motor rotated. After we do this we must show this on the screen. Let's show this on the screen we have a display and for this display we can show some text and this text would be a wired text.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWe start rotating, we wait for a second, we show the number of degrees that we've rotated for 1 second. That's not what we want to show on the display, we want to show the speed.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eFor the speed, that's actually degrees per second or rotations per second, so it's something per second. Let's do it the following way. We need a loop and we put this whole functionality in a loop.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eI'll just zoom out a little.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWe have the program now let's try and run it and see the number of degrees that we are rotating for 1 second.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis here is the brick, this here is the motor I'll now start the program and we'll see the values on the display.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eStart.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAs you can see the motor is currently rotating with about 870 degrees per second. That's the speed of rotation of our motor. And this will continue forever because that's how we set up this loop. Now let's connect this motor to our construction. Add the motor right here, so that it will rotate the wheel on the inside.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNow the question is what would be the speed of rotation of this motor when we attach it to this whole construction. I'll now start the program.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eI'll hold the whole construction together.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAs you can see the speed of rotation does not actually reach the maximum speed of rotation.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe question is and what we're going to explore in the next video because this is now getting pretty long. How much energy in terms of energy in joules have we accumulated in this mechanism and how can we use this energy.\u003c/p\u003e"},"115":{"position":115,"title":"Physics in LEGO Mindstorms: Energy Accumulation and Conservation. Part 2. Moment of Intertia","description":"\u003cp\u003eIntroducing three main concepts - Energy, Inertia Moment and Angular Velocity. We describe what is the moment of Inertia, how do we calculate it and how do we measure it?\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Moment of Inertia gives you an understanding of how difficult it is to stop an object once it is moving/rotating or to start moving/rotating an object once it has stopped. You can give it a value and this value depends on the weight and the speed of the object. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003ePrevious video tutorials:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003col\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"/episodes/114-physics-in-lego-mindstorms-energy-accumulation-and-conservation-part-1\"\u003ePhysics in LEGO Mindstorms: Energy Accumulation and Conservation. Part 1\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ol\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Physics,Construction","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eNow let's get into the theory. We have a cylinder and this cylinder is rotating on an axle and is rotating in a certain direction. Because of the rotation this cylinder has energy and energy is marked with the letter E and it has kinetic energy. Now there are different types of cylinders and different ways to calculate the kinetic energy of this cylinder and they all depend on something called the inertia moment and the the speed of rotation which is called omega. We have these 3 values, the kinetic energy the inertia moment and the speed of rotation of this cylinder. The connection between these values is the following. E is equal to a half of the inertia moment multiplied by omega squared. Omega marks the speed of rotation of this cylinder. This is the kinetic energy of our cylinder. For the inertia moment, it depends on the mass and radius of this cylinder. The inertia moment is equal to a half of the mass of the cylinder multiplied by the radius of the cylinder squared. The radius of the cylinder is right here and the larger the cylinder, the more the inertia moment, the larger the mass, the more the inertia moment and actually the inertia moment shows how difficult it is once this cylinder is rotating to stop it from rotating or once this cylinder is stopped to start it rotating. That's actually the notion behind the inertia moment.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis here is moment of inertia.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis formula right here applies only for a solid cylinder. If you look at the LEGO wheel that we are currently using it's a cylinder but it little bit different because the mass of this cylinder is not equally distributed. Our LEGO wheel has a tire and a rim. If you measure the tire and we've done it it's about 25 grams and the rim is about 15 grams and the whole wheel is about 40 grams. So the mass is not equally distributed and because of that it get very complicated and we'll use a very simple formula, it won't be very accurate, but it will be quite accurate for the principle that we would like to show. When you have a cylinder that has most of the mass here between the 2 radii. We have an outer circle and for it we have r outer and for the inner circle we have r inner.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWe have the inertia moment for the cylinder that has an outer circle and an inner circle that is equal to a half of the mass multiplied by the radius of the outer circle squared plus radius inner squared. That's the formula that we are going to use for finding the energy, the inertia moment and from there the energy of our LEGO wheel that is rotating. We have the 2 radii and the mass. Last but not least we must find the speed of rotation. The speed of rotation of this wheel and the angular velocity is marked with omega. We measured the angular velocity last time.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWe measured last time that our motor was rotating with 860 degrees per second. That was the angular velocity of our motor when it was reaching the power of a 100%.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIf we know that one circle has 360 degrees how many rotations per second are we doing. If we divide 860 by 360\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003ewill give us the number of rotations that our motor is doing for 1 second. This here is equal approximately to 2.39. We have our motor doing 2.39 rotations per second.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eBecause we are working in the system international units we must have all the units in the system so that we can get the energy. For the energy we would like to get it in joules, that means that we must have the mass in kg and the mass of our wheel is 0.04 kg, the radius then must be in meters, the larger radius is 0.07 m, that's the radius of the outer circle.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWe need the radius of the inner circle is equal to 0.049 m, and we must also have the omega, we must have it in radians per second. What does that means? We have a number of rotations per second\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eand we multiply this by 2 pi, because n 1 circle we have 2 pi radians. Below the video we'll give you more links for resources that explain exactly the conversion between the rotations per second and the radians per second If we multiply 2.39 by 2 pi we'll get something like this. So we have 2.39 multiplied by 2*3.14 and the result is about 15 radians per second. Our wheel is doing 15 radians per second.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eOmega is actually 15 radians per second. Because the video is getting too long in the next video we'll continue substituting these values in the formula and getting the result in joules.\u003c/p\u003e"},"143":{"position":143,"title":"EV3 basics course. Ultrasonic Sensor. Move after object is removed (part2)","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe robot detects an object. After the object is remove we want to make the LEGO robot move forward.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eDetecting\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eDetecting with the LEGO Mindstorms EV3 Ultrasonic Sensor that there is no object could be as usefull as detecting that there is.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe program is implemented with a number of wait blocks that wait for a specific event to happen. In this case we are waiting for detecting an object and for detecting no object.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003ePrevious video tutorials:\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cul\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\r\n\t\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/142-ev3-basics-course-ultrasonic-sensor-detect-object-part1\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\" title=\"EV3 basics course. Ultrasonic Sensor. Detect object (part1)\"\u003eEV3 basics course. Ultrasonic Sensor. Detect object (part1)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ul\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Ultrasonic Sensor,Basic,Programming","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eThe next program that we'll do for the ultrasonic sensor is to have my hand somewhere, initially, very close to the sensor then when I move my hand I'll have the robot to move forward. So we are waiting until we see something at a greater distance. We have very close object, we remove it and it will move forward.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhat we have to do is to move the Wait block as a first block in our program. So we just move the wait block as a first block and the second change is that we are waiting but we're not waiting to see something at a distance of 4 inches but to see something that is far away, so it is at a greater distance. Initially we have my hand at a distance of about an inch and then when I remove it there will be nothing in front of the robot and the robot can move forward. So what we want to do is to again compare the distance in inches but we want the distance to be greater than 4 inches. When the distance is greater than 4 inches the robot will move forward and we'll program it move forward for 1 second.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe program is currently running my hand is very close to the robot, I move my hand and when it is at a distance more than 4 inches the robot will move forward.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIf I now download because there is nothing in front of the robot will move forward.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIf my hand is in front of the robot, download, I remove my hand and it moves forward. In the next videos we'll continue with other tasks for the ultrasonic sensor.\u003c/p\u003e"},"313":{"position":313,"title":"Arduino Basic Course. Uploading program to the controller and configuring the controller","description":"\u003cp\u003eTo correctly upload the blinking diode program to the controller we must first check some of the configurations of software. These are the \"selected controller\" and COM port\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eUSB cable connection\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eMake sure you've connected the controller with the USB cable.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eTools-\u0026gt;Board:\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIn this menu make sure you've selected Arduino/Genuino Uno\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eTools-\u0026gt; Port:\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIn this menu make sure there is a port selected by the software and that this port says Arduino/Genuino Uno\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Arduino","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eIn this video we'll check some of the configurations of the software to make sure we can upload this blinking program to the Arduino controller.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eFirst, you must make sure that you've connected the Arduino with a USB cable to the computer. Then in the software you go to Tools\u0026gt;Board and here you must check that Arduino Uno is selected. That's very important. And the other thing that you must check is that in the Port menu you have the Arduino again checked. In my case on port COM6. Now, if you haven't connected the Arduino this will be empty. So, you must make sure that the Arduino is connected. In this configuration it might be possible that you need to install some additional drivers for your computer. But that's specific for every computer. So, if you have any questions do not hesitate to ask us below in the comment section. After you've configured this and you've checked the configuration uploading the program to the controller is very simple. You just click on this Upload button. The arrow to the right.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt takes a few seconds for compiling, connecting with the Arduino and uploading the program to the Arduino. The correct term is upload. At the end you see this Done uploading. Let's see how the program works.\u003c/p\u003e"},"452":{"position":452,"title":"Improving FLL Robot Game. Scissors mechanism for Lifting","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe final way for lifting our box robot is by using a scissors mechanism. In this Episode, we would discuss the benefits and advantages of this mechanism.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eScissors mechanism\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eNo, this is not the \"official\" name but is a nice name by which we could refer to this robotics mechanism. The are two gear wheels and two beams connected in a certain way. One of the gear wheels is fixed.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003ePlanetary Mechanism\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eOne of the gear wheels is fixed and the other is rotation around it. It is a planetary mechanism. Because one of the wheels orbits around the other as a planet. We are fixing the star wheel with an additional blue pin. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Construction,Classes with students,FLL","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eThe final way in which we'll try to lift our Box Robot is using a scissor mechanism. Let's discuss the benefits and most of the advantages of this mechanism for lifting our Box Robot. The final mechanism looks like this. Here we can rotate and it will lift the whole robot and the robot is right here. But to develop this whole attachment it is important to start from the very very simple think of a scissor mechanism. Again, we are using the gear wheels the large 40 teeth gear wheels. And we have two of these gear wheels. We have one of the gear wheels that is freely rotating using the axle and we have the other gear wheel that's fixed and by fixed I mean that this gear wheel cannot be rotated. You can't rotate this gear wheel. Let me just remove this. We have the axle and this axle is through the center of the gear wheel and then we have this blue pin here and this blue pin fixes the whole wheel and you cannot rotate this wheel. You can see it from the back. The idea here is that we have this wheel fixed on one of the beams - the white beam. Then we have the second wheel and this second wheel can be rotated and now the mechanism works like this. When I rotate the gear wheel we lift two of the legs. If we imagine these two gray beams are the legs, when we rotate like this we lift the legs. And we can even push to the ground. And this will make the whole attachment move up and then forward which is exactly the behavior that we need for attaching our Box Robot to the mission model. Just move forward and then attach. And then we can rotate back and get the legs back. And that's the principle of the mechanism. The interesting thing here is that you can extend this mechanism. You can, for example, place longer beams right here on the place of the gray beams and this will make the whole mechanism lift the robot up to more Lego units. And you get to a larger height. And it is an interesting mechanism because you can get this to work in a very stable way. You can construct it in a very durable way.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWe can achieve the same result with other gear wheels and for these gear wheels we have the maximum distance that is not actually the maximum. The distance between one of the axles and the other axle always stays the same because this axle rotates around this. It draws a circle around the axle. And the distance between the two axles is always the same. And it's this number of Lego units. It's 6 Lego units. So, the distance always stays the same which is a nice feature that we can use for actually lifting our Box Robot.\u003c/p\u003e"},"456":{"position":456,"title":"Improving FLL Robot Game. Our solution to driving the gear mechanism","description":"\u003cp\u003eIt this episode we would present you with our attachment for lifting the robot. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eCentral axle\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe central axle of the attachment is designed to be power from one of the medium motors. There is a system of gears that increases the torque and the robot could be lifted. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Construction,Classes with students,FLL","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eAt the end after you've completed the different tasks for changing the orientation we want to discuss how we've done this for our attachment. This is our attachment and we have the scissor mechanism right here. It's completely the same as the one that we showed you but it has some additional pins that we'll enter into more details in the next sections. What's important now is that we have this axle that will be connected to the motor of the robot. And when we rotate this axle what would happen rotating this axle is that the whole attachment will lift. Like this.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhy? Because we have a small gear wheel right here that's driving another larger gear wheel this one has 20 teeth. So, this one has 12 and this one has 20. And we change the direction here. And we have the large black 20 teeth gear wheel on the same axle as these two small 8 teeth gear wheels that are actually driving the system of gears. And the idea is simple. We have the motor. The motor is driving the small 12 teeth gear wheel. It is driving the larger 20 teeth gear wheel and it is then driving the whole system of gears. And here we can choose different system of gears that we'll discuss in the next video. It is important just to notice that when we rotate the main axle it will transfer the power to the small gear wheel right here at the scissor mechanism. Which will then rotate the 40 teeth gear wheel and from there the whole attachment moves forward.\u003c/p\u003e"},"470":{"position":470,"title":"Improving FLL Robot Game. Teacher's Note. Calculating gear rotations","description":"\u003cp\u003eWhat should you do as a teacher when the students are calculating the gear ratios and number of needed rotations?\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eI would use a sheet of paper with a pencil to discuss the calculations. The math behind this involves just simple division and should be doable by almost all students over 9-10 years old in almost every country of the world.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eDrawing the gear system\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eYou might need to draw the system for the gears for the students. When drawing use the scheme that we are using. It is just a schematic view of the real system. There are a number of ways to represent the system and this on is good enough for the classes that we are doing.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eMultiply the ratios\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eDraw the system and calculate the ratio between each of the gear wheels. Multiply the ratios and you will get the ratio between the first and the last gear wheel. The number that you should arrive at is 75. This is the ratio of the whole system of this LEGO Mindstorms EV3 gear wheels.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eStudents are different age\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eTry to give the student the task to calculate, but depending on their age you might need to help them a little bit. We leave this up to you, but remember that the students should do more and more of the tasks alone with as little help from you as possible.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Methodology,Gears,FLL 2016,Attachments,EV3,Construction,Teacher's Note,FLL,Classes with students","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eThis video is for a short teacher notice on calculating the gear ratio from the driving wheel to the driven wheel. The task for the students is to find the number of rotations. Now, how do we approach this? I'll start from the outer wheel. We have here a wheel that has 40 teeth and I'll draw a small scheme of the gear system. And we have a large 40 teeth gear wheel working with a small 8 teeth gear wheel. Then we have this small gear wheel connected to another wheel that has 24 teeth and this is an axle. And here we have a small 8 teeth gear wheel. And looking at the process then it is connected to another 24 teeth gear wheel and it is connected to one more 8 teeth gear wheel. And finally this is connected to a gear wheel with 20 teeth and it is connected with one with 12 teeth. And this is how our system looks. You draw it from the robot to the paper. And then if I just zoom in, what we have are different ratios. We have this gear wheel with 40 teeth gear wheel. I'll add 40 here and we have 8. So, the ratio between the 2 wheels is actually 5. And I'll draw it with 5. And then we have the next. This here is 24 and this here is 8. So, I have here 5 and I have here 3. Then we have another that is 24 and another that is 8 and I have 3 again. And finally, we have the last gear wheel so we have 40/8 = 5, 24/8 = 3, 24/8 = 3 and we have the last one that is 20 by 12. We have 20/12 which is 1.6. So, these are all the ratios between the different gears. 5, 3, 3, 1.6 Now, if we multiply these numbers the number that we arrive to is equal to 75. This means that if we do 75 rotations with this small teeth gear wheel, it will result in one rotation of this large 40 teeth gear wheel. 75 here, 1 here. This is the process in which you calculate. Now, the students might be of different ages. And depending on the group you can enter into these calculations or you can just skip them and try to do more experiments or you can do just a part of these calculations. The important thing is to know the principle, the mechanism, to be able to draw this on the black board or on the white board or on a piece of paper. And it's possible that some of the teams could come up with one ratio, other teams could come up with another ratio. So, it's more like a competition. Who will do the calculation correctly and then to try with this calculation to actually run the robot? So, coming up with different answers from different groups is kind of like a good thing because then you can experiment. You can experiment and see. The answer that we arrived to is 75. But this 75 is for doing 1 full rotation with the driven gear wheel, with this one here. But looking at the construction you cannot do a full rotation. Why? Because if you do a full rotation, you'll break the whole scissor mechanism. What we must do is do 90 degrees. This means 1/4 of the rotation. So, we actually divide this 75 by 4. And this is the answer for rotating the gear wheel the one that is the driving gear wheel to get to a driven wheel that rotates to 90 degrees.\u003c/p\u003e"},"328":{"position":328,"title":"VEX EDR Intro. Successful move forward and use of the \"wait\" function","description":"\u003cp\u003eIn the RobotC software we could make the robot wait for a couple of seconds by using the wait function. This will give the motors a chance to work and this will actually move the robot. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eWait functions\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eBetween line 8 and 9 we add the function \"wait1Msec\". This means \"wait for 1 millisecond\" and by setting the parameter to 1000 we will wait 1 millisecond a 1000 times. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"RobotC,Motors,VEX EDR,Programming","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eCurrently the program that's running on the robot is just setting motor 2 to power 50 and motor 3 to power of 50. And it's ending. And to make the robot move we must use a wait function. So, let's look at the wait functions.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis here is the program and in this program at the end between the line 8 and 9 we add the function 'wait1Msec'. Now, it's a strange name. We know, we don't like this kind of naming. But let's continue with this. It's a strange name 'wait1Msec'. Well, it's strange because in all the other programming languages, most of them is just a function called 'wait'. But here we have it as 'wait1Msec'. So 'wait1Msec' 1000. This means wait one milliseconds 1000 times. Which is wait for 1000 milliseconds. Which is actually 1 second. And we wait for 1 second. Download and run our program.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eDownloading... And the robot moves for about a second. Again. Actually for 1000 milliseconds.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eYou have your first robot moving. Download, run the program, experiment, try to accomplish the tasks and move it forward for a different number of seconds. Just experiment with the different wait functions.\u003c/p\u003e"},"517":{"position":517,"title":"Tetrix Gamepads. Controlling the motors with two separate GamePad Sticks","description":"\u003cp\u003eIn this tutorial, we are controlling the FTC Tetrix robot with the two sticks of the same GamePad. The left stick is for forward and backwards, while the right stick is for left and right.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eDifferent power for the left and right motor\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe calculation should be done based on the position of the stick. We take the account for the \"x\" and \"y\" position of both sticks. 50% of the power should come from the left and 50% from the right stick.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-family:Courier New,Courier,monospace;\"\u003eleftPower = - gamepad1.left_stick_y/2 + gamepad1.right_stick_x/2\u003c/span\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-family:Courier New,Courier,monospace;\"\u003eleftPower = - gamepad1.left_stick_y/2 - gamepad1.right_stick_x/2\u003c/span\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003ePart of the power comes from the Y axis of the first stick and part of the X axis from the second stick. You can modify the formula, but the principle for controlling with both sticks is the same.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Tetrix,Java,Android,Gamepad,Motors,Programming","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eWe are moving into a little more advanced task where we'll control with the same gamepad but with the two sticks we'll control the robot and the way we're going to do this is with the left stick we control the robot forward and backward while with the right stick we control the turns. And if I now just move the right stick slowly, you can see the robot turning. If I move forward and then backward and we can even group these two actions. So, forward and left\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eand backward and right.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis is the program that we want to develop in this video.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIn the Android studio what I'll do is to change the way we calculate the power for the left and for the right motor. For this, in our function I'll declare a new variable called leftPower and initially it is equal to 0. Another variable that's called rightPower and again it is equal to 0. So, these are the two variables that will control the power that we set to the motors. And right here we want to set rightPower and then is leftPower.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhat we need to do is to find a formula, a calculation that would give us the correct left power taking into account both gamepad1 and its left stick and gamepad1 again its right stick. You can develop different formulas and you can modify them based on your preferences for controlling the robot with the gamepad. But the simple formula would be just taking gamepad1 and its left stick\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eso we take the 'y' access of the gamepad with minus sign. We divide this by 2 and we sum with gamepad1 the right stick and its 'x' access. The idea is the following: When you move forward you can move forward to up to 50% with this motor but then when you press with the right stick you press left, you set the power to the other 50% that the whole robot could take - the whole motor. The same is for the right power - we have -gamepad1.left_stick but here it is with -gamepad1.right_stick_x/2. So, with the left stick we take about 50% of the whole value that we set to the motors because we divide the value that we get from the left_stick/2. So, we can get to up to 50% and the other 50% come from the right stick. If we've moved to the left or to the right and we get our correct value. So, this is the formula that we used for controlling the robot with both sticks. And here you can come up with more advanced formulas. So, you should take into account the 'y' access of 1 the 'x' access of the other stick and you can combine them in different ways. For example, you can combine them here. It might not be 2, it might be another value that gives you a better control of your robot so all the robots are different. So, this formula is something that you should develop specifically for your robot and for the way you want to control this robot. But the basic principle is the same. You get part of the result from the 'y' access of one of the sticks and part of the result from the 'x' access from the other stick. Download and run. I'll use just the right stick and I push to the left.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd now to the right. And you can see that the robot is rotating around an axle that's somewhere here between the two wheels. So, we have the axle on which the wheels are and it is rotating around the center of this axle.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd we also can move it forward and backward. What will happen if we set a maximum power forward and left?\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhat's happening is that we are giving a maximum power to the right motor and the left wheel stays on place. Now I'll just set it right and backward\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eand you see that because we are not rotating this wheel it stays on place and we can do the same for the other wheel - for our right wheel. So, move forward and right.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd this is at least a very interesting way in which you can control your robot. Again, the program will probably be different for your specific robot but the principle is the same and you can control the motors with both sticks.\u003c/p\u003e"},"122":{"position":122,"title":"One attachment for Solving FIRST LEGO League 2014 World Class missions - part 1","description":"\u003cp\u003eOne attachment to rule them all...We have seen it and it works -\u0026gt; solving most of the competition models with only one attachment. In this video tutorial without programming we would walk you through the principles and methods of using a single attachment for most of the FIRST LEGO League competition models. One can learn alot from using as few parts as possible to solve as many missions as possible.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eWe have skip the programming, because there are other tutorials on \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/playlists/7\"\u003epositioning and moving on the competition field\u003c/a\u003e. But we are demonstrating the way of thinking. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eAccomplishing most of the FIRST LEGO League (FLL) missions does several things:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cul\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003ereduces the usage of parts\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eteaches you to think\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003emuch faster\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ul\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eOf course, it is more difficult, but as everything there are advantages and disadvantages.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,FLL 2013,Pinless,Attachments,FLL","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eIn the next few videos we\u0026#39;ll be solving most of the FIRST\u0026nbsp;LEGO League World Class competition missions with a single attachment and with our EV3 competition robot. It is a single attachment with a few sensors, we\u0026#39;re solving The Door, The Search Engine, The Community Tree challenge, The Engagement, The Football. We are doing all kind of things with a single attachment and it will be walk-through and it\u0026#39;s very valuable that you can solve most of the competition with very few parts and a simple movement up and down. Let\u0026#39;s see how we can do this.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eFirst we start with The Door. The Door as I\u0026#39;ve told you is an interesting mission. We have to push the lever and only then you can open the door, so if you don\u0026#39;t push the lever down you can\u0026#39;t open the door. We add our attachment to the robot, like this. We add the ball, we need this ball for the football mission, we place the robot in the base, something like this and we start the round. When we start we align the robot to some of the borders, so it\u0026#39;s a matter of positioning of the robot in the base. You can choose to position it like this on the west border or here on the south border, but when you start the round you turn the robot and then you move forward. You move forward until the sensor, here, the ultrasonic sensor detects the door at a given distance. When you detect the door you just move the lever down.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThen you can open the door.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eSo we are solving the mission in about 4 or 5 seconds, depending on the alignment in the base. We start the mission, we align in the base, we move until we detect the door and when we detect the door with the sensor, we move the lever down.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eAs you see the ball is not following it because it\u0026#39;s attached to the attachment. It\u0026#39;s stays in place and then we again lift the attachment and we continue to the other missions, for the other mission we must leave something near one of the mission models and it\u0026#39;s something that we build with hands and we can just place it in front of the robot. Now when the robot moves, the small mission element moves with the robot. It\u0026#39;s just here below the attachment. This is how we solve the door. As we have accomplished the mission with the door, we move the robot and we must now place this small construction.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWe must place it in this white circle. We move with the robot.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIf we have to we lift the attachment a little so that we have more space and just by pushing with the robot, we place this parts in the white circle. They are currently in. Then we go for The Search Engine mission. Let\u0026#39;s see how we solve The Search Engine. The next step is to solve, to accomplish The Search Engine mission. As you may recall from the previous video the mission is the following. You see red here and you must push the lever and after you\u0026#39;re pushed you draw a color, for example, yellow and you must then take the yellow loop and return this loop back to base, so it\u0026#39;s actually 2 parts in this mission. First you must push the lever and then you must take the loop. As you can see, we have the robot here and it has this attachment and it\u0026#39;s quite well designed for taking loops, so as we placed the parts here in the previous mission, we continue with the robot. We must somehow push this lever, you can see in previous videos, different ways in the current video we\u0026#39;ll just continue with the robot and moving with the robot we can choose to align either to the wall, you can\u0026#39;t see but the ball is not following and we can align to the wall and after we align to the wall we know that we are quite near to the mission element, we can turn and it\u0026#39;s just a matter of position and then we can slightly push on the model. We push it so that we get the same color that was previously here in the mission model and then we know that we must take yellow. We just turn the mission model for 360 degrees and we know that we must take yellow. After we have slightly pushed this, we must take the yellow loop back to base. Now that might prove to be quite challenging but it\u0026#39;s again just a matter of turning, you can turn, that\u0026#39;s a strategy, turn, turn again and align to the wall and after you align to the wall, you at least know of the positions on the field. You know that the border is aligned to the map and you are aligned to the border. Then you continue forward, turn and then you align to this red line with the 2 sensors. After we align there are many videos for positioning robots on the field. You can see them in the links below and you can learn how to align to the lines. After you align, you again turn, it might be possible to align to this black line so that you you know exactly where you are and after that you return, you lower the attachment and you take the yellow loop,\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eagain on the attachment and then you return back. It\u0026#39;s something like this. And you have the attachment taking the loop and then you leave the attachment, now that you\u0026#39;ve taken the loop. That\u0026#39;s it for this mission now the next mission is to find a way to reach the football and throw the ball into the mission model. As this video is getting quite long we\u0026#39;ll continue with the football mission in the next video.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n"},"964":{"position":964,"title":"Introduction","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"","subtitles":null},"687":{"position":687,"title":"A robot a 'day'. Levers and how come the fork of the robot stays horizontal?","description":"\u003cp\u003eIs this my favourite thing? Yes, it is. The use of levers, especially in this robot is just great. These levers make the magic of keeping the fork horizontal even when the fork is moving up an down. Try it. Start the robot. See it. It's ... magic.  \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eLevers\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eFirst - where are the levers. See the picture below. The four white beams that the robot has, are working as levers. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/097/content/lego_mindstorms_ev3_lifting_levers.png\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eAll the beams are the same length. Because of this, the distance between the top of the frame on the left and the top of the frame on the right is kept the same as the distance between the bottom of the frame on the left and on the right. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eAs a result, both frames stay horizontal to each other. Very simple but a powerful concept of mechanical engineering. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Learn At Home,EV3,Basic,Construction","subtitles":null},"123":{"position":123,"title":"One attachment for Solving FIRST LEGO League 2014 World Class missions - part 2","description":"\u003cp\u003eWe show the principle of solving the next FIRST LEGO League (FLL) Nature's Fury 2013 competition missions. Again, without any programs, but just the principles of using one attachment for most of the missions.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003ePrevious videos\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cul\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\r\n\t\u003ch4\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/122-one-attachment-for-solving-first-lego-league-2014-world-class-missions-part-1\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;font-size: inherit;line-height: inherit;font-family: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\" title=\"One attachment for Solving FIRST LEGO League 2014 World Class missions - part 1\"\u003eOne attachment for Solving FIRST LEGO League 2014 World Class missions - part 1\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/h4\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ul\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,FLL 2013,Attachments,FLL","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eIn the previous video we accomplished 3 of the missions in the World Class 2014 competition and now we continue with our robot and the next challenge is the football. Let\u0026#39;s see how we solved the football. We finished with the search engine and our robot is right here, we must move the robot, again it is always a good solution, good idea to align to every line on the field, so we move the robot and we again align to this line. so we know where we are, where the robot is and we move the robot, it\u0026#39;s just a matter of position. We move and if we need to we can align to the border and move near the border, that\u0026#39;s one solution or we can move do a turn and then align to this elements here. It\u0026#39; again possible to align here and because you can reach the element here or here we must align to one more line and you can use, for example, this lines here or this black line, or you can use, there is a green line over here, you don\u0026#39;t see it from the camera but it\u0026#39;s again possible to align to this green line and then align to the mission model and after that you do a few experiments, you see how far you need to be from the mission model you move the robot and you fire and when you are firing the ball, the ball will jump and return right here. So it\u0026#39;s just a matter of experiment to know the power of the motor and how much power do you need to throw the ball. The tricky thing here is that you must do it in a way that the loops don\u0026#39;t fall so if you do it quite fast, like this, they can fall so you should do it also with the speed that\u0026#39;s not very fast so that the loops don\u0026#39;t fall from the attachment and you have the loops again here. Now let\u0026#39;s move to the next mission. After we have scored the goal, the robot is right here and our next mission is the Right sense mission, so we must push the mission model so that we have the loop free and after the loop is free we must take the loop, that\u0026#39;s the mission and return this loop back to the base. The tricky part here is that we must not push this mission model too far, because it will again lock the model. There are other videos for solving this mission model, you can check them in the link below. What can we do we have this black line here so it\u0026#39;s actually very convenient to have this black line, we can align to this line and we can know how far to push the mission model. We take the robot, we program it, it moves we can use either this or this line and we can follow them, for example we can follow the green line here, we reach it, we start to follow it, we move the robot, we follow the line. We can follow the line with line of the sensors or to of them and when we reach the mission model we only follow the line you can see that we start pushing the mission model and the moment we start pushing it our sensors are over the black line, so we know that we are over the black line we align and then we know exactly how much to push, so it could be half a rotation or 1/3 of the rotation of the wheel, we know exactly it\u0026#39;s just a matter of experiment. After we push for this exact amount we return back, we align again on this line, we return, just a number of rotations and then we lower the attachment, move near the loop and we take the loop with this attachment. We can also use the ultrasonic sensor for distance but either way we need the light sensors or the ultrasonic sensor, so that we know when exactly have we pushed the mission model so we can take the loop and now we are ready with the second loop, we have one attachment and 2 loops on this attachment. Now the next mission is to actually move and solve the either accomplish the Community tree challenge. It\u0026#39;s always a good practice to align, so we again turn and align on this line. Let\u0026#39;s see how we reach the Community tree.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eNext we go to the Community tree challenge. It\u0026#39;s right here. We must again take the loop and the robot is on this side of the field and we align to this red line here, so we align to the line and we move the robot. We must somehow reach the Community tree There\u0026#39;s one more line, right here, it\u0026#39;s a green line and we can again align to this line, but while moving we can decide to solve this communication challenge. The mission model is more complex, but I\u0026#39;ve disassembled it, so that I have more space here for the recording and the mission is actually to pull this mission model, like this.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eLooking at our attachment we can solve this mission with our attachment, we just turn the robot, lower the attachment, turn the robot again and we pull the mission model and that\u0026#39;s it. So it\u0026#39;s possible to solve this mission with the attachment, then we need again to align to one of this lines either to the green line here or here and we move the robot again only positioning, aligning to this line and almost always you should do this when you have green and black line, you align to the green, then you turn and you align to the black line. In this moment you know exactly where you are on the field. Then it\u0026#39;s 1 or 2 turns, back and we move to the Community tree challenge. The challenge is to remove the loop, there\u0026#39;s a loop here, we must leave this loop and again we have the attachment for lifting the loops, we lower the attachment and then lift the third loop and we return the robot aligning to this green line, always aligning to each line on our way and now we return back to accomplish the Reverse engineering challenge, but let\u0026#39;s do this in the next video.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n"},"771":{"position":771,"title":"Construction and Theory","description":"\u003cp\u003eToday there are no building instructions provided. You will construct a car which should meet the following requirements:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cul\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eThe front wheels should steer;\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eThe rear wheels should be driven by one or two motors.\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ul\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp id=\"yui_3_17_2_2_1520512585200_1795\"\u003eIf you have any difficulties, go to the task below where you can gain access to instructions which will help you.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"","tags":"Classes with students","subtitles":null},"782":{"position":782,"title":"The position of the color sensor matters","description":"\u003cp\u003eWhen we attached the color sensor in the middle of the front part of the robot, we found the correct coefficient relatively easy. The situation, however, changed when we attached the sensor close to one of the wheels. After several attempts with different coefficient values, we concluded it was impossible to find the correct value.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"","tags":"Classes with students","subtitles":null},"31":{"position":31,"title":"How to quickly follow a black line with one sensor","description":"\u003cp\u003eIn this video lesson I will show you how to follow a black line using just one sensor, but fast enough so that you could use it during any robotics competition without wasting any time.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eMentioned Episodes:\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eHere is a list of episodes that might be useful to watch. The following videos explain things we use in this tutorial:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cul\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\r\n\t\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/13-building-a-competition-robot\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;\"\u003eHow to build a LEGO Mindstorms Competition Robo\u003c/a\u003et\u003cspan style=\"font-size:13px;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e - You could find the instructions for building the robot used in the tutorial.\u003c/span\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ul\u003e\r\n","tags":"Line follow,Advanced,Light and Color Sensor,FLL,Programming","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eIn previous tutorials we have covered the topic of following a black line. Today we will talk more about following a black line with one sensor. A common way to do this is this way. But this way is kind of slow.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eToday I will go you through the program I have used in the previous episode. To follow a Black line with one Sensor using five states, and it looks like this. It is way more faster as you can see.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe first thing we need to do before we start programing is to calibrate our Light Sensors. You can find more on this topic in episodes 11 and 14. So now I have downloaded a calibration program to the brick. And I will start it. So fist I will set the min value which is actually the value of the Black line and it is somewhere around 340. Okey and now the max value which is the value of the White which is 600. Okey so I have our Sensors calibrated so we can start programing the robot. As I said in the beginning we will use the MyBlock we have used for solving the Cardiovascular and Strength Exercise missions in the previous episode.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eSo we have the Light Sensor on port 3 which we will use for following the Black line. And as a condition of the loop we have the Light Sensor connected on port 2. So actually we will follow the Black line until we detect the Green line with the Light Sensor on port 2. You can download this MyBlock and modificate the condition of the loop so it feels your needs. Okey so what is the difference between this following of the Black line and the regular one?\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIn the regular one we actually follow the line which divides the Black line and the White space. Here we divide the values we get from the Light Sensor in five ranges each with length 20 units. And if we get away from the Black line. So if we are in range which is far from the Black line we start moving one of the Motors faster. Actually what is going on is that the wider we are from the Black line the faster we make a turn. And the closer we are to the Black line we are closer to moving in a straight line. Which actually is giving the speed of this algorithm. So the program is we take the value of the Light Sensor divide it by 20 so that we get a number from 0 to 4. And in each of the cases we use a switch block which has five cases each with a number from 0 to 4. And in each case we modificate the power of the corresponding Motors accordingly. So when we are for instance on the default case we are on the Black line so both Motors move forwards at 100% power. But when we are away from the lack line either Motor B is moving than Motor C or Motor C is moving faster Motor B. So it really depends in which range we are. So the program is simple. But the main things are that we must calibrate our Sensors and we divide the values in five ranges. Actually the program can be faster and more precise if we let's say divide the values in 10 ranges. And so on. So you can try this on your own. Now let's run once again the program.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAs you can see the correction that the robot makes is always more than when we use the regular algorithm for following a Black line. This difference between the two algorithms means greater speed for the robot. And during the competition this can be really useful. So hope this could help you. Find more useful tutorials at fllcasts.com\u003c/p\u003e"},"138":{"position":138,"title":"EV3 basics course. Touch sensor (part 1)","description":"\u003cp\u003eComplete introduction to the LEGO Mindstorms EV3 Touch sensors from the very first step. In this video tutorial we program the robot to stop on touch sensor pressed. Again, this is based on your feedback that much of our tutorials in previous years were a little more advanced and that we have never made a proper introduction. A few more videos on touch sensor will follow after this\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eThe touch sensor has three states:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cul\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003ePressed\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eReleased\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eBumped\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ul\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eUsing the \"Pressed\" state you can program the \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/search/robot+construction\"\u003erobot\u003c/a\u003e to wait until the sensor is pressed. The is useful for detecting objects near the robot and acting upon it.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Touch Sensor,Basic,Programming","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eIn this video tutorial of the series on the EV3 basics we'll introduce you to the touch sensor and how you can use the touch sensor with the brick to position yourself, to detect objects around you and to command, to program even the brick from the sensor. So it'll be brief introduction and then we'll continue with additional tasks that you can implement.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe first important thing is to add the touch sensor somewhere on the robot. Now if we take as a given that this is the front of the robot and this is the back of the robot, we must find a way to add this sensor\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eat the front of the robot. This is quite straight forward, we have a beam with 2 pins and we add the sensor. And now with this sensor we can bump into objects, we can press and release the sensor. And we should also connect the sensor to the brick. Now this is the first sensor that we are using and as you remember from previous videos we use the ports from A to D to attach motors, so that we can control the motors and we use the ports from 1 to 4 to attach different sensors. And we'll attach the sensor to port 1.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThat's all we have to do to attach the sensor to the robot. Now let's look at some of the programs and how we use the sensor. The goal of our program, our first program with the touch sensor, will be to move forward until we press something and when press something, in this case my hand we'll stop. Let's see how we can program this.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis here is the EV3-G software and we'll program the robot. First we need to program the robot to go forward and for this we'll use the Move tank block. And we want to move forward with motor A and motor D, this is where we've connected 2 of the motors, so motor A is currently the right one and D is the left motor. We are moving forward with the power of 50 for 1 rotation. And we want to wait. What are we waiting for? We wait for the touch sensor to be pressed. So we are moving forward until the touch sensor is pressed. From this wait block, located in the orange palate, from the options we select touch sensor. We are waiting, we have to options to compare or to change. Let's start with comparing. We want the sensor to be, let's check them, 0 means released, 1 means pressed and 2 means bumped. Let's start with pressed. We want to move forward until the sensor is pressed, so we stay in this block and wait until the sensor is pressed, and then we want to stop the motors.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eLet's stop the motors. OK, let's see how this program works and it won't work as expected. So, what we are expecting is moving forward, pressing the button and then stop. Let's see how this program works. This here is the robot. We have the touch sensor. And now I'll run the program. Run.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe robot moves, we press the touch sensor and it seems that the robot stops. Let's do this again.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eI'll move it like this so that you can see it on the camera.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eOК it seems that the robot stop when you press the touch sensor. But actually if we start the program without putting my hand here as an end we start the program and we can see that the robot stops even if we don't press the sensor. More importantly if my hand is even closer we expect that the robot would stop now. Let's start it.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eBut as you can see the robot does not stop right in the moment when it reaches my hand, when we press the touch sensor. So, the program is not working as expected. Again.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eLet's go back to the software and see what's the problem. The issue with this program is that we are moving the motors not until we reach my hand where it can press the touch sensor. The problem is that we are moving the motors for only one rotation. So we are saying to the program OK, move for one rotation and then wait and then stop. What happens if the wall or my hand is on 3, 4, 5, 10 rotations as a distance with this program the robot will never reach my hand, so we are programming it for only one rotation. How can we know how far is the object before we download the program. What can we add here, should we add 1, 2, 3, how many rotations. Where is the object? How do we program this before we know where the object is, before we start the robot? The answer is pretty simple. It's very easy to implement this in the software. We just start the motors, without setting the number of rotations. We just set the motors to On - that means just turn the motors on. Doesn't matter how long they will travel, just turn them on. And we turn the motors on with power 50 and this block will execute, and then we'll wait until we press the touch sensor. This is kind of difficult for some of the students to get their head around this but that's very powerful to be able to set the motors just to move forward without setting the number of rotations, because you don't know them in advance.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe robot only finds how many rotations it makes, when it is actually working, when it is moving to the object. So we are programming the motors, then we are waiting for a touch sensor and then we stop. Let's see if this program works.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNow, if I download the program and I place my hand right here.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe robot moves to my hand and we press the touch sensor and the robots stops. What happens if my hand is at another location.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNow we'll move.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAs you can see the distance is different, we start the program the robot moves.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eI couldn't press the touch sensor. Again.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe moment I press the touch sensor, the robot stops. Or it could be just a from a centimeter. I'll start the program.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd the robot stops. So this is a basic introduction to the touch sensor and how it works. In the next video we'll explore, the other options of the touch sensor and some more interesting programs.\u003c/p\u003e"},"240":{"position":240,"title":"Sixth state - Going Home","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"EV3,WRO 2015,State machine,WRO,Light and Color Sensor,Sensors,Programming","subtitles":null},"356":{"position":356,"title":"Yo-Yo challenge introduction","description":"\u003cp\u003eOverview of what is going to happen that part of the lessons.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eThe challenge\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe Yo-Yo challenge is to make the robot move back and forth with ever decreasing distances.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eThe steps to solve the challenge\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWe will learn how to connect cables to the robot.\u003cbr\u003e\r\nWe will show you how to connect your computer with the Brick.\u003cbr\u003e\r\nWe will learn how to develop a program in the EV3 programming software.\u003cbr\u003e\r\nWe will demonstrate how to download the program to the brick\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Classes with students","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eIn this module we'll solve our first challenge with the EasyBot. And we call it the yo-yo challenge because the robot moves like a yo-yo backward - forward. To accomplish this challenge we must learn a few things. First, we must connect the cables to the motor, then we must develop a program on the computer. Connect the USB cable from the computer to the brick. Implement the program download it on the brick and run it. And in the end we'll know how to move forward and backward with the robot.\u003c/p\u003e"},"140":{"position":140,"title":"EV3 basics course. Touch sensor. Non-intuitive, but logical (part 3)","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe way sensors and programs work in a robotics system is sometimes not-intuitive for a beginner, but nevertheless very logical. Building a program for a touch sensors for \"Press-\u0026gt;Go-\u0026gt;Press-\u0026gt;Stop\" using the EV3-G software could be quite challenging at the beginning even for experienced teachers, students and robot builders.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eIn the field of STEM many times the experiment shows not what we expect and the programs are behaving in strange ways. This is one of the simplest examples of this scenario. If you could understand this, you have made your first step into the field of technical science and STEM.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003ePrevious video tutorials:\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cul\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/138-ev3-basics-course-touch-sensor-part-9\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\" title=\"EV3 basics course. Touch sensor (part 1)\"\u003eEV3 basics course. Touch sensor (part 1)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/139-ev3-basics-course-touch-sensor-programing-pressed-releases-part-2\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\" title=\"EV3 basics course. Touch Sensor. Programing. Pressed/Released (part 2) \"\u003eEV3 basics course. Touch Sensor. Programing. Pressed/Released (part 2)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ul\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Touch Sensor,Basic,Programming","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eAfter we looked at the properties of the touch sensor and that we can press, release and bump the sensor. And that we can control different motors. Now I would like to enter into probably one of the most basic concepts in the field of robotics. And I'll first set the problem, then we'll do the program and then we would think about why is it happening like this. So actually the program is the following, we would like to program the robot to move when I touch - start, when I touch again - stop. That's the goal of our current program.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eLet's look at the program. We would like to program the robot to do the following thing. First, we wait until we press the sensor, attached to port 1, then we start moving the robot not with the steering I would like to move it with the Tank block. So, I wait until we press the touch sensor, then we start moving the robot, but we move this for undefined amount of time, so it's just on and we move, then we wait again until we press the sensor again. So it's touch sensor, state, and the state is 1. This is how the program should work. First, we press, then we start, we move, then when we press again, the robot stops. And here I'll add a stop block.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWe add a stop block here. And that's the program. Let's see how the program works. Downloading the program. Download. We wait until the sensor is pressed and we go forward. Nothing happens. Let's download the program again.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhat is happening here is that the program is not behaving as we would expect. Something is happening and understanding this is crucial for you. To know why the program doesn't work and what happens in the program. Again. Nothing happens. The robot is not moving forward. Let's take a look back at the program. What is actually happening here is the following. We wait until the sensor is pressed, we start the motors and then we wait until the sensor is pressed again and then we stop. But while we are pressing the sensor and we enter into this block we detect that the sensor is pressed, we start the motors and before we lift our finger from the sensor the next wait block detects that the sensor is again pressed. The brick is so fast that this happens in milliseconds. We start the motor only for a number of milliseconds and we haven't removed our finger from the sensor, so it stays stopped. Again what happens, we press and we start the motors, but before we lift our finger from the sensor the next block detects that we have pressed the sensor and stops the motors. How do we fix this. There are a number of solutions. The easiest solution is the following. To wait for let's say one second. So we press we wait for one second so that we can lift our finger from the sensor then we start the motors, then we wait again until we press the sensor and then we stop. Let's check the program. Start, the program's running, I'll now press the sensor wait for a second the robot moves and when it reaches my hand it stops. Let's start the program again. Touch the sensor, wait for a second, move, stop. So it's working as expected. Can we fix this in another way so that we don't have to wait for a second?\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWe are losing one second here. We don't have to wait for a second. Let's see a solution. What if we don't wait for a second, how can we implement this? We delete the block and what we would like to do is to wait for the touch sensor to move from pressed to released. We add another block, we wait until the touch sensor is in the state - released.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eLet's see the program now. First we wait until the touch sensor is pressed, then we wait until the touch sensor is released, the moment we release the touch sensor is released we start the motor, so there's no delay for a second,\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003ethen we move with the motors until we press the sensor again and we stop both motors. Let's check the program. Download. Run. Here's the robot, now I press, then we wait for a releasing of the sensor the robot moves forward, until we press again.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003ethis is how, the robot should be working and this was the goal of our video. To program this sensor so that we can press, release, move, than press release and stop. I know that this behavior might be little strange, but it's perfectly logical. If you have any questions or suggestions for how we can explain it even clearly leave a comment below and we'll try to do it. In the next video we'll enter in more details for the touch sensor. Then we'll use the knowledge of the touch sensor to introduce the other sensors in the EV3 set.\u003c/p\u003e"},"152":{"position":152,"title":"EV3 basics course. Color Sensor. Tasks (part 6) ","description":"\u003cp\u003eTasks on using the LEGO EV3 Mindstorms Color sensor. Quite fun and useful for different STEM classes or just to get to know the sensor. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003ePrevious LEGO tutorials\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cul\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\r\n\t\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/147-ev3-basics-course-color-sensor-detect-line-part-1\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;font-size: inherit;line-height: inherit;font-family: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\"\u003eEV3 basics course. Color Sensor. Detect line (part 1)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\r\n\t\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/148-ev3-basics-course-color-sensor-stop-on-third-line-hack-part-2\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;font-size: inherit;line-height: inherit;font-family: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\" title=\"EV3 basics course. Color Sensor. Stop on third line. Hack (part 2) \"\u003eEV3 basics course. Color Sensor. Stop on third line. Hack (part 2)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\r\n\t\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/149-ev3-basics-course-color-sensor-stop-on-third-line-without-wait-block-part-3\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;font-size: inherit;line-height: inherit;font-family: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\" title=\"EV3 basics course. Color Sensor. Stop on third line without Wait block (part 3) \"\u003eEV3 basics course. Color Sensor. Stop on third line without Wait block (part 3)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\r\n\t\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/150-ev3-basics-course-color-sensor-stop-on-third-line-improve-program-part-4\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;font-size: inherit;line-height: inherit;font-family: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\" title=\"EV3 basics course. Color Sensor. Stop on third line. Improve program (part 4) \"\u003eEV3 basics course. Color Sensor. Stop on third line. Improve program (part 4)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\r\n\t\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/151-ev3-basics-course-color-sensor-working-with-reflected-light-part-5\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;font-size: inherit;line-height: inherit;font-family: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\"\u003eEV3 basics course. Color Sensor. Working with reflected light (part 5)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ul\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Light and Color Sensor,Basic,Programming","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eThe next step in our course is for you to experiment with sensor, to try to build a few programs and if you have any questions ask them. Here are a few tasks that you can use to experiment with this sensor. All the tasks are described below the video. Just as an example, build a program that moves, counts the 3 lines and then moves back and stops on the second line. Again, move forward to the third line, then move back and stop at the second line. Of course the other tasks are described below the video. Build a program, record a video, submit your video in the comments and we'll be able to give you more feedback about the program.\u003c/p\u003e"},"153":{"position":153,"title":"EV3 basics course. Color Sensor at a competition (part 7) ","description":"\u003cp\u003eIn a competition environment like the FIRST LEGO League (FLL) or World Robotics Olympiad (WRO) the color sensor is more than useful. It makes positioning on the field quite easy and precise. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eWe have build a number of videos on this subject and you can find them in the playlist: \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/playlists/10\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;font-size: inherit;line-height: inherit;font-family: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\"\u003eFollowing and Aligning to Lines\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eInteresting would be for you to check out the following videos and their series:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cul\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\r\n\t\u003ch4\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/175-proportional-line-following-with-ev3-mindstorms-part-1\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;font-size: inherit;line-height: inherit;font-family: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\" title=\"Proportional Line Following with EV3 Mindstorms. Part 1\"\u003eProportional Line Following with EV3 Mindstorms. Part 1\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/h4\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\r\n\t\u003ch4\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/178-crossed-lines-t-sections-positioning-part-1\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;font-size: inherit;line-height: inherit;font-family: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\" title=\"Crossed lines (T Sections). Positioning. Part 1.\"\u003eCrossed lines (T Sections). Positioning. Part 1.\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/h4\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ul\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003ePrevious tutorials\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cul\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\r\n\t\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/147-ev3-basics-course-color-sensor-detect-line-part-1\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;font-size: inherit;line-height: inherit;font-family: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\"\u003eEV3 basics course. Color Sensor. Detect line (part 1)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\r\n\t\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/148-ev3-basics-course-color-sensor-stop-on-third-line-hack-part-2\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;font-size: inherit;line-height: inherit;font-family: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\" title=\"EV3 basics course. Color Sensor. Stop on third line. Hack (part 2) \"\u003eEV3 basics course. Color Sensor. Stop on third line. Hack (part 2)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\r\n\t\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/149-ev3-basics-course-color-sensor-stop-on-third-line-without-wait-block-part-3\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;font-size: inherit;line-height: inherit;font-family: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\" title=\"EV3 basics course. Color Sensor. Stop on third line without Wait block (part 3) \"\u003eEV3 basics course. Color Sensor. Stop on third line without Wait block (part 3)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\r\n\t\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/150-ev3-basics-course-color-sensor-stop-on-third-line-improve-program-part-4\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;font-size: inherit;line-height: inherit;font-family: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\" title=\"EV3 basics course. Color Sensor. Stop on third line. Improve program (part 4) \"\u003eEV3 basics course. Color Sensor. Stop on third line. Improve program (part 4)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\r\n\t\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/151-ev3-basics-course-color-sensor-working-with-reflected-light-part-5\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;font-size: inherit;line-height: inherit;font-family: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\"\u003eEV3 basics course. Color Sensor. Working with reflected light (part 5)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\r\n\t\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/152-ev3-basics-course-color-sensor-tasks-part-6\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;font-size: inherit;line-height: inherit;font-family: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\"\u003eEV3 basics course. Color Sensor. Tasks (part 6)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ul\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Light and Color Sensor,FLL,Programming","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eThe light sensor, the EV3 color sensor is also very appropriate for different competitions, so you can position yourself at the competition. Now the programs there are a little bit more advanced, they include following lines or aligning to different lines and using the sensors with different states and calibrating. So we filmed other videos that we did previously, but all of the videos are given in the links below the video, so you can start with them and move to the use of the color sensor in a competition enviorment. Check out the links below.\u003c/p\u003e"},"156":{"position":156,"title":"EV3 basics course. Gyro Sensor. Non-intuitive, but logical. Turn back (part 3) ","description":"\u003cp\u003eLet's explain the problem of just waiting for the Gyro sensor to detect an angle and think of why the robotics systems work like that.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003ePrevious video tutorials:\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003col\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/154-ev3-basics-course-gyro-sensor-turn-at-an-angle-part-1\"\u003eEV3 basics course. Gyro Sensor. Turn at an angle (part 1)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\r\n\t\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/155-ev3-basics-course-gyro-sensor-why-is-the-robot-turning-to-a-different-angle-part-2\"\u003eEV3 basics course. Gyro Sensor. Why is the robot turning to a different angle (part 2)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ol\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Gyro Sensor,Sensors,Basic,Programming","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003ePreviously we tried to turn to 90 degrees the robot was turning to 97 degrees and we tried to return back the robot, but the program was not working and the question is why. Why wasn't the robot returning back a few degrees.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eTo answer this question we should again look at the program. What happens in the program? Why is it very logical but non intuitive. First, the robot turns forward with the motor and it turns right until we reach a value detected by the gyro sensor of greater than or equal to 90 degrees and then we stop. As we stop, we saw that the value returned by the sensor was about 97 degrees. This was displayed here in the block. Then we tried to turn back the motor, very slightly until we are at exactly 90 degrees and then stop. This was not working correctly. The real problem here is the following. While this motor turns, we wait for the sensor to detect a value exactly 90 degrees and it detects it, it stops and it runs again until we are at exactly 90 degrees. These 2 blocks here are running in a few milliseconds because the micro controller of the brick is quite fast and from this block to this block we have some milliseconds and that's why the moment that this block detects the value of 90 degrees is actually the moment that this block detects the value of 90 degrees and they are separated with a few milliseconds difference. That's why we don't get the chance to return back with the robot and the whole program ends. In order to solve this we must add one more wait block. We wait here for about a second for the whole program to stop, to wait\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eand then we return back with the motor. Let's run the program, first on the software. We turn, 93 and then we return to exactly 90.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eLet's see this on the camera.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eYou'll now see the robot turn and then return.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eYou see this small turning back after the robot has stopped. Again, I'll run the program.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNow we are almost perfectly aligned to about 90 degrees. So it might be 89 or 91 and that's something that we'll explore in the next video.\u003c/p\u003e"},"971":{"position":971,"title":"How to build SUV Box Robot for LEGO Competitions","description":"\u003cp\u003eThere are a few main challenges with box robots and in the following tutorial we would like to resolve them. Read on and let's see how we could do this. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch2\u003eMotors should be in the right direction\u003c/h2\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWhat we learned based on your feedback is that it is difficult for students to use a robot where the motors are not in the right direction. When this happens students have to enter minus seconds or degrees of rotation for the robot to move forward. This was the case with Box Robot 2. Entering \"-2\" to move 2 seconds forward is just not very natural. It makes you think and pay more attention to details. But it is not natural. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eFor the SUV robot we've placed the motors in the right direction. As a conclusion try to always place the motors in the right direction.   \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch2\u003eBalance between accuracy of Light/Color sensors and high of the robot\u003c/h2\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThis SUV Box robot has a large clearance. It could move through high obstacles which makes it a very good fit for Into Orbit FIRST LEGO League competition. But there is a balance here. When the robot is this high the sensors are further away from the field. Errors might occur. So be carefully.  \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch2\u003eNEVER use the USB programming port\u003c/h2\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe LEGO Mindstorms EV3 Brick is really great. But it has two major flows.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e1. It uses Mini-B\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e2. It is used by students :D \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWhen students use the brick they constantly plug and unplug the USB cable and they will eventually brake it. And it will happen in a few months. And we talk from experience here. We've seen a lot of bricks that are broken in this way.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eAnd then you have to upgrade the software. But since the USB port is broken, you can not.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe solution is simple:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDo not use the USB programming port. Always program the robot through Bluetooth. Use the USB programming port only for Firmware upgrade.\u003c/strong\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eFor this particular robot we've even constructed it in a way to discourage you from using the port.  \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"FLL,Attachments,FLL 2018,EV3,Box Robots,Knob Wheel","subtitles":null},"137":{"position":137,"title":"Contain and release ping pong balls. WRO Elementary 2015. Part 2","description":"\u003cp\u003eImproving the construction for the World Robotics Olympiad missions. The improvement is in the position of the sensor and the size of the balls container. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eThere are two angled beams at the front of the construction with which we can collect the different treasures. The robot must be limited to 25cm/10inches. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eUsing two chains we release on ball at a time and in this way we count how many balls have we released. Counting is necessary because we need to release the exact number of balls from the robot construction. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe limitation of this construction is that there is a large friction in the container because we have loaded it with too many balls. In the next videos we would improve this robot. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003ePrevious video tutorials\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cul\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/136-contain-and-release-ping-pong-balls-wro-elementary-2015-part-1\"\u003eContain and release ping pong balls. WRO Elementary 2015. Part 1\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ul\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Balls,Container,Attachments,WRO,Construction","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eIn this video we continue with the World Robotics Olympiad (WRO) 2015 elementary challenge and previously we build a robot for solving some of the missions and today we continue with improvement of this robot. This here is the improvement. It's quite large so let's see how it works. The robot must accomplish 2 missions and the first mission is connected with these boxes. They are different colors, we have red, we have green colors and they are on the field. So we move, we must collect them and after we collect them we detect the color and depending on the color we must release a different number of balls from the container above. Then we must leave the box at another place at the field. So we move with the robot, we collect and then we leave the box. You can see these 2 angled beams at the front of the robot and they are very useful when you want to collect an object because even if you are not aligned to the object you can again collect it. You can see that you always collect it. They are not aligned, and you move and it's a nice, smooth and very convenient way for collecting different objects. always use this 2 angled beams. The second part of the competitions is connected with releasing different number of balls depending on the color that you have detected and we built this robot, this is the second try. We have the container for the balls, above the robot and there are some limitations for the size of the robot, it's 25 cm which is about 10 inches and we can measure with a ruler and we can see that the whole robot is about, less than 25 cm. It is always convenient to build a small attachment from LEGO parts, like this to take a measurement of this attachment and to know that this is for example, 24 and a half cm or about 10 inches. Then you can use this attachment to actually measure your robot. In this way you can keep the robot in the specified limits, here and here and above and we can see that our robot even though it is quite large,\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003ebut it's less than 25x25x25 cm, which is less than 10x10x10 inches. Third part of the mission, let's load the container with a few balls.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWe have 2 balls at the right side of the robot and we have 2 balls at the left side. We move with the robot and then we release the balls from the back of the robot. You can see that we have 2 chains. These here are the chains and these 2 chains are powered by single motor and they are connected, you can see the axles here, you can also find the instructions for building this robot below the video, but we have the motor, it is on the inside and we have an axle that controls both chains. Now the chains are not aligned and this would allow us to release only 1 ball at the time from both chains. There will be a case where both chains automatically, simultaneously release a ball. It will be first on of the chains, then the other chain. Let's see this in action. I have a program. the program just moves the motor for about 120 degrees. let's start the program with 2 balls.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eSo we have 4 balls and it's a working construction but it has a few limitations. First as you can here, there's some noise when the chains are moving and this is because some of the parts, that are connected to the chains, when they move they touch the motor, right here, this motor here.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThey touch the motor right here. That's why we here this noise and that's not very nice because we have some friction between the parts and the motor. When they are moving above the motor. The next even larger problem with this construction is that it does not work for all the balls. I'll just load all the balls in the container\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eand it's quite full. Now when I start the program, you'll see that the whole construction does not work as expected. let me just start the program.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThen you can see that there is even a larger friction between the balls on the inside in the container. There is so much friction that we can't actually move the chains. Now if we release part of the friction by moving the balls by hand the robot will start working.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eBut this require us to touch the robot with a hand and that's not possible during competition, of course. It must be an autonomous robot. This is one of the problems with this construction. it works for a few balls, like, for 10, 15 balls, but when you fill the whole container with whole 25 balls it actually does not work because there is friction between the different balls and the LEGO parts. You can't actually move and release one ball at the time, especially with this construction, but I suppose that it will be nice to use it in other competitions, with other challenges and it's very interesting because you have the 2 chains and if you find a place, a competition, a mission, where you are using this construction give us a link below, record it, comment it so that we can know it and we can help you with making it work even better.\u003c/p\u003e"},"904":{"position":904,"title":"Construction and Theory","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"","subtitles":null},"223":{"position":223,"title":"Count Lines. Move to 4-th Line. WRO Elementary 2013","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"EV3,WRO 2013,WRO,Light and Color Sensor,Programming","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eThe block that we are about to see is about counting the lines and moving to the fourth line in the World Robotics Olympiad 2014 Elementary challenge.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eYou can find this program below the video in the materials section and it's the full program for solving this elementary challеnge. It starts of course with the menu that we looked at a few videos ago. And we reach at the point that we move to the fourth line. And we have a block that is called Move to fourth line. If we enter this block, we can see the actual code that counts the lines and moves the robot to the fourth line. Let's look at the code. We just zoom this. Counting the lines is not very difficult. We start two of the motors B and C and just start them for 2 rotations to move forward very fast and then we enter a loop. In this loop we start motors B and C for unlimited amount of time and rotations. Just on. And here the robot is just moving forward and it's waiting for something. This something is to detect with the colour sensor that we have reached a black line. And in our case a black line means that the sensor returns something smaller than 25. And this is black. On our field the value is actually 10, so something smaller than 25 is a black line. Then we continue moving forward. We don't stop the motors and we wait until we detect something that's white so that we pass the line. So we detect when we are on the line and we are on the line for a number of milliseconds and then we wait to move over the line and detect white. This means that we have moved over the line. Then we play a sound so that we can hear it and we can debug it and it's better in this way for the camera . We do this whole loop three times which means that we count three lines. And we can change here the number and we can count 1 line or 2 lines or 3 or even more lines. At the end when the loop finishes we stop the motors. So that we know where we are. And to reach the fourth line we do the same thing again but this time not using the reflected light but the colour detection of the colour sensor. We start the motors and we wait until the sensor on port number 3 detects something that is black. If I now open, we can see that 1 means black and when we detect black we stop with the motors. When we stop we return back a little until we detect white. 6 for the colur sensor means white. And in this way we are just before the last fourth line. And we are on a position where we can start our program for sorting the different blocks into different regions. So this is the program. Find it below the video. Especially this block. And do the tasks that are again described below the video. Let's see again how the robot behaves.\u003c/p\u003e"},"155":{"position":155,"title":"EV3 basics course. Gyro Sensor. Why is the robot turning to a different angle (part 2) ","description":"\u003cp\u003eTurning with the Gyro Sensor on a specified angle and stopping there have never been easy. It is not going to get any better. However, this is not a problem of the Gyro sensor. The problem is in the way we develop our programs.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eNo matter what your \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/search/robot+construction\"\u003erobot\u003c/a\u003e is when you turn at 90 degrees with the LEGO Mindstorms EV3 Gyro sensor it would almost always stop at 90+ or 90- degrees. This makes using the sensor difficult and error prone. The solution requires you to understand how sensors work. Not only this, but also the Touch, Color, Ultrasonic sensors.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003ePrevious video tutorials:\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003col\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/154-ev3-basics-course-gyro-sensor-turn-at-an-angle-part-1\"\u003eEV3 basics course. Gyro Sensor. Turn at an angle (part 1)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ol\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Gyro Sensor,Sensors,Basic,Programming","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eIn the previous video we tried to build a program for turning the robot to 90 degrees but we couldn't, because the sensor was returning negative values. In this video we'll search for ways to overcome these negative values and to handle them.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe first very obvious solution would be just to turn in the opposite direction. Not to turn in this direction, but in the opposite direction, turn right. Let's program it and see if the program works. I'll change the motor form A to D This will be our left motor. So we'll be turning right, the robot will be turning right. Download and run the program.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe robot turns and it stops at about 90 degrees. I'll try to align it on the camera, so that we can see the angle.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt's not precisely 90 degrees but we'll also look for why this happens. Looking at the program and running it.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe motor turns, the whole robot turns, but at the end of the program the value detected by the sensor is not 90 degrees, it's 97 degrees. What happened here is that after we stop the motor, the robot continues for very small distance, but it's enough for the sensor to detect 97 so it stops at precisely 90 degrees but after we stop, the whole robot continues because of the inertia and because of the calibration of the sensor it returns not exactly 90 degrees, but slightly more than 90 degrees. What can we do? We can try to turn the robot back to return it a few degrees. So if it is 95, we'll return the robot, 5 degrees back. How can we do this? We can add a new block, it's again motor block. We'll turn it in reverse direction -10% of the power\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eand we'll be turning until the gyro sensor detects an angle of exactly 90 degrees and then we stop with motor D.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eHow does the program behave? Let's check at the software.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eRun.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAgain, at the end of the program you can see that the sensor returns a value of 96 so the program is not working as we would expect. I'm entering into these details because it's not intuitive but very logical and I've seen students that are looking at such programs and are wondering why this happens and why is it so non intuitive so I'll first show you the problem, this one that the sensor is not returning the correct value. Then we'll search for ways why. Let's see on the camera what happens with the robot. Running the same program.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe robot turns to more than 90 degrees but it does not return back.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eTurning but although we've add the blocks for turning motor D in reverse and we would expect something like this to happen and to align to 90 degrees the robot is not returning. This is something that we'll solve in the next video.\u003c/p\u003e"},"161":{"position":161,"title":"Ultrasonic Sensor. Simple follow a wall (part 1)","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis tutorial is about how to follow a wall with an ultrasonic sensor. The example is with a border from a FIRST LEGO League (FLL) competition, but could also easily be applied to other competitions and problems.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003ePrevious courses\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe LEGO Mindstorms EV3 Ultrasonic Sensor detects objects. You can learn more about the sensor in the \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/playlists/15\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;font-size: inherit;line-height: inherit;font-family: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\"\u003eEV3 basics course. Ultrasonic Sensor\u003c/a\u003e that will introduce you to programming and using it.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eThis video\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWe start with a simple experiment for following a border by keeping a distance of about 10 centimeters/4 inches from the wall. The sensor is placed on the side of the \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/search/robot+construction\"\u003eLEGO robot\u003c/a\u003e. As a result the robot moves in Zig-Zag while following the wall.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Ultrasonic Sensor,Programming","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eDuring a competition you can also use the LEGO Mindstorms EV3 ultrasonic or infrared sensor to position yourself on the field. You can use this sensor to detect the distance to different objects, for example you can use the sensor to detect the distance to the border right here, here's the border of the field. You can place the robot at exactly, let's say 4-5 inches off the border about 10 cm. Then you can turn for 90 degrees and you know where you are compared to this competition module. Then you can take the loop for this competition module or you can use the sensor, that's not very common, but you can use the sensor to try to detect the object itself, so you can turn until you see the object, you see something that's about 10-15 cm or 5-6 inches from your robot and then you know how to approach the loop and how to take it you can also use the ultrasonic sensor to follow the border and to move near the border and to follow it and this is the program that we'll build today.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAgain, I would like to implement a program that follows the border of a field. First, I'll have to make sure that the sensor is pointing to the border. I'll have to disassemble this and try to add this part here and then attach the sensor.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eI'll move this whole construction to the other side of the robot.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNow the sensor is facing the border and I can implement a program that will follow the border and we'll keep a distance of about, let's say 10 cm or about 4 inches and to move the robot in this direction following the border. Let's attach the sensor to port 4, the default port for ultrasonic sensor. Let's check out the program.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eFirst I'll start with a very simple program for following the border with the ultrasonic sensor.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe program is the following. I'll start motor, in my case, motor A\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eand I'll just move it forward. I'll move motor A forward until and now you can remember all the things that we discussed for the ultrasonic sensor in the previous videos in the EV3 basic course. We turn motor A until the ultrasonic sensor detects a distance of let's say 4 inches. We need distance of 4 inches or less than 4 inches.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThen stop with motor A.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eDownload and run. This here is the robot and I'll place it like this. We have some distance here between the border and the ultrasonic sensor when running the program the robot moves and it moves until the sensor detects a distance of about 4 inches. I can place the robot on another place.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt will be something like this. The next step is to move the robot with, so this is motor A - the right motor and this is motor D - the left motor, to move with the left motor until we detect a distance grater than 4 inches, about 10 cm and then stop, and then move again until we detect distance less than 4 inches, more than 4 inches, less than 4 inches, more than 4 inches or about 10 cm. This will make the robot follow the border. It's very simple it's called zig-zag following because it is following in a zig-zag movement. After we stop with motor A we'll start motor D.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eStart motor A until we see something equal to or less than 10 cm then start motor D that will move the robot away from the border until\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003ethe ultrasonic sensor detects a distance in inches that is greater than 4 inches.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThen stop with motor D,\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003ejust turn it off.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eYou saw this zig-zag movement.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNow if we repeat this movement in a loop we would actually follow the border on the field.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eI'll start the program again.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003elet's put them in a loop. I'll take a loop block and just add all the blocks inside the loop.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eJust all the blocks inside the loop.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis would be the program for following the border. It's very similar to the program for following lines. Very simple program for following lines with the color sensor, but this time it's an ultrasonic sensor. It's not very advanced program, it's not even smart, but it's very simple and it's working. It's a zig-zag program. Place the robot like this and run the program.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eYou can see that the robot is actually following the border.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt might not be very useful most of the time because we have this zig-zag movement. in the next videos we'll look for ways to improve this program, so that we remove this zig-zag movements.\u003c/p\u003e"},"177":{"position":177,"title":"Proportional Line Following with EV3 Mindstorms. Part 3","description":"\u003cp\u003eLast part of the series. The final touch of the program makes sure that it works and is following the line with the LEGO Mindstorms EV3 Color Sensor in a smooth and fast way. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eImportant: \u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIn the video the second math block is not correctly connected. Download the program from the Materials section to see the correct version.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe problem is that the output port from the sensor is connected to input \"b\" and should be connected to input \"a\". \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"Correction for the proportional follow algorithm\" src=\"http://media.fllcasts.com/assets/episodes/notes/177/correction.png\" style=\"height:544px;width:691px;\"\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003ePrevious episodes:\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cul\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\r\n\t\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/175-proportional-line-following-with-ev3-mindstorms-part-1\" style=\"color: rgb(46, 49, 171);margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;font-size: inherit;line-height: inherit;font-family: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\"\u003eProportional Line Following with EV3 Mindstorms. Part 1\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\r\n\t\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/176-proportional-line-following-with-ev3-mindstorms-part-2\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;font-size: inherit;line-height: inherit;font-family: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\"\u003eProportional Line Following with EV3 Mindstorms. Part 2\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ul\u003e\r\n","tags":"Advanced,EV3,Light and Color Sensor,FLL,Programming","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eThis is the result that we currently have for the proportional following of a line. This is the result we want to have, very smooth program.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eFinds the line very fast, follows it but this is the program that we currently have.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThere is a difference in the program, especially the beginning and in this video we'll remove this jiggling in the beginning.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe secret here would be to somehow modify the values for the right and left motor so that they are larger and smaller but with a certain percentage. This would make the robot find the line much faster without so much movement and if we add one more value, right here, we multiply the result of subtracting 40 from the value of the sensor. We multiply this by 0,4 and this is 40% of the difference. We move with 40% of the difference and we add the same thing to the other Math block - 0,4. Download and run.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe robot finds the line and starts following it.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eLet's return to the program for a minute. What you see here and the reason behind this 0,4 and multiplying by 0,4 is actually that we have the speed of the motor calculated from 2 things. The first is the constant speed that we would like the motor to have and then how fast we want the motor to rotate towards the line so how fast we want the robot to move to the line and we can experiment with these 2 values. We can experiment with the value 15 here and the value of 0,4. It is always a good practice when you have such constants to extract them in a new constant block, numeric and it will be 0,4.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWe want to take this constant and pass it to the block as the variable c.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThen we want to multiply it not by 0,4 but by c.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis won't change the behavior of our program. Let's download and run it.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAs you can see we've changed our program, the blocks but it behaves in the same way, which is great. There's one more thing we can improve in our program.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWe have extracted the value c and it's equal to 0,4 as a constant and\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003ewith this constant we calculate how fast we want to turn to the line and we also have the constant speed which is 15 and I add another constant with the value of 15 and I take it to the Math block and it would be the d parameter.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWe also change it in the other block.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis also won't change the behavior of our program but we can now customize these 2 parameters. What's the constant speed and how fast do we want to turn to the line. By modifying these to parameters you can customize this program for your particular robot. It depends of course what's the distance between the different sensors, what's the light in the room and how white is the line and what's the construction. By modifying these 2 constants we can modify our whole program. Let's just zoom out. This is the program for a proportional following that's very, very smooth.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eFind the instructions for building this robot and doing this proportional line following algorithm below the video you can download and use the whole program in your programs.\u003c/p\u003e"},"182":{"position":182,"title":"Collecting humans. Moving modules. WRO 2014 Elementary. Part 3 - Lifting","description":"\u003cp\u003eIn this last part of the tutorial we actually lift the rocket modules and prepare them for lauch. First we have to collect them in the right order and them somehow lift them.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"Picture of the grabber with the robot\" src=\"http://media.fllcasts.com/assets/episodes/notes/182/WRO_2014_grabber.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eBelow you could see the field of the World Robotics Olympiad (WRO) 2014 Elementary challenge. The blocks must be collected from the yellow regions.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"Elemntary field for the WRO 2014\" src=\"http://media.fllcasts.com/assets/episodes/notes/181/rocket.png\" style=\"height:367px;width:600px;\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eFor this robot we use a grabber developed by Dave Brauer. We just extend it and modify for this robot. Check out the materials section. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe grabber uses one motor to achieve two movements. On for moving the grabber and one for actually grabbing. This one motor, two movements is a very powerful. More video on the subject you could find by searching at fllcasts.com for \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes?utf8=%E2%9C%93\u0026amp;search=one+motor\"\u003eone motor, two movements\u003c/a\u003e.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003ePrevious video tutorials:\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/180-collection-humans-moving-modules-wro-2014-elementary-part-1\"\u003eCollecting humans. Moving modules. WRO 2014 Elementary. Part 1. Rocket Elements\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/181-collection-humans-moving-modules-wro-2014-elementary-part-2-humans\"\u003eCollecting humans. Moving modules. WRO 2014 Elementary. Part 2. Humans\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,WRO 2014,Grabber,WRO,Construction","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eWe placed the modules of the rocket, we launch them, we also collect the humans and we clear them from the area and now the subject of the video is how do we catch and move these modules, with our robot.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWe have the three modules and we have our robot, it has an attachment on the front, this attachment is powered by the medium motor. You can find more about this attachment below the video. You can find also the building instructions for this attachment and this attachment works in the following way. I start the motor, and I can move the attachment up and down and while moving it down, we also open the attachment.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNow as we move on the field, we can move to one of these modules, it doesn't need to be very precise, we move to one of these attachments and we can catch it with the motor. The next step is to lift the module, the rocket module.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWe catch and lift the module. We can stop right here and we can move, over the humans. Then we move, we collect the humans and then we can return the whole module and push it to the rocket launcher with the same attachment. If we now reverse the motor and we can return and place it back.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhat's interesting about this attachment is that you have 2 movements with one attachment. You move the attachment up and at the same moment you catch the rocket module. These are 2 movements with the same attachment.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eSo we have the basic building blocks for solving the World Robotics Olympiad 2014 elementary challenge. We know how to catch these modules, we know how to lift them, we know how to move them. We also know how to collect the humans and we know how to position them on the rocket launcher. The next step is just to position yourself on the field. Let's do a couple of runs there.\u003c/p\u003e"},"681":{"position":681,"title":"Safety considerations. Soldering or no soldering","description":"\u003cp\u003eWhen possible - no soldering. This is our rule of thumb.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eElectronics and soldering\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eTo quote Wikipedia:  \"Soldering is a process in which two or more items (usually metal) are joined together by melting and putting a \u003ca href=\"https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Filler_metal\" title=\"Filler metal\"\u003efiller metal\u003c/a\u003e (\u003ca href=\"https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Solder\" title=\"Solder\"\u003esolder\u003c/a\u003e) into the joint, the filler metal having a lower \u003ca href=\"https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Melting_point\" title=\"Melting point\"\u003emelting point\u003c/a\u003e than the adjoining metal\". The way you join electronic components together is with soldering.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eNo soldering needed in this course\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eGenerally, it is difficult to do electronics without soldering and we've spent a lot of time thinking how to created the course so that we could avoid soldering. The reason is that for soldering you would need an additional device and that it takes a lot of practice to do it correctly. We would show you in a video or two how to do soldering if you want to go deep and learn how. But for the whole course soldering is not needed.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eSafety considerations\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eFew things are needed especially if you decide to do some soldering. Be careful because of excessive heat and always wear some protective glasses when soldering.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Learn At Home,Diode,STEM,Classes with students","subtitles":null},"195":{"position":195,"title":"EV3 Robot with Motors in Opposite Directions. Proportional like following. Part 3","description":"\u003cp\u003eLet's implement a more advanced program for this robot to learn how to use with motors in opposite directions - and this is to implement the \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/playlists/20\"\u003eProportional Line Following algorithm\u003c/a\u003e.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eThe algorithm controls the motors based on the sensors. But in this robot the motors are placed in opposite directions. We show how to modify the Proportional Line Following program to make it work for this robot.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWe are also following not a black line, but a red line. Which is interesting because red should be a color close to white. This is how the color sensor should work. Or is it?\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eFind the complete short course at:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/playlists/30\"\u003eEV3 Robot with Motors in Opposite Directions. The Frankenstein.\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eA course on proportional smooth line following can be found at:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/playlists/20\"\u003eProportional Line Following with LEGO Mindstorms EV3\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Light and Color Sensor,Programming","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eIn this video we are using our very strange Frankenstein robot, that has the 2 motors in opposite directions. And we are going to implement the proportional line following algorithm so that we can customize it to work with this very strange robot.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eFirst I'll go to fllcasts.com site and I'll find the playlist for proportional line following. It's in the playlist section and it's right here. Proportional Line Following with LEGO Mindstorms EV3. Then in the third video, we have a complete final solution in the materials section. This here is the video. And we have the section for proportional smooth line following. When you download the program, you'll get something that looks like this. This is the program for proportional line following from this episode. And there are a few modifications that we must do in this program. First, we'll use the third sensor, so the sensor on port 3. In our case this is our right sensor.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhat I'm trying to do now is to show you how to modify this program, so that it works for your robots. Because we received a number of questions on how we can modify this program for your constructions and for the way you build your robots and this is what I would like to show you today. Using our very strange robot. So I change the port for the color sensor, then I change the motors, our left motor in our case is C and the right is B. These are the 2 motors. So left motor - C, right motor - B. And the sensor is on port 3. These are the first 2 modifications that you must do on your program. Then we must detect the value of the color sensor. When I'm over the table, I can see that we detect a value of 60, that's the value that currently the sensor detects and when I move over the red line, I move the robot over the red line, when I'm over the red line, the value is 38. So over the table - 60, over the red line - 40. The value between 40 and 60 is 50. Third modification to do is to change the threshold value to 50. This one here and this one here.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis should be all. Let's now download, run our program and see how it behaves. Starting the program . It moves, but it seems that the robot is not detecting the line. So something strange is happening here. What's strange is that we must take into account that the motors of this robot. are placed in opposite directions, so whenever we want to use the right motor - B, we must actually in order to turn left with this motor, we must turn the motor back, because of its position. If we turn the motor forward the robot will turn right. And if we move the motor backward the robot will turn left. and that's different for this robot compared to the other robots that we built in which the motors are in the same direction. I'll change this in the program, so that we have the opposite calculated value passed to the motor for turning right and left.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWe have our left motor - C, that's placed in the correct way, so whenever we move forward with this motor, the robot moves forward, but motor B is place in reversed. This means that we must reverse the value for this motor. I'll take a math block, I'll take the value that we calculate for motor right, and I'll subtract this from 0. What would the subtraction do? If the value for the right motor is let's say 10, then the result will be -10 and if the value for this motor is -10, then the result will be 10. This means that by subtracting this from 0 we actually reverse the value of motor right. I'll pass this, right here. I think we are ready to download and run.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe robot searches for the line, detects it and starts following it.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eI hope you understood how to modify the proportional line following program for your robot. And how to use this program, even for very strange robots, where the motors are place in different directions. Find the instructions below for building this robot along with the program. If you find it difficult to follow the instructions in the video just download the programs, they're below in the materials section and directly use them. If they are not working just drop us a comment and we'll get back to you and try to see why they're not working.\u003c/p\u003e"},"819":{"position":819,"title":"How to connect Raspberry Pi Controller VCC and GND to the motor driver","description":"\u003cp\u003eAppart from the Inputs there is also one more connection that we must do to have the motor driver properly connected to the controller.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eTL. DR.\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eConnect Raspberry Pi 5V output to driver 5V. Connect the controller ground to motor driver ground \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor Drive VCC and GND\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe Motor Driver has 7 PCB Terminal Connectors - those blue things. 4 of them are for the motors. One is for 5V voltage (coming from the controller), one is for 12V voltage (coming from the batteries) and 1 is for GND. We would use those for the motors in the next section. In this tutorial, we must connect the motor driver VCC and GND. The basic reason is that without this connection we won't have a proper connecting between the motor driver and the controller and the whole system won't work.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e How to connect them?\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eTake a look at the picture below. We have the three PCB Terminal Connectors in blue. From left two right these are 12V, GND, 5V. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e12V is connected to the batteries. Red cable to the left.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eGND is connected to the batteries and to the controller.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e5V should be connected to the controller. Red cable to the right.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/234/content/driver_connected_to_gnd_and_vcc.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Learn At Home,Raspberry PI,Motor Driver,Basic,Classes with students","subtitles":null},"180":{"position":180,"title":"Collecting humans. Moving modules. WRO 2014 Elementary. Part 1. Rocket Elements","description":"\u003cp\u003e(LEGO humans of course, not real humans :) ). Working on World Robotics Olympiad 2014 elementary challenge. Collecting modules, bringing them together and lifting them. A very funny and interesting competition that we would explore in this and the next video tutorials from the series\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eWorld Robotics Olympiad (WRO) is divided on different levels. Here we are exploring the elementary level for the younger students. The goal of the competition is to construct a rocket and to fire this rocket into space. We love it. It is so interesting. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"Elemntary field for the WRO 2014\" src=\"http://media.fllcasts.com/assets/episodes/notes/181/rocket.png\" style=\"height:367px;width:600px;\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,WRO 2014,WRO,Construction,Programming","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eIn these series of video tutorials we would introduce you to the World Robotics Olympiad (WRO) 2014 competition. In this competition we had these mission models, along with the 3 LEGO humans we'll accomplish the tasks with them and we'll do an explanation of our robot that we have here. My plan for the series is to first start with a small introduction of the competition and a very simple run and then continue with explanation for different missions.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAfter this simple example run let's return to the rules of the competition. The rules of the competition state that the general idea is that we are launching a rocket and these are the 3 modules of the rocket and we must assemble them like this, so that we can fire the rocket and we should also clear the area from the humans and we should gather the humans and do something with them so that we can clear them. These here are the modules of the rocket there position on the field you can see below the video the map of the field and you also have in the beginning of this video a small simple run so you have a basic idea where these elements are. The robot moves, collects them and it brings them to the following mission model. Now in this mission model we have a part that is already placed on the field. These are the two grey beams right here and we have this construction already on the field and we build the rest around it, so we have the rubber bands, this frame here, this lever here and as we have these as initial conditions we have our module like this, the goal of this model is to lift the 3 modules of the rocket and to fire them, it's not actually firing but at least they look like a rocket. How do you do this? Initially the model is positioned like this, we move with the robot and as we move with the robot we lower the lever, then we move with the robot and we place the largest module, like this, then we place the medium and we push, then we place the smallest and we push. Now as we push this whole element is fixed on the field, as we push, what will happen is that the rubber bands will be released and we'll lift the rocket and we'll lift the rocket and we have the rocket in this position.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eHow does this model work? It has a rubber bands, 7 rubber bands here, so that we have enough power to lift the 3 modules and we also have a lever right here,\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003ethe white lever and when we release the lever, we push on this lever and we lift them. So that's for this model, you can find the instructions below the video.\u003c/p\u003e"},"181":{"position":181,"title":"Collecting humans. Moving modules. WRO 2014 Elementary. Part 2. Humans","description":"\u003cp\u003eCollect the humans and clear them from the rocket launching region. This is rather straightforward as a task, but it requires a little bit of thinking if you want to do it without manipulators.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eBelow you could see the field of the World Robotics Olympiad (WRO) 2014 Elementary challenge. The humans must be moved from the field to the red region.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"Elemntary field for the WRO 2014\" src=\"http://media.fllcasts.com/assets/episodes/notes/181/rocket.png\" style=\"height:367px;width:600px;\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eFor this robotics competition we use a robot that has a container inside of it and can collect the humans inside. This is an interesting robotics design that could be used for smaller objects. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003ePrevious videos:\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cul\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\r\n\t\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/180-collection-humans-moving-modules-wro-2014-elementary-part-1\"\u003eCollecting humans. Moving modules. WRO 2014 Elementary. Part 1. Rocket Elements\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ul\u003e\r\n","tags":"WRO 2014,EV3,WRO,Construction,Programming","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003ePreviously we did a small example on how can we collect the rocket elements from World Robotics Olympiad (WRO) 2014 competition and we collected the elements, we positioned them like this and we lifted and we were ready for firing the rocket. Before firing the rocket we must clear the whole field, all the humans.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis is the subject of today's video.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eHow to clear the humans, we have 3 humans positioned in places on the field and you can find a map of the field below the video and, of course, in the previous video we had a sample run. Now how do we collect the humans. This here is our robot. For this robot we use the medium motor to control an attachment that will collect the elements for the rocket. So we want to use a motor for collecting the humans. What we came up with is to use the belly of the robot, we'll build a robot with a belly, an empty belly and with this belly we'll add an element that's kind of a carabiner, so it's letting things get in but it's not letting things get out. As we move over the humans, like this, we move over this human, we take it and then we have the human in the belly of the robot and we can move. Then we can collect the other human, like this, and again move and as you can see they are right here in the belly, but because these axles don't let the humans escape it's quite interesting solution. Again we move, we collect, like this and then we move over the 3rd human and we have all the humans in the belly of the robot and we can continue and return them back to base to the safety zone. That's how we collect the humans. Very simple. Find the instructions for this robot below the video.\u003c/p\u003e"},"247":{"position":247,"title":"Simulation on paper. Robotics Game of Life. ","description":"\u003cp\u003eLet's look at what game of life actually is, what are the rules and how to play the game on paper\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eInitially the mathematicians had to solve the next generation by hand using paper, boards and other \"non-computer things\". I would be a good practice to walk over their experience and see how difficult this could be and what are interesting things about the game. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eEach generation could live to the next or could die in the next. It is also possible for a generation to enter into a stable state where the current generation is the same as a previous. This means that the generation will start repeating themselves.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eUse the tasks and try to guess what is the next generation and will this seed enter in a loop or die and after how many generations\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Array,Programming","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eBefore we start with programming the game let's try to solve the game on paper and for this we have prepared some interesting papers that you can find below the videos and with them you can experiment and try to solve different generations.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eFor example, if we have a grid and on it we have 16 different cells\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eand for them we have the following seed. We have this cell, that's alive, this cell that's alive and this cell. Now let's try to figure out the next generation of the game and for the next generation we know the rules, the rule says that if we have 2 or 3 neighbors the cell stays alive, if we have 1 neighbor - it dies, or if we have 4 or above - it dies. And for this first generation, we have 1 cell, second cell, third cell and only the second one has 2 neighbors, this means that it stays alive for the next generation. We also have this cell that's currently not alive, but it has 3 neighbors, so it stays alive, it's reborn\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eand we also have this cell that has 3 neighbors and this means by the rules of the game that also is reborn\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eand this cell has only one cell that's alive, it's neighbor and this applies also for this cell here. And that's the second generation. Now if we try to see the third generation. Let's try to draw it.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd again this cell will stay alive, this will be reborn, because it has 3 neighbors and this cell here will also be reborn.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd we've arrived at the previous generation. this means that currently this whole seed with the generation, is in a stable state and it will loop.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd this means that this seed will never die and it will stay alive. So we have prepared the number of different tasks. Find them below the video and different materials, try to solve the different generations by hand and try to answer the questions\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eif the whole generation will stay alive or it will die. And after how many generations it will stay alive or it will die.\u003c/p\u003e"},"791":{"position":791,"title":"A robot a 'day'. The simplest solution that works. Turning with motors","description":"\u003cp\u003eHere is a good problem- turning with the motors that we've built in the previous sections of the course. You noticed that turning with the robots is quite difficult because they lose balance and they fall. So we must learn the basic thing about engineering - the simplest solution is probably good enough.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eHow does a motorcycle turn?\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIt turns not with the handlebar, but by tilting it to the left and to the right. As a motorcyclist you do it with your weight. But our motorcycle robots don't have a motorcyclist . We are also limited to the type of parts that we could use to build it. We could only use parts of the LEGO Mindstorms sets. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eHelper wheels to the help\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe simplest solution is most of the time good enough. It might not be the best solution, it might not be the most beautiful solution, it might not be perfect, but it is simple and it works. And this applies to engineering a lot. Many times it is not worth the trouble of spending a lot of resources on developing more than the simplest solution. It is a matter of balance. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWe've just placed some helper wheels on the robot and now it could very easily turn. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Learn At Home,EV3,Motorcycle,Gears,Vehicle,Basic,Construction","subtitles":null},"189":{"position":189,"title":"Multi-axles, many-directional LEGO Mindstorms mechanism. Worm Gears. Part 2","description":"\u003cp\u003eWe are describing the Warm gear in this video. This worm gear does most of the magic of controlling how the different gear wheels move on the different axles. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eA worm gear along with a fixed gears can move a construction. This is an important concept that you should learn how to use. Such movement allows different \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/categories/construction\"\u003erobot constructions\u003c/a\u003e to lift or move heavy objects with a little input power from the LEGO Mindstorms EV3 motors. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThis video is part of the course at:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/playlists/28\"\u003eMulti-axles, many-directional LEGO Mindstorms mechanism for transferring power (almost a gear box).\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Gears,Worm gears,Construction","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003ePreviously we started with this mechanism that was rotating a different axle depending on how we control the motors and it worked like this. We had an axle rotating, this one here, and now we can move\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eand start rotating the other axles. We stopped at the way we control the movement of the different gears and this is the subject of this video.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe magic is actually in this worm gear on the inside. You can see these are 1, 2, 3 worm gear parts and there is a small 8th gear inside. And it's the same gear wheel as this one here, so it's a small gear wheel. What is interesting for this mechanism, and many teams and team members and students, initially find it difficult to work with such mechanism, is that the gear wheel is not rotating. The worm gear is but the gear wheel is not rotatitng, because it is connected to an axle and the way this whole mechanism works is the following. I'll start the program and if I now try to move the worm gears you can see that the whole mechanism on the inside moves.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe worm gears work with the gear wheel and they move the gear wheel and the gear wheel is connected to an axle and the axle is connected to the whole mechanism on the inside so we actually can move the whole mechanism on the inside. And these are the 2 interesting things about this mecahnism. First, we can control different axles and the way we control them is that we choose the inside gear wheel to work with one of the other gear wheels and how do we do this, we move this inside gear wheel.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWe move and now we work with the other. Let's move the whole inside mechanism to the end and we are working with the final gear wheel. As a recap, we can control the position of the inside gear wheel by moving, rotating the worm gears and thus moving the whole mechanism and from there we control which gear wheel is working and which axle is rotating. We can have 1, 2, 3, 4 different axles controlled and we can control them forward and backward. This means that with 2 motors we have 8 different movements, which is great for this mechanism. A few more interesting things will be shown in the third part of these video series.\u003c/p\u003e"},"248":{"position":248,"title":"Simulation online. Robotics Game of Life. ","description":"\u003cp\u003eThere are a number of tools available online to help you play the game. You just seed the initial conditions and leave the game. Let's look at some of the sites.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eWhile simulating online we can experiment with more complex seeds and see what happens to them. We use the online simulator available at:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.bitstorm.org/gameoflife/\"\u003ehttp://www.bitstorm.org/gameoflife/\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eInitially we will seed with the same conditition as show on the paper and see what happens. Than we would do a completely random seed and see what happens there.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWhat is interesting is can we predict if the generation would live of die and how many generations it would take to die.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Programming","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eWhat happens if we have a more complex grid with more cells that are alive. It will be more difficult for us to somehow calculate what is the next generation. And this applies for 10 different cells, what if you have a hundred. That's why it's a good idea to have a program and to somehow solve this problem with a computer. And there are number of different tools available online that you can use to solve this game and to see if this generation will live and for how long or will die and after how many generations it will die. Let's look at some of these tools.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNow what we see is the online tool that's written in Java I think and it's an online simulator that you can use to see the next generation. And you can find a link below in the description for this site. I've now configured the same generation as just before on the paper and I could now see what will be the next generation. I'll again click next and next and so on. In this way we can simulate this generation and we can see that at the end our generation dies at the 12 generation, so we've played the game for 12 generations and we've died. We can also experiment with other different forms. For example, here is glider and we can simulate this glider and we can see that it repeats itself.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eOr we can even do some more random interesting seeds\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eand see what happens.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNow if you don't have a computer this will be pretty difficult for anybody to find the generations and to see which generation is next, why, how it evolves and you can see that now it has become stable and it's a very interesting, you saw how with a simple very random seed and by following a few very simple rules we've arrived at something that's stable and it follows a very interesting pattern. Check again the links below the video for simulating different initial seeds for the game.\u003c/p\u003e"},"269":{"position":269,"title":"Display four rows with four boxes on the screen. Robotics Game Of Life","description":"\u003cp\u003eDisplay a matrix on the brick screen. Simple and easy. Download and run the program to see how\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eThe program from the materials section contains all the needed login to display rows and columns of squares on the LEGO Mindstorms EV3 brick and screen.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eYou can also modify the size of each of the squares. There is a variable called size that you can change and in this way change the size of the squares. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Array,Construction,Programming","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eWe would first start with a very simple program to just display a grid, a matrix on the brick screen. 4x4\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis here is the program. Just download it and run it. It's located below the video. And when you run it you'll get a new matrix, a new grid that's 4 rows by 4 cells. And you can change this in the program. It's a simple program and it just has a few blocks and in these blocks as in the previous programs you can see you have a rows variable and a columns variable. So, let's modify them to see what happens if I modify this to be 7 and I modify this to be 5 I'll have a matrix that's 7 rows by 5 columns. Download and run. I've downloaded. Run. And you can now see that we have a grid, a matrix that's 5 columns - 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and it has 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 but it must have 7 rows. And probably you can see it here. That the rows continue but there is not enough space on the brick screen. And we've thought about this and you can modify the size of each of the squares. Return back to the program. What we have in the program is a variable and this variable is called size. And this is actually the size of the side of the square. And it's 25 pixels and we won't get into details about this. Let's first change it to 10. And we'll have the size of the square 10x10 7 rows, 5 columns. Run.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd as you can see now we have our grid, our matrix. It has 7 rows. It has 5 columns. And each cell is 10x10 as a size. What you should do now is check out the tasks for this video. Experiment with them. The magic happens in the program in a block called display and it's DisplayField. So, you can also take a look at that. And we'll now enter into more details about the block and how it works. But whenever you need to display a grid or a matrix on the screen you can use this program and experiment with it and display the grid.\u003c/p\u003e"},"651":{"position":651,"title":"Front or Rear wheel drive for more precise LEGO Mindstorms robot movement?","description":"\u003cp\u003eShould the robot be with a Front Wheel Drive or a Rear Wheel Drive to make it more precise? The answer is - front wheel will probably give you better results, but the wheel drive is not the most important thing. In this video tutorial on the LEGO Mindstorms Robots, we will do a few experiments to discuss the influence of the wheel drive on the precision of the movement.  \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eA very popular construction on our platform is the Rear wheel drive construction from the FLL Robot Chassis section from the FIRST LEGO League course. So if you need an example for a construction with a Rear Wheel Drive, just check it out.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eMove forward\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eGiven our Box Robot when it moves forward it actually has a Front Wheel Drive. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eMove backwards\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWhen our robot moves backwards it actually has a Rear Wheel Drive \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eFront and Rear wheel drive or 4x4\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIt is possible to build a robot with front and rear wheel drive or to build a robot with 4x4, or two have a differential on the axles. But you have to decide whether it is worth it depending on the requirements for size and complexity that you have. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Physics,FLL,Construction","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eOur next step in the process of finding the answer how to make the LEGO robots move straight ahead is to discuss front-wheel drive and rear-wheel drive. Should the robot be with a front-wheel drive or with a rear-wheel drive to make it more precise, more stable, more predictable. The answer is that a front-wheel drive will probably give you better results but the wheel drive is not the most important thing. In this video tutorial on the LEGO Mindstorms robots we'll do a few experiments to discuss the influence of the wheel drive on the precision of the movement. Here we have the Box Robot and the Five Minute Robot. And the Box Robot is generally with a rear-wheel drive. This means that the wheels are at the back of the robot. And the wheels push the robot forward. How do you build a front-wheel drive? You actually just turn the robot. And now if you decide that this is your front of the robot and when you are moving forward, you should move in this direction then this becomes a front-wheel drive because now the wheels are at the front of the robot and they pull on the robot while they are moving. So, this is a front-wheel drive and this is a rear-wheel drive. And the same applies for the Five Minute Bot. If we think that this is our front, then we have a front-wheel drive but if we just turn the robot and if we now think that this is the front of our robot, then we have a robot with a rear-wheel drive. So, there is nothing special about constructing rear or front. You just have to decide on the direction in which you would like say that your robot will move forward. What we'll do as an experiment in this video is to take the Five Minute Bot and to move with the Five Minute Bot when we have the wheels at the back so as a rear-wheel drive. And it will move in this direction and we'll see the deviation of the straight line. And then we'll take the Box Robot and this Box Robot generally has a rear-wheel drive so we'll just turn it like this and it will move in this direction and again we'll see the deviation from the straight line.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAs you could see the robots still make errors. And they still deviate from the straight line even though that we change from front to rear and from rear to front-wheel drive. They still make errors. So, probably it is important for your robot but generally if you have a robot that's well balanced, whether you have a front-wheel drive or a rear-wheel drive should not matter.\u003c/p\u003e"},"107":{"position":107,"title":"Rubber band attachment with a flywheel - solving FLL 2014 Search Engine (part 4). Two tasks at once","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe attachment is now so advanced that we can do two tasks at once with it in order to solve the FIRST LEGO League 2014 World Class Search Engine Mission.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Flywheel, build from LEGO Mindstorms EV3 parts, accumulates the energy and uses this energy to complete the mission. Accumulation is done with the Rubber Band, Very tricky and nice principle for completing different missions.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eFind the previous videos from the series at:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003col\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\r\n\t\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/104-rubber-band-attachment-with-a-flywheel-solving-fll-2014-search-engine-part-1?playlist=12\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\" title=\"Rubber band attachment with a flywheel - solving FLL 2014 Search Engine (part 1)\"\u003eRubber band attachment with a flywheel - solving FLL 2014 Search Engine (part 1)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\r\n\t\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/105-rubber-band-attachment-with-a-flywheel-solving-fll-2014-search-engine-part-2?playlist=12\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\" title=\"Rubber band attachment with a flywheel - solving FLL 2014 Search Engine (part 2)\"\u003eRubber band attachment with a flywheel - solving FLL 2014 Search Engine (part 2)\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\r\n\t\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/episodes/106-rubber-band-attachment-with-a-flywheel-solving-fll-2014-search-engine-part-3-two-tasks-at-once?playlist=12\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-family: inherit;font-size: inherit;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;line-height: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\" title=\"Rubber band attachment with a flywheel - solving FLL 2014 Search Engine (part 3). Two tasks at once \"\u003eRubber band attachment with a flywheel - solving FLL 2014 Search Engine (part 3). Two tasks at once\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\t\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ol\u003e\r\n","tags":"Rubber band,EV3,Attachments,FLL 2014,FLL,Flywheel,Construction","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003e- For this video, we built an attachment that was solving the First LEGO League 2014, so changing and we built a small model for taking the loops. Today, I would like to extend these attachments so that we can take over the other loops. For now, we are taking only the yellow loop like this. The solution is pretty straightforward but it has some tricks. Let's say that for example, you have initially blue selected and you must take the blue pin. Then we must somehow extend our model here with axles so that we can take the blue loop. How do we do this? We have another model of axles and we do the same with it. Again, we load our rubber band attachment, then we program the road. It moves from the field, the border is right here. We reach the mission model, when we reach the mission model, we position the attachment so that we can push here on this lever. We trigger the attachment, it works, and then we return back to base with the blue loop. And we have the mission solved. Again, the robot is right here over the attachment. It's a pinless attachment. Let's do this again, we reach the mission model, we trigger the attachment right here. It's starts rotating and then we return back to base with the blue loop. In the same way, we can extend the whole model with the axles here so that we can reach the final loop, the red loop. And we also kept these parts, let me just extend...so let's say that initially, the color circuit was red. We have the attachment folded, then we program the robot, it moves on the field, it reaches the attachment, the mission model. We position the attachment in a way that we can push here, this lever. And when we trigger the attachment, it starts rotating and we then return back to base with the red loop because we've already taken it. And this is how we can solve the whole challenge with only...with actually one attachment. It's an attachment that has two rubber bands, it has a fly wheel, it has a gear mechanism, it has a model with axle for actually taking though. It's a very interesting challenge. I welcome any comments on this. Try to build it. You can find the instructions for building this attachment below the video and try to implement it also for other missions.\u003c/p\u003e"},"933":{"position":933,"title":"Data types in EV3 programming language","description":"\u003cp\u003eWorking with data is one important step if you want to take your robot programming to the next level. In EV3 programming language there are 3 data types - numeric, text, logic. In the following tutorial we will cover some basic facts about them.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow is data represented in computers?\u003c/strong\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eAs you may have heard everything in modern computers is represented with 1s and 0s. To be more precise those 0s and 1s are combined in groups by 8 called bytes. Those bytes can represent numbers between 0 and 255. So if we want to represent numbers in computers its easy, we just write them in binary. Here comes the part where the type of the data is important. Lets say we have a byte that is 01000011. If that byte represents a number it will be 67, but if that byte represents a text it will be the character C. So as you can see it is quite important for the computer to know if that byte is a number or character.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow data is handled within the EV3 Software?\u003c/strong\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eAs you may have noticed every block may have several input and output parameters. Each parameter should be either number, text or logic. Data is passed betweet the blocks through \u003cstrong\u003edata wires\u003c/strong\u003e. Those wires can be pulled from output parameters and insterted in input parameters as shown:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe wires may be in three different colors. If the data wire is yellow, then it \"caries\" numeric data type. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/439/content/branded_numeric_data_wire.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIf the data wire is orange it \"caries\" text\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/440/content/branded_text_data_wire.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eand if it is green it \"caries\" logic.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/441/content/branded_logic_data_wire.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIt is important not to mismatch data types, that is why it is useful to know which color represents which data type.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"","subtitles":null},"238":{"position":238,"title":"Fifth state - Determining The Rotation Angle","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"EV3,WRO 2015,State machine,WRO,Programming","subtitles":null},"302":{"position":302,"title":"Box Robot Two. Transferring power from the motors.","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe robot uses one middle motor. This middle motor with the use of a few gear systems controls for different axsels. We have attached wheels on this axles so it is very easy to extend the robot construction for additional LEGO Mindstorms active attachments\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eWe have provided the building instructions for this robot as part of the whole course \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/courses/6\"\u003eBox Robot Two. Fewer parts and one motor. Simplifying a robot.\u003c/a\u003e (this will require a course subscription)\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n","tags":"Construction,EV3,FLL","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eIn this video let's discuss how do we actually add attachments to this robot. And how do we transform power from the motors to these attachments.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIn some of the next videos we'll of course build specific examples for attachments but let's start from something very simple. We have one medium motor and with this one medium motor we rotate different wheels. What we are doing is we rotate this wheel here. We also rotate two wheels that are positioned right here. How do we do this? Now if you take a closer look here or on the building instructions of this robot you can see that there is a system of gears involved. And this system of gears to the following things. If you need to lift something heavy so you need more torque and more power you must add the attachment to this wheel here. And you have this black wheel and you also have a gray wheel. So, you can choose where to add the attachment and how to transform power from the attachment. If you need some lever to be activated very quickly and some lever that does not require any heavy lifting or much power and torque and it will require more speed you can just add the attachments right here. And in this way with the same motor you have different speeds of the attachments. Also if you need to rotate one attachment forward and another backward this happens with these two wheels here. They rotate forward and backward. And you also have one more wheel right here that is directly connected to the motor so it actually does not\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003etransfer the power through a system of gears but is actually connected to the motor. So, we have one that is connected to the motor through a gear system and that has probably the same speed as the motor. Two that have faster speed and one again that is connected to the same axle of the motor. So, we have a number of options of where would you like to add an attachment. You can have an overall of four attachments that you can control in the same time. And that makes the robot very interesting. What you should do is try to implement different frames for pinless attachments that you can add just about the robot and from there transfer the power from the motor to the attachment.\u003c/p\u003e"},"306":{"position":306,"title":"Arudino Basic Course. What parts do you need","description":"\u003cp\u003eIt is a hardware/software related course. You need a set with parts. And you need a number of sets for a class of students. You can buy the set from us, from other vendors, from online retailers. It doesn`t matter actually as long as you have the needed parts for the course. We have tried to create a very lean set, but if you can afford to buy additional parts you could create more complex and probably more interesting devices. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eThis are the parts that need to be bought:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eMain set:\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eArduino Uno controller, USB cable, Breadboard 840 pin holes, Jumnpers - 140pcs, Resistors - 220‎Ω - 10pcs, Resistors - 10k‎Ω - 10pcs, LEDs - Red - 2pcs, LEDs - Wellow - 2pcs, LEDs - Green - 2pcs, Buttons 6х6 - 3pcs\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eExpansion Set:\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eBuzzer, Speaker, Potentiometer - 3pcs, Photo resistor - LDR, RGB sensor - TCS34725, Infrared sensor - GP2Y0A21YK (10 - 80 см), Ultrasonic sensor - Maxbotix LV-EZ2, Relay, Motor, Motor driver\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Arduino","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eIn this course you\u0026#39;ll need a set with which you can work. We\u0026#39;ve created a very lean set that includes just the minimum number of parts. Just enough to get you started. As everything hardware related, of course the more parts you have the more different and probably even larger projects you would be able to make with this set. You can buy the set from us. We\u0026#39;ve listed it below the video. You can buy it from other places. It doesn\u0026#39;t matter. These are all standard components. Below the video we\u0026#39;ll include a list of the components that we use in this course and you can decide if you have previously bought different sets whether you have the parts or you can just order them from different stores. Again, all the links are below the video.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n"},"855":{"position":855,"title":"How to import/update groups and users with a CSV document in your subscription","description":"\u003cp\u003eHere is how you could import and update groups and users in your subscription using a simple CSV document. You can create many groups at once, or add users to a subscription, or add users to groups and everything needed for managing your subscription.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eStructure of the CSV document\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe CSV document must have the following headers:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch4\u003eRequired\u003c/h4\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cul\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eemail\u003c/strong\u003e - the email of the user that you are importing/referring\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003egroup\u003c/strong\u003e - the name of the group. The use will be added to this group if not already in it.\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003erole\u003c/strong\u003e - the role of the user in the group. Valid values are '\u003cstrong\u003estudent\u003c/strong\u003e' and '\u003cstrong\u003einstructor\u003c/strong\u003e'\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ul\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch4\u003eOptional\u003c/h4\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cul\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003erole_in_subscription\u003c/strong\u003e - the role of the user in the subscription. Valid values are '\u003cstrong\u003eowner\u003c/strong\u003e', '\u003cstrong\u003eteacher\u003c/strong\u003e', '\u003cstrong\u003euser\u003c/strong\u003e'\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eusername\u003c/strong\u003e - a username that the user could use for login instead of email\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003efirstname\u003c/strong\u003e - firstname of the student\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003elastname\u003c/strong\u003e - lastname of the student\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003epassword\u003c/strong\u003e - the password of the user\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ephone1\u003c/strong\u003e - phone of the student parent\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eparentname\u003c/strong\u003e - the name of the parent\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eparentemail\u003c/strong\u003e - the email of the parent\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ul\u003e\r\n","tags":"Classes with students","subtitles":null},"286":{"position":286,"title":"Box Robot for Robotics Competitions. Requirements for additional parts","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis video discusses the fact the robot requires a few more parts that are available in the LEGO Mindstorms EV3 robotics sets. We have a number of other constructions that require less parts, but for this particular robot construction we have decided to go beyond the standard sets, cheaply buy a few more parts and build a whole box robot with them. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eBuying LEGO parts\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWhat you could do is search the Internet for \"lego parts sale\". We are not in any way connected with any of the sites, but we have used mainly BrickLink in the past for the times when we needed some additional parts.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eWhere do we have the additional parts from\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eMost of the part we have are collected over the years and we have hundreds of thousands of lego parts. It now occurs to me that for some of the competitions of FIRST LEGO League we have 15-20 fields and this is where most of the parts come from. We, however, do not like to use them because we understand our unique position of having so many parts. These robots make a little exception.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWe have provided the building instructions for this robot as part of the whole course \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/courses/5\"\u003eBox Robots for competition\u003c/a\u003e (this will require a course subscription)\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe additional parts that you need:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3 id=\"page-title\"\u003eLEGO Technic Flat Panel 5 x 11 (64782) - about 15 of them\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/013/content/lego_technic_flat_panel_5_x_11_64782.jpg\" style=\"width: 640px;height: 360px;\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"FLL,WRO,Construction","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eIn this video I would like to discuss the fact that this robot requires a few more parts.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eI would personally prefer a robot that is built from a single set, from a single combination of a core set with the resource set. And we do have such robots at fllcasts.com. And you can search for the EV3 Competition robot or the NXT Competition robot and for different instructions. I can even give you a few links below in the video. But for this robot it is kind of impossible to built such a robot from a single set - a combination of a core set and a resouce set. Because it requires many parts. Parts that look like this. These frames here. Also the frames that look like this. So, the whole robot requires many parts. Even if you start to build different attachments you'll need more and more parts. So, what you should do is first, you can always try to use a robot that is build from a single set but it's also a good idea to spend some time on the Internet and to purchase such parts from different sites. They are not very expensive. And they are worth it because you'll use these parts for this year and for the next year and for the years to come. So, you should always have a few more additional spare parts and you can also buy more parts that you don't have in the different sets. Because there are no sets that include parts like the balck ones here and you should buy them from different set. But there are market places on the Internet and I can give you a few links below so that you can go there and for a couple of dollars just buy a few parts. And it will be worth it.\u003c/p\u003e"},"1013":{"position":1013,"title":"Programming and theory","description":"\u003cp\u003eNow it’s time to program the robot so that it starts to function. We will use the touch sensor to start the crane and if you cope with all tasks, you will have the chance to add an ultrasonic sensor in order to unload at the right moment.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"","tags":"Classes with students","subtitles":null},"722":{"position":722,"title":"Connect a diode to the Raspberry PI","description":"\u003cp\u003eAfter we've turned on the diode by connecting it to the batteries it is time to do the same thing, but with a diode connected to the Raspberry Pi. So it will be the Raspberry Pi that is controlling when and how is the diode turned on. Because of the Disk Image that we've burned on the SD card we would have the diode blinking when the operating system is turned on.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eTL. DR.\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eConnect a resistor to the diode. Connect system to pin 12 and pin 14. After turning on, wait for 10-15 seconds and the diode will blink.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eUse of a resistor\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWe would have to introduce you to the electronic element - resistor. It's not the hero we want. It's the hero we need. When we connect the diode to the controller the current that would flow through the diode will burn it. We must put something that would reduce the amount of current that is allowed to flow in the system. The special element that does exactly this is a resistor. There is a lot we should mention about voltages here, but let's just leave it like this. If you want to learn more try to search on the internet for an answer to the following question: \"is it the amount of current or voltage that burns the diode\". \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIn the picture below the resistor is connected with cables to the diode\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/126/content/resistor_connected_to_the_cables_and_the_diode.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eConnect to the Raspberry PI\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eOn the picture, the white cable is attached to the longer pin of the diode. The black and white cable is attached to the shorter pin. The white cable is attached to a resistor which is then attached to a blue cable. Connect the cables in the following way to the Raspberry Pi. Blue cable to pin 12. Black and white cable to pin 14. Because you don't know the number of the pins yet, just look at the picture.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/127/content/raspberry_diode_turn_on.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eNow when you start the Raspberry Pi after a few second the diode should blink. This is an indication that the system has started and that the Raspberry PI has loaded the operating system Ubuntu Mate and is now ready to accept other instructions and execute programs.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/128/content/diode_connected_to_raspberry_pi.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Learn At Home,Raspberry PI,STEM,Diode,Classes with students,Fun","subtitles":null},"923":{"position":923,"title":"Introduction","description":"","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eToday we will program a robot whose task will be to automatically clear a landing field.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe robot is carried to the Moon by a rocket and its task is to clear a landing field for a bigger rocket which will carry the colonizers and their machines.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThere are obstacles which the robot won’t be able to move so it will have to go round them which will be the second task for today.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"","subtitles":null},"192":{"position":192,"title":"WRO Elementary 2015. Field Run. Part 2","description":"\u003cp\u003eShowing the same run, but from a different angle. This allows you to see more of the way we sensors work and how exactly the robot positions itself.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eWhat is very interesting is that this robot does make mistakes, but finds it way back and accomplishes the tasks. The \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/categories/gyro\"\u003eGyro\u003c/a\u003e sensor detects the turn and the robot reacts on how much it has turned. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eA whole playlist for WRO 2015 Elementary is available at:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/playlists/26\"\u003eWorld Robotics Olympiad 2015 Elementary\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"http://fllcasts.s3.amazonaws.com/episodes/pictures/000/000/195/p360/DSC03850-2.JPG?1447666725\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eHere is how the robot looks at the end:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"FLLCasts Robot containing and releasing ball for WRO 2015\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"http://media.fllcasts.com/assets/episodes/notes/191/191_attachment2.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,WRO,Gyro Sensor,Sensors,Programming","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eIn this video I would like to show you different angle of the World Robotics Olympiad (WRO) 2015 solutions.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNow this will be the same program as previously only it is from a different angle.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe robot's facing north, towards us,\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003ethen we align, if we make a mistake, we can compensate for this mistake as you saw and we move back to the red region. We must release 6 balls.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eOne more run for the yellow region.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt is basically the same program. Move, dive, detect the color of the first pearl, then dive again for the second pearl.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eMake a mistake, now we compensate for the mistake,\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003ereturn to the yellow region, rotate the robot and release a number of balls.\u003c/p\u003e"},"183":{"position":183,"title":"Robot Design Ideas for Chassis with Mindstorms EV3. Base 1 ","description":"\u003cp\u003eFive different robot chassis. This is the goal of the series. To present ideas for different design of the robots and especially the robot bases. If the base is stable and balanced, then in could easily be extended. Let's start with the most simple of the five. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eSome of the designs would include robots with four motors. All of the designs include sensors and preferably two of them.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eFind the full course at:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/playlists/29\"\u003eRobot Design Ideas for Chassis with Mindstorms EV3\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n","tags":"Nxt,EV3,FLL,Construction","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eBuilding the base of your robot is sometimes the hardest thing. That's why in this series of video tutorials we'd introduce you to five new bases five new robot constructions from the Lego Mindstrorms EV3 set. Let's start with the first one.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eOur goal with these constructions is again to give ideas, to comment, to explore, to discuss the different options when you are building a robot what are the advantages and disadvantages. If we start with the first robot that's the smallest robot and the smallest construction.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis one here. And what's interesting about this construction is that it requires quite a few parts so it's very very modest when it comes to needed parts for building it and it's quite small so you can use it as a starting point. It is interesting that it has 2 motors. Now, you might have 2 motors, 2 medium motors but you might also have only one of the motors and you can decide to place the motor on the left or on the right. This construction also has two sensors. Of course, it is possible that you have only one of the sensors but both of the sensors are just in front of the wheels. And this has it's advantages when it comes to following lines because the sensor is aligned to the wheel. It is interesting that the motors are quite close to each other so there is only one Lego unit as a distance between the two motors. And this makes the whole robot very very small. As some of the disadvantages for this robot is that the back wheel is not mounted very well. And I'll leave this for you as an exercise if you have this robot and you have the instructions for building this robot you can try to find ways to add this wheel at the back of the robot. Because if you just add it as an axle and we've seen this in many competitions and in many teams what happens is that when the robot moves if it stops, it might fall. The whole wheel might fall. The whole back wheel. Because of the inertia of the robot when it moves and the back wheel is detached. So, it's a nice exercise to try to fix this in a way. And you should explore different ways. Again, it's a nice construction. It's very small and it's useful as a starting point. Let's move to the next one.\u003c/p\u003e"},"369":{"position":369,"title":"Common problems with motors not working","description":"\u003cp\u003eWe will cover the typical reasons why your robot is not moving at all.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eWrong port\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eBy default your motors must be connected to ports B and C. So if your robot is not moving, the first place you must look is the ports. Do the cable connections correspond to the ports selected on the move block in the programming software?\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eCable is not reliably connected\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eYou must push the cable up until a \"click\" sound is heard. So, if the ports are correct, check the cable connections in the ports.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eA way to demonstrate to someone that the cable is not reliably connected is to shake the robot and the cable will come out of the port.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Classes with students","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eThis here is our program for moving forward but sometimes the connection between the cable and the robot might not be good enough and the program won't work. So, let's stop and discuss this program.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIn the program we've configured the two ports for our robot to be B and C. And now the program works. The robot moves forward. But if we just move this cable not to port C but to port D and start the same program you see that the whole robot does not move. And the diode here is blinking. This happens because the robot is trying to direct both motors to move forward and there is no motor on port C. And because there is no motor the brick detects that there is no motor cannot get some feedback from the motor and it just stops. So, what you should do now if you see this screen and this blink you just press on back to stop the program. It might be possible that the port is correct but when connecting the cable you have not pushed the cable.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eSo, you've not heard the click. This is the click. But sometimes you can just add the cable like this, start the program, it'll work but because you've not clicked while working the cable will move.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt's difficult to replicate it because these are good cables but it happens many times in the classroom like this. You see, it seems that the cable is connected but it's not connected and the whole program does not work.\u003c/p\u003e"},"1015":{"position":1015,"title":"Introduction","description":"\u003cp\u003eToday we will continue our work with heavy equipment used in the mining industry. We will transport various minerals and we will program the robot to recognize the load it carries and deliver it to the right dump point.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"","tags":"Classes with students","subtitles":null},"47":{"position":47,"title":"How to on taking loops from LEGO parts","description":"\u003cp\u003eEach year the FIRST LEGO League robotics Competition involves loops. In this video tutorial I will go through the most common way of taking loops, show its disadvantages and suggest another way to do it.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"","tags":"Attachments,FLL,Construction","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eTalking about the FLL competition, we should surely mention loops. In all competitions from the past years there has been a mission that somehow involves loops. The loops are also one of our categories from the mission categorization in episode 25. So, in the next few minutes I'll show you different types of loops and also different ways for taking them.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eBefore we start thinking about how we can achieve missions that involve loops, we should categorize the different types of loops. First, we have regular loops which look like this. Still, they may differ. The first possible difference is their diameter, the diameter of the tubes. This loop has a smaller diameter than that loop. It can actually go through it. It's not magic. Then we have the height of the loop. As you can see, the black one is higher than the white one. Also we have a difference in the base. What does this mean? For instance, the yellow loop has a wider base and it's more stable than the white one. If you just slightly kick the white one it starts spinning and so on. Next we have objects that do not look like loops but still should be included in this category. And that's mainly because of the tubes of the objects. So, this is the pizza from the 2011 competition or the medicine mission from the 2012 mission or the loops mission like water from the 2013 competition. Here we also have a difference in the diameter. As you can see, this is different from this and from this. The last thing we should consider about loops no matter whether they are regular or not is the height of the upper part of the loop. In the case of the pizza the upper part of the loop is no more than 5 cm away from the ground. Next we have the regular loops or the medicine where we have 10-15 cm from the ground. Next we have the flexibility mission from last year where we have the upper part at 45 cm and also we could have a mission like the loops mission from 2009 where we have something like 20 to 30 cm off the ground. In conclusion, the two things that we should consider are the diameter of the loop and the height at which it is positioned. Now let's see which the most common way for taking loops is. For this purpose I'll use the pizza from the 2011 competition and also our robot. The first way is to attach a crossed axle at the appropriate height. When I run the robot, I can grab the pizza, turn around and the pizza will still be with me. The disadvantage is that if I decide to go back, the pizza will fall. A possible solution is to put something in front of the axle. Now I go and take the pizza but there's a problem. You can easily push the pizza and it may fall. So, I'll use another part. This one. I'll put it on my axle and put the axle back and try again. So, I go, take the pizza with me and when I go back (ops, I've missed it). Still, there is a slight chance that you can catch it like this. Nevertheless, I don't think this is the perfect solution we can think of. Another problem is that when using one axle only, you can easily miss the pizza. Because we aim at the middle of the pizza but if somehow the robot makes a mistake and is 2 cm on the left, it will miss the pizza. A solution is to have more than one axle. I will put these two axles. Again, I'll have to put something in front of them. Like these.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNow I have my pizza with me and when I go back, the pizza stays with me. Still, there are many flaws and a mistake can be easily made. A solution is to use some kind of a carabineer system. For instance, this one. What's the benefit of this one? It's very easy for the loop to come in but it's very difficult to come out. I can put this piece on my robot and easily take the pizza with me. Sorry, a mistake. You should have the appropriate height. Now, take the pizza with me. Right. Again, I'm using more than one axle to improve my chances for success. Another advantage of this object is that you can easily put it anywhere on the robot and you can use it no matter of the height of the loop. So, I can take the pizza with it but if I put it somewhere here on the robot, I can easily take the medicine. We used this kind of system in episode 16 where we accomplished the medicine mission using a gear construction. As we saw, it's relatively easy to take loops with this locking system. You can find building instructions for it in the materials tab below this video. When you download them, you can modify them to fit your needs. If you decide to do it, you should consider two things: the first one is the back part of the system. You can modify it so that you can attach it more easily to your robot as this really depends on the construction of your robot. The next thing is the number of axles on the base and the locking system. You can put more axles to be sure that you will take the loop. When you do that, however, you should consider the distance between any two axles. If it matches the distance between the two ends of the loop, you can easily push the loop and it may fall. In our case, when we have these axles not matching the distance between the two ends of the loop and even if we push the loop with one of the axles, the other axle still has grabbed the loop. Now we know what types of loops we can expect at FLL competitions and also we have one more solution for taking loops. Share with us your thoughts about this video and also ideas about future videos by commenting below the video or using the Help Us Improve button on the right. Thanks for watching.\u003c/p\u003e"},"184":{"position":184,"title":"Robot Design Ideas for Chassis with Mindstorms EV3. Base 2","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe second construction of the series along with a comparison with the first construction. The new robot requires more parts, but has a few more advantages. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eThe motors are well attached to the base. The robot also has more wheel at the back to take on more weight. This, in the general case, could make it more stable and precise. The wheels used are from the NXT set, but you could easily change them to wheels available in the EV3 set.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eFind the full course at:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/playlists/29\"\u003eRobot Design Ideas for Chassis with Mindstorms EV3\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,FLL,Construction","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eIn the second video we continue with the second robot that we built and that's the second construction and we'll do a small comparison with the first. Now there are several advantages and disadvantages on both constructions that I would like to point out.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eBoth robots are the same size but the second robot requires more parts, because there are more frames. First it's again with 2 medium motors, but they are attached very well. So always try to attach the motors in a very stable way. Compared to the first robot where the motors were kind of moving. The second thing is that our second robot has 2 wheels at the back. That's an advantage if you have 2 wheels because there's a little friction in these wheels but you can make the robot much more heavier and it would be again very balanced robot and robots with 2 wheels at the back tend to behave in more stable way, so they are more predictable. The next interesting thing about this robot is that it uses small wheels. Now you don't have these wheels in the EV3 set. These are wheels from the NXT set. You can of course change these wheels with other wheels and probably lift the whole construction up and this is an advantage most of the time. Smaller wheels mean that the robot will be more stable, but again there are some exceptions to these rules. Interesting for this robot is that also the color sensors are not positioned like this, as most of the time, but they are positioned vertically and this makes following the line a little bit different, it's not very different, but it will be a little bit different. That's interesting about this robot. As you may see on all of the constructions we have these red pins and with them you can actually disassemble the whole robot. You should always try to build your robot so that you can remove some of the parts with just removing the red pins. If I remove this and this I can remove the motor from this robot. So try to use the frames, the red pins so that you can always place some additional parts in a very fast way.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThat's for the second robot, let's now move to the third robot.\u003c/p\u003e"},"693":{"position":693,"title":"Connect to the Raspberry PI using SSH on Windows ","description":"\u003cp\u003eOnce we know the IP address of the Raspberry Pi we can connect to it through our computer and communicate with it. There are different ways to do this using different operating systems. On Windows, we are going to use PuTTY\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eTL; DR;\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eDownload and install PuTTY. Type the IP of the Raspberry PI as a host, select SSH, set port to 22 and select Open. If a dialogue appears, select YES.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is PuTTY?\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIt is an open source software that's used to establish connections between two computers that support a protocol called SSH (Secure Shell). The Raspberry PI that you have supports this kind of communication so we can connect to the Raspberry PI using the tool PuTTY and could send commands to it. We can, for example, send a command to the Raspberry PI to tell us its name, or to list all the programs that it has and many, many other commands that you are about to learn. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eDownload PuTTY\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe official site is \u003ca href=\"https://www.putty.org/\"\u003ehttps://www.putty.org/\u003c/a\u003e. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eInstall and run PuTTY\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eAfter downloading, install it,  following the onscreen wizard. Run it after installation.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eConnect to the Raspberry Pi\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003col\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eEnter the IP address of the Raspberry Pi. This could be 192.168.1.119 or whatever the IP address you've received when connecting with the Raspberry Pi to the internet. \u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eMake sure \"SSH\" is selected and Port is 22. Press Open at the bottom of the window. \u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eEnter username and password for the Raspberry PI.\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ol\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/280/content/putty.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cul\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eA screen might appear like the one below. Select OK on this screen. It will be a subject of another episode on why this screen appears. \u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ul\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/281/content/ssh.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003col\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eOn the next screen enter username and password.\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ol\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThese are\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-family:Courier New,Courier,monospace;\"\u003eusername: \u003cstrong\u003estudent\u003c/strong\u003e\u003c/span\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-family:Courier New,Courier,monospace;\"\u003epassword: \u003cstrong\u003estudent \u003c/strong\u003e(no letters will appear on the screen and that is normal; secure business)\u003cstrong\u003e \u003c/strong\u003e\u003c/span\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eAt this stage, you've successfully connected to the Raspberry Pi and could start sending commands to it. The screen would be similar to this:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg alt=\"\" class=\"img-responsive\" src=\"//s3.amazonaws.com/fllcasts/ckeditor/pictures/data/000/000/282/content/.jpg\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Learn At Home,Raspberry PI,STEM,Basic,Classes with students,Fun","subtitles":null},"316":{"position":316,"title":"Arduino Basic Course. Modify the blinking diode program","description":"\u003cp\u003eIn this episode we would modify the blinking diode program so that the diode will stay on for four seconds. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eDelay\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIn the example program for the blinking diode there is a function called loop written as:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003evoid loop() {\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e...\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e}\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eFind this function in your program. In the body of the function you will see a line:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003edelay(1000);\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThis is a call to a function called \u003cem\u003edelay.\u003c/em\u003e The program says to the computer to call this function and it will delay the execution of the next line with 1000 milliseconds. 1000 milliseconds is exactly 1 second.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eTwo delays\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThere are two delays in the program. The first delay is waiting for 1 second after the diode is turned on and the second delay is waiting for the diode to say off for 1 second. Let's change the value of the first \u003cem\u003edelay\u003c/em\u003e to 4000 and upload the program to the controller.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"Arduino,Diode","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eOur next step is to modify the program for this blinking diode so that is stays on for 4 seconds.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIn the program this here is the program for the blinking diode. And in this program we'll discuss it in greater details what exactly are functions, what are the variables what is everything in this software. But for now you must find this function called loop. And here you have two calls to a function called delay. And here you have a value. And this value currently is 1000. The other value is also 1000. So, these are the two waits. This is the wait of how long do you want the diode to stay on. And this is the wait of how long should the diode stay off. Now, let's change the value here to 4. And upload the program to the controller. End result. The diode blinks for 5, so it blinks but it stays on for 5 seconds.\u003c/p\u003e"},"185":{"position":185,"title":"Robot Design Ideas for Chassis with Mindstorms EV3. Base Chassis 3","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe third robot has the brick and motors placed vertically. This is quite unusual and difficult, but the construction is very powerful because it saves space.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eThe robot is shorter than the previous two, which is a great advantage because it could move through narrow entrances. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe robot also has a good frame around it. This allows for more attachments to be added to the \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/categories/construction\"\u003econstruction\u003c/a\u003e and the robot could become very powerful. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe wheels on this robot are also attached in a very good way. The axles supporting them is attached to two. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eBe careful also with the center of mass. Check out the video.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eFind the full course at:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/playlists/29\"\u003eRobot Design Ideas for Chassis with Mindstorms EV3\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Robot Base,FLL,Construction","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eWe continue with the third robot from the series on the five robot constructions for competitions and not only for competitions and this is one of the very interesting robots because the brick and the motors are placed vertically, not horizontally. Let's explore this robot.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhat we have learned from our experience is that you don't see many of these robots, because they're quite difficult to build and to add different attachments, but they're very powerful and the difficulty comes from that the whole brick is placed vertically along with the motors. That's different way of thinking, but this whole robot has many advantages. First, it requires a few parts, then it's shorter than the other robots. If we compare it with the second robot that I showed you it's 5-6 LEGO units shorter and if you compare, it will be the first robot. It's again 5-6 LEGO units shorter. And this make the whole robot smaller and it might be very easy to implement certain tasks at certain competitions. The other advantage of this robot is that the whole robot has a frame.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eCompared to the previous robots, we don't have a frame around the robot and we don't have much opportunities to add different attachments because we don't have that many holes. But for this robot we have a frame and it's very convenient to add different attachments like, containers, motors, so it makes the whole robot more powerful. The third very important thing about this robot is the wheels and the way they are attached. You can see that the wheels are rotating around an axle and this axle is attached to the motor and to another part. This part here. That's very important. If we have a robot like this where the wheel is attached, the axle is attached only to the motor, the whole axle can bend, if the robot becomes quite heavy or if the speed is large the whole axle can bend and that's something that makes the robot not very stable. But if you have the axle attached to 2 points like in this robot here, we have it to the motor and to this pin, the whole axle is much more stable and that's a good thing. Now this wheels are from the NXT sets, but you can customize this for the large wheels from the EV3 set. It's again something you can do as an experiment just to get you used to the instructions for this robot. You can find the instructions for building this robot below the video. Because this robot has the brick placed vertically along with the motors we have more space left. You can see that there is quite large space here and you can use this space for collecting object, adding different sensors or one more motor. So it's something you can use for the different competitions. You again have the sensors and you have the third wheel. That makes the robot very interesting. One disadvantage when you have the brick placed vertically is that probably, not in all of the cases, but you should be careful, the center of mass is placed at a different point compared to these robots. And the center of mass might be higher. It's not always this case but it is possible to get to a mass that is placed higher and this makes the inertia of the robot, it will have a larger effect on the behavior of the robot. So this is something that you should be careful with. In the next video we'll go into our fourth construction.\u003c/p\u003e"},"186":{"position":186,"title":"Robot Design Ideas for Chassis with Mindstorms EV3. Base Chassis 4","description":"\u003cp\u003eProbably the robot I like the most from this series of five robots. See the video to understand why and what is interesting and special about this robot. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eThere is almost nothing we should add to or remove from this robot. It is stable, it has the frame and attachments could be easily added.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe motors direction could also easily be changed. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe whole \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/categories/construction\"\u003econstruction\u003c/a\u003e is separated in different modules that allow for fast assembling or disassembling. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe full course is at:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/playlists/29\"\u003eRobot Design Ideas for Chassis with Mindstorms EV3\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Robot Base,FLL,Construction","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eI would like to give you an idea for one more robot and you can find the instructions below the video of course. This is the robot that I probably like the most from the five that I'm demonstrating in these series of videos and these are some of the reasons why.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eFirst, the robot is very small, it uses a very small amount of parts and it's a square robot. This makes it very well balanced.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThat makes the robot very interesting. Small, square robot with a few parts and the other thing that I like very much in this robot is that I cannot think of anything to add to this robot and to change in this robot, it's nearly perfect and we can align to different walls, we have the sensors at the front of the robot, we have the wheel and we have the 2 motors, at the sides of the robot. Because of these 2 motors the whole robot is valuable and balanced. In some of the EV3 sets you have only one of the motors and you can decide to place the motor here or to place it here. You can also change the position of the 2 motors. So you'll have enough space to change the position of the motor and you can have, if you have 2 motors, one of the motors pointing to the front of the robot and the other one pointing to the back of the robot. This makes the robot very, very interesting. Let me just return this to initial position. It's a very good starting point if you want to use a small robot and to add small attachments to this robot. If you have missions where you can add an attachment on the front and the back to keep the balance of the robot. The other thing is again this robot is using wheels from the NXT set, not the EV3 set but it can be easily modified to use the large wheels from the EV3 set. In many cases when we have the opportunity we'll use the small wheels because it seems that we can achieve a more stable robots with smaller wheels. That's not always the case, but in some of the cases. And the last thing for this robot, it has the axle on which the wheels are rotating, connected on 2 places and this makes the axles very, very stable. Very interesting robot. It's again build with modules and these red pins and you can just remove the pins and if I remove all 4 pins I can remove the motor.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIf you use it as a base for your robots, do not hesitate to share this with us.\u003c/p\u003e"},"320":{"position":320,"title":"Teacher Notes: Organizing the course with students - fundamental rules","description":"\u003cp\u003eThere are some fundamental rules that we imagine you would follow while organizing this course with students. Let's look at them.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eGet to know one another\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIf the group has new members, make sure \u003cstrong\u003eeveryone introduces himself\u003c/strong\u003e. This is compulsory at first level. Sometimes, at second or higher levels there will be new students joining the course and you will have to follow the same procedure as well. Most common things to share are: \u003cstrong\u003ename, age, school, favourite sports, after-class activities\u003c/strong\u003e.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eThe teacher\u003c/strong\u003e should start and shortly introduce himself the way it is expected from students.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eNames\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eDuring the introduction session, ask the students to \u003cstrong\u003erepeat the name of the speaker\u003c/strong\u003e, after he/she has finished.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eAfter the introduction session, check whether you have remembered the names of all students by repeating them \u003cstrong\u003ealoud\u003c/strong\u003e.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eEstablish a connection with students\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eStudents will feel the teacher close of he/she shares and understands their interests. When there is a friendly environment in the classroom, \u003cstrong\u003estudents will surely do what their teacher expects from them\u003c/strong\u003e .\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eYou can establish such a connection as early as the introduction session. When students say something about their hobby, comment on it and ask a follow-up question.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cul\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eIf a student shares that he/she plays computer games \u003cstrong\u003eask which games\u003c/strong\u003e so that you can share the names of the games you play or so that the other students can know they have common interests.\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eIf a student shares they do some sport, ask them for the style they practice or the post they take in team sports.\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003eWhen talking about sports, you can also ask about \u003cstrong\u003ethe student’s achievements \u003c/strong\u003e - participation in competitions, cups, medals, etc.\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ul\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWhen students say something you can relate to, use that opportunity -\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cul\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e“\u003cstrong\u003eI\u003c/strong\u003e also play Minecraft and  our school has its own server”;\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e“When \u003cstrong\u003eI\u003c/strong\u003e play football, I am usually the goalkeeper“;\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\t\u003cli\u003e“When \u003cstrong\u003eI\u003c/strong\u003e play volleyball, I prefer to be the libero”.\u003c/li\u003e\r\n\u003c/ul\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e    In that way students \u003cstrong\u003ewill relate to you \u003c/strong\u003e and you will become some sort of friends.\u003cbr\u003e\r\n \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eKeep stories related to the topic\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eStudents may also share a story or achievement about a thing no one has done, but related to science or school.\u003cbr\u003e\r\nBe careful, such stories may take a lot of time in the first lesson and you should better stick to hobbies.\u003cbr\u003e\r\nIf you still think that your students may tell share unrelated stories, guide them. Otherwise, inappropriate stories may \u003cstrong\u003eruin the discipline\u003c/strong\u003e which is unacceptable, especially in the first lesson.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Methodology,Teacher's Note,Classes with students","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eThere are a couple of things very important things you as an instructor should know when starting this course for robotics and the way you do the course with a group of students. So let's stop at some of them and you can read more about them in the description below.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe first and probably most important thing is to break the ice in the group. It's very important for the students to know each other, to know their names. It is also very important for you to know their names, their age, something interesting about the student. So we've prepared a list with a number of ice breaking games. Games that you can use. Of course you can think of other games that you from your experience know that work. But it's very important to first break the ice in the group.\u003c/p\u003e"},"343":{"position":343,"title":"Teacher Notes: Be careful while students are following PDF instructions to build a LEGO robot","description":"\u003cp\u003eWhat a teacher must look out for, while students are building a robot from instructions.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eLeft or right\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eWatch for students' errors - they usually get left-right orientation of pieces wrong.\u003cbr\u003e\r\nThey also miss the positions of pins in а beam - whether it is the third or fourth hole of the beam. They could also put the pin on the wrong side of the beam.\u003cbr\u003e\r\n \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eThe role of the teacher\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eDon't correct the students at the very moment they make the mistake (unless you are on very tight schedule).\u003cbr\u003e\r\nLeave them notice the bad alignment on their own and help them correct it, as they realize it.\u003cbr\u003e\r\nThe role of the teacher is to actively observe and to be aware of the current situation of each student.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3 id=\"docs-internal-guid-25cb88e3-dd13-b9f5-24bc-b137b075fe74\"\u003e“How do I assemble this” and “Have I done this right” Questions\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eShow your students that they have to orient their construction the same way it is shown on the image and that they have to compare what they hold with the image on the screen.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Methodology,Teacher's Note,Classes with students","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eWhile the students are constructing the robot there are a couple of things from our experience that you should watch out as a teacher, as an instructor, as someone that is helping the students.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWatch the students while they are building the robots. Every robot that we provide instructions while they are following the PDF instructions sometimes they kind of mistake the direction of the brick, they kind of place it like this instead of like this. They can make a mistake with the alignment of the parts and the direction. A part could be placed like this when it should be actually placed like this. And it is also possible when you have a robot and you have this motor that's actually a mirror image of this motor and one of the motors must be a mirror image of the other motor. And what some of the students are doing is that they are building the same module with the motors. So, they are building identical modules not mirror not mirror modules. And that's also one of the interesting mistakes that students make. Your role as a teacher should be to observe the students to look at their constructions but don't rush to stop them when they make a mistake. Unless you are in a very very tight schedule but it is much more appropriate and it has a better learning value if you just leave them to make a mistake. And when they make a mistake these are kind of the same mistakes each time with each group. And when they make a mistake you can also discuss with them how they can fix this mistake and you can also help them actually fix the mistake. So, it's important don't rush to stop them and to fix the mistake immediately.\u003c/p\u003e"},"134":{"position":134,"title":"EV3 basics course. Precise motor programming for competitions (part 7)","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe way you move the robot is always imprecise. Don't TRY to fight with this. Programming motors for competitions like the FIRST LEGO League (FLL) or World Robotics Olympiad (WRO) is not very different from programming the motors in the STEM classes. But there are a few things you should have in mind. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eProblem\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eAgain. Moving the robot is imprecise. Take it as a given and don't try to work on this. If you use only the motors and the rotations set to the motor to position the Mindstorm robot on a field then you would always fail. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIt is nearly impossible to program a LEGO Mindstorms robot do a couple of moves and turns and arrive at the same position every time. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eSolution\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe correct way is to use sensors. The problem is that the precise position of the robot depend on the wheels, the motors, the battery, the balance, the surface on which the robots work, and many other things. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eCheck out the following playlist for more detailed solutions:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/playlists/7\" style=\"margin:0px;padding:0px;border:0px;font-style: inherit;font-variant: inherit;font-weight: inherit;font-size: inherit;line-height: inherit;font-family: inherit;vertical-align: baseline;color: rgb(46, 49, 171);text-decoration: none;background-color: transparent;\"\u003ePositioning on a competition field with EV3 and NXT robot\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Basic,FLL,Programming","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eIn the previous videos of the series we did a general introduction on how you move the robot, with 2 motors and how you control these motors. In today's video we'll talk about how to use this knowledge for competition when you have different robots, for example, this here is a competition robot, so it's kind of more complex robot and when you're on a competition, it doesn't matter which competition, you have to follow some certain principles and we did many videos like 20 videos about positioning yourself, aligning and these are the things you must know when you go to a competition with a robot.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eFirst, at the competition, no matter the competition, and even more general, the way you move the robot is always imprecise and that's a rule. Let's see this. Let's build a program that moves the robot forward, then turn and then move forward and what you'll see is that even though we'll start at the same position every time we'll arrive at a different position at the end. And there will be small differences and this will be only after three movements: forward, turn, forward. Now imagine if you have more movements, but let's first see the simple movement. I will now program the robot to move.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eI would like to move with both motors forward and these are motor A and motor D, for one rotation, then I would like to turn with motor A, again, for half rotation or let's keep it one and a half rotations. So that you can see it well on the camera. And then move again forward, with a Tank block on A and D and move for one rotation. Let's see how the robot moves. Let's now measure how imprecise, actually the whole movement is. I will take a marker and I'll mark the starting position of the robot.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eHere and here. I have the starting position of the robot.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThese two black lines and I will now position the robot.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd let's start the program.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNow we mark the final position of our third wheel. which is somewhere here.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eI hope you can see it on the camera. And we do the same thing again. We start from the same initial position.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd as you can see there is a small difference between the position last time and the position now. It's 3 or 4 mm. It's not a very big difference but it's significant for only 3 movements. So, move, turn, move. And this is something repeatable so you'll get to a different place each time.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhat I'm trying to tell you here is that it is very unwise to rely only on the movement of the motors when you are at a competition or even generally. There are different solutions to this. First, you can align to different borders. Second, you can program the robot, so it aligns to lines. And following below the video you can find a whole playlist with different videos on how to solve this problem for competition robot.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eCheck out the playlist and then we'll continue with tasks on how do you prepare for competition and positioning on a competition.\u003c/p\u003e"},"193":{"position":193,"title":"EV3 Robot with Motors in Opposite Directions. The Frankenstein. Part 1","description":"\u003cp\u003eMotors can be placed in opposite directions... opposite .. directions. Robo-builders might have difficulties imagining it so we have build one. One of the motors facing forward, the other backward. It is interesting how this robot turns.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eThis is an LEGO Mindstorms EV3 construction with four motors, Two large and two medium. The robot is \"thin\" and is taking up small space. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eOf course the axles for the wheels are connected on two places.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eTo make the robot move forward you must turn the motors in different directions. That is a different experience. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eFind the complete short course at:\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/playlists/30\"\u003eEV3 Robot with Motors in Opposite Directions. The Frankenstein.\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Construction,Programming","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eToday I would like to discuss with you a new robot. We call it the Frankenstein and it's a very interesting robot, because the motors are placed in an opposite direction. Now let's see what we can do with this robot.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe robot is constructed from the LEGO Mindstorms EV3 set and it has 2 large motors, on on the front and one on the back, if we consider this to be front of the robot, we have 2 sensors, color sensors and 2 medium motors. What's interesting is that we have a medium motor on the front of the robot and we have a medium motor at the back of the robot. So we can add different attachments both to the front and to the back. As you can see this robot is, let's call it a thin robot, it's not taking so much space compared to other robots that you can build. The reason for this is that the 2 large motors are not placed next to each other, but they are placed in an opposite directions. This means that, for the robot to move forward with both tires, one of the motors should move forward and the other should move backward. That's a very interesting challenge for you to turn your head around and to think about. How do we program this robot to move forward, backward and to turn left and right. The third thing about this robot is that the axles on which the tires are connected. They are touch the robot on 2 places. They are connected on 2 places. First on this frame and second on the motor. So the axles are quite stable. I'll now try to program this robot to see how it works. Let's first make the robot move forward.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWe place a new block, the Move Steering block. This block is controlling ports B and C and these are the ports where our motors are connected. Now if we start for 3 rotations and the power of 50. We try to download and see what happens.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIn this case the robot rotated, because both motors are moving forward and the robot rotates and turns right. So when the motors are moving forward the, robot is turning right. We can assume that if move the motors backward, it will turn left. We need to move one of the motors forward, the other backward in order for the robot to move forward. Let's check this. The Move Steering block has an option for steering and it's currently 0, this means that both motors work in sync and they both move forward. Now if I change this value to -100, this will mean that one of the motors will move forward and the other backward. From this our whole robot will move forward. Download and run.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAs I start the program now, because one of the motors is moving forward and the other one backward, the whole robot moves forward. I can change the steering to +100 and then the robot will move backward. It's a nice way to think about the robot that it doesn't always have to with the 2 motors moving in the same direction. The construction might be different and in this case it is different and it's a really nice way to work with students in the field of STEM and to get them to think about this and to experiment with this robot and to try to move the robot forward and backward and do different turns. In the next video we'll try to do more complete program and we'll make the robot move in a square.\u003c/p\u003e"},"197":{"position":197,"title":"WRO Junior-High 2014. Sputnik. Collecting objects. Part 1","description":"\u003cp\u003eStarting with the World Robotics Olympiad 2014 Junior-High challenge we first catch the object on our path. We discuss a good mechanism for catching and lifting balls that can do two movements with one motor. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eTwo robots are orbiting a single object. One of the robots is \"factory\", given by the organizers. The other is build by us.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eOn our path there are elements that we should collect or skip. We describe the solution of lifting these elements. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Gears,WRO 2014,WRO,Space,Construction","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003e- In this video and the next few of the series, we'll start we will start working on the World Robotics Olympiad 2014 Junior High Competition. It's a very interesting competition. And this is a small model of the mission field. The competition is the following; we have an object in space, and we have two satellites that are in orbit around this object. The first one is the green one that's moving on the green line. And the second one is the black one that's moving on the black line. This here is called the factory and this factory satellite is orbiting the large orbit in the middle. And we must program, construct and program the other satellite that will be orbiting the green line. And on the green line we have some small objects, balls, and we use these balls and we must collect these balls with our green satellite. And when we collect them, we must put these balls on the factory satellite. So both satellites are in orbit. This one collects and then it must find a way to place the balls on the satellite object. And this is the problem that we are solving in the next few videos.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe first thing that we should think about is how do we construct the satellite, our satellite. Because the factory satellite is given by the organizers of the competition. This one here, that's the black satellite. That's the default and it has a container but we can't place the container currently. But this satellite, it is the factory satellite. And it's orbiting on the black line. And the other satellite, the green satellite, is our satellite. And it must collect objects. So we came up with the construction and the construction looks like this. This here is the construction for the green satellite. And with this robot we can follow the line, the green line. We can collect different objects because we have an attachment at the front of the robot. And it is also very interesting that when we lift this attachment, we can move above objects that we don't have to collect because there are such objects on the green line. Some of them we have to collect, some of them we will turn, skip, etc. And because the robot is quite high, we can place the elements below the robot. And we can move with the robot over the elements. And the elements are actually lego, one of the balls from lego. This here is our construction. Let's first check out how do we collect an object with this construction. First we have the ball, and we must catch and lift this ball and put it in the container of the other satellite. So we move with our robot and we have this nice construction at the front of the robot, the manipulator. And it's again interesting because it has two movements with a single motor. First we close the manipulator like this and then we lift again with the same motor. Because at the front of the manipulator, we have an ultrasonic sensor right here, we can detect where the ball is and we can move with this ball. And now as we have lifted the ball, we can move over other balls. So for example if this ball is here, the robot is high enough so that we can move over this other ball. If we have to collect it, we use the manipulator. And if we don't have to collect it we just leave the hand and move over the ball. And it's a nice strategy because with such a large robot we don't have to turn and to try to avoid the obstacles. We can just move over the obstacles. We can then lower and leave the ball. We just turn the medium motor in the opposite direction. Okay let's try and see how this works on the field. But since the video is getting already over five minutes, I prefer to continue with the field in the next video.\u003c/p\u003e"},"902":{"position":902,"title":"Introduction","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"","subtitles":null},"439":{"position":439,"title":"Improving FLL Robot Game. The robot base for Lifting – center of gravity","description":"\u003cp\u003eDon't limit yourself to the box and think of different ways to lift the robot. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eWeight and size\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe lighter the robot the better, but you would have fewer parts. You can work with a third or fourth motor, but this will make the robot heavier and probably more difficult to lift. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eCenter the gravity\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe closer the center of gravity is to the mission model the easier it will be to lift it. The center of gravity is the point of the robot body on which if you place the robot it will balance and will not move.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eBox robot \u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe center of gravity is in the middle of the robot and it is easier to use it. This is by design, but if you have the center of gravity closer it will be easier to attach to the mission model. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Construction,Classes with students,FLL","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eThe robot base for lifting and attaching on the mission model. In real life the mission model will bend. And that's for sure. We can't make it that stable. Don't limit yourself by the box and try to think of different ways to do the lifting. Here we have our general Box Robot. First thing to know about this robot is the size and the weight of the robot. It is normal that it will be difficult to lift a heavier robot. So, a lighter robot will probably be easier but you won't have that many places to attach the attachment, you won't have the third motor. So, it's a balance. The next thing is that the size of the robot also matters. If you have a very large robot, it will be very difficult to attach this robot to the mission model. And there is one more third thing and this is the center of gravity. We must consider the center of gravity for this robot. And the closer the center of gravity is to the attachment, the easier it will be to attach this robot to this attachment. So, when looking at your robot this can be the front but you can attach the robot from the back. You can attach the robot like this. Or you can even lift the robot and try to attach the robot like this. You can think of such an attachment. There is no need for the robot to be horizontal. You can even make the robot be vertical. And it is like this. Or you can think of any other type of configuration for this robot from the 4 different sides and up and down. For our Box Robot one of the very good things about this robot is that the center of gravity is just at the middle of the robot. What is the center of gravity? It's the point on which if you place the robot, the mass of the robot will balance. And how do we find the center of gravity for this robot? There are different ways but I'll just use this system of beams, place it here and if I now place the robot and if the center of gravity is just above the beams, the whole robot will balance. You see that now it goes to the back. So, I'll move it to the front and a little more and a little more and it is somewhere in-between. I'm not sure if I'll be able to balance it for the camera but I'll try. Like this. And you see that the beam is just at the middle. So, our center of gravity is at the center of the robot. That's not bad. That was a designed decision for this robot to have the center of gravity like this but if you have the center of gravity closer to the attachment it will be easier to attach. Why? Because then when you attach the robot if the mass is located closer to the mission model, then it will hold the mission model and it will not bend. And if you have most of the mass located away from the mission model, the whole mission model will bend. Because it's working like a lever and it's pushing on the mission model and if the mass of the robot is here, it will push and it will be difficult to lift it.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eTry to find the center of gravity of your robots and if you've build the Box Robot again do the experiment and find where exactly is the center of gravity of this robot.\u003c/p\u003e"},"45":{"position":45,"title":"How to run NXT Hardware with EV3-G Software","description":"\u003cp\u003eAn interesting question that has arise is whether we can use the LEGO Mindstorms EV3-G Software to program the NXT brick. In this episode we will go through the blocks from the EV3-G Software and see which works with the NXT Hardware and which does not.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"","tags":"Nxt,EV3,Programming","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eIn this episode I'd like to show you how to run the old version of the NXT Mindstorms series using the new software of Evolution 3. It's possible and it's doable but it poses some challenges.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eOur first task is to try to connect the new EV3 version of the software to the NXT Mindstorms version of the robot. I'll try to search for the connection using Bluetooth. The Bluetooth of the robot is turned on.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eProbably, the first problem is that the new version cannot establish a Bluetooth connection with the NXT hardware. At least for now, it's impossible for me to find the NXT hardware using the EV3 version of the software. So, we should use a cable. I'll take a cable; plug it in;\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eand we see this warning message: \"Please, update brick's firmware.\" Currently, the version of our NXT firmware is 1.28 and, as we saw in the warning message, we should update this firmware. Regrettably, it's not possible to update the brick's firmware using the EV3 version. You can look for it in different places but at the end of the day we should use the old NXT G version. Here it is. I can update the NXT firmware. I will download this NXT firmware version 1.31. Brick. OK. And it's done. The firmware is updated. Let's again try running the Evolution 3 version of the software. We create a \"New Project\". \"Program\"\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThey take a while to load. And we see that our new 911BNXT is connected and has a firmware of 1.31. And it's connected by USB. Let's make a couple of tests. For example, let's try to move one of the motors: Motor B for number of rotations with power of 100. I think this would work pretty much straightforwardly. Then we can try to steer it to see if there is any difference in steering. For example, steering with the value of 100 or, let say, 75. Is there anything else? Yes, we can try to move tank block. We can move one of the motors with some power and the other with less power, again for a number of rotations. Let's download it and see if there is any difference in programming when using the EV3 and NXT version. When I now try to start the brick, you see that the default program that has just been downloaded from the EV3 version is called \"Program\". And if I try to run it, \"Program\", \"Run\", you can see that the robot behaves in basically the same way. So, it's possible to program the motors using EV3 when the hardware is NXT. Let's now write a more advanced program and try the flow control from EV3 to NXT. Let's write the following program. I'll delete these motors. I'd like to start motor B with the power of 10 and then add a loop. We have a loop and we'd like to loop until (so we have to add a switch) the motor rotations of motor B are less than 1. The moment when motor B reaches 1 rotation we will use this new loop interrupt block.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWe will interrupt this loop - this is something new for EV3 and we'll see whether it works with the old NXT hardware. Let's try another block at the end of the program - the \"stop program block\". So, we are moving forward with motor B until it reaches 1 rotation; then we break the loop and then we use the stop. OK. Let's see how it works.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAs you can see, the robot is moving motor B until it reaches 1 rotation and then it stops.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnother thing we can try, for example, is to use the old light sensors from the NXT hardware with the new EV3 software. If you go to the sensors tab, you will see that you have brick buttons, color sensors, gyro sensors and other, but you don't have any light sensors. Currently, my robot has two light sensors from the NXT hardware connected on port 1 and port 3. If I try to select port 1, since there're no light sensors, we can try the color sensor. We can select \"reflected light\". We will then actually see there is no value shown. It stays 1. This means it is not possible to use the old light sensors with the new EV3 software. Other things that are not possible to use are different blocks and if you, for example, use this medium motor, you will notice a special icon called NXT which means the EV3 software detects there is NXT hardware connected and it tells you that you can't use this block with the NXT hardware. It's impossible. Other such blocks are, for example, (let me find them) the gyro sensor. The energy meter is possible to use. But the arrays are not possible. You cannot use the arrays with the NXT hardware. Are there any other? I don't think so. That's all basically. Oh, yes. The invert motor. There are five or a little bit more blocks that cannot be used in the EV3 software to control the NXT hardware. But that's all. In one of the next videos we'll probably try to use the color sensor of the old NXT hardware with the new EV3 software. But until then, if you have any other problems with running the NXT or EV3, or with preparing for the FLL, do not hesitate to contact us and we can make a video about your problem.\u003c/p\u003e"},"354":{"position":354,"title":"EV3 Phi. Introduction to motors in LEGO Mindstorms EV3","description":"\u003cp\u003eWe will take a look at the EV3 motors and will go into details about them\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003eElectrical motors a.k.a Actuators\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe EV3 LEGO motors are electrical motors. You may hear the term actuators too.\u003cbr\u003e\r\nA motor needs a power source and typically that is the battery of the brick. The power goes from the brick to the motor via \u003cstrong\u003ecable\u003c/strong\u003e.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eMuscles of the robot\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eMotors can make the robot move around when used with tires.\u003cbr\u003e\r\nMotors can drive attachments so that the robot lifts and moves objects around.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\r\nTwo types of motors\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe Large Motor is typically used to drive robot wheels.\u003cbr\u003e\r\nThe Medium motor is used for attachments.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003e\n\u003cbr\u003e\r\nOrientation of the motors\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe drive shafts of a Medium and a Large motor are in different planes. The Large motor rotates to the side, and the Medium motor rotates to the front.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003ePower and precision\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eLarge motors have more power compared to the Medium motor. Medium motor is more precise that the large motor.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Classes with students","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eThe subject of this video are the Lego Mindstorms EV3 motors. And we have a number of different motors in our set, so let's take a look and discuss some of the features of these motors.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThese are electrical motors. So, what you need to do to use these motors is: First, take the brick then to connect the brick with a cable to the motor. And now, if you have the correct program what will happen is that the motor will be powered by the brick and the brick has a battery. And, it's an electrical motor. Also, these electrical motors are most of the time in the field of robotics referred to actuators. And you can think of the motors as the muscles of the robot. With these motors the robot makes some of the attachments move and the robot actually moves with these motors. As you can see, we have different type of motors. This motor is referred to as 'the large' Lego Mindstorms EV3 motor. And this motor is referred as 'the medium' EV3 Mindstorms motor. And there is no small motor. So, we have only large and medium. And there are a couple of differences between these motors. First, as you can see when you have a construction and when you place these motors you can add different attachments but in different orientation. For example, when you use the right motor you have the attachment at the side of the motor. Either on the left side or on the right side. And when you have the 'medium motor' you have the attachment at the front. Also, I won't enter into details here but the 'large motor' is more powerful while the medium motor is more precise. So, you can again decide depending on what exactly you want to do to use either of the two motors. And in the set you basically receive two large motors and one medium motor. The idea is that you use the large motors to move the robot because you need more power here and more torque. While you use the medium motor to control a hand, to control a different attachment, to control something that's on the robot. So, the two large motors are for moving and the one medium is basically for attachments. So, that's a rule of thumb. It's not a requirement but it's a good way of thinking about the motors.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAlso, when you have the motor and we'll enter again more details in some of the next videos of the course. When you power the motor you see that this part will start rotating. And this is the default positive side of rotation, it'll rotate forward in this way. While the rotation in the reverse will be rotating backward. And when we get to programming and when we start actually programming these motors we'll again stop at this just to make sure that you understand how do you move forward with the motors and how do you move backward.\u003c/p\u003e"},"368":{"position":368,"title":"Naming programs in the EV3-G software","description":"\u003cp\u003eOur programs and projects have \u003cstrong\u003edescriptive\u003c/strong\u003e names. Let's share \u003cstrong\u003ea cool way\u003c/strong\u003e to name your programs too.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eIn every project, you start with a single program. You can create \u003cstrong\u003enew programs with the small Plus sign\u003c/strong\u003e.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIf a project has any \u003cstrong\u003eunsaved changes\u003c/strong\u003e, there will be a small asterisk (*) in the project name.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eWe communicate via programs and projects\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIf you need help with your robot, you can send us your program.\u003cbr\u003e\r\nWhen we teach you, we share \u003cstrong\u003eexemplary\u003c/strong\u003e programs with you.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAlways give names to your programs\u003c/strong\u003e. This way you demonstrate that you \u003cstrong\u003ecare\u003c/strong\u003e for what is happening with the robot.\u003cbr\u003e\r\n\u003cstrong\u003eThe name\u003c/strong\u003e should \u003cstrong\u003edescribe\u003c/strong\u003e the task, usually with a verb and a noun. You can change the name of a program with a \u003cstrong\u003edouble click\u003c/strong\u003e.\u003cbr\u003e\r\nGood names for a program could be:\u003cbr\u003e\r\n\"\u003cspan style=\"font-size:16px;\"\u003e\u003cem\u003egrab ball\u003c/em\u003e\u003c/span\u003e\" ,\u003cbr\u003e\r\n\"\u003cspan style=\"font-size:16px;\"\u003e\u003cem\u003emove in a square\u003c/em\u003e\u003c/span\u003e\" , etc.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eNever put abbreviations in the names. They mean something to you right now, but mean \u003cstrong\u003enothing\u003c/strong\u003e to a stranger or to you, say, a week later.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eDemonstration at the end of the class\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eCreate a new program for each task and save it with \u003cstrong\u003ea descriptive name.\u003c/strong\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEvery new task\u003c/strong\u003e should be created in a new program and those programs must have descriptive names. Don't simply overwrite one program all the time.\u003cbr\u003e\r\nWhen you have many programs in the project, you can make \u003cstrong\u003ea demonstration\u003c/strong\u003e at the end of the class or \u003cstrong\u003erecord a video\u003c/strong\u003e for us to show your results.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Classes with students","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eIn the course I'd like to share our programs with you and you can find most of the programs below in the material sections.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eBecause we need to communicate with this programs we must also have proper names for this programs. I can't just name each of our programs just 'program' or each of our projects just 'project'. So I must give names to our programs. First, you can see that our project is not saved. So I'll just click 'File', 'Save Project As' and right here I'll select a name for my project. And the name of my project is let's call it the name of the module intro_ev3. So that's the name of the project. And in this project the first task that we've solved is actually moving forward. Now just double click on the program and here I can type. And it's always a good idea to have a noun or a verb because the program is actually something that the robot does. So, it's a move and it's move_forward.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAnd again I'll just save. Now you can find the program below in the material section and you'll have a project called intro_ev3 and in this project you'll have a new program called move_forward. It's always a good idea to name your programs because in this way you can keep track of the changes that you make. You can have a whole project with all the programs from the current class. You can show this programs, you can share them. And to do all of these good things you must have good names for your programs. And even if you return to your program a few days back or a few weeks if it has a good name, you can just remember from the name what the program does. So, always try to give good names to your programs.\u003c/p\u003e"},"373":{"position":373,"title":"Introduction to the Yo-Yo challenge","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe challenge is to make the robot move back and forth with ever decreasing distance.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eIn order to do this, you must know how to use many programming blocks in one program. You must also know a few things about the motors as well. Finally, you must learn more about the settings of the Move block.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eFor about 5 minutes\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eTry the yo-yo yourself for no more than five minutes.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eYou are not expected to solve it in just five minutes. Simply try your hand with the task and see where the challenging part is. Experiment with the software.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThen return to the course and watch the rest of the videos, where we have your problems covered.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Classes with students","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003ePreviously we've learned how to move the robot forward. In this module we'll continue and at the end we'll have a program that makes the robot work like a Yo-yo forward, backward. Now to learn this we must expand our knowledge with a few things. First, we must learn how to use a number of blocks, we must learn a few more things about the motors. And a few more things about the blocks that program the motors and the configurations of these blocks, the settings. Again, at the end we'll have a Yo-yo challenge and with this we can then control most of the movements of our robots.\u003c/p\u003e"},"774":{"position":774,"title":"Construction and Theory","description":"\u003cp\u003eToday, we are going to construct a car with mechanical differential. Pay attention while constructing the gear mechanism, driving the rear wheels. After you have build the robot, we will discuss how the mechanism works and what is its' use.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"","tags":"Classes with students","subtitles":null},"398":{"position":398,"title":"EV3 Phi. The different palettes in LEGO Mindstorms EV3-G software","description":"\u003cp\u003eEach palette contains programming blocks that share common purpose. We will cover most of them\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003cp\u003eHere we will introduce the palettes briefly, and later on, will discuss each block in detail.\u003cbr\u003e\r\n \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eGreen \"Action\" palette\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe green palette is the action palette - here are blocks that make the robot do visible things - move motors, play sound, display something on the screen or make a sound. The \"Brick status light\" block is also in this palette.\u003cbr\u003e\r\n \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eOrange \"Flow\" palette\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe orange palette is the flow palette - controls the flow, the execution, of the program. Start block, wait block, loop, switch and loop interrupt are in this palette.\u003cbr\u003e\r\n \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eYellow Sensors palette\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe yellow palette is sensor palette - these blocks measure the values returned from various sensors. An often mistake is to use sensors from this palette, when actually you need a \"Wait sensor\" block from the orange palette.\u003cbr\u003e\r\n \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eRed \"Data Operations\" palette\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003e\"Data operations\" is in the red color - block related to calculations that the robot can perform for us. Variables, Arrays, math and logical operations.\u003cbr\u003e\r\n \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eBlue \"Advanced\" palette\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe \"Advanced\" palette is blue and contains various block from different areas that are rarely used even at competition level. One of the most interesting blocks here is the Bluetooth messaging block.\u003cbr\u003e\r\n \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eTeal MyBlocks palette\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe last palette seems empty (teal color) - here stay programming blocks that you have created yourself!\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,Classes with students","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eWith the introduction of the wait block you saw that there're other palettes in the lower part of the software. And in this video I'd like to stop at the purpose of these palettes.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eFirst, you know the green palette and these are the action blocks. These are blocks that control the motors. Four blocks - we have one block for controlling the display, one for sound and one - brick status light. We haven't discussed this brick status light but probably in some of the next videos. Then we have an orange palette. And as you can see it's called flow control. These are blocks that control the flow of your program. You can think of the program as a series of instructions that can flow in different directions. And with these four block here we can control the flow of this program. Five blocks - we can even use this start. We also have a yellow palette. And in the set you have a number of sensors and these are the blocks for these sensors. Now, you probably have two or three sensors and here the blocks are more. Why? Because we have, for example, a rotation sensor. And this is a sensor that is embedded in the motors. We also have a timer. And that's a sensor embedded in the brick. And we also have other types of sensors. With these blocks you can control the sensors and from there get some input from the environment around you or around the robot. Then you have the math operations. And here you have simple operations for math like adding, subtracting, multiplying. You also have other more interesting operations like using variables and constants. These blocks here. Like using a race. Or logical operations. We'll discuss logical operations in some of the next modules. We also have some operators and we can use range, we can transfer tax. These are very powerful operations that we can use to somehow manipulate the data that the robot is collecting from the world. Then we have advanced. The dark blue palette. And these are all advanced blocks. And in this advanced blocks what do we consider advance or at least Lego is considering an advance. These are the abilities for the robot to do some messaging. To send a message to another robot. And this other robot can take some actions depending on the message or\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003ewe have an operation, let me see it,\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003efor a row sensor value. And it's different from the yellow palette where you have non-raw sensor values and here you have raw. Again, these are advanced and, again we can stop at some of them in the next modules. The last palette that is empty on my side and that's on purpose it's probably empty on your side too is called my blocks. And as you see a block in the program this is a block developed by Lego. And this is a block for moving the motors forward or backward. You can develop a block yourself. You can build your own block for your own behavior. If your behavior is, for example, greeting a stranger. You can build a block that's just one block and with this one block you greet a stranger. Again, we'll show you how to do this. And this is for the palette.\u003c/p\u003e"},"1037":{"position":1037,"title":"Construction and theory","description":"\u003cp\u003eIn this lesson robots will use colors to communicate. There are a lot of things in our everyday lives which also use the same color system – for example, traffic lights use red to ban moving.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThink about areas of life which use colors as a way of communication and then start building your robots.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"","tags":"","subtitles":null},"207":{"position":207,"title":"Gapped \u0026amp; Crossed Line Following. Part 4. Follow to Gap","description":"\u003cp\u003eWe follow a line. We start from the \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/playlists/20\"\u003eSmooth Proportional Line Following\u003c/a\u003e program and modify it a little for this program. We follow the line with the middle sensor attached on port 2. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","long_description":"\u003ch3\u003ePrerequisites\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eBefore continuing with this course, we recommend you take a look at the \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/playlists/20\"\u003eProportional Line Following with LEGO Mindstorms EV3\u003c/a\u003e. This will give you the base for working with smooth line following programs and would make this course much more clear.\u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eIf Proportional Line Followig seems to difficult at first then look at the \u003ca href=\"http://www.fllcasts.com/playlists/17\"\u003eEV3 basics course. Color Sensor\u003c/a\u003e \u003c/p\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003ch3\u003eStates\u003c/h3\u003e\r\n\r\n\u003cp\u003eThe line is black, the field is white and we follow the black line. We create a \"follow\" state and a \"follow\" behaviour in our state machine. \u003c/p\u003e\r\n","tags":"EV3,State machine,Light and Color Sensor,FLL,Programming","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003eWe start from what we have and this is the proportional line following algorithm. It behaves like this. The robot follows the line, because there is a gap it lost the line and the robot tries to find the line again, but it can't. What we should build is a program that works in the following way.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eRobot follows the line, moves, detects the gap, aligns, moves again finds the next line. This is the way we should build our program and now we'll go into details about the programming.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis is how the default program for proportional line following downloaded from the site looks like and we must change it first, we must change the port of the sensor, that detects the line, because this is port 2 and our left motor is motor C and our right motor is motor B. This whole program is a proportional line following, but that's not the only program that we should execute in our line following challenge. We must group all the logic. The first thing I would do is move the 2 motors together.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNow we have one of the threads calculating the values for motor left and motor right and the other thread controlling the motors. I would do even more grouping here and I would just move the whole blocks for controlling the motors after the calculations.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNow we have our program for proportional line following, it will behave in the same way and it calculates the values for left and motor right and then it sets the values for motor left and motor right. I will extract this whole functionality in a new block and this new block will be called proportional line following. Before extracting this new block I would like to take the value from sensor 2 and write this value in a new variable. And I call this new variable Sensor2 (S2). This will give me the chance to just measure the sensor only once and then use this value in the rest of the program. I'll write this S2 and then I'll read this from S2\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis without any change of the behavior changes the structure of our program. What we can do is to extract this whole collection of blocks into a new My block. How do we do this, we select all the blocks. Click on tools, my block builder and this is our proportional line following.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eLet's use a sensor for this block. The input is actually the value of the sensor.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAn icon for our block, I'll choose just a number.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNow what we have is a much more clear program, where we have only 2 blocks. The first block is detecting the value of the sensor and the second is following a line. Let see if this works.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAs you can see without modifying the behavior of the program We've just modified it's structure, So we have refactored our program, but the robot is still following the line. Our next step is to program the different states of our robot. The first state that we're sure of is if the sensor detects a line, we're following the line, but if the sensor detects the table or something white, we are either following the line or we have just lost the line. So we've been here and while we are following we're on black and then white and then we start searching for the line and if we search for a line, for a number of seconds, let's say 1 sec and we can't find a line for 1 second, we can assume and this will be a correct assumption that we've lost the line. So there must be a gap here. If with the proportional line following we've lost the line and we haven't found the line for 1 or 2 seconds, depends on the robot.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIf we haven't found a line, this means that we've lost the line and we have the second state, which is state of a gap and we must react to this state of a gap. Let's detect where we exactly know that we've lost the line. For this we'll use a timer, when we are following the line, each time we detect white, we detect the table, we start the timer and if this timer reaches 1 second and we haven't reset the timer, this means that we've lost our line. So each time we detect black we reset the timer, each time we detect white, we increment the timer and if we don't detect black for a number of seconds this means that we've lost the line. I think that when you get to the program it will become more clear. Let's try the program. While our program is running we detect the value of sensor 2, we write this value in a new variable, that's called S2 and then we pass this value to the proportional line following block. This allows us to read from the sensor, only once and then use the different variables with the different values. Now we must follow the line, if we are in the state of following line. How do we know if we are in that state, we must have a variable, We'll call it State.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIf our state initially, let's set it initially before the loop with a value of -1 and now we must define what are our states. For the states we need different values. The first state is following a line. If we are over a black line with the second sensor, this means that we are detecting a line, so we must follow this line. For this we'll use a switch.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe switch is the following. If we have a numeric value for S2, the value detected by sensor 2, if we are over a black line which means that S2 must be less then 40, because 40 is the treshold in our case. We take S2 and we compare it with our treshold value for black and it is 40. This means that this is the value between 10 which is black and 70 which is white.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe value inbetween is 40, this means that this is the treshold value. Now if we are less than or equal to the treshold value, this means that we over a black line. And if we are over a black line then our state should be state - 0.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis is the way we calculate our state. Again we detect with the sensor and if we are over a black line, the state is 0. This is something that we now defined. State 0 will be follow a line.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThen we must follow the line only if we are in state 0. So we'll take another switch and check are we in state 0. How do we do this. We take a Switch, numeric,\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eand we compare the state, we read from the state variable\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eand if we are in state 0, only then we follow the line proportionally.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eFor state -1, this is the default state, where we haven't calculated the state.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAt the end of our switch we would like to reset the state back to -1.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe logic is the following. We would use different states that will tell us wether we should turn left, right, continue forward and then depending on the state we'll do different things with the motors. And at the end of the program, we reset the state back to -1, which is unknown state and then we continue the loop again. We calculate what is our state based on the sensors, then we execute something and then we reset and this continues forever until we reach the end of the line. Currently we have only one state that is state 0 and it means that we are following the line, we are over the black line. Let's check if the program works.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAs you can see the robot is now following the line. So we've made a change in our program and it's not working correctly. When we are over black we are trying to reach the white, but when we are over white, we just continue forward. This is the problem for the next video. We'll continue in the next video, because this is getting quite long.\u003c/p\u003e"},"225":{"position":225,"title":"Arrays Transformation. WRO Elementary 2013","description":"","long_description":"","tags":"EV3,WRO 2013,Array,WRO,Programming","subtitles":"\u003cp\u003e- We start our robot from the green region and we program with the manual what are the different regions, where are they, and the different blocks and their order on the robot. And we did this point deduction on the program with the menu and then on counting the lines. But in between, there is some transformation of this information, and there are a few arrays involved. And in this video, I will introduce you to the arrays and how we work with them.\u003c/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis here is the full program. And in this program, we'll look at the block for moving to the fourth line and for sorting blocks. And to test with you, we'll take a look at the Find Places. If we enter this block, we can see that these blocks involve only different calculations of different variables and arrays. And that's it. There are no movements, no control motors or sensors. The purpose of this block is very interesting. It's only calculation and it demonstrates how we can use arrays to calculate. And we have... In our program we have one array that's called \"InRobot.\" And that's from the previous videos where we add, we configure the order of the different blocks. And that's the array \"InRobot.\" We have a second array that's called \"Sectors\" with the different values. And the values are the following; First the two blocks at the beginning are green and green is a...we have the order of our colors. And blue is actually one, and green is two, and red is three. So we have our blocks and we have two, two let's say, then one blue, one blue and one red. And these are the values that we have entered in the menu for the order of the blocks. These here are the blocks, and these here are the sectors, S. And the sectors are the following; the first sector is red which means it is three, the second sector is blue which means it is two, and the third sector is green. Sorry, the second sector is blue which means it is one and the third sector is green which means it is two. And these are the two arrays. First, the order of the blocks then the order of the sectors. And as a result from this Sort Blocks array, sort block program, we must...from the Find Places, we must get a new array, and this new array is called \"Places.\" And it will ha